Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Alaska Energy Authority Mertarvik Rural Power System Final Technical Specifications September 2018
f=ENERGY AUTHORITY MERTARVIK RURAL POWER SYSTEM FINAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for: ALASKA ENERGY AUTHORITY 813 West Northern Lights Boulevard Anchorage,Alaska 99503 September 2018 Table ofContents #Project Manual Mertarvik Rural Power System STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS -PROVIDED BY ANTHC SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS -PROVIDED BY ANTHC DIVISION 01 -CONTRACT DOCUMENTS -PROVIDED BY ANTHC Section 011000 Summary of Work Section 012000 Price and Payment Procedures Section 013000 Administrative Requirements Section 013300 Submittal Procedures Section 014000 Quality Requirements Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 016000 Execution Requirements PHASE I POWER SUPPLY SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS -PROVIDED BY ANTHC DIVISION 02 --EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 2000 Subsurface Conditions DIVISION 03 -CONCRETE Section 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 (NOT USED) DIVISION 05 --METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 --WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 16 00 Sheathing Section 06 17 53 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Section 07 41 13.16 Formed Metal Roof Panels Section 07 42 13.13.Formed Metal Wall Panels September 2018 i Table of Contents Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealant DIVISION 08 (NOT USED) DIVISION 09 -FINISHES Section 09 96 00 Section 09 98 00 High Performance Coatings Hot Dip Galvanized Coating DIVISION 10 --SPECIALTIES Section 10 44 16.13 Portable Fire Extinguishers DIVISIONS 11 -20 (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 -FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 13 29.10 Fire Suppression DIVISION 22 (NOT USED) DIVISION 23 -MECHANICAL Section 23 05 00 Section 23 05 29 Section 23 07 19 Section 23 09 00 Section 23 11 13 Section 23 12 00 Section 23 12 13 Section 23 13 23 Section 23 21 13 Section 23 21 16 Section 23 31 13 Common Work Results for Mechanical Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment Piping Insulation Instrumentation and Control Devices Fuel and Lube Oil Piping Fuel Tank Appurtenances Fuel and Lube Oil Equipment and Specialties Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks Hydronic Piping Hydronic Equipment and Specialties Metal Ducts and Ventilation Equipment Section 23 35 16.10 Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping DIVISIONS 24 -25 (NOT USED) DIVISION 26 --ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Section 26 05 02 Section 26 05 26 Section 26 05 29 Section 26 05 33 Common Work Results for Electrical Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 23 00.10 Prime Power Low Voltage Switchgear September 2018 ii Table of Contents Section 26 32 00.10 Engine Generators Section 26 32 13.20 Rebuilt Diesel Engines DIVISIONS 27-30 (NOT USED) DIVISION 31 --EARTHWORK Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving Section 31 23 19 Dewatering Section 31 30 00 Clearing and Grubbing Section 31 32 19 Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation DIVISION 32 --EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fence Section 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 33 -UTILITIES Section 33 05 26.13 Signage Section 33 47 13 Fuel Protection Liners Section 33 71 00 Electrical Utilities Section 33 71 02 Distribution Conductors Section 33 71 16 Electrical Utility Poles Section 33 72 16 Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers APPENDIX A -Golder Associates'"Revised Geotechnical Recommendations for the Proposed Power Plant in Mertarvik,Alaska”,written February,2018. DRAWINGS (Bound Separately) September 2018 ili Table of Contents STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 -Definitions and Terminology...........eccceseceeseseneseesscereseseaseaseseenessseeesesensecesenseseaseseanees 1 1.01 Defined Teri ........ceececccsceccseecceeaceessceesececenceeecaeesesanensceeonaesersnenensneseneneessueerseeeessesenseesesneesseneees 1 1.02 -Terminology «0...eeeeccrcsseccsrcerstersenersssecesscccssescssseesseceesssessseessseecssssessssecsseeasseeeesseessseasensesens 5 ARTICLE 2 -Preliminary MatterS...........cccscsscceccsssssestsecesteessssnceseseteessssneccaaeneecesesssscsnneaeseessenceeueeaees 6 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of INSUraNCe...........sccscecesserreeressenseconseneesonsonsesonsecessssansoseosses 6 2.02 Copies of DOCUMENTS ..........:cecseceseeseceseseceeeesscaeceseaeeeseesaneeseescaseasencaseeseseasaesenesseesoaseeenseneaees 7 2.03 Before Starting COMStructiOn .........cccescesceessseeeeseceecessceeeessssneessesaseeseseeseessseseasenseeeeseneeess 7 2.04 Preconstruction Conference;Designation of Authorized Representatives ..............::ccseseee 7 2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ...........scccsseccecssscctscsssececccnecseesnseescessncesceeaecsesensacensenseeeesenseess 8 2.06 -Electromic Tramsmittals..........ccccessssssseescesesessseesssesesseecssscesteeessessssesseessseeesssteessteeesseseseneees 8 ARTICLE 3 -Documents:Intent,Requirements,REUSC..........cccccccssesseeeceeccceeecansneeeceeeecesecuaeneenereee 9 5k08I 011 <1 0)9 3.02 Reference Standards ...........esscceesccssseeeseneesseceeseeerscseeseacssssuessaeeesedeseseesscdensseeersetestsetarsserenaneess 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ..............::ccssssceceeseseeseeeucceeesnaceeseeseaeneesedcereneasaeesssenanee 9 3.04 Requirements of the Contract DOCUMENKS..........:csscccccesccettossceceetenecetesssecetoenaeeesersaterenenenes 10 3.05 Reuse Of DOCUMENTS .........cesccstescseesccenseesneesceseesseesseceneeesenensenssenscetencesaesonsenseerssensseesstenesenes 11 ARTICLE 4 --Commencement and Progress Of the WOTK ..........scssssscccesesessssseececesceesnsenseeeeesesssnenes 11 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times;Notice to Proceed ........ccsscsseccsssecseecsseserseesssaseseees 11 4.02 -Starting the WOrKk.........c ce cecseeesseeseeeescaceeeesceseeenoeeeeeaueaesesseaaesescaaeeeseaseseeseaeecescaseseeeseseenaes 11 4.03 -_Reference Points ...........-sececesscesssensssccestsestceceseeessseeesseessseecesesesseaseseaseescecseeeesseessneasensaseseees 11 4.04 Progress Schedule ..........--cesesceeceseeceereseceeeseseeeseesaceeseecaseeseseaceaecscasoaseetasseecseeeseesssoaseneesesesseases 12 4.05 Delays in Contractor's Progress «0.00...scessscessssesssecerssecessecseeseessseassssesseeeeseaeereeeessseereeeeeseans 12 ARTICLE 5 =Availability of Lands;Subsurface and Physical Conditions;Hazardous Environmental CONGITIONS ooo...eee esneeeteeeeecetseeeeeeseseneeneneesaneeseeeacusseaceeeseuaeeeseeseseeaeaeueeaseeccenssasessaneseseeaeessaseeas 13 5.01 Availability of Lands 00...cceescccesssscscesenscesenscecenenseecossseeeesecesnereneeseessaceesnscaeeesesseeneensneeeens 13 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas .........:csscssscsscsssessscsseesseeesnccsneoneeseessnscensssnssasesssesoisesseseasersesentens 14 s RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. *Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein., Page i 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............cc ccesscesseesceseeceesseereesscenscneessceseceeseassseusseeeenseneess 15 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Condition...escecssseneeseeeeensncesensseesensececsuseeunecsnens 15 5.05 Underground Facilities ............ccc sesscesseereessecessersenesesssessuscseesoneessesessessseesaeceasansaseessassness 17 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .........c cc ccsessssesenesssenssessssensenseeseestesensereoees 19 ARTICLE 6 -Bonds and INSUPANCe...........cceeeseeceeeeseenessecescceessanecssceressseseoeascessnsesentsseravenensreeneserens 21 6.01 Performance,Payment,and Other Bonds ...........ceescecseesesesecsssessesssssescseesseeesersneessesenseas 21 6.02 Insurance -General Provisions ...........ccsccssssccsscestcsntecssscsssssssscsnsssessessnsaseseseeecsesessceseeeseesen 22 6.03 -Contractor's INSUraNnCe............sescsseessesecesseseessseseeseeesessssssnssssscecesessssssasseeeeeeeeeensssateeeeesesaetes 23 6.04 Owner's Liability INSUPANCE 20.0...ce eeneceeeeeercesseeceseescsaseeeeecsesesseecseucesusceusssseusssenenseagesenesees 25 6.05 =Property INSULANCE........eee eecesseeeeesseeesesenscesseecsceessssecesssaseausesesusersnseessssneessersesesereneneeseenenens 25 6.06 Waiver Of Rights .............::cssseccescessessseeeensetseesseesseessceeseesseesesseoesueceasenseasnenseneasouseusesersnanenses 27 6.07.Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ..........sesessessnseersssesersesessseenses 28 ARTICLE 7 -Contractor's Responsibilities ...........ec eceessceseeeseetesseeseseueesssenesesseseensessessecesnerersneeens 29 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ........cc cecscsecssensesssssccessensssenssensesssaneesseseseeessenensesseessgs 29 7.02 -Labor;Working HOUIS ..........cccsccccessssescesesseesceseceesseeeescuaensssetecseessonssescseesesseassoreseessenseneesanes 29 7.03 Services,Materials,and EQuipMent.............ccssccesseeseeeenseceessseesesseseseseeeseseeeeeneeessentesesesesees 29 7.04 -"Or Equals”.........eccccccssceesseeeseccessncensceesscenesessenseeseeeesacesaessascosseussenseansenseeesesassssueseesssseensaeonees 30 7.05 -SUDSTITUTES 00.eee cceeeseseereeeseceeesscnseesecscusessnsssuessncuenscaesesscesenscessesseuanecessssasnenaeeecssecesaneessees 31 7.06 Concerning Subcontractors,Suppliers,and Othesrs ............cscscesesssrecsseesesssesseaesersessenseaes 33 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ............cccccccccsssenceceeseeeessseeeessesenseeeesecesesceeonseeessseecsseetsessecsieseeeases 34 7.08 -PELIMitS .....eee eeeeeeeseeeeesssccencesseusecsssecensnssaeseresssnsconsceeseeasseeecuseeeeesseeeesausecsnsesessaeenserensseesssenes 35 7.09 -TAXES coe eeeesesecceesereceessnneesescensessscusenssceususseasaesesesesusecsscensseaessneueaseeeessseeseesusecensesensanensatesssensaaaes 35 7.10 -_Laws and Regulations.............cccsscccssescsseseceesereceeeeeeeersensecesseenseensssessucssaesseesseesesegenensensagenees 35 7.11 Record DOCUMENTS........ce ceessccstessstsseecseesoneeesconssseecssusesseeesenseeusesseessesseesnssssesasseneesscneneenseees 36 7.12 -Safety and Protection...sesesssenssseseessstsessccsecsseceracenensstenssscensensssesseneessensenensessesseseenens 36 7.13 Safety Representative ...........csccesccsseesscsseeteesssseseseseceeessesseeseesseesessssusisssesessenuneassessensenseeees 38 7.14 --Hazard Communication Program .........:cccssccssssccceressercesesesecesesseaeecesesnueecesossneensuenssensenseees 38 7.15 EM BencieS «0.0...cee eccesssseesesssensnssesenesesceassssscsececssnsconsscnsnesenseneseesesesseeeeseeeeenseneessaetaaeseagesenes 38 7.16 Shop Drawings,Samples,and Other Submittals...csccssccsssecsessseeeneesssesssenersssensarsnees 38 7.17 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee...eeccsscsssssnensssceesseessessesessrscnseesseeses 41 bd RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page ii 7.18 IdenifiCatION 0...ec eececsesteessesesteeesseceseseseneeeacsecsseesessseeseessasesesesceesecasssesesenasseseeeseaeasoues 42 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ...........c:cssesessssseseetscecetesetsseeserscsenceseteenteecseeees 42 ARTICLE 8 -Other Work at the Site...ee csccesseersssesesesessreensenseesseasecesserseseeesedeeaseeerseeessees 43 B.01 Other Work oo.eeeeessteeseesecccnseeseeesseceeacsseessseesseseeteesseesssesseesseesseseeeseeeessesesseesteeseesseees 43 8.02 -COOrIMATION 0.0.0...ee eseeeceseeeeeceesseetsseceseeeeeseeensescacecsseeessonsnennseeseneosanatssseaesseesoeanenseonenenenens 44 8.03 -_Legal Relationships..............ccsccssscsssssscsscessscsseesereessescnsecsetsssnsonseesscessteseusensessneessessnesseseenes 44 ARTICLE 9 -Owner's Responsibilities «2.0.20...eee eecsceesaceessseecseceeesseteeesseessssenenanesesueserseeeensatenenees 45 9.01 Communications to CONtrACTON.......ccc cecescsesecssenseseceseeneeessaseessesscuesesaceceusesseessseeeeesnenss 45 9.02 Replacement of Engineer Project Manager ..........ccccssecesceceeseceessseneseeeeseaeeseceeseeeeseseeeeneeeees 45 9.03 -FUrmish Data...ccscsecsscessssssessessnensessecsscesssscessssseecsesssesceenssssesssconscnessseesseneessaseeeeeasoeesessans 46 9.04 =Pay Whe Due...cecesssscccesssncccesssnccecscnsaneecesssnncesesssanacesesssnnsceeesanececessauaecesesesoessesneaseesesees 46 9.05 Lands and Easements;Reports,Tests,ANd DraWings...........:cccsssssscssssssccecsssssseeseseseeeessessaees 46 9.06 -INSUPANCE...eee ccc cecsssuensnsceeeseseseeessuseceuecssseeeeucueseouasessenccessesenseeeeseeeesesaseneneessuccugeeessesageas 46 9.07 Change Orders...ceeessecessssescecseeceesessessecesesecceessnensseacassecessceseseseeseseseneseseeneessseeeeseesaeseeeeees 46 9.08 Inspections,Tests,and Approvals...........cccssccscccersseseececcesecceoeecssesesereneseosecsaceesesenssencesnasesosees 46 9.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities ..0.......cece seseseeteceeeesseseeeseseesesesessessscesseessessaeesenee 46 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition...ce sescetecestssesesecenseecserseeeneterseeenes 46 944 =EvidenceoffinancialArranements...ccecscettecrseertsesteesseeeeeeesteeseeesssarceeeteuereeanesanenes 46 9.12 Safety Program .0.....:...-cccceecesssesesseeeseeececeeaseoeenseeeaseeeesseeaeaceauasescaseseeeeesseaessceseneesesseeeseaeesenea 47 ARTICLE 10 Engineers Project Manager's Status During COnstruction.........ccccccsssscesssrereteeeres 47 10.01 Owner's Representative...ceesccecccescccesceessseseceeeesseeesseasesseeeesecerseeeeseeaeeesoeeceseaseeeeeeneasonee 47 10.02 VISITS TO Site...eee ccccecseensesscesenssseeessssessasenseseneescusssceesscesseeeesssacueeseseeeeessenscessuececeesesensausons 47 10.03 Project Representative...........cccccccccssscescssecsseeeessesseesessssesseccesessessseseseeseseeeeeesesseseneceeseoneaes 47 10.04 Rejecting Defective WoOrk...........:ccceccessceeeerseseseeeesecceesseeeeneasseseaeeseeeeseasensioeteseeeetaceatsenserseaeaee 48 10.05 Shop Drawings,Change Orders and PayMents..........:cccssscessecesssceesscessssecsssecssssesssasessneesses 48 10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work ........cesscstsssesssccsesseessessesesssecsesssessesecsosseescescessesesees 48 10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work................48 10.08 Limitations on Engineers Project Manager's Authority and Responsibilities ....................48 10.09 Compliance with Safety Programm.............ecssesesseeeseecesecesceeeeescaseseacesseeeteseessesenesceenteneetenee 49 s RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 .This document is a MODIFIED version of ESCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page iii ARTICLE 11 Amending the Contract Documents;Changes in the Work...........ssssccccssssseeesseseneee 49 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract DOCUMENES .........ccsssseesecseeseeneceeseeeesaeeteeseseeeaees 49 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work...........ccssssscssccesececsseceneeeseesecesceesaeescaeessseeuserseenees 50 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work .........cecceccssseseceeseeeeeseeceeesesseaeeeseseenesesecseaeeteeeeeeenecernees 50 11.04 Change of Contract Price 00.0...ceeeescesscesesececeeeteeeesssecceeseesnerenseneescesenessnetseeeonstsensenatsoneeseasenes 50 11.05 Change of Contract Times ..........cccccssccsssssesesseeecseceesneessnecoratsssesencesscsatseseesseeerenaneceseseesenaasenes 51 11.06 Change PropoSals .......cee eessescseeccssesessssessseseeecsasesssesccescraecesassesecesseseseeesesessaseseeseseesseeesenes 52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders..........esssecccssscesesscecerecereneceescertecesensoesenstendsatensereseesanenesesaeeaes 53 11.08 Notification to SUrety........eee ceeceeesnceeeeeeceeseceeeacersaeesecaecaeeceaeasseaeessaseneeeesasesseeseneatencaeseosens 53 ARTICLE 12 -Claim 2002...eee eeeeseeteecesneneecesseeaerssaneneseesesossseessseeeeessctserssnsersusteesesseesersaeseeeesenseeeenseas 53 12.01 Claims ooo.ceceeesseeteseeseeceenceeeeseeeesesaeeeeseseesscesssaseeseessssasesseseeessseseseeesceseseseaeseeeeeeeeerenses 53 ARTICLE 13 -Cost of the Work;Allowances;Unit Price Work ............cccsssssssseceesssesseceseeersessessenses 55 13.01 Cost of the Work ....cccccccccsssessseestessseseseectstessseessseseesssesescesesssesesesedsesesesseseeseeseeseesesersarenens 55 13.02 AllOWANCES oo...eeececccctssstsesesescnnecseseseaseeacesscenseesstesssssesesescesesescenseescsesssasesesseaesessseererateeaes 58 13.03 Umit Price Work...ceccsscsscsssscstscstsesecessescsseessseceeossensssscesessaseasenssssessessseesseseseeneseaseeaeeees 58 ARTICLE 14 -Tests and Inspections;Correction,Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work....59 14.01 ACCESS tO WOFK 0...ec eescectesceeeecensreeseesenaceneeracsaesdaneneenseeseseseeeseeseessseescenssessensssosnecsacssentenseasens 59 14.02 Tests,Inspections,ANd Approvalls...........cccsssscssstcserescsseseseeconseoesecessecenattsasenenaeeessceenaaeeseaasens 59 14.03 Defective Work...ecesscessssneescetenseencceseenseesesensneesscnseensesenensaeescensensaeneatseeeeneatseeteceseetanens 60 14.04 Acceptance of Defective WOrk..........ccceesesesecstereseteneeseeneercsenseceseeestaseensantesenetteetiseseeesanens 61 14.05 Uncovering Work ........ccccscesscecensecesseeecnconsneceaceecseenensaeeseesoneesecesescersanenaeseesseeenaeetneesesaeeses 61 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .........ecessccssssencsssseseenccesasensneeceeceseesneesencesnansesassenseasenacersuesesseesses 62 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective WOrk.........ccccccccecesesesesescseteesensecesseeeeeceacsnnsenenseeerenenseeteneees 62 ARTICLE 15 -Payments to Contractor;Set-Offs;Completion;Correction Period ............csesseee 63 15.01 Progress PayMeNtS ..........csssssecessssesesenseeencssssestsercessesescaneesrsonsnenececennecescessersessarecetpatseesessaeees 63 15.02 Contractor's Warranty Of Title 0.0...cccesssesscessceseeetsesseessescecentsacessesaeeeseesseeesatsaeseeesees 66 15.03 Substantial Completion...esc ccseesessseeceeeeeseessceeseseseceseeeseseesseeeesusessasessseeseeesenseettaaes 66 15.04 Partial Use Or OCCUPANCY ........c.cccccesscsssscecssseccessencsasenseceessesssesssessuseecasesensesseeeseaesssasaesacensaes 67 15.05 Final INSP@Ction ........c:cesssccessecescetsecetsensesessenecesseesensesecesenseronsesaaensaseneseneaeeseseesensessaeessausenacs 68 15.06 Final Payment...cece ceecceseeceseeeesaeseseeceecaeeceseeesneecseenseeasesaeeaeaseaeecsaaceseseeseeeesaseseeucsaeeeraeees 68 .RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page iv 15.07 Waiver of Claim ..........ccc cccccsscsssscsensersncersnanenecssceesscensneceseneneasecssensnesssseseeeseeeeensenseseeseneees 70 15.08 Correction Period .........:ccccccssccesscssseetcnssensseesssersneesseesaeeessesaeeeseesseseesseasensseesnesetaneeseesssnessneses 70 ARTICLE 16 -Suspension of Work and Termination ............:cccccssssccesssscecseseeeececesreeeseessnetevessnsevas 71 16.01 Owner May Suspend Wotk .........:cceccccssscesseccsencessececsesecneceeseeescesceassecsesscesnsseneusesseseenstessees 71 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause..........cccccssscccsscecessesensscssscsseeesssaccesesecsunscessecesneeecsescenssseaees 71 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ..............cssssssscssescccscccesssesccesesaassceccecssceenavsssesceseeses 72 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .00......cceccccscsecssececsscecsseecensecesnaecesseessasecseescesasessecs 73 ARTICLE 17 -Final Resolution of Disputes ...............cscssesccccescesssseteseeceseesssscaeeeeseeseseseatscuseuseceanaeees 73 17.01 Methods and Procedures...cece essecesseessereesseetsccenssneceseeeesseeessaeesseesessneeessnessteneeeneeesntsseees 73 ARTICLE 18 -Miscellan@OusS 2.0...eee eeeeestecenessceeenensneneeseeeeensnecseneenaasesessaueesesessnetesesesseesesseesesees 74 18.01 GIVING NOtICE 0...eeccettcececesneeeeeeeeceeeseesueassacenercesedocssceearseseceasaeesseeseeessssaneeaeesecseseusanenseseees 74 18.02 Computation Of Times...eeescssseesseeesseceesscencsceesssseesceceseasesenseeseseesassesseaseeaseesaeecessseceees 74 18.03 Cumulative REMedieS 0.0...cc cccccssccesscessssersscerssetecescessssenserenssasessaeeesasesseeesseeeeseaeenstsesnetenstes 74 18.04 Limitation of Damages ...........ccccessessseccsssccesseeesseeeesestecsetecsnesseseessesecsseeceseteesseeseseessneessaserss 74 18.05 NO WAIVER 20...ccc cesesteeceesecesenseeauseneeeeesensanensessesessecnsescsscesenseseeeeecseeasecseasesecseasaeeeeeeetens 74 18.06 Survival of Obligations ......ee eeeceesseesseeessecceseseesstsesseeessneesseeseeseeessesessateeesetecseeesseessessens 74 18.07 Controlling LaW ........ci eeesccessecssceenseeeeseeessaeeesseeesseeeessesecsteesateescaeesensensnteceseseessueeesaesesseesensees 74 18.08 Headings...essscsscsssnceseeesssscesseeeeseeeseaseesesesseseessesenersasaeeasnsesensesensesessueessesessaesseseeseesens 75 .RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Pagev ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A.Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents,a term printed with initial capital letters,including the term's singular and plural forms,will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below.In addition to terms specifically defined,terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs,and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. 10. Addenda-Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,correct,or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. Agreement-The written instrument,executed by Owner and Contractor,that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times,identifies the parties and the Exgineer Project Manager,and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. Application for Payment-The form acceptable to Engineer Project Manager which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Bid-The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. Bidder-An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. Bidding Documents-The Bidding Requirements,the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. Bidding Requirements-The advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security,if any,the Bid Form,and the Bid with any attachments. Change Order or Modification -A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition,deletion,or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times,or other revision to the Contract,issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. Change Proposal-A written request by Contractor,duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein,seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,or both;contesting an initial decision by Engineer Project Manager concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;challenging a set-off against payments due;or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. Claim-(a)A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor,duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein:seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times,or both;contesting an initial decision by Engineer Project Manager concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;contesting Engineers Project Manager's decision regarding a Change Proposal;seeking resolution of a contractual s This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. *__Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 1 of 75 issue that Engineer Project Manager has declined to address;or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract;or (b)a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner,duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein,contesting Engineers Project Manager's decision regarding a Change Proposal;or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer Project Manager has declined to address.A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11.Constituent of Concern-Asbestos,petroleum,radioactive materials,polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs),hazardous waste,and any substance,product,waste,or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed,regulated,or addressed pursuant to (a)the Comprehensive Environmental Response,Compensation and Liability Act,42 U.S.C.§§9601 et seq.("CERCLA”);(b)the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act,49 U.S.C.§§5101 et seq.;(c)the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C.§§6901 et seq.("RCRA”);(d)the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C.§§2601 et seq.;(e)the Clean Water Act,33 U.S.C.§§1251 et seq.;(f)the Clean Air Act,42 U.S.C.§§7401 et seq.;or (g)any other federal,state,or local statute, law,rule,regulation,ordinance,resolution,code,order,or decree regulating,relating to,or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning,any hazardous,toxic,or dangerous waste,substance,or material. 12.Contract-The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13.Contract Documents-Those items so designated in the Agreement,and which together comprise the Contract. 14.Contract Price-The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.. 15.Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall:(a) achieve Milestones,if any;(b)achieve Substantial Completion;and (c)complete the Work. 16.Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17.Cost of the Work-See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18.Drawings-The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope,extent,and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19.Effective Date of the Contract-The date,indicated in the Agreement,on which the Contract becomes effective. 20.Engineer Project Manager -The individual or entity appointed by the Owner and named as such in the Agreement.The Project Manager may elect to perform his or her responsibilities with the assistance of one or more professionals engaged by Owner. 21.Field Order-A written order issued by Engineer Project Manager which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 2 of 75 22.Hazardous Environmental Condition-The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto.The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work,or that are to be incorporated in the Work,and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices,Laws and Regulations,and the requirements of the Contract,does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 23.Laws and Regulations;Laws or Regulations-Any and all applicable laws,statutes, rules,regulations,ordinances,codes,and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction. 24.Liens-Charges,security interests,or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds,real property,or personal property. 25.Milestone A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 26.Notice of Award-The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner's acceptance of the Bid. 27.Notice to Proceed-A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 28.Owner-The indiiduater entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work,and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract.The ANTHC Contracting Officer,designated by the ANTHC Chief Executive Officer or Procurement Director and vested with the sole authority to modify Contract Documents on Owner's behalf,represents the Owner in all matters except those that are the responsibility of the Project Manager or the ANTHC Procurement Director. 29.Progress Schedule-A schedule,prepared and maintained by Contractor,describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 30.Project-The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors,and others,including planning,study,design,construction,testing, commissioning,and start-up,and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. 31.Project Manual-The written documents prepared for,or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work,including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents,geotechnical and existing conditions information,the Agreement,bond forms,General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,and Specifications.The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 3 of 75 32.Resident Project Representative-The authorized representative of Engineer Project Manager assigned to assist Engineer Project Manager at the Site.As used herein,the term Resident Project Representative or "RPR”includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 33.Samples-Physical examples of materials,equipment,or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 34.Schedule of Submittals-A schedule,prepared and maintained by Contractor,of required submittals and the time requirements for Eagiweers Project Manager's review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities. 35.Schedule of Values-A schedule,prepared and maintained by Contractor,allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 36.Shop Drawings-All drawings,diagrams,illustrations,schedules,and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.Shop Drawings, whether approved or not,are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 37.Site-Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed,including rights-of-way and easements,and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 38.Specifications-The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials,equipment,systems,standards,and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 39.Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 40.Substantial Completion-The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof)has progressed to the point where,in the opinion of Engineer Project Manager ,the Work (or a specified part thereof)is sufficiently complete,in accordance with the Contract Documents,so that the Work (or a specified part thereof)can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.The terms "substantially complete”and "substantially completed”as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 41.Successful Bidder-The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts,and to which the Owner makes an award of contract,subject to stated conditions. 42.Supplementary Conditions-The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 43.Supplier-A manufacturer,fabricator,supplier,distributor,materialman,or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 4 of 75 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. Technical Data- Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions,with respect to either (a)subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities)or (b)Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site,then the data contained in boring logs,recorded measurements of subsurface water levels,laboratory test results,and other factual,objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03,5.04,and 5.06. Underground Facilities-All underground pipelines,conduits,ducts,cables,wires, manholes,vaults,tanks,tunnels,or other such facilities or attachments,and any encasements containing such facilities,including but not limited to those that convey electricity,gases,steam,liquid petroleum products,telephone or other communications,fiber optic transmissions,cable television,water,wastewater,storm water,other liquids or chemicals,or traffic or other control systems. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work-The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents.Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor,services,and documentation necessary to produce such construction;furnishing,installing,and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction;and may include related services such as testing, start-up,and commissioning,all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive-A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,signed by Owner and recommended by &agineer, Project Manager ordering an addition,deletion,or revision in the Work. 1.02 Terminology A.The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but,when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents,have the indicated meaning. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1.The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed,”"as approved,”"as ordered,” "as directed”or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer-Project Manager.In addition,the adjectives "reasonable,” "suitable,”"acceptable,”"proper,”"satisfactory,”or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer Project Manager as to the Work.It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment,action,or determination will be solely to evaluate,in general,the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise).The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer Project Manager any duty This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 5 of 75 or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work,or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. Day: 1.The word "day”means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective: 1.The word "defective,”when modifying the word "Work,”refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,faulty,or deficient in that it: a.does not conform to the Contract Documents;or b.does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection,reference standard, test,or approval referred to in the Contract Documents;or c.has been damaged prior to Engineers Project Manager's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04). Furnish,Install,Perform,Provide: 1.The word "furnish,”when used in connection with services,materials,or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services,materials,or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location)ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2.The word "install,”when used in connection with services,materials,or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services,materials,or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3.The words "perform”or "provide,”when used in connection with services,materials, or equipment,shall mean to furnish and install said services,materials,or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4.If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services,materials,or equipment,but do not expressly use any of the four words "furnish,”"install,”"perform,”or "provide,”then Contractor shall furnish and install said services,materials,or equipment complete and ready for intended use. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents,words or phrases that have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A.Bonds:When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. ®Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EICDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 6 of 75 Evidence of Contractor's Insurance:When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner,Contractor shall also deliver to Owner,with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract),the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6. Evidence of Owner's Insurance:After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation,Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor,with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise),the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A.Owner shall furnish to Contractor feurprinted-eepies a copy of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement),asd-ere-cepy in electronic portable document format (PDF).Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract,including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineerand-other design professionals.Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review.Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to EngineerProject Manager. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A.Preliminary Schedules:Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents),Contractor shall submit to Engineer Project Manager for timely review: 1.a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates)for Starting and completing the various stages of the Work,including any Milestones specified in the Contract; 2.a preliminary Schedule of Submittals;and 3.a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work.Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference;Designation of Authorized Representatives A.Before any Work at the Site is started,a conference attended by Owner,Contractor, Engineer Project Manager,and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A,procedures for handling Shop Drawings,Samples,and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment,electronic or digital transmittals,and maintaining required records. *This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. 4 Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 7 of 75 At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate,in writing,a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract.Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information,render decisions relative to the Contract,and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 =Initial Acceptance of Schedules A.At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor,Engineer Project Manager,and others as appropriate,will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer Project Manager as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A.Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules.No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer Project Manager. 1.The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer Project Manager if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times.Such acceptance will not impose on ErRgineer Project Manager responsibility for the Progress Schedule,for sequencing,scheduling,or progress of the Work,nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2.Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer Project Manager if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3.Contractor's Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer Project Manager as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A.Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract,the Owner,Engineer_Project Manager,and Contractor may transmit,and shall accept,Project-related correspondence, text,data,documents,drawings,information,and graphics,including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals,in electronic media or digital format,either directly, or through access to a secure Project website. lf the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals,then Owner,Engineer Project Manager,and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format,the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility,usability,or readability of the items resulting from the recipient's use of software application packages,operating systems,or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items,or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols. s This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 8 of 75 ARTICLE 3 -DOCUMENTS:INTENT,REQUIREMENTS,REUSE 3.01 Intent A.The Contract Documents are complementary;what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof)to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions)and the printed record version,the printed record version shall govern. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,representations,and agreements,whether written or oral. Engineer Project Manager will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. 3.02 Reference Standards A.Standards Specifications,Codes,Laws and Regulations 1.Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications,manuals,reference standards,or codes of any technical society,organization,or association,or to Laws or Regulations,whether such reference be specific or by implication,shall mean the standard specification,manual,reference standard,code,or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids),except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2.No provision of any such standard specification,manual,reference standard,or code, or any instruction of a Supplier,shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner,Contractor,or Engineer Project Manager,or any of their subcontractors,consultants,agents,or employees,from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer Project Manager.No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner,Engineer Project Manager,or any of their officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents, consultants,or subcontractors,any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer Project Manager. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A.Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Contractor's Verification of Figures and Field Measurements:Before undertaking each part of the Work,Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents,and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein,particularly with respect to applicable field measurements.Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Exgineer .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 9 of 75 B. Project Manager any conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy that Contractor discovers,or has actual knowledge of,and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy is resolved,by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer Project Manager,or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2.Contractor's Review of Contract Documents:If,before or during the performance of the Work,Contractor discovers any conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy within the Contract Documents,or between the Contract Documents and (a)any applicable Law or Regulation,(b)actual field conditions,(c)any standard specification,manual, reference standard,or code,or (d)any instruction of any Supplier,then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer Project Manager in writing.Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15)until the conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy is resolved,by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer Project Manager,or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3.Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer Project Manager for failure to report any conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. Resolving Discrepancies: 1.Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents,the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer Project Manager shall take precedence in resolving any conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a.the provisions of any standard specification,manual,reference standard,or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document);or b.the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A.During the performance of the Work and until final payment,Contractor and-Owrer shall submit to the Engineer Project Manager all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation-RFls),or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents,as soon as possible after such matters arise.Engineer Project Manager will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents,and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Engineer Project Manager will,with reasonable promptness,render a written clarification, interpretation,or decision on the issue submitted,or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents.Engineers Project Manager's written clarification, interpretation,or decision will be final and binding on Contractor,unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal,and on Owner,unless it appeals by filing a Claim. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. ®Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EICDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 10 of 75 3.05 If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1)the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents,(2}the design (as set forth in the Drawings,Specifications,or otherwise),or (3)other engineering or technical matters,then Engineer Project Manager will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer Project Manager is unable to provide a decision or interpretation.If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question,either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. Reuse of Documents A.Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1.have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings,Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof)prepared by or bearing the seal of Ergineer Project Manager or its consultants,including electronic media editions,or reuse any such Drawings,Specifications,other documents,or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer Project Manager and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer Project Manager;or 2.have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents,reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner's express written consent,or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment,or termination of the Contract.Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4 -COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 4.02 4.03 Commencement of Contract Times;Notice to Proceed A.The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or,if a Notice to Proceed is given,on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed.A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract.In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract,whichever date is earlier. Starting the Work A.Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run.No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date. Reference Points A.Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineers Project Manager's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work.Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work,shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments,and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner.Contractor .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. _#Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 11 of 75 shall report to Engineer Project Manager whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations,and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A.Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1.Contractor shall submit to Ergineer_Project Manager for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05)proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. 2.Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner.No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements,or during any appeal process,except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04,or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor's Progress A.If Owner,Engineer Project Manager,or anyone for whom Owner is responsible,delays, disrupts,or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work,then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay,disruption,or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.Delay, disruption,and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. If Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted,or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner,Contractor,and those for which they are responsible,then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times.Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays,disruption,and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay,disruption,or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1.severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires,floods,epidemics,and earthquakes; 2.abnormal weather conditions; ®This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 12 of 75 3.acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner,as contemplated in Article 8); and 4.acts of war or terrorism. Delays,disruption,and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition,an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents,or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy,and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays,disruption,and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay,disruption,or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay,disruption,or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor_in whole or in part.Contractor must provide written notice to the Owner and Project Manager within three (3)days of the beginning of any delay,disruption or interference the Contractor alleges is in the control of the Owner.In the event of a continuing delay,disruption,or interference,the Contractor need only provide one notification of the delay.Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay,disruption,or interference for which Contractor has not provided the notice required in this Paragraph. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting,or interfering event. ARTICLE 5-AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A.Owner shall furnish the Site.Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Upon reasonable written request,Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. a Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 13 of 75 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A.Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1.Contractor shall confine construction equipment,temporary construction facilities,the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise,and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations,and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment.Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a)damage to the Site;(b)damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor's operations;(c)damage to any other adjacent land or areas;and (d)for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2.If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work,or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible,Contractor shall (a)take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12,or otherwise; (b)promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant,or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding,or at law;and (c)to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer Project Manager,and the officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claim,and against all costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to any claim or action,legal or equitable,brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,Engineer Project Manager,or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly,in whole or in part by,or based upon,Contractor's performance of the Work,or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work:During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials,rubbish,and other debris.Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish,and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. Cleaning:Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner.At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools,appliances,construction equipment and machinery,and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. Loading of Structures:Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure,nor shall Contractor subject any .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 14 of 75 part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A.Reports and Drawings:The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2.those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities);and 3.Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized:Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings,but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents.If no such express identification has been made,then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1)contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor.Except for such reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer Project Manager,or any of their officers, directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,or subcontractors,with respect to: 1.the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes,including, but not limited to,any aspects of the means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor,and safety precautions and programs incident thereto;or 2.other data,interpretations,opinions,and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings;or 3.any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data,interpretations,opinions,or information. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A.Notice by Contractor:\f Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either: 1.is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate;or 2.is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications;or 3.differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;or 4.is of an unusual nature,and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall,promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection .This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 15 of 75 therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15),notify Owner and Engineer Project Manager in writing about such condition.Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency)until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B.&ngineers Project Manager's Review:After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,Engineer _Project Manager will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question;determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition;conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor;prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications;and advise Owner in writing of Engineer's Project Manager's findings,conclusions,and recommendations. C.Owner's Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition:After receipt of Engineers Project Manager's written findings,conclusions,and recommendations,Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer Project Manager)regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question,addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition,indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made,and adopting or rejecting Engineers Project Manager's written findings,conclusions,and recommendations,in whole or in part. D.Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1.Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition,or any related delay,disruption,or interference,causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of the Work; subject,however,to the following: a.such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b.with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis,any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;and, c.Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 2.Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a.Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract,or otherwise;or This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 16 of 75 b.the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination,investigation,exploration,test,or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such commitment;or c.Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3.If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor's entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 4.Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,no later than 30 days after Owner's issuance of the Owner's written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 5.05 Underground Facilities A.Contractor's Responsibilities:The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer Project Manager by the owners of such Underground Facilities,including Owner,or by others.Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1.Owner and Engineer Project Manager do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others;and 2.the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price,and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a.reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; b.locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site; c.coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner)of such Underground Facilities,during construction;and d.the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site,and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. Notice by Contractor:\f Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy,then Contractor shall,promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15),identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer Project Manager. Engineer's Project Manager's Review:Engineer Project Manager will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 17 of 75 indicated in the Contract Documents,or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy;obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor;prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question;determine the extent,if any,to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility;and advise Owner in writing of Eagineers Project Manager's findings,conclusions,and recommendations.During such time,Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D.Owner's Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility:After receipt of Engineers written findings,conclusions,and recommendations,Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to ERgineer_Project_Manager)regarding the Underground Facility in question,addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility,indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made,and adopting or rejecting Engineers Project Manager's written findings, conclusions,and recommendations in whole or in part. E.Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1.Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy,or any related delay,disruption,or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of,or time required for, performance of the Work;subject,however,to the following: a.Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question; b.With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis,any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; c.Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times;and d.Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2.If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor's entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 3.Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,no later than 30 days after Owner's issuance of the Owner's written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 18 of 75 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A.Reports and Drawings:The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site;and 2.Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized:Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings,but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents.If no such express identification has been made,then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1)contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor.Except for such reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer Project Manager,or any of their officers,directors,members,partners, employees,agents,consultants,or subcontractors with respect to: 1.the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes,including, but not limited to,any aspects of the means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto;or 2.other data,interpretations,opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings;or 3.any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data,interpretations,opinions or information. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered,uncovered,or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling,containing,and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor,Subcontractors,Suppliers,or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible,and for any associated costs;and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. If Contractor encounters,uncovers,or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work,or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,then Contractor shall immediately:(1)secure or otherwise isolate such condition;(2)stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15);and (3)notify Owner and Engineer Project Manager (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing).Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer Project Manager concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action,if any.Promptly after consulting with Eagineer .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 19 of 75 Project Manager,Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F.lf Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question,then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition,and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F.Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto,and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1)specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2)specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed Safely. G.If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent,if any,of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor,then within 30 days of Owner's written notice regarding the resumption of Work,Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may impose a Set-off. H.If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe,or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions,then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work,following the contractual change procedures in Article 11.Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. |.To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,and except for claims that are deemed to be against the United States pursuant to 25 U.S.C.§5321(d),25 U.S.C.§1680c, section 314 of Title I!l of Public Law 101-512 and the provisions of the Federal Tort Claims Act,28 USC §1346(b)and 28 USC §§2671,Owner shal!indemnify and hold harmless Contractor,Subcontractors,and_Engineer,and the officers,directors,members,partners, employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all reasonable fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition,provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1)was not shown or indicated in the Drawings,Specifications,or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B,or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work,and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible.Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.1 shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. J.To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner andEngineer,and the its officers,directors,members,partners, employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors ef-each-andanyofthem from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all reasonable fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to the failure to This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 20 of 75 control,contain,or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible,or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible.Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.)shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03,5.04,and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6 -BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance,Payment,and Other Bonds A.Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond,each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price,as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract.These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08,whichever is later,except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations,the Supplementary Conditions,or other specific provisions of the Contract.Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations,and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies”as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented)by the Financial Management Service,Surety Bond Branch,U.S. Department of the Treasury.A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual's authority to bind the surety.The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located,or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above,then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer Project Manager and shall,within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification,provide another bond and surety,both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond,Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 16. Upon request,Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier,or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 21 of 75 6.02 Insurance-General Provisions A.Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized,in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located,to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages.Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions,all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M.Best rating of A-VII or better. Contractor shall deliver to Owner,with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article,in the Supplementary Conditions,or elsewhere in the Contract),certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies,coverages,and endorsements required by the Contract.Upon request by Owner or any other insured,Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance,including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements,and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles.Contractor may block out (redact)any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. Owner shall deliver to Contractor,with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article,the Supplementary Conditions,or elsewhere in the Contract),certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies,coverages,and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured,Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any),including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements,and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact)any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party's full compliance with these insurance requirements,or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided,shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party's obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract,such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work,or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. (f Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance,Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site,impose an appropriate set-off against payment,and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 16. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy,if a party has failed to obtain required insurance,the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.© Page 22 of 75 Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract. 6.03 Contractor's Insurance A.Workers'Compensation:Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers'compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1.claims under workers'compensation,disability benefits,and other similar employee benefit acts. 2.United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers'Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 3.claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of Contractor's employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker's compensation states). 4.Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B.Commercial General Liability-Claims Covered:Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance,covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor,on an occurrence basis,against: 1.claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees. 2.claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage. 3.claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located,including loss of use resulting therefrom. C.Commercial General Liability-Form and Content:Contractor's commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later)ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1.Products and completed operations coverage: a.Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment. b.Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract)evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. 2.Blanket contractual liability coverage,to the extent permitted by law,including but not limited to coverage of Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. 3.Broad form property damage coverage. 4.Severability of interest. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 23 of 75 5.Underground,explosion,and collapse coverage. 6.Personal injury coverage. 7.Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together);or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together);or their equivalent. 8.For design professional additional insureds,ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, "Additional Insured-Engineers,Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured”or its equivalent. Automobile liability:Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership,maintenance,or use of any motor vehicle.The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis. Umbrella or excess liability:Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability,commercial general liability,and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above.Subject to industry-standard exclusions,the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies. Contractor's pollution liability insurance:Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third-party injury and property damage claims,including clean-up costs,as a result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor's operations and completed operations.This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion. Additional insureds:The Contractor's commercial general liability,automobile liability, umbrella or excess,and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and-tngineer,and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions;include coverage for the respective officers,directors, members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds;and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations)on a non-contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements. Contractor's professional liability insurance:\f Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract,through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise,then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance.This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services,and caused by a negligent error,omission,or act for which the insured party is legally liable.It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion_or for the duration of the statutory period during which the Contractor may be exposed to liability,whichever is longer.If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor,and not by Contractor itself,then the This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein., Page 24 of 75 requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor. General provisions:The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall: 1.include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article. 2.be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions,or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 3.contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed,or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor.Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner,Engineer Project Manager,and each other insured under the policy. 4.remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article)and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting,removing,or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation,or otherwise,or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 5.be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents,whether it is to be performed by Contractor,any Subcontractor or Supplier,or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies. 6.04 Owner's Liability Insurance A.in addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner,at Owner's option,may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. B.Owner's liability policies,if any,operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor,and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner's liability policies for any of Contractor's obligations to the Owner;Engineers,or third parties. 6.05 Property Insurance A.Builder's Risk:Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions,Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations).This insurance shall: 1.include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds,and all Subcontractors,and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder's risk policy,as insureds or named insureds.For purposes of the s This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDOC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 25 of 75 remainder of this Paragraph 6.05,Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07,and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions,the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as "insureds.” 2.be written on a builder's risk "all risk”policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work,temporary buildings,falsework,and materials and equipment in transit,and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:fire;lightning;windstorm;riot;civil commotion;terrorism;vehicle impact; aircraft;smoke;theft;vandalism and malicious mischief;mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion,and artificially generated electric current;earthquake;volcanic activity,and other earth movement;flood;collapse;explosion;debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations;water damage (other than that caused by flood);and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.If insurance against mechanical breakdown,boiler explosion,and artificially generated electric current;earthquake; volcanic activity,and other earth movement;or flood,are not commercially available under builder's risk policies,by endorsement or otherwise,such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3.cover,as insured property,at least the following:(a)the Work and all materials, supplies,machinery,apparatus,equipment,fixtures,and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation,fabrication, construction,erection,or completion of the Work,including Owner-furnished or assigned property;(b)spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c)temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site,or to the Work under construction,or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction,including scaffolding,form work,fences,shoring, falsework,and temporary structures. 4.cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects). 5.extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). 6.extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. 7.allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner,such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder's risk insurance. 8.allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights,as set forth below. 9.provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 10.not include a co-insurance clause. This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General - Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 26 of 75 6.06 11.include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship,design,or materials exclusions. 12.include performance/hot testing and start-up. 13.be maintained in effect,subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner,until the Work is complete. Notice of Cancellation or Change:All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof)required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder.Within three days of receipt of any such written notice,the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured. Deductibles:The purchaser of any required builder's risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner:lf Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04,then Owner (directly,if it is the purchaser of the builder's risk policy,or through Contractor)will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder's risk insurer.The builder's risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy;rather,those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may come off the builder's risk policy,while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder's risk insurance. Additional Insurance:\f Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05,it may do so at Contractor's expense. Insurance of Other Property:\f the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest,such as tools,construction equipment,or other personal property owned by Contractor,a Subcontractor,or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor,then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it,and if so in what amount. Waiver of Rights A.All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05,expressly including the builder's risk policy,shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder,or against Engineer Project Manager or its consultants,or their officers,directors,members, partners,employees,agents,consultants,or subcontractors.Qwnerand Contractor waives all rights against Owner each-other and its the-respective officers,directors,members, partners,employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors eFeach-andanyeofthem,for all losses and damages caused by,arising out of,or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originatedin copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard GeneralConditionsareshowninredline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.: Page 27 of 75 Work;and,in addition,waives all such rights against Ergineer_Project_Manager,its consultants,all Subcontractors,all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds,and the officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents, consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of them,under such policies for losses and damages so caused.None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary,or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner,Contractor,all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds,the Exgiveer Project Manager and its consultants,and the officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents, consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages caused by,arising out of,relating to,or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. 6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A.Any insured loss under the builder's risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy.Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds,and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress.Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 28 of 75 fiduciary fer-etherinsureds,subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder's risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. If no other special agreement is reached,the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof,and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order,if needed. ARTICLE 7 -CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 7.02 7.03 Supervision and Superintendence A.Contractor shall supervise,inspect,and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures of construction. At all times during the progress of the Work,Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written aeticete concurrence of Owner and Engineer Project Manager except under extraordinary circumstances. Labor;Working Hours A.Contractor shall provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and fay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents.Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto,and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours,Monday through Friday.Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday,Sunday,or any legal holiday.Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays,or legal holidays only with Owner's written consent,which will not be unreasonably withheld. Services,Materials,and Equipment A.Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services,materials,equipment,labor,transportation, construction equipment and machinery,tools,appliances,fuel,power,light,heat, telephone,water,sanitary facilities,temporary facilities,and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance,testing,start up,and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner.If required by Engineer_Project Manager,Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence ®-This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. *_Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General | Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.: . : Page 29 of 75 (including reports of required tests)as to the source,kind,and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be stored,applied,installed,connected,erected, protected,used,cleaned,and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier,except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.04 "Or Equals” A. B. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified.The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type,function, appearance,and quality required.Unless the specification or description contains or is followed either by words reading that no like,equivalent,or "or equal”item is permitted_or by words that indicate only the named product or preapproved equals will be allowed, Contractor may request that Engineer Project Manager authorize the use of other items of material or equipment,or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below. 1.If Engineer Project Manager in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required,Engineer Project Manager shall deem it an "or equal”item.For the purposes of this paragraph,a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a.in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer Project Manager determines that: 1)it is at least equal in materials of construction,quality,durability, appearance,strength,and design characteristics; 2)it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3)it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4)_it is not objectionable to Owner. b.Contractor certifies that,if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1)there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2)it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. Contractor's Expense:Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed "or equal”item at Contractor's expense. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the ECDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 30 of 75 Engineers Project Manager's Evaluation and Determination:Eagineer Project Manager will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each "or-equal”'request.ERgineer Project Manager may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed "or-equal” item.Engineer Project Manager will be the sole judge of acceptability.No "or-equal”item will be ordered,furnished,installed,or utilized until!Engineers Project Manager's review is complete and Engineer Project Manager determines that the proposed item is an "or- equal”,which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication.Engineer Project Manager will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. Effect of Engineers Project Manager's Determination:Neither approval nor denial of an "or-equal”request shall result in any change in Contract Price.The Engineers Project Manager's denial of an "or-equal”request shall be final and binding,and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Treatment as a Substitution Request:If Eagineer Project Manager determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or-equal”item, Contractor may request that Engineer Project Manager considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05. 7.05 Substitutes A.Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted,Contractor may request that Engineer Project Manager authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1.Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer Project Manager to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor.Engineer Project Manager will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor. 2.The requirements for review by Engineer Project Manager will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B,as supplemented by the Specifications,and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. 3.Contractor shall make written application to Engineer Project Manager for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use.The application: a.shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1)perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, 2)be similar in substance to that specified,and 3)be suited to the same use as that specified. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 31 of 75 b.will state: 1)the extent,if any,to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times, 2)whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project)to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item,and 3)whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c.will identify: 1)all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified,and 2)available engineering,sales,maintenance,repair,and replacement services. d.shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item,including but not limited to changes in Contract Price,shared savings,costs of redesign,and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B.&ngineer's Project Manager's Evaluation and Determination:Ergineer Project Manager will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request,and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.Engineer Project Manager may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item.Exgineer will be the sole judge of acceptability.No substitute will be ordered,furnished,installed,or utilized until Ergineer's Project Manager's review is complete and Engineer Project Manager determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute.Engineers Project Manager's determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts,including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer Project Manager will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C.Special Guarantee:Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D.Reimbursement of Engineer's Project Manager's Cost:Engineer Project Manager will record Engineers Project Manager's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor.Whether or not Exgineer Project Manager approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor,Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer Project Manager for evaluating each such proposed substitute.Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer Project Manager for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner)resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. E.Contractor's Expense:Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor's expense. F.Effect of Engineers Project Manager's Determination:|f Exgineer Project Manager approves the substitution request,Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution.The Engineer's Project _Manager's denial of a This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.: Page 32 of 75 7.06 substitution request shall be final and binding,and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents.Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D,by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. Concerning Subcontractors,Suppliers,and Others A.Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work.Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor's Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract,Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order,Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable,during the bidding process or otherwise).Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive,reasonable objection within five days. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work.Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements;provided,however,that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection.If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner,and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto),then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive,reasonable objection after due investigation.Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work,then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,with respect to the replacement;and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner's requirement of replacement. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement,shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer Project Manager a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor,and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 33 of 75 Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer Project Manager for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors,Suppliers,and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors,Suppliers,and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors,Suppliers,and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer Project Manager or Owner,except through Contractor or in case of an emergency,or as otherwise expressly allowed herein. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer Project Manager. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier,or other individual or entity,to the extent practicable,information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1.shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer Project Manager and any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity;nor 2.shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer Project Manager to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A.Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention,design, process,product,or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.If a particular invention,design,process,product,or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if,to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer Project Manager,its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others,the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,and except for claims that_are deemed to be against the United States pursuant to 25 U.S.C.§5321(d),25 U.S.C.§1680c, section 314 of Title Ill of Public Law 101-512 and the provisions of the Federal Tort Claims Act,28 USC §1346(b)and 28 USC §§2671,Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 34 of 75 7.08 7.09 7.10 Contractor,and its officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals,and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,process,product,or device specified in the Contract Documents,but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer Project Manager,and the officers,directors,members, partners,employees,agents,consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,design,process,product,or device not specified in the Contract Documents. Permits A.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses.Owner shall assist Contractor,when necessary,in obtaining such permits and licenses.Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractors Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract).Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work Taxes A.Contractor shall pay all sales,consumer,use,and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. Laws and Regulations A.Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations,neither Owner nor Ergineer Project Manager shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses,and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer Project Manager,and the officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects, attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. «Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 35 of 75 costs)arising out of or relating to such Work or other action.It shall not be Contractor's responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations,but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor's Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract)in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work,including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales,use,value-added,consumption,and other similar taxes.If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent,if any,of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes,then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may initiate a Claim. 7.11 Record Documents A.Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders,Work Change Directives,Field Orders,written interpretations and clarifications,and approved Shop Drawings.Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction.These record documents,together with all approved Samples,will be available to Engineer Project Manager for reference.Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer Project Manager. 7.12 Safety and Protection A.Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work,nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of,and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage,injury,or loss to: 1.all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2.all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the Site;and 3.other property at the Site or adjacent thereto,including trees,shrubs,lawns,walks, pavements,roadways,structures,other work in progress,utilities,and Underground Facilities not designated for removal,relocation,or replacement in the course of construction. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property,or to the protection of persons or property from damage,injury,or loss;and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. 1.Contractor shall notify Owner;the owners of adjacent property,Underground Facilities,and other utilities;and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site,when prosecution of the Work may affect them,and shall .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. «Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 36 of 75 cooperate with them in the protection,removal,relocation,and replacement of their property or work in progress. 2.Prior to proceeding with any underground work,Contractor shall: a.notify in writing all utility owners with utilities in place on or adjacent to the site that construction is about to commence,and b.coordinate the work with the utility owners and have the utility owners mark all utility locations that might conflict with the work prior to commencement of the work. C.Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner's safety programs,if any.The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner's safety programs that are applicable to the Work. D.Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer Project Manager of the specific requirements of Contractor's safety program with which Owner's and-Engineers employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E.All damage,injury,or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused,directly or indirectly,in whole or in part,by Contractor,any Subcontractor, Supplier,or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work,or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss solely attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions or willful misconduct_of Owner or Engineer Project Manager or anyone employed by any of them,or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,and not attributable,directly or indirectly,in whole or in part,to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F.Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Ergineer Project Manager has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). G.Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations,or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. H.The Contractor shall coordinate any outages of utilities with all parties affected by such outages.The Contractor shall abide by all the requirements of_utility companies or operators,shall be certain that all affected parties have adequate notice,and shall minimize the number and length of outages.Affected parties may include,but_are not limited to,the utility companies,private utility owners,organizations and individuals served by the utilities,the general public,the Project Manager,other designated representatives of the Owner and affected Subcontractors.The Project Manager shall be advised by the Contractor of any proposed utility outage not less than 48 hours (unless a longer period is provided in the contract elsewhere)in advance of the outage.Prior to the outage,the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with satisfactory evidence that appropriate This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.: Page 37 of 75 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 coordination procedures and efforts to comply with applicable requirements have been completed. The Contractor shall 1)be entirely responsible for any and all damage sustained by any and all parties affected by utility outages caused by him,whether the outages are deliberate or accidental,2)make all necessary efforts to prevent damages,and 3)make all necessary efforts to promptly repair and restore facilities or equipment damaged as a result of such outages. The Contractor shall make arrangements with public or private companies or operators before disconnecting utility services,and shall remove all temporary service connections after their purpose has been served.Existing utility lines shall have the right of way over all other lines,and all such lines encountered by the Contractor shall be carefully maintained in proper alignment.If the grades at which any line is being laid under the contract intersect with an existing utility line,the Contractor shall stop laying the line until new grades are established or adjusted by the Project Manager. Safety Representative A.Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. Hazard Communication Programs A.Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. Emergencies A.In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto,Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury,or loss.Contractor shall give Engineer Project Manager prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof.If Engineer Project Manager determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency,a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. Shop Drawings,Samples,and Other Submittals A.Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements: 1.Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample,Contractor shall have: a.reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; .This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.: Page 38 of 75 b.determined and verified all field measurements,quantities,dimensions,specified performance and design criteria,installation requirements,materials,catalog numbers,and similar information with respect thereto; c.determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application,fabrication,shipping,handling,storage, assembly,and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work;and d.determined and verified all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures of construction,and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 2.Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review of that submittal,and that Contractor approves the submittal. 3.With each submittal,Contractor shall give Engineer Project Manager specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal;and,in addition,in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer Project Manager for review and approval of each such variation. B.Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples:Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer Project Manager for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals.Each submittal will be identified as Engineer Project Manager may require. 1.Shop Drawings: a.Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b.Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions,specified performance and design criteria,materials,and similar data to show Engineer Project Manager the services,materials,and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer Project Manager to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. 2.Samples: a.Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b.Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material,Supplier,pertinent data such as catalog numbers,the use for which intended and other data as Engineer Project Manager may require to enable Engineer Project Manager to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. 3.Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals,any related Work performed prior to Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCOC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 39 of 75 C.Other Submittals:Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer Project Manager in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals,and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications. D.Engineers Project Manager's Review: 1.£ngineer Project Manager will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer Project Manager. Engineers Project Manager's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will,after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2.Engineer's Project Manager's review and approval will not extend to means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3.Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 4.Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer Project Manager has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample.Engineer Project Manager will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order. 5.€ngineers Project Manager's review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B. 6.Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample,or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents,shall not,under any circumstances,change the Contract Times or Contract Price,unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7.Neither Engineers Project Manager's receipt,review,acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing,Sample,or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8.Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples,subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4. E.Resubmittal Procedures: 1.Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer Project Manager and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit,as required,new Samples for review and approval.Contractor shall direct specific This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 40 of 75 attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Exgineer Project Manager on previous submittals. 2.Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals.Engineer Project Manager will record Engineer's Project Manager's time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings,sample,or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineers Project Manager's charges to Owner for such time.Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3.If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item,Contractor shall be responsible for Engineers Project Manager's charges to Owner for its review time,and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges,unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 7.17.Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A.Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective.Engineer Project Manager and its officers, directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1.abuse,modification,or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,Subcontractors,Suppliers,or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible;or 2.normal wear and tear under normal usage. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute.None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1.observations by Engineer Project Manager; 2.recommendation by Exgineer Project Manager or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3.the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer Project Manager or any payment related thereto by Owner; use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer Project Manager; any inspection,test,or approval by others;or onDYany correction of defective Work by Owner. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 41 of 75 D.If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner,then the specific warranties,guarantees,and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A.To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise,Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer Project Manager,and the officers,directors,members, partners,employees,agents,consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work,excepting only the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the Owner. B.In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer Project Manager or any of their officers, directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee)of Contractor,any Subcontractor,any Supplier,or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work,or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,compensation,or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor,Supplier,or other individual or entity under workers'compensation acts,disability benefit acts,or other employee benefit acts. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A.Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. : Page 42 of 75 lf professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials,or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer Project Manager will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer Project Manager. Owner and Engineer Project Manager shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy, and completeness of the services,certifications,or approvals performed by such design professionals,provided Owner and Engineer Project Manager have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this paragraph,Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.Engineers Project Manager's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings)will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer Project Manager. ARTICLE 8 -OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A.In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents,the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site.Such other work may be performed by Owner's employees,or through contracts between the Owner and third parties.Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. lf Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner's employees,or through contracts for such other work,then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work.If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site,Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work,each utility owner performing other work,and Owner,if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees,proper and safe access to the Site,and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work.Contractor shall do all cutting,fitting,and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work.Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,excavating,or otherwise altering such work;provided,however,that Contractor .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 43 of 75 may cut or alter others'work with the written consent of Exgineer Project Manager and the others whose work will be affected. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8,Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer Project Manager in writing any delays,defects,or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work.Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 8.02 Coordination A.if Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site,to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner's employees,or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site,the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1.the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2.an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility;and 3.the extent of such authority and responsibilities. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions,Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. Contractor shall make reasonable accommodation in its schedule to accommodate such work at no additional cost. 8.03 Legal Relationships A.If,in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner,the Owner's employees,any other contractor working for Owner,or any utility owner for whom the Owner is responsible causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors,or unreasonably delays,disrupts,interferes with,or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work,through actions or inaction,then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times,or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposajs seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying,disrupting,or interfering event.The entitlement to,and extent of,any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any)regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract.When applicable,any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor's rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage,delay,disruption,or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EICDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. : Page 44 of 75 adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging,delaying, disrupting,or interfering with the work of Owner,any other contractor,or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site.If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages,delays,disrupts,or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner,then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor,and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner's employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work,and for the reasonable direct delay,disruption,and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner's other work.In response to such damage,delay,disruption,or interference,Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor. If Contractor damages,delays,disrupts,or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site,through Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts,or if any claim arising out of Contractor's actions,inactions,or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor,Owner,or Erxgineer_Project_Manager,then Contractor shall (1)promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner,or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,and (2)indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Eagineer Project Manager,and the officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims,and against all costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to such damage,delay,disruption, or interference. ARTICLE 9 -OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 9.02 Communications to Contractor A.Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions,Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer Project Manager. Replacement of Esgineer Project Manager A.Owner may at its discretion appoint an-engineerte a replacement for Engineer Project Manager;on e es-_ne-_reasonable jection Re-repta engineer.The replacement's engineers status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer Project Manager. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 45 of 75 9.03 9.04 9.05 9.06 9.07 9.08 9.09 9.10 Furnish Data A.Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. Pay When Due A.Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. Lands and Easements;Reports,Tests,and Drawings A.Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B.Owner's duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. Cc.Article 5 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site,and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. Insurance A.Owner's responsibilities,if any,with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. Change Orders A.Owner's responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. Inspections,Tests,and Approvals A.Owner's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests,and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A.The Owner shall not supervise,direct,or have control or authority over,nor be responsible for,Contractor's means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A.Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 46 of 75 9.12 Safety Programs A. B. While at the Site,Owner's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Owner has been informed. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. ARTICLE 10 -ENGHVEER'S PROJECT MANAGER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A.Engineer Project Manager will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Eagineer Project Manager as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. 10.02 Visits to Site A.Engineer Project Manager will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer Project Manager deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work.Based on information obtained during such visits and observations,Engineer Project Manager,for the benefit of Owner,will determine,in general,if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.Engineer Project Manager will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work.Eagineers Project Manager's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents.On the basis of such visits and observations,Exgineer_Project Manager will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. Engineers Project Manager's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineers Project Manager's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly,but without limitation,during or as a result of Engineers Project Manager's visits or observations of Contractor's Work,Engineer Project Manager will not supervise, direct,control,or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures of construction,or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Project Representative A.if Owner and Exgineer Project Manager have agreed that Engineer Project Manager will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer Project Manager at the Site and assist Engineer Project Manager in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions,and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08.If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineers Project Manager's consultant, «This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 47 of 75 10.04 10.05 10.06 10.07 10.08 agent,or employee,the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Rejecting Defective Work A.Engineer Project Manager has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. Shop Drawings,Change Orders and Payments A.Engineers Project Manager's authority,and limitations thereof,as to Shop Drawings and Samples,are set forth in Paragraph 7.16. Engineers Project Manager's authority,and limitations thereof,as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any,are set forth in Paragraph 7.19. Engineers Project Manager's authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11. Engineers Project Manager's authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. Determinations for Unit Price Work A.Engineer Project Manager will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A.Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents,and judge the acceptability of the Work,pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations,Change Proposals,and acceptance of the Work.In rendering such decisions and judgments,Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor,and will not be liable to Owner,Contractor,or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations,decisions,or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. Limitations on Engineers Project Manager's Authority and Responsibilities A.Neither Engineers Project Manager's authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract,nor any decision made by Ergineer_Project Manager in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,exercise,or performance of any authority or responsibility by Exgineer Project Manager,shall create,impose,or give rise to any duty in contract,tort,or otherwise owed by Engineer Project Manager to Contractor,any Subcontractor,any Supplier,any other individual or entity,or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer Project Manager will not supervise,direct,control,or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures of construction,or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.Engineer Project Manager will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. : Page 48 of 75 C.Engineer Project Manager will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,any Supplier,or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D.Engineer's Project Manager's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions,schedules, guarantees,bonds,certificates of inspection,tests and approvals,and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of,and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests,and approvals,that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E.The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative,if any. 10.09 Compliance with Safety Program A.While at the Site,Engineers Project Manager's employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner's and Contractor's safety programs (if any)of which Esgineer Project Manager has been informed. ARTICLE 11 -AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A.The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order,a Work Change Directive,or a Field Order. 1.Change Orders: a.If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times,such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order.A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. b.Contracting Officer Qwrer and Contractor may amend these the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that-de-netinvelve{t}the performanceor E of a4 ity of t e Work,{2}the design {as Set forth in the Drawings, Specifications:;isel,3 ott ;.hrical witheutthe+recommendationoftheEngineer.Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order. 2.Work Change Directives:A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order,following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive's effect,if any,on the Contract Price and Contract Times;or,if negotiations are unsuccessful,by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments,expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price.Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an .This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 49 of 75 adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times,or both,no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive.Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both,no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 3.Field Orders:Engineer Project Manager may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor,which shall perform the Work involved promptly.If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or both,then before proceeding with the Work at issue,Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A.Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety,Contracting Officer Owner may,at any time or from time to time,order additions,deletions,or revisions in the Work.Sueh-change Rhat-be-suppertedpy Encines "s-recommendation,tetheextentthe etherengineering ortechnical matters.Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order,if Contracting Officer Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect,if any,of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price;or by a Work Change Directive.Upon receipt of any such document,Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or,in the case of a deletion in the Work,promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work.Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents,as amended,modified,or supplemented,except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A.The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order.Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06.Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1.where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03);or .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 50 of 75 2.where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2);or 3.where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum,then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01)plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C). C.Contractor's Fee:When applicable,the Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1.a mutually acceptable fixed fee;or 2.if a fixed fee is not agreed upon,then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a.for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B8.2,the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b.for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3,the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c.where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon,the intent of Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a and 11.04.C.2.b is that the Contractor's fee shall be based on:(1)a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work,at whatever tier,and (2)with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work,a fee of five percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred)attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor;provided,however,that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work; d.no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5,and 13.01.C; e.the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal!to five percent of such net decrease;and f.when both additions and credits are involved in any one change,the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e,inclusive. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A.The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order.Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06.Any ®This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 51 of 75 Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05,concerning delays in Contractor's progress. 11.06 Change Proposals A.Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Contracting Officer,Engineer with a copy to Project Manager,to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price;appeal an initial decision by Ergineer_Project_Manager concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents;contest a set-off against payment due;or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both,or other proposed relief,and explain the reason for the proposed change,with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.Procedures:Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Contracting Officer Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days)after the start of the event giving rise thereto,or after such initial decision.Contractor understands that the 30- day notice period is a condition precedent to obtaining a change and failure to meet such notice provision shall waive Contractor's right to seek a change for the event.The Contractor shall submit supporting data,including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any),to the Engineer Project Manager and Contracting Officer Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal.The parties may mutually agree in writing to extend the deadline for submission of supporting data.The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete,and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event._Owner shall have the right to audit Contractor's project records, including bid records,to confirm the supporting data are accurate and complete. 2.Contracting Officer's Engineer's Action:Contracting Officer Engineer will review each Change Proposal and,within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor's supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole,approve it in whole,or deny it in part and approve it in part.Such actions shall be in writing,with a copy provided to Engineer Project Manager and Contractor.The parties maymutually agree in writing to extend the Contracting Officer's deadline for decision.If Contracting Officer Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days,then either Owneror Contractor may at-anytimethereafter submit a letter to the Contracting Officer etherparty indicating that as a result of Contracting Officer's Engineers inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied,thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 3.Binding Decision:Contracting Officer's Engineers decision will be final and binding upon Ownerand Contractor,unless Ownerer Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. s This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC°C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 52 of 75 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A.Contracting Officer Qwrer and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1.changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the Contracting Officer and Contractor parties,including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2.changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off,unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3.changes in the Work which are:(a)ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02,(b) required because of Owner's acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07,or (c)agreed to by the ,parties;subje ethe needtoretncinee ecommendatien he-crange-in-the Vie 4.changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or other changes,which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06,or Article 12. B.If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07,it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect,as if fully executed. 11.08 Notification to Surety A.If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including,but not limited to,Contract Price or Contract Times),the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility.The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. ARTICLE 12 -CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A.Claims Process:The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article: 1.Appeals by Owrerer Contractor of Contracting Officer's Engineers decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2.Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times,or other relief under the Contract Documents;and .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations}between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 53 of 75 3.Disputes that Engineer Project Manager has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings,Specifications,or otherwise),the acceptability of the Work,or other engineering or technical matters. Submittal of Claim:The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days)after the start of the event giving rise thereto;in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal.Contractor shall submit its Claims directly to the ANTHC Procurement Director;Owner shall submit its Claims to Contractor through the Contracting Officer,Fhe-party submittingthe-Claim-shalt-alse_furnish_acepyte+thetnaineerforits infermatiern-ent,The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim.In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price,or both,Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith,that the supporting data are accurate and complete,and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. Review and Resolution:The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly,giving full consideration to its merits.The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations.The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement.All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party,with a copy to Ergineer Project Manager. Mediation: 1.At any time after initiation of a Claim,Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute.The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2.{if Owner and Contractor agree to mediation,then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process,and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination.If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute,the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation,as determined by the mediator. 3.Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs. Disposition of Contractor's Claims:\f the ANTHC Procurement Director fails to render a decision within 30 days of the initial submittal of a Claim by Contractor,it shall be deemed to be a decision in the favor of the Owner,however this response period shall be stayed during mediation or mutual agreement to extend.The decision of the ANTHC Procurement Director to approve or reject a Claim,in whole or in part,shall be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless the Contractor timely submits an appeal to the ANTHC Chief Executive Officer,pursuant to subparagraph F.,below. Contractor's Appeal to ANTHC Chief Executive Officer:lf dissatisfied with the Procurement Director's decision or failure to render_a decision after 30 days,Contractor may submit a written appeal to the ANTHC Chief Executive Officer no later than 20 days after the Procurement Director's decision.The appeal must identify the reason(s)why the This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originatedin copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the ECDC'C-700.Standard GeneralConditionsareshowninredline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 54 of 75 Contractor believes the Procurement Director's decision is in error.The Chief Executive Officer shall render an appeal within 60 days of the submittal of the appeal,however,the Chief Executive Officer may extend this period for 30 days upon notice to the Contractor.If the Chief Executive Officer fails to render a decision in this time period,it shall be deemed to_be a decision in the favor of the Owner.The decision of the ANTHC Chief Executive Officer shall be final and binding on the parties unless Contractor invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. £G.Partial Approval of Owner's Claim:\f the partyreeeiing-a-Claim Contractor approves the Claim in part and denies it in part,such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 60 days of such action the ether-party Owner invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. FH.Denial of Qwner's Claim:\f efforts to resolve a Claim by Owner are not successful,the-party receiving the-Claka Contractor may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the ether party Owner.If the Contractor receiving-party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days,then either Owner er-Contracter may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the ether-party Contractor indicating that as a result of the inaction,the Claim is deemed denied,thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial.A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 26 60 days of the denial the ether-party Owner invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. &.|.Final and Binding Results:\f the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim,direct negotiations,mediation,or otherwise;or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part,or denied in full,and such actions become final and binding;then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract,including the Work, the Contract Times,or the Contract Price. ARTICLE 13 -COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES;UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A.Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work:The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue,as further defined below.The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1.To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price,under cost-plus-fee,time-and-materials,or other cost-based terms;or 2.To determine the value of a Change Order,Change Proposal,Claim,set-off,or other adjustment in Contract Price.When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work,Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. Costs Included:Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner,costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project,shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C,and shall include only the following items: .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in rediine/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 55 of 75 1.Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include,without limitation,superintendents,foremen,and other personnel employed full time on the Work.Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work.Payroll costs shall include,but not be limited to,salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits,which shall include social security contributions, unemployment,excise,and payroll taxes,workers'compensation,health and retirement benefits,bonuses,sick leave,and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto.The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours,on Saturday,Sunday,or legal holidays,shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2.Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work,including costs of transportation and storage thereof,and Suppliers'field services required in connection therewith.All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments,in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner.All trade discounts,rebates,and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner,and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3.Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.If required by Owner,Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner,who will then determine,with the advice of Engineer Project Manager,which bids,if any,will be acceptable.If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee,the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4.Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers,architects,testing laboratories,surveyors,attorneys,and accountants)employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5.Supplemental costs including the following: a.The proportion of necessary transportation,travel,and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b.Cost,including transportation and maintenance,of all materials,supplies, equipment,machinery,appliances,office,and temporary facilities at the Site,and hand tools not owned by the workers,which are consumed in the performance of the Work,and cost,less market value,of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c.Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery,and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer Project Manager,and the costs of transportation,loading,unloading,assembly,dismantling,and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EICDC°C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 56 of 75 The rental of any such equipment,machinery,or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work._In the case of equipment rented from_the Contractor,the Contractor shall provide evidence to the Project Manager that the costs contained in the rental agreement shall be the lesser of the following methods for cost:_1)the cost is the equivalent to that charged by the majority of equipment rental firms in the locale of the project,or;2)the cost is as indicated in the financial records of the Contractor and assumes equipment life indicated in the financial records of the Contractor. d.Sales,consumer,use,and other similar taxes related to the Work,and for which Contractor is liable,as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e.Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor,any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f.Losses and damages (and related expenses)caused by damage to the Work,not compensated by insurance or otherwise,sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05),provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor,any Subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner.No such losses,damages,and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g.Thecost of utilities,fuel,and sanitary facilities at the Site. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site,express and courier services,and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i.The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C.Costs Excluded:The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1.Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers,executives,principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships),general managers,safety managers, engineers,architects,estimators,attorneys,auditors,accountants,purchasing and contracting agents,expediters,timekeepers,clerks,and other personne!employed by Contractor,whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4.The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2.Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originatedin copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EICDC'C-700 Standard GeneralConditionsareshowninredline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 57 of 75 3.Any part of Contractor's capital expenses,including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4.Costs due to the negligence of Contractor,any Subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to,the correction of defective Work,disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied,and making good any damage to property. 5.Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. Contractor's Fee:When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement.When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order,Change Proposal,Claim,set-off,or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work,Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C. Documentation:Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13,Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer Project Manager an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 13.02 Allowances A.It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer Project Manager. Cash Allowances:Contractor agrees that: 1.the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site,and all applicable taxes;and 2.Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site,labor,installation,overhead, profit,and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances,and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Contingency Allowance:Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance,if any,is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. Prior to final payment,an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer Project Manager to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances,and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A.Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. .This document is a MODIFIED version of E)CDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. a Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 58 of 75 The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Engineer Project Manager will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor.&aAgineer Project Manager will review with Contractor the Engineer's Project Manager's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise).Engineers Project Manager's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer Project Manager to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data)upon Owner and Contractor,subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. Within 30 days of Engineer's Project Manager's written decision under the preceding paragraph,Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if: 1.the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; 2.there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work;and 3.Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price,and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 14-TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A.Owner,Ergineer_Project_Manager,their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,independent testing laboratories,and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection,and testing.Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 14.02 Tests,inspections,and Approvals A.Contractor shall give Exgineer Project Manager timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof)for all required inspections and tests,and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. Owner Contractor shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector,testing laboratory,or other qualified individual or entity,reasonably acceptable to Project Manager and Owner,to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documentste-be-furnished-and-paidforbyOwner,except that costs incurred in .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted ECDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 59 of 75 connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)specifically to be inspected,tested,or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body,Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections,tests,or approvals,pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer Project Manager the required certificates of inspection or approval. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging,obtaining,and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1.by the Contract Documents,unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; 2.to attain Owner's and Engineers Project Manager's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3.by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4.for testing,adjusting,and balancing of mechanical,electrical,and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work;and 5.for acceptance of materials,mix designs,or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors,testing laboratories,or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer Project Manager. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof)to be approved by Owner, Engineer Project Manager,or another designated individual or entity,then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. If any Work (or the work of others)that is to be inspected,tested,or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of ExgiweerProject Manager,Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer_Project Manager,uncover such Work for observation.Such uncovering shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor had given Engineer Project Manager timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Ergineer Project Manager had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A.Contractor's Obligation:\t is Contractor's obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. Engineers_Project_Manager's Authority:Engineer Project Manager has the authority to determine whether Work is defective,and to reject defective Work. Notice of Defects:Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer Project Manager has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Correction,or Removal and Replacement:Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work,Contractor shall correct all such defective Work,whether or not fabricated, .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 60 of 75 installed,or completed,or,if Engineer Project Manager has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Preservation of Warranties:When correcting defective Work,Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee,if any, on said Work. Costs and Damages:In addition to its correction,removal,and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work,Contractor shall pay all claims,costs,losses,and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work,including but not limited to the cost of the inspection,testing,correction,removal,replacement,or reconstruction of such defective Work,fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective,and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work.Prior to final payment,if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims,costs,losses,and damages resulting from defective Work,then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A.If,instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work,Owner prefers to accept it,Owner may do so.{subjectif-suchacceptance-oceurs_priorto-final7 noinae uch 3 antanceis_incene le ith he Owner's acceptance under this paragraph shall only be valid if done in writing and accompanied with an accurate certification by the Contractor indicating any and all areas of non-compliance _and the ramifications of the non-compliance.Contractor shall pay all claims,costs,losses,and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Exgineer Project Manager as to reasonableness),and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor.If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment,the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order.If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted,then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment,Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A.Engineer Project Manager has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work,whether or not the Work is fabricated,installed,or completed. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Eagineer Project Manager,then Contractor shall,if requested by Engineer Project Manager,uncover such Work for Engineers Project Manager's observation,and then replace the covering,all at Contractor's expense. If Engineer Project Manager considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer Project Manager or inspected or tested by others,then Contractor,at Engineers Project Manager's request,shall uncover,expose,or otherwise make available .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EICDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 61 of 75 for observation,inspection,or testing as Engineer Project Manager may require,that portion of the Work in question,and provide all necessary labor,material,and equipment. 1.If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective,Contractor shall be responsible for all claims,costs,losses,and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure,observation,inspection,and testing,and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others);and pending Contractor's full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2.If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective,Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times,or both,directly attributable to such uncovering,exposure,observation,inspection,testing, replacement,and reconstruction.If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof,then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A.If the Work is defective,or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment,or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents,then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however,this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor,any Subcontractor,any Supplier, any other individual or entity,or any surety for,or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A.If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer Project Manager to correct defective Work,or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer Project Manager,or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents,then Owner may,after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07,Owner shall proceed expeditiously.In connection with such corrective or remedial action,Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site,take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto,and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere.Contractor shall allow Owner,Owner's representatives,agents and employees,Owner's other contractors,and Esgineer Project Manager and Engineers Project Manager's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims,costs,losses,and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set- offs against payments due under Article 15.Such claims,costs,losses and damages will .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 62 of 75 include but not be limited to all costs of repair,or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction,removal,or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15 -PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION;CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. C. Basis for Progress Payments:The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer Project Manager.Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period,as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03.Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. Applications for Payments: 1.At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month),Contractor shall submit to Engineer Project Manager for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing,the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale,invoice,or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens,and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance,a warehouse bond,or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein,all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.Owner may require Contractor and its first tier subcontractors and suppliers to submit interim and final lien,bond and claim releases with each application for payment that confirm that there are no outstanding claims on the project_as of the date of the application or enumerate any outstanding claims or change proposals. 2.Beginning with the second Application for Payment,each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3.The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. Review of Applications: 1.Engineer will,within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment,including each resubmittal,either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner,or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originatedin copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard GeneralConditionsareshowninredline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 63 of 75 Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment.In the latter case,Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2.Engineers Project Manager's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer Project Manager to Owner,based on Engineer's Project Manager's observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional,and on Enrgineers_Project Manager's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules,that to the best of Engineers Project Manager's knowledge,information and belief: a.the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b.the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion,the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents,a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03,and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation);and c.the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineers Project Manager's responsibility to observe the Work. 3.By recommending any such payment Engineer Project Manager will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a.inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive,extended to every aspect of the Work in progress,or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer Project Manager in the Contract;or b.there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4.Neither Engineers Project Manager's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineers Project Manager's recommendation of any payment,including final payment,will impose responsibility on ERgineer Project Manager: a.to supervise,direct,or control the Work,or b.for the means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,or c.for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work,or d.to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price,or This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. : Page 64 of 75 e.to determine that title to any of the Work,materials,or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5.Engineer Project Manager may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if,in Engineers Project Manager's opinion,it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. 6.Engineer Project Manager will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs)necessary in Engineers Project Manager's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. b. the Work is defective,requiring correction or replacement; the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07,or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible;or Engineer Project Manager has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D.Payment Becomes Due: 1.Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation,the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs)will become due,and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E.Reductions in Payment by Owner: 1.In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs)recommended by Engineer Project Manager,Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a.claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work,or Owner has incurred costs,losses,or damages on account of Contractor's conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work,including but not limited to claims,costs,losses,or damages from workplace injuries,adjacent property damage,non-compliance with Laws and Regulations,and patent infringement; Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage,delay,disruption,and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews,evaluations of proposed substitutes,tests and inspections,or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 65 of 75 f.the Work is defective,requiring correction or replacement; g.Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07,or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h.the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i.an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred; j.liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones,Substantial Completion,or final completion of the Work; k.Liens have been filed in connection with the Work,except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; |.there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended. 2.If Owner imposes any set-off against payment,whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Exgineer_Project Manager,Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Erngineer_Project Manager) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction,and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld.Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld,or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor,if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action.The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3.Upon a subsequent determination that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor's Warranty of Title A.Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work,materials,and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1)all Liens and other title defects,and (2)all patent,licensing,copyright,or royalty obligations,no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A.When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer Project Manager in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer Project Manager issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Exgineer_Project Manager an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Promptly after Contractor's notification,Owner,Contractor,and Engineer Project Manager shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion.If Engineer This document is a MODIFIED version of ECDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 66 of 75 Project Manager does not consider the Work substantially complete,Exgineer Project Manager will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete,Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion.Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment.Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list.If,after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate,Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete,Engineer will,within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner,notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete,stating the reasons therefor.If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate,or if despite consideration of Owner's objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete,then Engineer will,within said 14 days,execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected)reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion,Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion,review the builder's risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder's risk coverage,and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner.Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing,Owner shall bear responsibility for security,operation,protection of the Work,property insurance,maintenance,heat,and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items,following the progress payment procedures set forth above. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A.Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work,Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents,or which Owner,Engineer Project Manager,and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work,subject to the following conditions: 1.At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete.If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCOC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 67 of 75 Contractor,Owner,and Ergineer Project Manager will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer Project Manager in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer Project Manager to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request,Owner,Contractor,and Engineer Project Manager shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion.If Engineer Project Manager does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete,Engineer Project Manager will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.If Engineer_Project_Manager considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete,the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder's risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A.Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,Eagineer Project Manager will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work,or agreed portion thereof,is incomplete or defective.Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A.Application for Payment: 1.After Contractor has,in the opinion of Ergineer_Project Manager,satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered,in accordance with the Contract Documents,all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,guarantees,bonds,certificates or other evidence of insurance,certificates of inspection,annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11),and other documents,Contractor may make application for final payment. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered)by: a.all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b.consent ofthe surety,if any,to final payment; c.satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work,materials,and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects,or will so pass upon final payment. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 68 of 75 d.a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled;and e.complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner)of all Lien rights arising out of the Work,and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3.In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner,Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that:(a)the releases and receipts include all labor,services,material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed;and (b)all payrolls,material and equipment bills,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible,or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property,have been paid or otherwise satisfied.If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full,Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien,or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B.&ngineers Project Manager's Review of Application and Acceptance: 1.If,on the basis of Engineers Project Manager's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection,and Engineers Project Manager review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents,Engineer Project Manager is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer Project Manager will,within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment,indicate in writing Ergineers Project Manager's recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment.Such recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineers Project Manager's opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments.At the same time Engineer Project Manayer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable,subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07.Otherwise,Engineer Project Manager will return the Application for Payment to Contractor,indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment,in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C.Completion of Work:The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations)when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineers Project Manager's written recommendation of final payment. D.Payment Becomes Due:Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,the amount recommended by Engineer Project Manager (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineers Project Manager's recommendation,including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments)will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted ECDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 69 of 75 15.07 Waiver of Claims A.The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor.Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05,from Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein,from outstanding Claims by Owner,or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A.If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents,or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents),any Work is found to be defective,or if the repair of any damages to the Site,adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise,and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations,is found to be defective,then Contractor shall promptly,without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1.correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas; 2.correct such defective Work; 3.if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner,remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective,and 4.satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work,to the work of others,or to other land or areas resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions,or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage,Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced.Contractor shall pay all claims,costs,losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,architects,attorneys,and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs)arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work,the correction period for that item may Start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom)has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph,the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. s Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC”C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 70 of 75 E.Contractor's obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties.The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for,or a waiver of,the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16 -SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A.At any time and without cause,Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer Project Manager.Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed.Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed.Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times,or both,directly attributable to any such suspension.Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A.The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: 1.Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including,but not limited to,failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2.Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; 3.Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;or 4.Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Ergineer Project Manager. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs,then after giving Contractor (and any surety)seven ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract,Owner may proceed to: 1.declare Contractor to be in default,and give Contractor (and any surety)notice that the Contract is terminated;and 2.enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond,if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause,Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site,take possession of the Work,incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere,and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.Contractor further agrees that in the event of default,it shall assign to Owner those subcontracts which Owner wishes to maintain,either for its use or the use of Contractor's surety.Contractor_agrees to insert in each of its subcontracts,language allowing such an assignment. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EICDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein.. Page 71 of 75 Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate has begins-te eorrectits-failuretoperferm-and-preceeds-_ditigentlyte cured such failure. tf Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B,Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed.If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work,including all related claims,costs, losses,and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,attorneys,and other professionals)sustained by Owner,such excess will be paid to Contractor.If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims,costs,losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance,Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims,costs,losses,and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer Project Manager as to their reasonableness and,when so approved by Engineer,Project Manager incorporated in a Change Order.When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph,Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner,the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue,or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond.Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.If the default termination is deemed improper,then such default will be automatically converted to a termination for convenience and Contractor's rights shall be limited to those rights granted it under the termination for convenience provisions of Paragraph 16.03. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A,the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A.Upon seven days written notice to Contractor andEngineer,Owner may,without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner,terminate the Contract.In such case,Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1.completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination,including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2.expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor,materials,or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work,plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses;and 3.other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination,not including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead,profits,or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 72 of 75 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A.lf,through no act or fault of Contractor,(1)the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority,or (2) Engineer Project Manager fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,or (3)Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,then Contractor may,upon seven days written notice to Owner and Ergiveer Project Manager,and provided Owner or Engineer Project Manager do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time,terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy,if Engineer Project Manager has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,Contractor may,seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer Project Manager,stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor,including interest thereon.The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17 -FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A.Disputes Subject to Final Resolution:The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article: 1.A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim,or of a denial in full;and 2.Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents,and arising after final payment has been made. Final Resolution of Disputes:For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article,Owner or Contractor may: 1.elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions;or 2.agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process;or 3.if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to,give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. .This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 73 of 75 ARTICLE 18 -MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 18.02 18.03 18.04 18.05 18.06 18.07 Giving Notice A.Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice,it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1.delivered in person,by a commercial courier service or otherwise,to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended;or 2.delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail,postage prepaid,to the last business address known to the sender of the notice. Computation of Times A.When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days,it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period.If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day madea legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,such day will be omitted from the computation. Cumulative Remedies A.The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to,and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of,any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations,by special warranty or guarantee,or by other provisions of the Contract.The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation,right,and remedy to which they apply. Limitation of Damages A.With respect to any and all Change Proposals,Claims,disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue,neither Owner nor Engineer Project Manager,nor any of their officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims,costs,losses,or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. No Waiver A.A party's non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder ofthis Contract. Survival of Obligations A.All representations,indemnifications,warranties,and guarantees made in,required by,or given in accordance with the Contract,as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract,will survive final payment,completion,and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. Controlling Law A.This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located_unless stated otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. =This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCOC documents remain subject to the copyright. .Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC*C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 74 of 75 18.08 Headings A.Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-700,Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Council of Engineering Companies,and American Society of Civil Engineers,or is based in part on excerpts from copyrighted EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in copyrighted EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Differences (additions,deletions,alterations)between these Standard General Conditions and the EJCDC'C-700 Standard General Conditions are shown in redline/strikeout and are incorporated herein. Page 75 of 75 ATTACHMENT G RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract,which are based on EJCDC®C-700 (2013 Edition).All provisions of the Standard General Conditions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the Standard General Conditions.Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below,which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions,with the prefix "SC"added thereto. SC-1.CONFLICT WITH STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS The Supplementary Conditions supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract,which are based on EJCDC®C-700 (2013 Edition).Where conflicts exist between the Supplementary Conditions and the Standard General Conditions,the Supplementary Conditions prevail. ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 Defined Terms SC-1.01.Add to the list of definitions in Paragraph 1.01.A by inserting the following as numbered items in their proper alphabetical positions: ANTHC -The Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium,a non-profit health consortium organized under the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act,section 325 of Public Law 105-83,and the laws of the State of Alaska. ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS SC--2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance SC-2.01.C Amend Paragraph 2.01.C to read as follows: Evidence of Owner's Insurance:After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation,Owner shall,upon request,promptly deliver to Contractor,with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise),the RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 1 of 14 certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. ARTICLE 6 -BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 Contractor's Insurance SC-6.03.G. G. SC-6.03.1&J SC 6.03.N N. Amend Paragraph 6.03.G to read as follows: Additional insureds:The Contractor's commercial general liability,automobile liability, umbrella or excess,pollution liability,aviation liability,watercraft liability,and drone liability insurance policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and the Denali Commission,an independent federal agency;include coverage for the respective officers,directors,members,partners,employees,agents,consultants,and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds;and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed Operations)on a non-contributory basis.Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.03.H: Aviation liability insurance:\f Contractor or any of its Subcontractors uses,owns, charters,rents,borrows or leases an aircraft or rotor wings to be used in the performance of this Contract,contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained aircraft liability insurance or require equivalent insurance from the company providing the aircraft or rotor wing. Watercraft liability insurance:\f Contractor or any of its Subcontractors uses,owns, charters,rents,borrows or leases any watercraft to be used in the performance of this Contract,contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained watercraft liability insurance or require equivalent insurance from the company providing the watercraft. Drone liability insurance:\f Contractor or any of its Subcontractors uses,owns,rents, borrows or leases a drone to be used in the performance of this Contract,contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained drone liability insurance or require equivalent insurance from the company providing the drone. Renumber the two paragraphs as new 6.03.L (General provisions)and 6.03.M Add the following new paragraph immediately after new Paragraph 6.03.M: The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 2 of 14 1.Workers'Compensation,and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions: State:Statutory Federal,if applicable (e.g.,Longshoreman's):If Applicable Jones Act coverage,if applicable: 1,000,000 If Bodily injury by accident,each accident S Applicable 1,000,000 If Bodily injury by disease,aggregate S$Applicable Employer's Liability: Bodily injury,each accident S 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease,each employee S$1,000,000 Bodily injury/disease aggregate S$1,000,000 For work performed in monopolistic states,stop- gap liability coverage shall be endorsed to either the worker's compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of:S If Applicable Foreign voluntary worker compensation Statutory 2.Contractor's Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and 6.03.C of the General Conditions: General Aggregate 5 2,000,000.00 Products Liability -Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury S$1,000,000 Contractual Liability S$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Per Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage)S$1,000,000 The aggregate limits under SC-6.03.K.2 (Commercial General Liability)shall be maintained fully available for this Contract by obtaining and maintaining a Designated Construction Project General Aggregate Limit endorsement,or equivalent. 3.Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D.of the General Conditions: Bodily Injury: RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCOC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 3 of 14 Each person $_N/A Each accident S N/A Property Damage: Each accident S N/A [or] Combined Single Limit Per Occurrence S$1,000,000 (Such insurance shall include coverage of all "owned,”"hired,”and "non-owned”vehicles, or coverage for "any auto”.) 4.Excess or Umbrella Liability: Per Occurrence S 9,000,000 General Aggregate 5 9,000,000 5.Contractor's Pollution Liability: Each Occurrence S 5,000,000 General Aggregate S N/A 5,000,000 6.Contractor's Professional Liability: Each Claim S 2,000,000 Annual Aggregate S 2,000,000 t is acceptable for the Contractor's Professional and Contractor's Pollution Liability to be combined in one policy but each coverage must carry separate limits of liability noted above. 7.Aviation Liability: 5,000,000 If Per Passenger or crew seat S Applicable 25,000,000 If Per Occurrence S Applicable 8.Watercraft Liability: 1,000,000 If Per Occurrence S Applicable 2,000,000 If General Aggregate S Applicable RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EICDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 4 of 14 ° $C-6.03.0 SC-6.05 SC-6.05.A A. SC-6.05.A 9.Drone Liability: 1,000,000 If Per Occurrence S Applicable 2,000,000 If General Aggregate S Applicable 10.Additional Insured requirement:Owner,as well as its respective officers, officials,employees,and agents. Add the following new Paragraph 6.03.0 immediately after new Paragraph 6.03.N: Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificate of insurance and policy endorsements from each subcontractor. Unless specified in a delivery order,subcontractors are not required to carry Builder's Risk,Professional Liability,or Pollution Liability and subcontractors'Commercial General Liability limits are $2,000,000. Property Insurance Amend Paragraph 6.05.A to read as follows: Builder's Risk:Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions,Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis,in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost of each delivery order thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations).This insurance shall: Amend Subparagraph 6.05.A.2 to read as follows: be written on a builder's risk "all risk”policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work,existing structures,owner supplied furniture, temporary buildings,falsework,and materials and equipment for installation in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:fire;lightning; windstorm;riot;civil commotion;terrorism;vehicle impact;aircraft;smoke;theft; vandalism and malicious mischief;mechanical breakdown,boiler explosion,and artificially generated electric current;volcanic activity,and other earth movement; collapse,including collapse during construction,remodeling or renovation due to use of defective material or methods of construction,remodeling or renovation;explosion; debris removal;demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations;water damage (other than that caused by flood);and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.If insurance against mechanical breakdown,boiler explosion,and artificially generated electric current; earthquake;volcanic activity,and other earth movement;or flood,are not commercially available under builder's risk policies,by endorsement or otherwise,such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EICDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 5 of 14 SC-6.05.A Amend Subparagraph 6.05.A.6 to read as follows: 6. SC-6.05.A extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit,including when waterborne. Replace Subparagraph 6.05.A.11 to read as follows: Extend to cover damage or loss from faulty workmanship,materials,and construction. SC-6.05.A Add the following to the list of items in Paragraph 6.05.A,as numbered items: SC-6.05.B B. 14.include for the benefit of Owner,contractor or subcontractor loss of use of the Land or the Project due to delays in Project completion caused by covered peril losses to the Project,including loss of income and rents and soft costs such as real property taxes and assessments and insurance premiums,plus attorneys fees and engineering or other consultants'fees,if not otherwise covered. 15.include coverage for "cold testing”of all building systems. 16.include coverage for "extra expense”. 17.include coverage for direct physical damage to the Project and loss of use caused by an off premises power interruption. 18.shall contain a separate debris removal limit of liability which is separate from,in addition to,and not part of the overall policy limit of liability. 19.be subject to a deductible amount of no more than $100,000 for direct physical loss in any one occurrence. Amend Paragraph 6.05.B to read as follows: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof)required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be suspended,voided, canceled,materially changed,renewal refused,or reduced in coverage or in limits except by the reduction of the applicable aggregate limit by claims paid,until at least 30 days prior written notice (ten (10)days for non-payment of premiums)has been given to the purchasing policyholder.Within one day of receipt of any such written notice,the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured. ARTICLE 7 -CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02.8 B. Amend Paragraph 7.02.B to read as follows: Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto,and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,all Work at the Site shall be performed Monday through Saturday,10 hours per day.Contractor will not perform Work on a Sunday,or any legal holiday.Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Sundays,or legal holidays only with Owner's written consent,which will not be unreasonably withheld. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 6 of 14 SC-7.20 SC-7.20 SC-7.21 SC-7.21 Add a new Section heading to read "Compliance with ANTHC Policies”immediately after Section 7.19. Add the following new Paragraph 7.20 under the new section heading: Contractor shall comply with,and shall ensure each of its subcontractors,suppliers,and persons for whom they are responsible shall comply with,the following policies which have been adopted by ANTHC: 1.Compliance Awareness and Reporting Policy (#01-3007) 2.Conduct and Ethics Policy (#400) 3.Good Faith Reporting and Non-Retaliation Policy (#1200) 4 Screening Government-wide Debarment,Suspension and Exclusion Database Policy (#01-2005)umTobacco Free Campus Policy (approved April 2006) 6.Background and Character Check Policy (approved September 2014) 7.itis the policy of ANTHC to actively seek participation of Alaska Native/American Indian-owned business concerns in its procurements (Section 3 of ANTHC's Purchasing and Procurement Policy (01-2007)).The Contractor is encouraged to do the same regarding subcontracts or purchase orders for any part of the performance of this order. 8.Background Character Check Policy (HR-106) If not provided with the bid solicitation,Owner shall provide Contractor copies of these policies upon request. Add a new section heading to read "Maintenance of Records and Owner's Rights to Audit”immediately after Section 7.20. Add the following new Paragraph 7.21 under the new section heading: Owner and any applicable governmental entity shall have the right to audit and copy Contractor's books and records of any type,nature or description relating to the Project (including but not limited to financial records reflecting in any way costs claimed on the Project),and to inspect the Site,including Contractor's trailer,or other job Site office,at any time and this requirement shall be contained in the subcontracts of Subcontractors working on Site.By way of example,Owner shall have the right to inspect and obtain copies of all Contract Documents,planning and design documents,proposal and negotiation documents,cost records and job cost variance reports,payroll and labor distribution records,design modification proposals,value engineering or other cost reduction proposals,job progress reports,photographs,and as-built drawings maintained by Contractor.Notwithstanding the foregoing,on lump sum contracts (including the prime contract)and for cost components subject to lump sum pricing, Owner's audit rights set forth above shall not extend to cost records,unless a claim or dispute places such cost records at issue.This right of audit and inspection shall last for five years after Final Completion or termination,whichever is earlier.Contractor shall maintain,and require that its Subcontractors maintain,a true and correct set of records pertaining to all activities relating to their performance of this Contract and all transactions related thereto for five years following Final Completion or termination, REP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 7 of 14 whichever is earlier.This right of inspection shall not relieve Contractor of its duties and obligations under the Contract Documents.This right of inspection and obligation to maintain records shall be specifically enforceable in a court of law,either independently or in conjunction with enforcement of any other rights in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall insert a provision containing all the requirements of the this Article in all contracts between Contractor and any Subcontractors exceeding $50,000.00,altering the paragraph only as necessary to identify properly the contracting parties. ARTICLE 10 -PROJECT MANAGER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION SC-10.03 Project Representative SC-10.03.A A. SC-10.03.B B. Amend Subparagraph 10.03.A to read as follows: Owner may appoint a Project Representative at the Site to represent and assist Project Manager in observing the progress and quality of the Work.The authority and responsibilities of any such Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions,and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. Add the following new Paragraph immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A: By letter,Owner may designate Project Representatives at the Site to represent or assist Project Manager in observing the progress and quality of the Work.Owner may add or rescind the designation at any time.The designation letter,a copy of which will be provided to the Contractor,will detail the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of the Project Representative. SC-10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work SC-10.07.A Amend Subparagraph 10.07.A to read as follows: Project Manager will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents,and judge the acceptability of the Work,pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations,Change Proposals,and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 15 -PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION;CORRECTION PERIOD SC-15.01 Progress Payments $C 15.01.B.1 SC 15.01.B.3 Amend the first sentence of Subparagraph 15.01.B.1 to read as follows: Monthly as the work proceeds,or at more frequent intervals as determined by the Project Manager,Contractor shall submit to Owner's Finance Department an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Amend Subparagraph 15.01.8.3 to read as follows: The Owner will retain ten percent (10%)of the amount of each approved Application for Payment until completion and final acceptance of the work covered by the agreement, which shall be paid to the Contractor per Paragraph 15.06.At any time after completion RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC”C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 8 of 14 of fifty percent (50%)of the work,the Owner,at its sole discretion,may authorize a reduction in the retainage or the method whereby the retainage is calculated.At any time after completion of the Substantial Completion inspection,the Owner,at its sole discretion,may authorize a further reduction of the retainage. $C 15.01.C.1 Amend Subparagraph 15.01.C.1 to read as follows: Project Manager will,within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment by the Owners Finance Department,including each resubmittal,either make a recommendation of payment to Owner,or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Project Manager's reasons for refusing to recommend payment.In the latter case,Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. $C 15.01.D.1 Amend Subparagraph 15.01.D.1 to read as follows: Thirty days after receipt of the Application,the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs)by Project Manager will become due,and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. SC-15.03 Substantial Completion SC 15.03.B Add the following new Subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1.if some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Project Manager,the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing,including the cost of time,travel and living expenses, shall be paid by Contractor to Owner.If Contractor does not pay,or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed,then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. SC 15.03.C Amend Paragraph 15.03.C to read as follows: If Project Manager determines the Work is substantially complete,Project Manager will deliver a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion.Project Manager shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment.If Project Manager concludes that the Work is not substantially complete,Project Manager will notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete,stating the reasons therefor. SC 15.03.D Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 15.03.D to read as follows: Prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion,Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion,review the builder's risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder's risk coverage,and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. SC-15.06 Final Payment 15.06.A.2 Amend Subparagraph 15.06.A.2 to read as follows: 2.The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a.all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 9 of 14 . b.all technical and service,instruction and procedure manuals relating to the operation and maintenance of all HVAC systems and other mechanical devices and equipment installed in the Project; c.a complete set of final as-built plans and specifications prepared by Contractor for the Project; d.all warranties,guarantees,maintenance contracts,and machinery and equipment warranties received by Owner from the Contractor or any subcontractor thereof,or any supplier,materialmen or manufacturer relating to the Project; e.the originals (if not posted at the Project)of all permits,licenses and other approvals necessary for the occupation,use and operation of the Project, including all final unconditional certificates of occupancy from the Municipality of Anchorage; f.consent of the surety,if any,to final payment; g.satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work,materials,and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects,or will so pass upon final payment; h.a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; i.complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner)of all Lien rights arising out of the Work,and of Liens filed in connection with the Work from such materialmen,laborers,contractors and subcontractors as the Owner may require; j.evidence reasonably satisfactory to Owner that all construction costs have been paid in full including evidence of full payment for any personal property installed on the Land as part of the Project;and k.Contractor-issued "Certificate of Substantial Completion”together with its Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims,(AIA Forms 706 and 706A or its equivalent). 15.06.B.1 Amend the first sentence of Subparagraph 15.06.8.1 to read as follows: If,on the basis of Project Manager's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection,issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion by Owner,and Project Manager's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents and Subparagraph 15.06.A.2, Project Manager is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled,Project Manager will,within 15 business days after receipt of the final Application for Payment,indicate in writing Project Manager's recommendation of final payment. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 10 of 14 ARTICLE 17 -FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES $C-17.02 Add the following new Paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 17.01. SC-17.02.A Arbitration Agreement to Arbitrate:All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be decided by arbitration;provided,however,that Owner shall have the option,in its sole discretion,to pursue any Claim(s)or to defend against any Claim(s)in a court of competent jurisdiction rather than to arbitrate.Contractor shall not have this option. Either party may make a demand for arbitration by filing such demand in writing with the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the ANTHC Procurement Director has either (i)issued a final written decision,or (ii)failed to issue a final written decision within the 40-day period provided in Paragraph 12.01.E.If Owner elects to opt out of arbitration,it shall give written notice to Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the demand for arbitration.lf Owner does not notify Contractor of its election to opt out of arbitration,or if Owner files a demand for arbitration,arbitration then shall be proceed in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the limitations of this Article.This agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. Owner's election to opt out of arbitration shall leave both parties free to pursue the subject Claim at law or equity,subject to the provisions of this Article 17. Exhaustion of Remedies:No demand for arbitration or any other legal process may be made or initiated until the procedures and requirements of Articles 11 and 12 have been exhausted.A party loses the power to file such a demand for arbitration if the demand is not sent within the 60-day time period set forth in Paragraph 17.02.A and the final decision of the ANTHC Procurement Director shall become final and binding. Notice:Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing and sent by certified mail to the other party and to the American Arbitration Association. Non-parties:No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include by consolidation,joinder or in any other manner any other person or entity (including Project Manager,Project Manager's agents,employees or consultants)who is not a party to this contract unless: the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration;and such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question or law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 11 of 14 E.Alaska Revised Uniform Arbitration Act:All disputes subject to resolution under this Article are reviewable pursuant to the Alaska Revised Uniform Arbitration Act,AS 09.43.300,et seq.Any such review shall be brought in the Alaska Superior Court,Third Judicial District,Anchorage,Alaska. F.Arbitrators:The appointment of arbitrators shall be as follows: 1.For Claims less than $1,000,000,there shall be one arbitrator.If the parties do not agree on an arbitrator after review of two lists of arbitrators from the American Arbitration Association (AAA)then the AAA itself,pursuant to its own Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (CIAR),may choose the arbitrator. 2.For Claims of $1,000,000 or more,there shall be a panel of three arbitrators.Both parties shall agree to each arbitrator.If the parties cannot agree on three arbitrators after review of two lists form the American Arbitration Association,then the AAA itself, pursuant to its rules,may choose the remaining member(s). 3.Regardless of the amount of the claim,if the fair market value of equipment,or any other tangible or intangible property (including the value of a business)is in dispute, then both parties shall allow reasonable access to their premises and records for the purpose of viewing and evaluating such property. E.Expenses:The parties agree that each party shall bear its own expenses,including attorney's fees,witness fees,transportation costs,reproduction costs,and other similar expenses related to its prosecution or its own claim or defense. F.Disputes on Timeliness:A dispute on the timeliness of a demand for a final decision of the ANTHC Procurement Director or a demand for arbitration shall be considered in the same manner as all other disputes and shall first be remanded to the Project Manager for a decision.If either party disputes the decision of the Project Manager,that party shall,within the time limits set forth in Article 12 appeal to the ANTHC Procurement Director.If either party disputes the final decision of the ANTHC Procurement Director, that party shall,within the time limits set forth in Article 17,request arbitration on the timeliness issue. G.Form of the Award.The award rendered by the arbitrator(s)shall be consistent with the agreement of the parties,in writing,and include a concise breakdown of the award,and a written explanation of the award specifically citing the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. H.Finality ofAward.The award will be final.Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof,and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This documentis a MODIFIED version of EJCDC*C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is basedin part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.ThoseportionsofthetextthatoriginatedinpublishedEJCDCdocumentsremainsubjecttothecopyright. Page 12 of 14 I.Arbitrators'Fees.The fees and expenses of the arbitrators and any arbitration service shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor unless the award provides otherwise. SC 17.02.B Add the following new paragraph 17.02.B immediately after Paragraph 17.02.A.: 1.Legal proceedings related in any manner to this Contract,and which are not otherwise subject to arbitration hereunder,shall be conducted in federal district court in Alaska if it has jurisdiction over at least one of the asserted claims.All other disputes or claims that are not subject to arbitration hereunder shall be brought in a court of competent jurisdiction in Anchorage,Alaska.The prevailing party shall be entitled to reimbursement of its reasonable costs,expenses,and attorney's fees as provided by applicable law. 2.This Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with federal law.In the absence of applicable federal law,this Contract is governed by and will be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Alaska. 3.Owner is a tribal organization performing functions under a contract with the United States authorized by the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act,25 U.S.C.§§5301 et seq.Owner is deemed to be part of the Public Health Service in the Department of Health and Human Services while carrying out such contract and its employees are deemed employees of the Public Health Service while acting within the scope of their employment in carrying out the contract.Owner is protected from civil liability by various federal laws,including 25 USC §5321(d),25 USC §1680c,section 314 of Public Law 101-512 and the provisions of the Federal Tort Claims Act,28 USC §1346(b)and 28 USC §§2671-2680.Nothing in this is Agreement shall be construed to prejudice Owner in any way or waive any of its rights or privileges pursuant to the foregoing and similar federal laws. 3.Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract to the contrary,ANTHC expressly reserves the right to assert any applicable protections,privileges or immunities to which it may be entitled as a tribal organization,including federal and common law protections and immunity from suit;provided,however,ANTHC hereby expressly waives any sovereign immunity it may enjoy with respect to any and all controversies,claims and/or causes of action whether legal or equitable, arising out of or related to this Contract,except that this waiver does not extend to jury trials or to any civil action or proceeding to the extent such trial,action or proceeding is subject to 25 USC §5321(d),25 USC §1680c,section 314 of Public Law 101-512,the Federal Tort Claims Act,28 USC §1346(b),28 USC §§2671-2680,or similar federal protections. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 13 of 14 4.Contractor hereby waives any and all future claims against ANTHC,its officers, employees,agents,or representatives,arising under this Contract for consequential, punitive,incidental,or special damages of any kind,amount,or nature,including without limitation claims for lost profits,economic loss,or stigma damages. $C-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02.: SC-17.03 Attorneys'Fees:The parties agree that neither party is entitled to recovery of attorneys fees and costs under this Contract unless specifically provided for under the terms ofthis Contract. RFP #ANTHC 18-R-28770 This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC'C-800 (Rev.1),Copyright ©2013 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,American Society of Civil Engineers,and American Council of Engineering Companies,or is based in part on excerpts from EJCOC documents.Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Page 14 of 14 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS #ANTHC 18-R-28770 ATTACHMENT L DIVISION 1 SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 01 10 00 Summary Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 70 00 Execution Requirements This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 10 00 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Scope of Work Location of the Work Contract Work Orders Work by Owner Owner supplied products Contractor's use of the site Work Sequence Specification Conventions Conditions Permits and Licenses 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A.At a minimum,the Item 1 and 2 in the list below will be included in the Base Contract as Delivery Orders No.1 and No.2.Items 3 and 4 are optional Delivery Orders that will be priced in the Contractor's proposal. 1.Housing:Provide renovation of 13 modular barracks located at Joint Base Richardson Elmendorf (JBER),Alaska.Barracks shall be refurbished at JBER,packaged for open ocean transported to Mertarvik,Alaska,and reassembled on site with additional alterations to make complete 4-bedroom dwelling units. a.See attachment P to RFP 18-R-28770 for modular housing Plans, Specifications,and Special Requirements. Power:Provide a modular diesel power generation facility on constructed gravel foundation pad and installation of phase I power distribution system consisting of approximately 1,575 feet of overhead 01 1000-1 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 10 00 power distribution line,18 power poles,13 service drops and all appurtenant equipment. a.See attachment Q to RFP 18-R-28770 for power generation Plans,Specifications,and Special Requirements. Bulk Fuel:Provide a 7 tank (2 owner provided),141,000-gallon bulk fuel facility and appurtenances including truck fill dispenser and fuel transfer piping between this facility,the barge landing,and the power generation facility. a.See attachment R,to RFP 18-R-28770 for bulk fuel facility Plans, Specifications,and Special Requirements. Landfill:Provide a Class HI municipal solid waste landfill (trench and fill type)appurtenances. a.See attachment S to RFP 18-R-28770 for landfill Plans, Specifications,and Special Requirements. B.The following items may be included as additional Delivery Orders over the duration of the contract. 1.Construction of community roads,up to a total of approximately 15,000 LF Construction (expansion)of man-camp facilities for housing of construction personnel during townsite development Construction of a wastewater treatment lagoon,approximately 4,000 LF of buried gravity sewer line,and sewer service lines to public facilities. Construction of a modular water treatment plant Construction of preliminary buried water distribution system to community infrastructure facilities. Construction of indoor sanitation facilities in modular homes Construction of a heavy equipment maintenance shop Construction of interior elements for the new Mertarvik Evacuation Center developed for multipurpose activities (temporary school, pioneer clinic,and other functions as required to support the development of Mertarvik). Construction of expansions to the electrical distribution system from power plant to all homes and community infrastructure. 01 1000-2 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 10. 11. 12. 13. SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 10 00 Construction of a health clinic Construction of additional residential housing Construction of a heat recovery system from power plant to public facilities Operation of Construction Camp Facilities for construction crews including IDIQ contractor personnel and other personnel engaged in Mertarvik development activities (local laborers,rock quarry operators, design and project management professionals,U.S.military,federal and state agency personnel) C.The following construction activities are expected to occur over the term of the contract but will not be included as task orders under this contract. 1.Mertarvik Airport:Airport construction may be funded by FAA with Alaska Department of Transportation management of the construction solicitation.Construction is expected during the 2020 and 2021 construction seasons Community School:School funding may be provided by the State of Alaska with Lower Kuskokwim School District management of a construction solicitation.Construction is expected during the 2022 and 2023 construction seasons. Innovative Readiness Training (IRT):The IRT is a Department of Defense program providing training opportunities for servicemen and women through the implementation of public projects in coordination with local government sponsors.The local sponsor is responsible for providing material and equipment.The IRT program provides labor and supplemental equipment. a.Newtok Village Council is coordinating with DOD to provide construction of designated infrastructure projects at the Mertarvik,to be selected from the list in Article 1.2B above. b.Project selection will be made by September 1,2018. c.Materials procurement and staging and onsite coordination may be tasked to the selected Contractor. 1.3.LOCATION OF THE WORK A.Project Site:The Mertarvik project site is located on Nelson Island 9 river miles upstream of the community of Newtok on the Ninglick River. 01 1000-3 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 10 00 B.Air Services:There is no commercial air service in Mertarvik.Transportation of materials via commercial air freight must be delivered to Newtok and transported by boat to Newtok. 1.Mertarvik Landing Strip:A temporary airstrip has been partially constructed at Mertarvik.The airstrip is 1,500'long and 35'wide. Several chartered small fixed wing aircraft,up to Cessna 207,have landed on the airstrip.It will require additional sloping and surfacing in order to continue to support chartered air service. Helicopter:Charter helicopter service to Mertarvik is available via private operators in Bethel.Previous service has been provided by Yukon Helicopters. C.Barge Services:A functional shallow water barge landing has been constructed in Mertarvik and used for the delivery of materials and equipment for previous construction activities.Barge service in 2017 was provided by Vitus Marine and Alaska Marine Lines. 1.4 CONTRACT DELIVERY ORDERS A.-The following general Delivery Order types may be utilized to accomplish additional work items subsequent to the Base award. 1.Pre-Construction Services:Provide review and value engineering services during development of design documents by others. Design Build:Scope development,design,and construction services to be provided by the Contractor. Construction:Provide work elements delineated in a complete set of plans and specification. Construction Management Services: a.IRT:Site and equipment coordination,procurement,and daily oversight of construction activities undertaken by the DOD's IRT program. b.|Man-camp Operation:Daily operation and maintenance of the Mancamp;services currently provided by others.See Section 01 50 00,Article 1.2 Mancamp and Sheds. B.Delivery Orders may be based on Fixed Fee,Time and Materials,or Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP).In all cases,Delivery Orders will be negotiated based on rates established in the Base contract. 01 1000-4 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC SUMMARY OF WORK June 1,2018 SECTION 01 10 00 C.ANTHC reserves the right to request additional cost detail,such as delineation by CSI specification division,during negotiation of Delivery Orders,including those listed in Paragraph 1.2.A above. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A.Other Contracts:Owner may employ other contractors to complete work in additional and separate contracts. B.Cooperate with workers engaged in concurrent contracts to assure expedient completion of both. C.Existing contracts include the following: 1.Mertarvik Evacuation Center:The 6,000 square foot Mertarvik Evacuation Center in Mertarvik will serve as a multi-purpose facility. Wolverine Supply will install the building shell,heating system,basic electrical system,and lighting by December 2018. 2.Quarry Operations:The Mertarvik Quarry will be operated for NVC by Brice Inc (Brice).Brice will produce aggregate products as needed for active projects. a.Schedule of Operations: 1)August 1,2018 through September 30,2018. 2)May 2019 until project needs met. 3.|Man-camp Operations:To be provided by HC Contractors,Inc.for NVC.Man-camp operations in Mertarvik will continue to be operated by HC Contractor's Inc.through September 30,2018. a.|Usage Rates:Section 01 50 00,Article 1.2B. 1.66 OWNER PROVIDED PRODUCTS A.Items furnished by Owner for Installation by the Contractor: 1.Gravel:Various rock products mined and manufactured at the existing Mertarvik Quarry site. B.Owner's Responsibility: 1.Stockpile specified gravel products at the rock quarry on schedule and in quantities required to perform the work. 01 1000-5 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 C. SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 10 00 Contractor's Responsibility: I. 3. Provide gravel schedule delineating monthly product specifications and quantities to owner. a.Provide within 30 days after contract award and in March of each subsequent construction season. Inspect gravel stockpiles for compliance with project requirements. a.Provide written acceptance that materials comply with specification requirements. b.Immediately notify COR of any non-compliance. Transfer owner furnished products from the quarry to the project site. 1.7}NEWTOK VILLAGE COUNCIL EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES A.Equipment: 1.Newtok Village Council (NVC)owns the following pieces of equipment;available to the Contractor according to the provisions of this section. Mechanic Service Truck Mobile Shop Flatbed Trailer Loader:Doosan DL450 Loader:Doosan DL420 Excavator:Doosan DX490 Excavator:Bobcat E85 Dump Truck:Doosan DA30,Articulating Dump Truck:Doosan DA30,Articulating Track Loader:Bobcat T550 Bulldozer:Komatsu D39 Dozer:Cat D8R Diesel Generator:Doosan G450,365kw (for rock crusher) Mancamp Generator:150kw Welder/Generator:Miller-Bobcat-225 Fuel Tank Wagon:Greer 2,000 gallon (25,000 Ib)POBRrATTremeassEIRT activities will be given priority access to all NVC owned equipment a.|IRT usage to be determined by September 1,2018. When available,Contractor may rent equipment from NVC to supplement Contractor's own equipment fleet. 01 1000-6 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC SUMMARY OF WORK June 1,2018 SECTION 01 10 00 4.|Owner makes no guarantee of the condition,suitability,and availability of NVC equipment. B.Bulk Fuel Storage: 1.|Newtok Village Council and Newtok Native Corporation have the following bulk fuel tanks available for use for construction activities in 2019 in Mertarvik. a.20,000-gallon diesel tank (at barge landing) b 12,000-gallon diesel tank (at barge landing) c.6,000-gallon diesel tank (near MEC) d 5,000-gallon gasoline tank (at barge landing) C.Landfill:Owner will construct a Class III municipal solid waste landfill including construction waste disposal site. 1.Section 01 70 00 -Execution Requirements:Progress and Final Cleaning. 2.|Hazardous Waste:Not accepted at landfill. 3.Tipping Fees:Paid to NVC a.$30 per cubic yard D.Landing Craft:NVC operates a 30-foot landing craft for transportation of freight between Newtok and Mertarvik. 1.Rate:$200 round trip. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF THE SITE A.Construction Operations:Limited to established public rights of way and designated construction sites. 1.|Mark construction site boundaries prior to start of construction in coordination with COR. 2.Do not operate construction machinery outside of established boundaries. 3.Protect native vegetation outside of the construction footprint. 1.9 WORK SEQUENCE A.Project specific work sequence requirements will be established in individual Delivery Orders. 01 1000-7 MERTARVIK INFRATRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC SUMMARY OF WORK June 1,2018 SECTION 01 10 00 1.10 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS A.These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor,unless specifically noted otherwise.The words "shall be”are included by inference where a colon (:)is used within sentences or phrases. 1.11 CONDITIONS D. E. Give all required notices as specified. Comply with codes,ordinances,rules,regulations,orders and other legal requirements of public authorities,which bear on performance of the work. Promptly submit written notice to the Owner of observed variance of construction documents from legal requirements. Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do not employ unfit persons or persons not skilled in assigned tasks. 1.12 PERMITS AND LICENSES A.-The owner will secure and pay for Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation (ADEC)Approval to Construct,Fire Marshal Review,and will obtain all necessary easements. B.The Contractor will prepare,submit and maintain Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans in accordance with plans and specifications. C.The Contractor will obtain other construction permits not noted to be provided by the Owner. D.All!permits relating to construction shall be obtained prior to beginning the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01 1000-8 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 6,2018 PRICE &PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 20 00 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A.Schedule of values. B.Applications for payment. C.Change procedures. D.Unit prices. E.Alternates. F.Failure to complete on time. G.Division 1 Cost Payments SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Submit printed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Continuation Sheet for G702. B.Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form:submit draft to COR for approval. C.Submit Schedule of Values within 20 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. D.Format:As defined in individual project specifications.Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. E.Include in each line item,amount of Allowances specified in Delivery Order.For unit cost Allowances,identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by unit cost to achieve total for each item. F.Include Contractor's overhead and profit as separate line items. G.Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders,with each Application for Payment. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.Submit one electronic of each application on EJCDC C-620 or AIA Forms AIA G702 and G703. 1.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements:Electronic Submittal Service 01 2000-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC PRICE &PAYMENT PROCEDURES June 6,2018 SECTION 01 20 00 B.Electronic media including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard forms;submit draft to COR for approval. Cc,Submit separate application for payment for each Delivery Order. D.List each Change Order as a separate line item;include Change Order number and amount as for an original work item. E.Content and Format:Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. F,Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G.Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. H.Payment Period:Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. I.Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01330. J.Substantiating Data:When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question.Include the following with Application for Payment: 1.Current construction photographs delineating completed work. 2.Construction progress schedules 3.Prevailing wage rate payroll submittals. 1.4 CHANGE PROCEDURES A.Submittals:Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents,and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B.The Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on EJCDC Form C-942 Field Order. C.The Engineer may issue a Notice of Change including a detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications,a change in Contract Time for executing the change.Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within 7 days. D.Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Architect/Engineer,describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work.Include a statement describing reason for the change,and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation.Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. 01 20 00-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC PRICE &PAYMENT PROCEDURES June 6,2018 SECTION 01 20 00 E.Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order:Based on Notice of Change and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Engineer. F.Unit Price Change Order:For contract unit prices and quantities,the Change Order will be executed on fixed unit price basis.For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined,execute Work Directive Change.Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. G.Work Change Directive:COR may issue directive,on EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive signed by Architect/Engineer,instructing Contractor to proceed with change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.Document will describe changes in the Work,and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.Promptly execute change. H.Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. L Change Order Forms:EJCDC C-941 Work Change Order or similar form approved by the COR. J.Execution of Change Orders:COR will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract. K.Correlation Of Contractor Submittals: 1.Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price. 2.Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time,revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change,and resubmit. 3.Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.5 UNIT PRICES A.Authority:Measurement methods are delineated in individual specification sections. B.Measurement methods delineated in individual specification sections complement criteria of this section.In event of conflict,requirements of individual specification section govern. C.Take measurements and compute quantities.COR will verify measurements and quantities. D.Unit Quantities:Quantities and measurements indicated in Delivery Order price proposals are for contract purposes only.Actual quantities provided shall determine payment. 01 20 00 -3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 6,2018 PRICE &PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 20 00 1,When actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated,provide required quantities at unit sum/prices contracted. 2.When actual Work requires 25 percent or greater change in quantity than those quantities indicated,Owner or Contractor may claim for Contract Price adjustment. Payment Includes:Full compensation for required labor,products,tools,equipment,plant and facilities,transportation,services and incidentals;erection,application or installation of item of the Work;overhead and profit. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on basis of actual measurements and quantities accepted by Architect/Engineer multiplied by unit sum/price for Work incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. Measurement Of Quantities: 1.Measurement by Volume:Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. 2.Measurement by Area:Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. 3.Linear Measurement:Measured by linear dimension,at item centerline or mean chord. 4,Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement:Items measured by weight,volume,area,or linear means or combination,as appropriate,as completed item or unit of the Work. 1.6 ALTERNATES A.Alternates quoted in Price Proposals will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option.Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work. Schedule of Alternates: 1.Alternates shall be identified in the plans and specifications developed for individual Delivery Orders. 1.7 FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME A.For each calendar day that the work is not substantially complete after the Delivery Order completion date,the Owner shall deduct from progress payments the full daily charge indicated below corresponding to the original Delivery Order amount. 1.Daily Charge for Liquidated Damages:Per table below. 01 2000-4 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC PRICE &PAYMENT PROCEDURES June 6,2018 SECTION 01 20 00 Original Work Order Amount Daily Charge(from more than)(up to) S -$100,000 |$300 $100,000 |$500,000 |$550 S 500,000 |$1,000,000 |$750 S 1,000,000 |$2,000,000 |$1,000 $2,000,000 |$5,000,000 ;$1,500 $5,000,000 |$10,000,000 |}$25,000 B.For each calendar day that the work is substantially complete but the project is not complete after the expiration of the Delivery Order completion date has passed,the Owner shall deduct 20 percent of the daily charge from progress payments. C.If no money is due the Contractor,the Owner may recover these sums from the Contractor,from the Surety,or from both.These are liquidated damages and not penalties.These charges shall reimburse the Owner for its additional administrative expenses incurred due to the Contractor's failure to complete the work within the time specified. 1.8 DIVISION 1 COST PAYMENTS A.Delivery Order costs associated with Division 1 requirements shall be paid as follows: 1.Monthly Progress Payments:100%of documented actual costs,less retainage. 2.Upon Substantial Completion:Balance of the Delivery Order amount for Division 1 Costs. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 2000-5 This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 30 00 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A.Electronic submittal service. B.Coordination and project conditions. Cc Field engineering. D.Preconstruction meeting. E.Site mobilization meeting. F,Progress meetings. G.Pre-installation meetings. H.Daily Construction Reports I.Special procedures. ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A.All contract administration documents are to be in electronic (PDF,MS Word,or MS Excel)format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives,logs and stores documents,provides electronic stamping and signatures,and notifies addressees via email. 1.Applies to submittals,requests for interpretation (RFIs),progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g.supplementary instructions,change proposals,change orders),applications for payment,daily field reports, inspection reports,meeting minutes,punch lists,change proposals,and other transmitted project documents.Does not apply to samples and color selection charts. 2.Required participants:Contractor,A/E's,and COR. 3.Submit documents in allowable format. 4.Provide email address,internet access,and PDF review and mark-up software with electronic stamp functionality (such as Adobe Acrobat,www.adobe.com,or Bluebeam PDF Revu). 5.Paper and email submittals will be rejected without special approval by COR. 6.Additional submittal procedures:Section 01 13 00. Cost:The cost of the service will be paid by Owner. 01 3000-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.3 1.4 C. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 30 00 Submittal Service:Owner will select and establish the service.Links to be provided upon award. COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and Work of contract to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B.Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with utilities.Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,connecting to,and placing in service,operating equipment. C.Coordinate space requirements,supports,and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.Follow routing shown for pipes,ducts, and conduit,as closely as practicable;place runs parallel with lines of building.Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. D.In finished areas,conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring within construction.Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E.Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. F.After occupancy of premises,coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner and/or occupant's activities. FIELD ENGINEERING A.Employ Land Surveyor registered in State of Alaska and acceptable to Owner. B.Locate and protect survey control and establish reference points required for execution of the work.Promptly notify COR of discrepancies discovered. Control datum for survey is shown on Drawings. D.Verify set-backs and easements;confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. E.Provide field engineering services.Establish elevations,lines,and levels,utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. F.Submit copy of site drawing signed by Land Surveyor certifying elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents. G.Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses. H.Protect survey control points prior to starting site work;preserve permanent reference points during construction. 01 3000-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 30 00 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A.COR will schedule meeting after Notice of Award for each Delivery Order. B.Attendance Required:COR,Architect/Engineer and Contractor and major Subcontractors. C.Agenda: 1.Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2 Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3.Distribution of Contract Documents. 4 Submission of list of Subcontractors,list of products,schedule of values,and progress schedule. 5.Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract,and Architect/Engineer. 6.Procedures and processing of field decisions,submittals,substitutions, applications for payments,proposal request,Change Orders,and Contract closeout procedures. 7.Scheduling. 8.Scheduling activities of Geotechnical Engineer and Surveyor. D.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with digital copies to COR,Architect/Engineer,and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A.COR will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B.Attendance Required:COR,Architect/Engineer,Contractor,Contractor's Superintendent, Contractor's Consultants and major Subcontractors. C.Agenda: 1.Use of premises by Owner,NVC,and Contractor. 2 Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3 Construction facilities and controls provided by NVC. 4.Temporary utilities provided by NVC. 5.Survey layout. 6 Security and housekeeping procedures. 7 Schedules. 8.Application for payment procedures. 9.Procedures for testing. 10.Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11.Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12.Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with digital copies to COR,Architect/Engineer,and those affected by decisions made. 01 30 00 -3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 30 00 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A.Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi- monthly intervals. B.Make arrangements for meetings,prepare agenda with copies for participants,preside at meetings. C.Attendance Required:Job superintendent,major subcontractors and suppliers,COR, Architect/Engineer,as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D.Agenda 1.Review minutes of previous meetings. 2.Review of Work progress. 3.Field observations,problems,and decisions. 4.Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5.Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6.Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7.Maintenance of progress schedule. 8.Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9.Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10.Coordination of projected progress. 11.Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12.Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13.Other business relating to Work. E.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with digital copies to Architect/Engineer,COR,and those affected by decisions made. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.When required in individual specification sections,convene pre-installation meetings at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section. B.Require attendance of parties directly affecting,or affected by,Work of specific section. C.Notify Architect/Engineer and COR four days in advance of meeting date. D.Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1.Review conditions of installation,preparation and installation procedures. 2.Review coordination with related work. E.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with digital copies to Architect/Engineer,COR,and those affected by decisions made. 1.9 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A.Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site and project progress: 01 3000-4 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 30 00 1.Date. 2.High and low temperatures,and general weather conditions. 3.Safety,environmental,or industrial relations incidents. 4,Meetings and significant decisions. 5.Unusual events (submit a separate special report). 6.Stoppages,delays,shortages,and losses.Include comparison between scheduled work activities and actual activities.Explain differences,if any.Note days or periods when no work was in progress and explain the reasons why. 7.Testing and/or inspections performed. 8.Quality Assurance activities. 9.Signature of Contractor's authorized representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL PROCEDURES A.Materials:As specified in product sections;match existing with new products for patching and extending work. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. Cut,move,or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage,including rotted wood,corroded metals,and deteriorated masonry and concrete.Replace materials as specified for finished Work. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new work and finishes. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. END OF SECTION 01 3000-5 This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT ANTHC June 1,2018 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL Ll SECTION INCLUDES A. B C. D m7lame)Submittal procedures. Requests for Interpretation Construction progress schedules. Proposed products list. Product data. Shop drawings. Design data. Test reports. Certificates. Manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer's field reports. Construction photographs. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. B. DIVISION 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or equivalent form approved by the COR. Sequentially number transmittal forms.Mark revised submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix. Identify Project,Contractor,subcontractor and supplier;pertinent drawing and detail number,and specification section number,appropriate to submittal. Apply Contractor's stamp,signed or initialed certifying that review,approval,verification of products required,field dimensions,adjacent construction Work,and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 01 33 00-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.3 E. K, L. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 Schedule submittals to expedite Project and deliver to Architect/Engineer in accordance with Section 01 30 00,Paragraph 1.2,Electronic Document Submittal.Coordinate submission of related items. For each submittal review,allow 15 days from receipt for review and response. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. When revised for resubmission,identify changes made since previous submission. Owner's action will be documented by marking a submittal with a virtual stamp. 1.Actions on items submitted for review a."Approved” b."Approved as Noted,Resubmission not required” 1)Resubmit at Contractor's discretion. c."Revise and Resubmit”. 1)Resubmit prior to purchase,fabrication,delivery,installation. d."Rejected”. 1)Submit item compliant with contract requirements 2.Actions on items submitted for information: a."Received”-received for record only. b."Reviewed”-no further action required by Contractor. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to field personnel.Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFID) A.Submit immediately upon discovery of need for interpretation. 1.Failure to submit in a timely manner is for denial of subsequent claim for additional costs or delays in execution of the work. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. Prepare in a format and with content acceptable to Owner. Incomplete requests will be returned without a response.PwNInclude identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI and sufficient information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1.Discrete and consecutive RFI number,and descriptive subject/title. 2.Issue date and requested reply date. 3.Identify specific Contract Document(s)requiring information/interpretation. 4 Identify pertinent drawing,detail number,and/or specification section number, title,and paragraph(s). 5.Annotations:Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered the request. 0133 00-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 6.Attachments:Sketches,coordination drawings,descriptions,photos,submittals, and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request. Review Time:5 calendar days from receipt.RFIs received after 3:00 PM will be considered received on the following regular working day. 1,May be shortened or lengthened subject to mutual agreement 2.Request for additional information will be considered a response.Submit amended RFI,identified with a revision suffix added to original number. 3.Submit amended RFI within 7 calendar days, RFI responses do not constitute a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project.Promptly provide notice in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract if RFI response is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A.Submit preliminary outline Schedules within 20 days of date established in Notice to Proceed for coordination with Owner's requirements.After review,submit detailed schedules within 15 days modified to accommodate revisions recommended by Owner or Architect/Engineer. Submit revised Progress Schedules at minimum with each Application for Payment. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file,subcontractors,suppliers,and other concerned parties. Instruct recipients to promptly report,in writing,problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. Submit computer generated chart with separate line for each major portion of Work or operation,identifying first work day of each item. Show complete sequence of construction by activity,identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.Indicate early and late start,early and late finish, total and free float,and duration,actual start and finish,and percentage completion of each activity. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings,product data,and samples,and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/Engineer. Revisions to Schedules: 1,Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal,and projected completion date of each activity. 2.Identify activities modified since previous submittal,major changes in scope,and other identifiable changes. 3.Prepare narrative report to define problem areas,anticipated delays,and impact on Schedule.Report corrective action taken,or proposed,and its effect. 01 3300-3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES June 1,2018 SECTION 01 33 00 1.5 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A.Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed,submit list of major products proposed for use,with name of manufacturer,trade name,and model number of each product. B.For products specified only by reference standards,give manufacturer,trade name,model or catalog designation,and reference standards. 1.6 PRODUCT DATA A.Product Data:Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B.Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options,and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project. Cc,Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics,utility connection requirements,and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D.After review,produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A.Shop Drawings:Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B.Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics,utility connection requirements,and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C.Submit number of opaque reproductions Contractor requires,plus two copies Architect/Engineer will retain. D.After review,produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00. 1.8 DESIGN DATA A.Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge and/or for Owner. B.Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.9 TEST REPORTS A.Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge or for Owner. 0133 00-4 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 B. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.10 CERTIFICATES A.When specified in individual specification sections,submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor,or Contractor to Architect/Engineer,in quantities specified for Product Data. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.Submit supporting reference data,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A.When specified in individual specification sections,submit printed instructions for delivery,storage,assembly,installation,[start-up,]adjusting,and finishing,to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. Indicate special procedures,perimeter conditions requiring special attention,and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. B. C. Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. Submit report within 30days of observation to Architect/Engineer for information. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.13.CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. B C. D Provide photographs of construction throughout progress of Work. Submit photographs weekly. Photographs:Digital color photographs,minimum size 3 megapixels. Take site photographs from differing directions indicating relative progress of the Work on a daily basis. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows: Buried work elements prior to backfill Exposed work elements Interior views:minimum 10 each Exterior views:minimum 10 eachWN -0133 00-5 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES June 1,2018 SECTION O01 33 00 F,Use descriptive names to identify photos including work element and location and/or other identifying information. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 33 00-6 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 40 00 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Quality control and control of installation. B.Tolerances C.References D.Testing and inspection services. E.Manufacturers'field services. F.Examination. G.Preparation. H.General Installation Requirements I.Defect Assessments 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A.Monitor quality control over suppliers,manufacturers,products,services,site conditions,and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B.Comply with manufacturers'instructions,including each step in sequence. C.When manufacturers'instructions conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D.Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E.Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F.Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G.Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration,physical distortion,or disfigurement. 01 40 00-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00 1.3 TOLERANCES A. C. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances.When manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions;position before securing products in place. 1.4 REFERENCES A.For products or workmanship specified by association,trade,or other consensus standards,comply with requirements of standard,except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids,except where specific date is established by code. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. Neither contractual relationships,duties,nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A.Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to Owner to perform specified testing. 1.Prior to start of Work,submit testing laboratory name,address,and telephone number,and names of full time registered Professionals and responsible officer. 2.Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection,with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection. The independent firm will perform tests,inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Owner and/or Authority having jurisdiction. 1.Laboratory:Authorized to operate in State of Alaska. 2.Laboratory Staff:Maintain full time registered Professional on staff to review services. 3.Testing Equipment:Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 01 4000-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 40 00 C.Testing,inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site.Perform off-site testing as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner. D.Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect/Engineer and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. E.Cooperate with independent firm;furnish samples of materials,design mix,equipment, tools,storage,safe access,and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1.Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 7-days prior to expected time for operations requiring both onsite and offsite testing services. 2.Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F,Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G.Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect/Engineer.Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price. H.Agency Responsibilities: 1.Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2.Provide qualified personnel at site.Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3.Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4.Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5.Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6.Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer. 7.Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. I.Agency Reports:After each test,promptly submit two copies of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor.When requested by Architect/Engineer,provide interpretation of test results.Include the following: Date issued. Project title and number. Name of inspector. Date and time of sampling or inspection. Identification of product and specifications section. Location in Project. Type of inspection or test. Date of test. Results of tests. 0.Conformance with Contract Documents.aePNAMEYWNSD01 40 00 -3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 40 00 J.Limits On Testing Authority: 1.Agency or laboratory may not release,revoke,alter,or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2.Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3.Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4.Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.6 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES A.When specified in individual specification sections,require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up,and testing of equipment as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. B.Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. C.Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. D.Refer to Section 01330 -Submittal Procedures:Manufacturer's Filed Reports article. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B.Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C.Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B.Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C.Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer,sealer,or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 01 4000-4 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Install products as specified in individual sections,and as shown on the Drawings,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level,unless otherwise indicated. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level,neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines,unless otherwise indicated. Make consistent texture on surfaces,with seamless transitions,unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. B. Replace the Work,or portions of the Work,not conforming to specified requirements. If,in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer,it is not practical to remove and replace the Work,the Architect/Engineer will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment. The defective Work may remain,but unit sum/price will be reduced 50%at discretion of Architect/Engineer. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect/Engineer,and unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect/Engineer. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction. Authority of Architect/Engineer to assess defects and identify payment adjustments is final. Non-Payment for Rejected Products:Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.MwPYWN>Loading,hauling,and disposing of rejected products. END OF SECTION 01 40 00-5 This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Ll SECTION INCLUDES A. D. Construction Facilities: 1. 2. Man-camp and sheds. Field Offices Temporary Utilities:PADMAEYWNTElectricity Lighting Heating Ventilation Telephone Internet Water Sanitation Temporary Controls: 1. 2. 3. 4 5 6. 7. 8 so$Vehicular Access Parking Progress Cleaning Project Identification Traffic Regulation Barriers Enclosures and Fencing. Security. Water Control. Dust control. Erosion and sediment control. Pollution control. Protection of Existing Vegetation. Removal of utilities,facilities,and controls. 1.2 MANCAMP AND SHEDS A.Mancamp:Newtok Village Council (NVC)owns a facility in Mertarvik with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. 12 two-bedroom sleeping quarters heated by baseboard electric heaters and accessed by a raised boardwalk. Separate 8-man bunkhouse heated by drip oil stove. Mudroom /drying facility in uninsulated shed with heater. Kitchen,pantry,and mess hall facility with capacity to simultaneously serve about 24 workers. A laundry/showering facility with 4 showers,4 washers,and 4 dryers. 01 50 00-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 6.Water Service:Consisting of 300-foot water line from treatment skid with 200 gallons of storage sourced by a well. 7.Wastewater Service:provided by a septic tank and drainfield system with 1,500- gallon septic tank. 8.Power:150 kW Perkins diesel generator. Mancamp Rates:$208/night per occupant. 1.Includes lodging,water,heating,electrical,telecommunications,and 3 meals/day. a.Telecommunication specs:As described in Articles 1.8 and 1.9 Mancamp As-built Drawings:Attachment O to the RFP Storage Sheds: 1.Provide portable storage facilities as required to protect materials,tools,and equipment. 1.3 FIELD OFFICES Provide temporary field office.Coordinate placement in Mertarvik with COR. Office:Weather tight,with lighting,electrical outlets,heating equipment,and equipped with sturdy furniture,drawing display table,computer and internet access. Provide space for project meetings,with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. Locate temporary offices and sheds minimum distance of 50 feet from existing structures. Construction:Portable or mobile buildings,or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground,securely fixed to foundations with steps and landings at entrance doors. 1.Construction:Structurally sound,secure,weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces.Maintain during progress of Work;remove when no longer needed. 2.Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors,Walls,and Ceilings:Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. 3.Exterior Materials:Weather resistant. 4.Interior Materials in Offices:Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings,pre- finished or painted;resilient floors and bases. Lighting for Offices:Exterior lighting at entrance doors. Fire Extinguishers:Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area. 7.Interior Materials in Storage Sheds:As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.nMEnvironmental Control: 1.Heating,Cooling,and Ventilating for Offices:Provide equipment as required to maintain comfortable conditions. 01 50 00-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 50 00 2.Storage Spaces:Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents;lighting for maintenance and inspection of products. G.Storage Areas And Sheds:Size to storage requirements for products of individual 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Sections,allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 01600. H.Preparation:Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away from buildings. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A.Section 01 10 00 Paragraph 1.6:Owner provided generators. B.There is currently no permanent power generation facility in Mertarvik. C.Provide or maintain temporary portable power for construction operations. TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A.Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations as needed. TEMPORARY HEATING A.Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B.Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress,unless indicated otherwise in product sections. TEMPORARY VENTILATION A.Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials,to dissipate humidity,and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes,vapors,or gases. B.Provide ventilation equipment as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. TELEPHONE SERVICE A.Provide,maintain,and pay for telephone service to field office at time of mobilization. 1.Service Provider:GCI. 2.Service Specification:GSM 3G data cell service. 3.Reliability:Spotty throughout the site;reliable at existing man camp. 01.50 00-3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION | ANTHC June 1,2018 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 1.9 INERNET SERVICE A.Provide,maintain and pay for email and internet service to field office.Provide at time of project mobilization. 1.Service Provider:Alaska Satellite Internet 2.Specifications:512/1554 download speeds with 4420 MB cap. 3.Rates:$4,500 install charge plus $200/week a.Confirm costs with service provider 1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A.Source: 1,MEC Well:Drilled and cased well. a.Capacity:estimated 12-14 gpm. b.Usage:Pump installed with dedicated service to mancamp. C.Location:Adjacent to MEC. d.Availability:After satisfaction of mancamp water needs. e.Well data:Attachment U. 2.West Well:Drilled and cased well. a.Capacity:estimated 15 gpm. b Usage:currently unused;no pump installed. c Location:Attachment T,Community Layout Plan d Availability:Unencumbered. e Well data:Attachment U. Note:A water treatment system sufficient to meet DEC Class C Public water system requirements will be needed to support expansion of mancamp capacity beyond 24 persons.An expansion to the existing water treatment and storage system is expected in _earlier 2019 in anticipation of larger construction crew sizes. 1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Mancamp is served by septic tank and drainfield system. 1.Capacity:24 workers. 2.Summertime operation only. Starter lagoon and force main is proposed for 2019 construction to accommodate expanded mancamp capacity and rear round occupancy. 1.12 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. B. Use existing on-site roads for construction traffic. Construct temporary access roads as needed to facilitate construction activity. l.Do not create any roads or walking trails across any area that has not been designated as a future road or trail via established Right of Way. 01°50 00-4 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 1.13.PARKING A. B. Use existing construction lay-down areas for vehicle parking. If space is not adequate,create additional parking 1.Must be located within footprint of proposed construction activities. 2.Locate only as approved by COR. Maintenance: 1.Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, products,mud,snow,and ice. Site Repair: 1,Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion. 2.Remove underground work and compacted materials to depth of 2 feet;fill and grade site as specified. 3.Repair existing facilities damaged by use,to original condition. 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. D. Maintain areas free of waste materials,debris,and rubbish.Maintain site in clean and orderly condition. Remove debris and rubbish from trenches and excavations and other closed or remote spaces,prior to backfilling or enclosing spaces. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing,and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. Collect and remove waste materials,debris,and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site. 1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A.Project Identification Sign: 1.One painted sign,32 square-foot area,bottom 6 feet above ground. 2.Content: a.Project number,title,logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. b.Names and titles of authorities. Cc.Names and titles of Architect/Engineer and Consultants. d.Name of Prime Contractor and major Subcontractors. G3.raphic Design,Colors,Style of Lettering:Designated by Architect/Engineer. Design sign and structure to withstand 60 miles/hr wind velocity. Sign Painter:Experienced as professional sign painter for minimum three years. 01 50 00-5 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION I ANTHC TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 50 00 D.Finishes,Painting:Adequate to withstand weathering,fading,and chipping for duration of construction. E.Show content,layout,lettering,color,and grades of members. F.Sign Materials: 1.Structure and Framing:New wood,structurally adequate. 2.Sign Surfaces:Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay,minimum 3/4 inches thick,standard large sizes to minimize joints. 3.Rough Hardware:Galvanized. 4.Paint and Primers:Exterior quality,two coats;sign background of color as approved by Owner. 5.Lettering:Exterior quality paint,contrasting colors as approved by Owner. G.Installation: 1.Install project identification sign within 15 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. 2.Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site. 3 Erect supports and framing on secure foundation,rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. 4.Install sign surface plumb and level,with butt joints.Anchor securely. 5 Paint exposed surfaces of sign,supports,and framing. H.Maintenance:Maintain signs and supports clean,repair deterioration and damage. I.Removal:Remove signs,framing,supports,and foundations at completion of Project and restore area. 1.16 TRAFFIC REGULATION A.Coordinate traffic control measures with COR. B.Traffic Plan:Develop traffic control plan to ensure safe passage of pedestrians and vehicles in and around the work area. L.Develop haul routes to avoid occupied homes;currently 3 seasonally occupied homes.Confine construction traffic to designated routes. 2.Conduct work to interfere as little as possible with public access. 3.Establish operating procedures and speed limits for all construction vehicles. 4.Employ signage as required. 5.Deploy trained and equipped flaggers as needed to minimize when construction operations conflict with public. 6.Revise as needed with additional controls to minimize interference with public traffic. Cc.Removal: 1.Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. 2.Repair damage caused by installation. 3.Remove post settings to depth of 2 feet. 01 50 00-6 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 50 00 1.17 BARRIERS A.Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B.Provide barricades required by authorities having jurisdiction for public rights-of-way. C.Protect non-owned vehicular traffic,stored materials,site,and structures from damage. 1.18 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A.Construction:Contractor's option. B.Provide 6 feet high fence around construction site;equip with vehicular gates with locks. 1.19 SECURITY A.Security Program: I.Protect Work from theft,vandalism,and unauthorized entry. 2.Initiate program at project mobilization. 3.Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance precludes need for Contractor security. B.Entry Control: 1.Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site. 2.Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. C.Restrictions: 1.Do not allow cameras on site or photographs taken except by written approval of Owner. 2.Do no work on days indicated in Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.20 WATER CONTROL A.Grade site to drain.Maintain excavations free of water.Provide,operate,and maintain pumping equipment. B.Protect site from puddling or running water.Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.21.DUST CONTROL A.Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B.Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 01 50 00-7 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25 TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A.Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas.Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B.Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. C.Provide temporary measures including berms,dikes,and drains,and other devices to prevent water flow. D.Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. E.Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation;promptly apply corrective measures. F,Storm Water Pollutions Prevention Plan (SWPP):Provide in accordance with the Alaska Pollution Discharge Elimination System (APDES)Construction General Permit Requirements and the Alaska Storm Water Guide,as required by regulation or Delivery Order Specifications and Special Requirements. POLLUTION CONTROL A.Provide methods,means,and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water,and atmosphere from discharge of noxious,toxic substances,and pollutants produced by construction operations. B.Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION D. Protect existing vegetation from damage from construction activities. Restrict construction activities to designated storage areas and to minimum required footprint necessary for execution of work. Movement of equipment across existing vegetation (tundra)or parking on existing vegetation outside of designated area is prohibited. Restore damaged vegetation to preconstruction condition. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES,FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A, B. Remove temporary utilities,equipment,facilities,materials,prior to final inspection. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet.Grade site as indicated on Drawings. 01 50 00-8 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC TEMPORARY FACILITIES &CONTROLS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 50 00 C.Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D.Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 50 00-9 This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 60 00 SECTION 0 16 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Products. B Product delivery requirements. C.Product storage and handling requirements. D Product options. E.Product substitution procedures. 1.2 PRODUCTS A.Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B.Do not use products containing lead,cadmium,or asbestos. C.Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use.Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. D.Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises,except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents. E.Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being replaced. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A.Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage;for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B.Protect products for exposure to elements associated with open overseas shipment. C.If special precautions are required,attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. Dz Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. E.Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 01 6000-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 F. G. H. I. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 60 00 Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,and products are undamaged. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,or damage. Arrange for the temporary storage of organic packing materials,such as cardboard and wood pallets,prior to final disposal in the Class ITI Municipal Solid Waste Landfill,upon completion of construction of the landfill. Arrange for the temporary storage and subsequent backhaul of Styrofoam and plastic packing materials,and any hazardous waste materials for proper disposal in a Class I landfill. 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A.Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,precipitation,humidity,temperature,sunlight and ultraviolet light,dirt, dust,and other contaminants. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate controlled,enclosures in an environment favorable to product. For exterior storage of fabricated products,place on sloped supports above ground. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering.Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area.Prevent mixing with foreign matter. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,or damage. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection.Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 01 6000-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 60 00 1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A.Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only:Any product meeting those standards or description. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers:Products of one of manufacturers named and meeting specifications,no options or substitutions allowed. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for Substitutions:Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. PART 2 PRODUCTS Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. A request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1.Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product. 2.Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product. 3.Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4.Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5.Will reimburse for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities having jurisdiction. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals,without separate written request,or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents. Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 6000-3 This Page Intentionally Blank MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 70 00 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Closeout procedures. B.Progress Cleaning. C.Final Cleaning. D.Starting of systems. E.Demonstration and instructions. F.Protecting installed construction. G.Project record documents. H Operation and maintenance data. 1.Manual for equipment and systems. J.Spare parts and maintenance products. K.Product warranties and product bonds. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,Work has been inspected,and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. B.Provide close-out submittals to COR as required by Delivery Order Specifications or Special Requirements or as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C.Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,previous payments,and sum remaining due. 1.3 PROGRESS CLEANING A.Maintain areas free of waste materials,debris,and rubbish.Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. 0170 00-1 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 70 00 B.Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases,plenums,attics,crawl spaces,and other closed or remote spaces,prior to enclosing the space. C.Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D.Collect and remove waste materials,debris,and trash/rubbish from work site periodically;establish single temporary off-site collection area,until completion of Class III landfill.Provide final disposal in the landfill.Organic wastes may be burned with the approval of the COR and the authority having jurisdiction. 1.Landfill Tipping Fee:Section 01 10 00 -Owner Provided Equipment and Facilities. E.Store hazardous waste in a Connex or similar secure container. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A.Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B.Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C.Clean interior and exterior glass,surfaces exposed to view;remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances,polish transparent and glossy surfaces, D.Remove all labels that are not permanent.Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E.Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F,Clean site;sweep paved areas,rake clean landscaped surfaces. G.Delivery surplus material to a location specified by the Owner. H.Remove waste,trash/rubbish from the work area and dispose in landfill along with other waste temporarily stored during the project.Organic wastes may be burned with the approval of the COR and the authority having jurisdiction. 1.Landfill Tipping Fee:Section 01 10 00 -Owner Provided Equipment and Facilities. I.At the completion of the project,provide for backhaul of all hazardous waste from community and disposal at a facility certified to accept hazardous waste. J.Unless otherwise specified by the Owner,remove temporary construction facilities from site. 1.5 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A.Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. 01 70 00-2 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.6 1.7 B. C. H. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 70 00 Notify Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation,belt tension,control sequence,and for conditions which may cause damage. Verify tests,meter readings,and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. When specified in individual specification Sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check,and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A.Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A.Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products.Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs,sills,and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors,stairs,and other surfaces from traffic,dirt,wear,damage,or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces.If traffic or activity is necessary,obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed;reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 01 7000-3 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC June 1,2018 1.8 1.9 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 70 00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.ma9foG. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: Drawings. Specifications, Addenda. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. Reviewed Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly,installation,and adjusting.NMPWN>Ensure entries are complete and accurate,enabling future reference by Owner. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Record information concurrent with construction progress,not less than weekly. Specifications:Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed,including the following: 1.Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2.Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3.Changes made by Addenda and modifications. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings:Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1.Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish [first][main]floor datum. 2.Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3.Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4.Field changes of dimension and detail. 5 Details not on original Contract drawings. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4)text pages,binders with durable plastic covers. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",title of project. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers,logically organized as described below;with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. Drawings:Provide with reinforced punched binder tab.Bind in with text;fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 01 7000-4 aeMERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 70 00 E.Contents:Prepare Table of Contents for each volume,with each product or system description identified,typed on white paper,in three parts as follows: l.Part 1:Directory,listing names,addresses,and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer,Contractor,Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. 2.Part 2:Operation and maintenance instructions,arranged by system.For each 1.10 category,identify names,addresses,and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.Identify the following: a.Significant design criteria. b.List of equipment. c.Parts list for each component. d.Operating instructions. e.Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f.Maintenance instructions for [special]finishes,including recommended cleaning methods and materials,and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3.Part 3:Project documents and certificates,including the following: a.Shop drawings and product data. b.Certificates. c.Photocopies of warranties and bonds. MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A.Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work.Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B.Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection.Draft copy be reviewed and returned after final inspection,with Architect/Engineer comments.Revise content of document sets as required prior to final submission. Cc,Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection.Submit one digital copy of the manual in PDF format. D.Each Item of Equipment and Each System:Include description of unit or system,and component parts.Identify function,normal operating characteristics,and limiting conditions.Include performance curves,with engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. E.Panelboard Circuit Directories:Provide electrical service characteristics,controls,and communications. F.Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. G.Operating Procedures:Include start-up,break-in,and routine normal operating instructions and sequences.Include regulation,control,stopping,shut-down,and emergency instructions. 01 7000-5 MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 70 00 H.Maintenance Requirements:Include routine procedures and guide for preventative 1.12 maintenance and troubleshooting;disassembly,repair,and reassembly instructions;and alignment,adjusting,balancing,and checking instructions. I.Include servicing and lubrication schedule,and list of lubricants required. J.Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. K.Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. L.Include original manufacturer's parts list,illustrations,assembly drawings,and diagrams required for maintenance. M.Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. N.Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts,current prices,and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. O.Additional Requirements:As specified in individual product specification sections. P.Include listing in Table of Contents for design data,with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A.Furnish spare parts,maintenance,and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B.Deliver to project site place in location as directed by Owner;obtain receipt prior to final payment. PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A.Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers,and manufacturers,within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B.Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers,and manufacturers. C.Verify documents are in proper form,contain full information,and are notarized. D.Co-execute submittals when required. E.Submit prior to final Application for Payment. F,Time Of Submittals: 01 7000-6 Va MERTARVIK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT DIVISION 1 ANTHC EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS June 1,2018 SECTION 01 70 00 1.For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission,submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2.Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion,prior to final Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 7000-7 ATTACHMENT Q ANTHC RFP No.18-R-28770 (updates to Specifications will be provided in Amendment 002) Delivery Order Number 2 Phase I Power Supply SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 1 June 2018 1.1 DELIVERY ORDER MILESTONES A.Anticipated Award:+5July 2618 To Be Determined B.Substantial Completion:1 August 2019 C.Final Completion:1 October 2019 1.2 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A.In accordance with Section 01 20 00,Article 1.7. 1.3 BONDING A.Required in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Base Proposal -Mertarvik Power System:All items below shall be included in the base proposal and provided in accordance with the plans. 1.Structural gravel foundation pad,insulated. Modular diesel power generation facility with 3 generators,switch gear,and appurtenances. 3.10,000-gallon double walled storage tank. 4.Site grading,erosion control,and fencing. 5.Phase 1 power distribution system with 18 poles and approximately 1,575 feet of overhead power distribution line. 6.13 service connections. 1.5 ADDENDA A.Revisions to the plans,specifications,and special requirements for this delivery order will be issued prior to the solicitation due date. 1.6 COMMISSIONING A.Location of Power Module Commissioning:Anchorage Alaska,regardless of the manufacturing location. End of Special Requirements Page 1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 02 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska PART 1 GENERAL Subsurface Conditions SECTION 02 20 00 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. Section 00 80 00 --Supplementary Conditions Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving 1.2 SOIL REPORTS A.General: 1.Any data on soil and/or subsurface conditions shown in the Contract Drawings or Specifications is not to be taken as a representation of actual conditions,but is based on limited information acquired and is at best only an opinion;consequently,such data cannot be considered precise or complete. 2.The information contained in the soils report may not be representative of the actual soil conditions at the time or location of the Contractor's work, and the Contractor is solely responsible for costs associated with interpretations made from the information and there is no guarantee as to its completeness,accuracy,or precision. Soils Report: l.A copy of Golder Associates'soils investigation memorandum for the Project titled "Revised Geotechnical Recommendations for the Proposed Power Plant in Mertarvik,Alaska”,dated February 1,2018,is provided in Appendix A.This memorandum is for general informational purposes only. Additional Investigation: 1.Contractor is encouraged to visit the site and acquaint himself with site conditions before submitting a Bid,and the submission of a Bid shall be prima facie evidence that he has done so. Prior to bidding,Contractor may make his own sub-surface investigations, as approved by the Project Manager and the Authority,to satisfy himself with site and subsurface conditions. 02 20 00 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 02 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Subsurface Conditions 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.The Contractor shall make no deviations from the Contract Documents without Specific written approval from the Authority. B.The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approval from responsible agency or property owner before performing any exploratory excavations. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 02 20 00 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska PART 1 GENERAL Cast-In-Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. Cast-in-place concrete requirements. Reinforcing steel bars,wire fabric,and accessories for cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. 1.3 REFERENCES A.zorprqam™moACI 301 ACI 302 ACI 304 ACI 305 ACI 306R ACI 308 ACE 315 ACI 318 Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing Structural Concrete for Buildings. Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete. Hot Weather Concreting. Cold Weather Concreting. Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures,and as modified by Interim Reports. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ASTM A182.Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A775 _Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 03 30 00 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete N.ASTM ©94__Ready Mixed Concrete. O.ASTM C143.Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. P.ASTM C150.Portland Cement. Q.ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. R.ASTM C260 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. S.ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete T.ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. U.ASTM D1850 Concrete Joint Sealer,Cold-Application Type. V.ASTM D4397 Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,Industrial,and Agricultural Applications. W.CRSI 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. X.CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports,Specifications, and Nomenclature. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data 1.Air-entraining admixture 2.Water reducing admixture B.Shop Drawings:Submit detailed drawings indicating bar sizes,spacing, location,and quantities of reinforcing steel,bending and cutting schedules,and supporting and spacing devices. C.Miscellaneous 1.Mix design:Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete for review prior to commencement of Work,including delivery of concrete components.The mix design shall be newly prepared for the specific components intended for use in the project. 2.Identify individual(s)responsible for installation of concrete flatwork. The responsible individual(s)shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years' experience and demonstrate a minimum of 10 similar flatwork projects. 03 30 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.Manufacturer's installation instructions:Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent work for sealer-hardener and joint sealer. 4,Submit results of cylinder breaks,entrained air test,and slump tests. 5.Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 6.Welding procedure where required for grounding purposes. 7.Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63 and 65;ACI 301,304,315,and 318; and ASTM A184. B.Maintain one copy of each document on site. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. D.Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.6 COORDINATION A.Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. B.Coordinate the placement of threaded rods with tank and module skids. C.Verify grounding requirements are in conformance with Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Portland Cement:ASTM C150,Type I,II,or III. B.Coarse Aggregate:ASTM C33,Size 67. C.Intermediate Aggregate ASTM C33,Grade 8. D.Fine Aggregate:ASTM C33,Concrete Sand. E.Mixing Water:Fresh,clean,and potable. 03 30 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete F,Air-Entraining Admixture:ASTM C260,MB AE-90 or approved equal. G.Chemical Admixture:ASTM C494,Type A,water reducing. H.Joint Filler:ASTM D1751,1/2-inch thick,unless otherwise indicated. I.Joint Sealant:ASTM D1850,for horizontal joints,inside buildings. J.Non-Shrink Grout:Non shrink type,pre mixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate,cement,water reducing and plasticizing additives,capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. K.Cement Grout:Consisting of cement,fine aggregate,and water. L.Reinforcing Steel:Install ASTM A-615 grade 40 or 60 reinforcing bars epoxy 2.2 coated in accordance with ASTM A-775;to be installed in accordance with ACI 315,size and quantity as indicated.Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304. MIX DESIGN -CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE A.The Contractor shall furnish all aggregate for cast-in-place concrete and a material sample shall be submitted to ensure compliance with the specifications. The design of the concrete mixes using the materials specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor as in accordance with ASTM requirements. The concrete shall be Type C and have the following characteristics: 1.Compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 3,500 psi. 2.The strength of the concrete proposed for use shall be established by testing prior to beginning concreting operation.A test consists of the average of three cylinders made and cured in accordance with ASTM C192 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. 3.Slump shall not be more than 4 inches for vibrated concrete tested in accordance with ASTM C143. 4.Minimum cement factor shall be 5.5 bags per cubic yard. 5.Air-entrainment is required for all concrete and shall be 6 percent +/-1- 1/2 percent. 03 30 00 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete 6.Maximum water-to-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45,consistent with ACI recommendations for minimum shrink concrete. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT A.Reinforcing Steel:Install ASTM A-615 grade 40 or 60 reinforcing bars epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A-775;to be installed in accordance with ACI 315,size and quantity as indicated.Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304. B.Welded Steel Wire Fabric:ASTM A185 Plain Type in flat sheets;plain finish. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Tie Wire:Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B.Chairs,Bolsters,Bar Supports,and Spacers:Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. 2.5 FABRICATION A.Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice, ACI 318,and ASTM A184. B.Weld reinforcement in accordance with UBC Standard 19-1 and ANSI/AWS D1.4-92. C.Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings,at point of minimum stress.Review location of splices.Minimum lap shall be 36 bar diameters, 24”minimum. D.Cold bending shall be in accordance with IBC and ACI recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. 03 30 00 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.2 3.3 3.4 B.Verify that anchors,bar chairs,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed,and positioned securely. PREPARATION A.Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. MIXING A.Materials shall be stored,batched,and mixed as specified in ASTM C94. 1.Job-Mixed:Mix concrete at the job site in a batch mixer in the manner specified for stationary mixers in ASTM C94. 2.Hand-Mixed:Hand-mixed concrete will be permitted only when such use is approved by Engineer,but in no case in amounts exceeding one sack of cement per batch.Proportions for concrete shall be one part cement to five parts aggregate.Accomplish mixing in a manner to obtain required consistency and strength. PLACING CONCRETE A.Contractor shall field verify compaction of structural fill under foundation prior to placing concrete foundations. B.Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301,ACI 304,and ACI 318. C.Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. D.Ensure reinforcement,inserts,embedded parts,and other accessories are not disturbed during concrete placement. E.Composite slab,provide closures necessary to contain the concrete during the pour. F.Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction or indicated contraction joints. G.Do not interrupt successive placement;do not permit cold joints to occur within the construction joints. 03 30 00-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 3.5 3.6 3.7 Cast-In-Place Concrete H.Screed floor slabs maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4-inch in 10 feet.Slope floor as shown on the drawings. PLACING REINFORCEMENT A.Provide contraction joints,either formed or saw cut to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished.Sawed joints shall be completed within 4 to 12 hours after concrete placement.Protect joints from intrusion of foreign matter. B.Place,support and secure reinforcement against displacement.Do not deviate from required position. C.Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. D.Accommodate placement of formed openings. E.Conform to applicable code and details on Drawings for concrete cover over reinforcement. CONCRETE FINISHING A.Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth trowel finish. B.Finish concrete landing surfaces with a non-slip broomed finish. C.Edge Finishing:Before final finishing is completed and before the concrete has taken its initial set,all edges in contact with the forms shall be tooled with an edger having three-eighth (3/8)inch radius. CURING AND PROTECTION A.Immediately after placement,protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures in accordance with ACI 305 and ACI 306, and mechanical injury.Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be objectionable,on any surface to be painted,where coverings are to be bonded to the concrete,or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded. B.Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement,hardening of concrete and minimizing of shrinking cracks. 03 30 00 -7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.8 3.9 C.Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.Begin curing immediately following form removal. D.Impervious Sheeting:Except during cold weather concreting,wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period.Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum.Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure edges. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301. B.Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C.Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. D.Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cubic yards of concrete placed on each day. E.One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting as defined by ACI 305,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. F.One test cylinder shall be tested for compressive strength at 7 days and two cylinders shall be tested for compressive strength at 28 days.If an additional cylinder was cast during cold weather concreting,it shall be tested for compressive strength at 28 days. G.One slump test and entrained air test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. PATCHING A.Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. B.Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 03 30 00-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 03 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A.Defective Concrete:Concrete not conforming to required lines,details, dimensions,tolerances or specified requirements. B.Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C.Contractor shall repair or replace defective concrete as directed at no additional cost to the Owner. D.Do not patch,fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION 03 30 00-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A.Structural steel framing members and support members. B.Plates and fabricated connections. WORK INCLUDED A.This section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work,as shown on Contract Drawings including schedules,notes,and details showing size and location of members,typical connections,and types of steel required. 1.Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)"Code of Standard Practice”and as otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 2.This section applies,but is not limited to,stairways,module framing,and other miscellaneous steel fabrications. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications. B.Section 09 96 00 -High Performance Coatings. C.Section 09 98 00 -Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AISC (MAN)-Steel Construction Manual;American Institute of Steel Construction,Inc. B.AISC $303 -Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction,Inc. C.ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 05 1200-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing 1.5 D.ASTM A53/A53M -Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot- Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless. E.ASTM A108 -Standard Specification for Steel Bar,Carbon and Alloy,Cold Finished. F.ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. G.ASTM A325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. H.ASTM A325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel,Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric). I.ASTM A563 -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. J.ASTM A563M -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]. K.ASTM A572/A572M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low- Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. L.ASTM A992/A992M -Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. M.ASTM F436 -Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. N.ASTM F1554 -Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts,Steel,36,55,and 105 ksi Yield Strength. O.AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding,Brazing,and Nondestructive Examination;American Welding Society. P.AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel;American Welding Society. SUBMITTALS A.Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for products.Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 05 1200-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing 1.6 1.7 B.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate profiles,sizes,spacing,and locations of structural members, openings,attachments,and fasteners. 2.Connections. 3.Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols.Indicate net weld lengths. C.Manufacturer's Mill Certificate:Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D.Mill Test Reports:Indicate structural strength,destructive test analysis,and non- destructive test analysis. E.Welders Certificates:Certify welders employed on the Work,verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. F,Fabricator's Qualification Statement:Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricate structural steel!members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B.Qualifications for Welding Work:Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification"requirements. 1.Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. 2.If recertification of welders is required,retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Fabricate or deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B.Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.Keep steel members off ground by using pallets,platforms,or other supports.Protect steel 05 1200-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty,clean and re-lubricate before use. 1.Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures.At Contractor's expense,repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Metal Surfaces,General:For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view,use 2.2 only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting,rust and scale seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names,and roughness.Remove such blemishes by grinding,or by welding and grinding,prior to cleaning,treating, and applying surface finishes. B.Stee!Angles and Channels:ASTM A36/A36M. C.Steel Shapes:ASTM A992/A992M. D.Steel Plate:ASTM A572/A572M,Grade 50 (345)high-strength. E.Cold-Formed Structural Tubing:ASTM A500/A500M,Grade B. F.Pipe:ASTM A53/A53M,Grade B,Finish black. E.Electrodes for Welding:Comply with AWS Code. F.High-Strength Structural Bolts,Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A325 or A325M, Type 1,medium carbon,galvanized,with matching compatible ASTM A563 or A563M nuts and ASTM F436 washers. FABRICATION A.Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B.Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. 1.Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 05 12 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing 2..Where finishing is required,complete assembly,including welding of units, before start of finishing operations.Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings,burrs,and other defects. C.Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.Grind exposed welds smooth. D.Fabricate connections for bolt,nut,and washer connectors. E.Welded Construction:Comply with AWS Code for procedures,appearance and quality of welds,and methods used in correcting welding work. F,Assemble and weld built up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without warp. G.Holes for Other Work:Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members,as shown on final shop drawings. H.Cut,drill,or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.Drill holes in bearing plates. I.Tolerances:Structural component tolerances shall be +/-1/8 inch and as required to adequately support loads. 2.3.STEEL COATING A.The structural steel members not noted to be galvanized shall be coated per Section 09 96 00. B.The stairs,landings,ladders,fence components,steel foundation plates, miscellaneous hardware,and shop fabrications not part of the structural building framing system shall be hot-dipped galvanized per Section 09 98 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 05 12 00-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing 3.2 B.Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop,and field,conducted by a qualified inspection agency.Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 1.At Contractor's expense,promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply. Design of Members and Connections:Details shown are typical;similar details apply to similar conditions,unless otherwise indicated.Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 1.Promptly notify Project Manager whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated. ERECTION A.Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Temporary Shoring and Bracing:Allow for erection loads,and provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made.Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. Shop Welding:Contractor shall inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies,as follows: 1.Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required.Record types and locations of defects found in work.Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2.Perform visual inspection of all welds. Field Assembly:Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly.Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 05 12 00 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing 3.3 3.4 Gas Cutting:Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing.Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress,as acceptable to Project Manager.Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. G.Touch-Up Repairs:Immediately after erection,clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded areas of shop paint or galvanizing. H.Galvanizing Repair:Galvanized coating at damaged areas shall be repaired according to ASTM A 780 (Annex A1)using zinc-based alloy repair sticks commonly known as "hot sticks”. I.Coating Repair:If underlying metal surface is exposed,wheel abrade or sandblast to clean metal and re-coat same as tanks.If damage does not fully penetrate coating then reapply top coat only to minimum DFT. J.Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. K.Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Engineer. TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation From Plumb:1/4 inch per story,non-cumulative. B.Maximum Offset From True Alignment:1/4 inch. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.The Authority,or Authority's representatives,will visually inspect welded connections. B.The Authority reserves the right to contract an independent testing firm to test welded connections. C.Provide access for the Authority's inspectors or testing agency representatives to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. D.The Authority may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment. 05 1200-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Structural Steel Framing E.Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspection and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements.Perform additional tests,at Contractor's expense,as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work. F,Shop Welding:Contractor shall inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies,as follows: 1.Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required.Record types and locations of defects found in work.Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2.Perform visual inspection of all welds. G.Field Welding:Contractor shall inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 1.Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required.Record types and locations of defects found in work.Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2.Perform visual inspection of all welds. END OF SECTION 05 1200-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A.Shop fabricated steel items including miscellaneous metal fabrications not part of the structural building framing system. B.Shop fabricated steel stairs,guardrails,handrails,and grating. C.Miscellaneous metal fabrications and fasteners. D.Hot dipped galvanized metal fabrication such as access stairs,guardrails, handrails,access ladders,platforms,and platform supports. E.Other hot dipped galvanized metal fabrications where specified or indicated. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing. B.Section 09 98 00 -Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard for Ladders --Fixed --Safety Requirements. B.ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C.ASTM A53/A53M_-Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless. D.ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E.ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 05 50 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication F,ASTM A325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel,Heat Treated,120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. G.ASTM A325M-Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,Steel,Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric). H.ASTM A500/AS500M -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I.AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding,Brazing,and Nondestructive Examination;American Welding Society. J.AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel;American Welding Society. K.IAS AC172 -Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;International Accreditation Service,Inc. L.SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer;Society for Protective Coatings. M.SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,"Inorganic,"and Type II,"Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. N.SSPC-SP 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning;Society for Protective Coatings. 14 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings:Indicate profiles,sizes,connection attachments,reinforcing, anchorage,size and type of fasteners,and accessories.Include erection drawings,elevations,and details where applicable. 1.Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.Indicate net weld lengths. B.Welders'Certificates:Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. C.Fabricator's Qualification Statement:Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications:Fabricator must be a firm experienced in producing 05 50 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance,as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B.Welding:Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2.Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS -STEEL A. B. Steel Wide Flange Shapes:ASTM A992. Miscellaneous Steel Sections and Plate:ASTM A36/A36M. Steel Tubing:ASTM A500,Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. Pipe:ASTM A53/A53M,Grade B Schedule 40,black and hot-dip galvanized finish,as indicated. Bolts,Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M),Type 1,galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. Welding Materials:AWS D1.1/D1.1M;type required for materials being welded. Shop and Touch-Up Primer:SSPC-Paint 15,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. Touch-Up of Galvanized Surfaces:SSPC-Paint 20,Type I -Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. GS Metals Corp.Product Grip Strut Safety Grating with fasteners and saddle clips by manufacturer:Galvanized finish. 05 50 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication 2.2.FABRICATION A.Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections,for delivery to site. B.Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C.Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D.Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface.Make exposed joints butt tight,flush,and hairline.Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E,Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications.Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication,except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.3 FABRICATED ITEMS A.Stairs and Landings:Steel members,connections,and fasteners as detailed in Drawings;hot-dipped galvanized finish. B.Guardrails and Handrails:Fabricate guardrails and handrails of pipe of dimensions indicated.All transitions shall be made using smooth radius fittings. Handrails shall be fabricated continuous,without interruptions,and shall return to terminate at endposts or walls. C.Grip Strut Grating Panels:Manufactured die stamped type,serrations facing upward,galvanized steel: 1.Profile 11-3/4”x 2”,5 diamond pattern. 2.Thickness:14 gauge. 3.Stair Treads:Provide manufacturer's standard end plate connection. 4.Attachments:Provide manufacturer's standard saddle clips and fasteners. 2.4 FINISHES -STEEL A. B. All metal fabrications not part of the module structural steel framing shall be hot- dipped galvanized as noted in the Drawings and in Section 09 98 00. The module metal framing shall be coated per Section 09 96 00. 05 50 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication 2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.Squareness:1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B.Maximum Offset Between Faces:1/16 inch. C.Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members:1/16 inch. D.Maximum Bow:1/8 inch in 48 inches. E.Maximum Deviation From Plane:1/16 inch in 48 inches PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. B. Install items plumb and level,accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects. Provide for erection loads,and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grip Strut Grating Attachment:Anchor by bolting through saddle clips. 1.Bolt Size:5/16"carriage bolts and nuts with diamond connection clip. 2.Quantity:Minimum 2 clips at each end support location. Obtain approval from Architect /Engineer prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb:1/4 inch per story,non-cumulative. Maximum Offset From True Alignment:1/4 inch. 05 50 00 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 05 50 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Fabrication C.Maximum Out-of-Position:1/4 inch. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 -6 Mertarvik Phase I Power System Section 06 10 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1.SECTION INCLUDES A.Preservative treated wood materials. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A.This section covers the work necessary to install the module roof system as shown on the drawings. 139 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 60 00 -Material and Equipment. B.Section 01 74 00 -Cleaning and Waste Management. C.Section 06 05 00 -Fasteners and Supports. D.Section 06 16 00 -Sheathing. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard;National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce);2005. B.WWPA G-5 -Western Lumber Grading Rules;Western Wood Products Association;2011. 15 SUBMITTALS A.Manufacturer's Certificate:For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B.Research/Evaluation Reports:For the following,showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1.Power-driven fasteners. 06 1000-1 Mertarvik Phase I Power System . Section 06 10 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Rough Carpentry 16 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.General:Cover wood products to protect against moisture.Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Dimension Lumber:DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated.If no grading agency is indicated,provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review.Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. Species:Hem or Douglass Fir,unless otherwise indicated. Grade:No.2 or better.BYNES2.2 FASTENERS A.General:Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified. Power-Driven Fasteners:NES NER-272. Wood screws:ASME B18.6.1 Bolts:Wood to steel or wood to wood,Structural Bolts,Nuts,and Washers:ASTM A307,medium carbon,galvanized,with matching compatible nuts and washers. 2.4 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.Available Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1.List of manufacturers. Basis-of-Design Products:Subject to compliance with requirements,provide 06 1000-2 Mertarvik Phase I Power System Section 06 10 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Rough Carpentry products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: Alpine Engineered Products,Inc. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. Harlen Metal Products,Inc. KC Metals Products,Inc. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co.,Inc. USP Structural Connectors.NAYSWNDSAllowable Design Loads:Provide products with allowable design loads,as published by manufacturer,which meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Galvanized Steel Sheet:Hot-dip,zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTMA 653/A 653M,G60 coating designation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.4.INSTALLATION A.Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line, cut,and fitted.Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.Locate nailers,blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. Framing Standard:Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"unless otherwise indicated. Framing with Engineered Wood Products:Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Metal Framing Anchors:Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not splice structural members between supports,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber.: 06 1000-3 Mertarvik Phase I Power System Section 06 10 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 3.5 Rough Carpentry G.Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,complying with the following: 1.NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2.Table 2304.9.1,"Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's International Building Code. 3.Table 23-II-B-1,"Nailing Schedule,"and Table 23-II-B-2,"Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule,"in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 4.Table 2305.2,"Fastening Schedule,"in BOCA's National Building Code. 5.Table 2306.1,"Fastening Schedule,"in SBCCI's Standard Building Code. 6.Table R602.3(1),"Fastener Schedule for Structural Members,"and Table R602.3(2),"Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 7.Table 602.3(1),"Fastener Schedule for Structural Members,"and Table 602.3(2),"Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's International One-and Two- Family Dwelling Code. PROTECTION A.Do not burn scrap on project site. B.Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. C.Do not leave any wood,shavings,sawdust,etc.on the ground or buried in fill. END OF SECTION 06 1000-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 16 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1.SECTION INCLUDES A.Roof Sheathing. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A.This section covers the work necessary to install the module roof sheathing as shown on the Drawings. 13 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS,GENERAL A.Plywood:DOC PS 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2.ROOF SHEATHING A.Plywood Roof Sheathing:Exterior sheathing. 2.3.FASTENERS A.General:Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with require- ments specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.For roof and wall sheathing,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing:Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indi- cated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 06 1600-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 16 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Sheathing PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1.INSTALLATION,GENERAL A.Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are 3.2 F. too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support mem- bers. Cut panels at penetrations,edges,and other obstructions of work;fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated,complying with the follow- ing: 1.Table 2304.9.1,"Fastening Schedule,"in the ICC's International Building Code. 2.Table R602.3(1),"Fastener Schedule for Structural Members,"and Ta- ble R602.3(2),"Alternate Attachments,"in the ICC's International Resi- dential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 3.ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant in- stallation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent ex- terior moisture from passing through completed assembly. Do not bridge building expansion joints;cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. Block all diaphragm roof panel edges with 2 x 4 flat blocking. WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A.General:Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No.E30,"Engi- neered Wood Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applica- tions indicated. Fastening Methods:Fasten panels as indicated below: 1.Roof Sheathing: 06 1600-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 16 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Sheathing a.Nail to wood framing.Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b.Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 17 53 Mertarvik,Alaska Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A.Wood roof trusses. WORK INCLUDED A.This section covers the work necessary to install the module roof wooden trusses as shown on the Drawings. ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For metal-plate connectors,metal truss accessories,and fasteners. B.Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1.Show location,pitch,span,camber,configuration,and spacing for each type of truss required. 2.Indicate sizes,stress grades,and species of lumber. 3 Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 4.Indicate locations,sized,and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 5.Indicate type,size,material,finish,design values,orientation,and location of metal connector plates. 6.Show splice details and bearing details. C.Delegated-Design Submittal:For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,including analysis data signed and sealed by an engineer licensed to practice in the State of Alaska. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates:For metal-plate-connected wood trusses,signed by officer or truss-fabricating firm. B.Evaluation Reports:For the following,from ICC-ES 1.Metal-plate connectors. 2.Metal truss accessories. 06 1600-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 17 53 Mertarvik,Alaska Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications:A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 1.Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineer- ing services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2.Engineering Responsibility:Preparation of Shop Drawings and compre- hensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. Fabricator Qualifications:Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program,complies with quality-control procedures in PTI 1,and involves third- party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in SBCA BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information:Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing,Restraining,&Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.” PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Trusses shall be designed for the gravity loads,wind and seismic later and uplift loads,and support conditions as indicated on the Drawings and specifications. No duration of load increase in stresses will be allowed for snow loading.Unbal- anced snow and drift loading is required.Submit truss designs stamped by an en- gineer licensed to practice in the State of Alaska.Truss drawings shall indicate all materials of construction. Wood truss design criteria shall be in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code and ASCE/SEI 7-10 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.Design shall use the following parameters: 1.Classification of Structure:Category IV,Essential Facility. 2.Importance Factors (IBC 2012,ASCE37-10) Seismic =1.5 Snow =1.2 06 1600-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 17 53 Mertarvik,Alaska Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.Wind Risk Category =IV 4.Design Loading: A.Seismic:Site Class D;Short Period Response Acceleration (Ss)= 0.20;One Second Period Response Acceleration (S1)=0.10. B.Snow:Ground Snow Load =40 PSF. C.Wind:Basic Wind Speed =165 MPH,3 Second Gust,Exposure D. D Floor Live Loads:Light storage /Manufacturing =125 PSF or 2000 Ib.point load. 5.Trusses shall be designed,or supplemented,for anticipated shipping and handling loads. C.Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI 1,TPI DSB, and SBCA BCSI. D.Wood Structural Design Standard:Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction”and its "Supplement.” GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Dimension Lumber:DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indi-Awcated.If no grading agency is indicated,provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Re- view.Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Re- view to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. Species:Hem or Douglass Fir,unless otherwise indicated. Grade No.2 or better. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A.General:Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. B.Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet:ASTM A 653/A 653M;Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A),or high-strength low-al- loy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B),G60 coating designation;and not less than 0.036 inches thick. FASTENERS A.General:Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with require- ments specified in this article for material and manufacture. 06 16 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 17 53 Mertarvik,Alaska Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses B. 1.Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer. 2.Where trusses are exposed to weather,in ground contact,or in an area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating com- plying with ASTM A 153/A 153 M. Nails,Brads,and Staples:ASTM F 1667. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES A.Allowable design loads,as published by manufacturer,shall comply with or ex- ceed those of basis-of-design products.Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demon- strated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand the same loads as the anchors. Galvanized-Steel Sheet:Hot-dip,zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 coating designation. 2.6 FABRICATION A.Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated;use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly,with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1.Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or by hydraulic press. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A.Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece,assemble trusses before installing. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses re- quired,exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane 06 1600-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 06 17 53 Mertarvik,Alaska Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses bending or other causes. D.Install and brace trusses according to TPI 1 recommendation and as indicated. E.Anchor trusses securely at bearing points;use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable.Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. F.Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. G.Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1.Install bracing to comply with Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry. 2.Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of par- allel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated. H.Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. I.Do not alter trusses in field.Do not cut,drill,notch,or remove truss members. J.Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 21 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Thermal Insulation SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1.SECTION INCLUDES A.Polystyrene foam-plastic board. B.Mineral-wool blanket. 12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing. B.Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving. 13.SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,soiling,and other sources.Store inside and in a dry location.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing,and protecting during in- stallation. B.Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1.Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD A.Insulation Board:AASHTO M 230,Type VI,except that extrusion is not required and the maximum water absorption shall not exceed 0.3%by volume,as determined in ASTM C272.Thermal resistance (R-value)shall not be less than 4.5 per inch at 75°F as determined by ASTM C177.Compressive strength at yield or 10%defor- mation shall not be less than 40 psi.The minimum board size shall be 2-inches by 2- feet by 8-feet. 07 21 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 21 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Thermal Insulation Sand Blanket:Shall be crushed aggregate surface course containing no mulch,frozen material,roots,sod,or other deleterious matter and with a plasticity index not greater than 6 (WAQTC FOP for AASHTO T 89/T 90).Meet the grading requirements of Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving. 2.2.HIGH TEMPERATURE MINERAL-WOOL ACOUSTICAL FIRE BATT INSULATION A.High Temperature Mineral-Wool Acoustical Fire Batt Insulation,Unfaced:ASTM C 553 Type VII (blankets without membrane facing);consisting of fibers;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively, per ASTME 84;passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. B.Minimum R value of 4 per inch. C.Minimum 2000°F Melting Temperature. D.Roxul AFB or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. B. Prior to placing the insulation board,blade,shape,and compact subgrade to a flat, smooth,firm,and unyielding surface.Visually inspect embankment surface and re- move bumps,ruts,deleterious material,debris,and any other objects that may prevent proper installation,attachment,and performance of the insulation board. Place a sand blanket leveling course at least two (2)inches thick on the subgrade. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF INSULATION BOARD A.Set each board accurately to the line and grade established and anchor firmly in place by driving a minimum of two (2)wood dowels per panel. Place insulation as shown on the plans,using a minimum of two (2)layers.Stagger all joints between layers.The required thickness is actual thickness,not nominal. Stagger all joints a half-board width horizontally and vertically.All joints shall be butted tight. 07 2100-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 21 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Thermal Insulation D.Cover the insulation board with four (4)inches of sand blanket material prior to plac- ing subsequent lifts.Use approved spreading and compacting equipment. E.Do not compact fill over insulation until it is completely thawed through its entire thickness. F,The Contractor shall use caution and appropriate construction techniques to ensure the insulation is protected and not damaged during formation of embankments. G.Remove and replace,at no cost to the Owner,any insulation that has been damaged or displaced. 3.3.CONSTRUCTION OF MINERAL WOOL A.The mineral wool insulation shall be installed as indicated in the manufacturer's specifications and Contract Drawings. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 41 13.16 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Roof Panels (Standing Seam) SECTION 07 41 13.16 FORMED METAL ROOF PANELS (STANDING SEAM) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A.Metal roof panels. B.Flashing and trim integral to roof panels. C.Clips,anchoring devices,fasteners,and accessories for installation of panel system. SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following: 1.Product Literature and data sheets for each material used. 2.Manufacturer's surface preparation and installation instructions. 3.Calculations demonstrating attachment complies with REFERENCE STANDARDS A.UL 580 -Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. B.UL 1897 -Uplift Test for Roof Covering Systems. C.ASTMA 653 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. D.ASTM A 792 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel by the Hot-Dip Process. E.ASTMA 924 -General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Metallic-Coated by the Hot- Dip Process. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural and Wind Load Tests: Design load/deflection criteria verified from tests per ASTM E 72 "Chamber Method"using a 20 psf (0.96 kPa)simulated wind load with a deflection limit 07 41 13.16 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 41 13.16 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Roof Panels (Standing Seam) of L/240. 2.FM Approval Standard 4471:Meets windstorm Class 1A [90]and hailstorm Class 1-SH classifications. 3.Underwriters Laboratory (UL)Uplift Tests for Roof Assemblies:UL Class 90 rated in accordance with UL 580 and shall withstand static uplift load of 140 psf when tested on 7 foot purlin spacing and 166 psf when tested on 5 foot purlin spacing. 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:Company specializing in installation of the products specified for projects of similar size and scope with minimum five years documented experience. 16 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Store products in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.Store under cover in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until ready for installation. B.Store products off the ground,with panels sloped for drainage and covered to protect factory finishes from damage. C.Do not overload roof structure with stored materials.Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Warranty:Manufacturer's two year limited warranty that panels are free from defects in materials and workmanship,beginning from the date of shipment of panels,but excluding coil coatings (paint finishes)covered under a separate warranty.Warranty does not include interior painted surface of panels. B.Submit exterior paint manufacturer's written twenty year limited warranty on paint finish for adhesion to the substrate and a thirty year limited warranty on chalk and color fade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Acceptable Manufacturer:AEP Span,A Division of ASC Profiles Inc.-A BlueScope Steel Company,2110 Enterprise Boulevard,West Sacramento,CA 95691,800-726-2727,916-372-0933 (Corporate Office)907-227-1607 (Alaska Office)or approved equal. 07 41 13.16-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 41 13.16 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Roof Panels (Standing Seam) 2.2 MATERIALS A.Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels:AEP Klip-Rib,or approved equal. 2.3 A. 1.Prefinished Galvalume®or Zincalume®sheet,ASTM AZ50 made of 55% aluminum,1.6%silicon and the balance zinc as described in ASTM specification A792. 2.Fabricate panels with sufficient thickness to meet specified UL 90 wind uplift requirements. 3.Fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams suitable for continuous locking or crimping by mechanical means during installation. 4.Seam Height:1 5/8”high ribs @ 8”centers. Provide pre-installed,high grade,hot-melt elastomeric sealant or butyl mastic,within the confines of panel's female leg,designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg. 6.Thickness:24 gauge (0.0250 inch).wsPanel Finish: 1.Exterior Finish:Cool Dura Tech 5000,color cool Forest Green. Flashing and Trim:Brake-formed sheet metal in the same thickness and finish to match the panels. Fasteners:Clips,anchoring devices,fasteners,and accessories for installation of panel system as recommended by panel manufacturer for the system specified. Sealant:Sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. Snow Fence System:Provide compatible snow fence system as shown on the drawings. Vented Metal Soffit:Flush Profile,Concealed Fastener Metal Soffit Panels consisting of formed metal sheet with vertical panel edges,with flush joints between panels,field assembled with nested lapped edges and attached to supports using concealed fasteners. 1.Panel Width:12” 2.Panel Thickness:1” UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS Self-Adhering,High-Temperature Sheet:Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick.Grace Ice and Water Shield,or approved equal. 07 41 13.16 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 41 13.16 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Roof Panels (Standing Seam) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine structural members before beginning installation to ensure that all supporting members are straight,level,plumb and satisfactory for panel installation. B.Panel Support Tolerances: 1.Overall rake to rake tolerances plus or minus 2 inches or plus or minus 1 inch at each rake. 2.Overall eave to ridge tolerance plus or minus |inch or plus or minus 1/2 inch at the eave,end lap and ridge. 3.Vertical deviation from the nominal roof plane of plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 5 foot length,plus or minus 1/4 inch in any 20 foot length and plus or minus 1/2 inch over the entire roof area. C.Verify roof openings,curbs,pipes,sleeves,ducts,or vents through roof are solidly set,reglets are in place,and nailing strips located. D.Correct defective conditions before beginning work. E.If substrate is the responsibility of another installer,notify Engineer of 3.2 3.3 unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A.Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment:Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free,in shingle fashion to shed water,and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses.Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches.Roll laps with roller.Cover underlayment within 14 days. INSTALLATION GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations including approved shop drawings,installation guidebook and manufacturer's handbook of construction details. Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria. Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion or defects. Install flashing and trim true and in proper alignment. 07 41 13.16-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 41 13.16 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Roof Panels (Standing Seam) E.Protective film on trim shall be removed before exposure to sunlight. F,Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids,to ensure weather tight 3.4 CLEANING A.Replace damaged panels and other components of work,which cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or similar minor repair. B.Wipe finished surfaces clean of any filings caused by drilling or cutting to prevent rust staining. 3.55.PROTECTION A.Protect installed products until completion of project. B.Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07 41 13.16-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 42 13.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Wall Panels SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A.Metal wall panels. B.Flashing and trim integral to wall panels. C.Fasteners and accessories for installation of panel system. SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following: l.Product Literature for each material used. 2.Manufacturer's surface preparation and installation instructions. REFERENCE STANDARDS A.UL 580 -Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies B.UL 1897 -Uplift Test for Roof Covering Systems C.ASTM A 653 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. D.ASTM A 792 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel by the Hot-Dip Process. E.ASTM A 924 -General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural and Wind Load Tests: l.Design load/deflection criteria verified from tests per ASTM E 72 "Chamber Method"using a 20 psf (0.96 kPa)simulated wind load with a deflection limit of L/240. 2.FM Approval Standard 4471:Meets windstorm Class 1A [90]and hailstorm Class 1-SH classifications. 07 42 13.13 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 42 13.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Wall Panels 3.Underwriters Laboratory (UL)Uplift Tests for Roof Assemblies:UL Class 90 rated in accordance with UL 580 and shall withstand static uplift load of 140 psf when tested on 7 foot purlin spacing and 166 psf when tested on 5 foot purlin spacing. 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:Company specializing in installation of the products specified for projects of similar size and scope with minimum five years documented experience 16 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Store products in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.Store under cover in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until ready for installation. Store products off the ground,with panels sloped for drainage and covered to protect factory finishes from damage. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials.Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces. 1.7 #$WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Warranty:Manufacturer's two year limited warranty that panels are free from defects in materials and workmanship,beginning from the date of shipment of panels,but excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) covered under a separate warranty.Warranty does not include interior painted surface of panels. Submit exterior paint manufacturer's written twenty year limited warranty on paint finish for adhesion to the substrate and a thirty year limited warranty on chalk and color fade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Acceptable Manufacturer:AEP Span,A Division of ASC Profiles Inc.-A BlueScope Steel Company,2110 Enterprise Boulevard,West Sacramento, CA 95691,800-726-2727,916-372-0933 (Corporate Office)907-227- 1607 (Alaska Office)or approved equal. 2.2.MATERIALS A.Metal Wall Panels:AEP Super-Span,or approved equal. 07 42 13.13 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Section 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels Prefinished Galvalume®or Zincalume®sheet,ASTM AZ50 made of 55%aluminum,1.6%silicon and the balance zinc as described in ASTM specification A792. Fabricate panels with sufficient thickness to meet specified UL 90 wind uplift requirements. Fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams. Seam Height:1-1/4”high. Provide pre-installed,high grade,hot-melt elastomeric sealant or butyl mastic,within the confines of panel's female leg,designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg. Thickness:24 gauge (0.0250 inch). Panel Finish: 1.Exterior Finish:One coat 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride, nominal 0.7 mil (0.02 mm)thick,over 0.2 mil (0.005 mm)primer; color Cool Forest Green. C.Flashing and Trim:Brake-formed sheet metal in the same thickness and finish to match the panels. D.Fasteners:Fasteners and accessories for installation of panel system as recommended by panel manufacturer for the system specified. E.Sealant:Sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine structural members before beginning installation to ensure that all supporting members are straight,level,plumb and satisfactory for panel installation. B.Panel Support Tolerances: 1.Overall rake to rake tolerances plus or minus 2 inches or plus or minus |inch at each rake. 2.Vertical deviation from the nominal wall plane of plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 5 foot length,plus or minus 1/4 inch in any 20 foot length and plus or minus 1/2 inch over the entire wall area. C.Verify wall openings,curbs,pipes,sleeves,ducts,or vents through wall are solidly set,reglets are in place,and nailing strips located. D.Correct defective conditions before beginning work. 07 42 13.13 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 42 13.13 3.2 3.3 3.4 Mertarvik,Alaska Formed Metal Wall Panels E.If substrate is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. INSTALLATION GENERAL A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations including approved shop drawings,installation guidebook and manufacturer's handbook of construction details. B.Anchor securely in place using fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria. C.Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion or defects. D.Install flashing and trim true and in proper alignment. E.Protective film on trim shall be removed before exposure to sunlight. F.Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids,to ensure weather tight CLEANING A.Replace damaged panels and other components of work,which cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or similar minor repair. B.Wipe finished surfaces clean of any filings caused by drilling or cutting to prevent rust staining. PROTECTION A.Protect installed products until completion of project. B.Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07 42 13.13 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 92 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Joint Sealant SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANT PART 1 GENERAL 11 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnishing and installing all sealant where indicated on the Drawing. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications. B.Section 09 97 13.23 -Exterior Steel Coatings. SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information: 1.Product Literature for each material used. 2.Manufacturer's surface preparation and installation instructions. B.Joint-Sealant Schedule:Include the following information: 1.Joint-sealant application,joint location,and designation. 2.Joint-sealant manufacture and product name. 3.Joint-sealant color. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installers:Use only skilled workmen specially trained in the techniques of sealing and familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used. B.Verify that sealants are compatible with the substrates and accessory materials provided under other Sections.Notify Engineer of evidence of incompatibility. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A.Install and protect sealants under conditions recommended by the manufacturer and as follows: 1.Do not apply sealant when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F,or expected to fall below 40 degrees F before sealant cure is complete. 2.Do not apply sealant to substrates or accessories that are moist. 07 92 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 92 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Joint Sealant PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS.GENERAL A.Compatibility:Provide joint sealants,backings,and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. B.Joint Sealants: 1.Products:Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products listed. 2.Manufacturers:Where no product is listed,subject to compliance with requirements,provide products from one of the following manufacturers: a.BSAF. b.Dow. c.Pecora Corporation. d.Sika Corporation,Construction Products Division. e.Tremco Incorporated. C.Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.1 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component,Nonsag,Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 100/50,for Use NT. B.-Single-Component,Nonsag,Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,for Use NT. C.Single-Component,Nonsag,Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 35,for Use NT. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.Polyurethane-based sealant,Sika Sikaflex 1A,or approved equal,meeting Fed. Spec.TT-S-00230C,Type II,Class A. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Joint Cleaner:Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer;compatible with joint forming materials. B.Primer:Non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 07 92 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 92 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Joint Sealant C.Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible back-up materials. l.Polyethylene,Urethane,Neoprene or Vinyl extruded closed cell foam backer rod.Over size backer rod by 30 to 50%. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Prior to starting work,carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify 3.2 3.3 that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.Notify the Authority in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. B.Verify joint dimensions and conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section. C.Beginning of installation means acceptance. PREPARATION A.Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter,which might impair adhesion of sealant. B.Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. C.Prime as required by manufacturer for proper bond to substrate materials. D.Prepare joint to achieve proper sealant width/depth ratios as indicated.Install backer rod where required to achieve correct joint profile. INSTALLATION A.Install sealant in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Sealant beads shall have a section as detailed in the Drawings. C.Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. D.Tool joints concave,unless indicated otherwise.Finish free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter,ridges and sags. 07 92 00-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 07 92 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Joint Sealant 3.4 CLEANUP A.Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses.Use cleaning agents recommended by the sealant manufacturer. B.Upon completion,remove and dispose of masking. END OF SECTION 07 92 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.This section includes surface preparation and external coating requirements for the module framing and aboveground storage tanks to be completed in the Shop after fabrication and before shipping. B.This section includes tough up and repair of all painted surfaces. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing B.Section 23 13 23 -Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks 13 REFERENCES A.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)Specifications: SSPC-PA 1 Shop,Field,and Maintenance Painting SSPC-SP 1.-Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP 7 _Brush-off Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning B.SPCC Paint Application Specification No.2 -Measurement of Dry Paint Thick- ness with Magnetic Gauges. C.National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE)Standards:Recom- mended Practice 0188-99,"Discontinuity (Holiday)Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Contractor shall submit for approval the following items one (1)month prior to the start of coatings application: 09 96 00 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings 1.5 1.The proposed coating system.If different manufacturers are proposed within each coating system,provide certification from manufacturers for capability. 2.The proposed applicator,his qualifications,and experience. 3.Provide manufacturer's data,instructions,and Safety Data Sheets (SDS)for all coatings. 4.Inspection and application procedures. 5.NACE Inspector qualifications and certifications. 6.Ambient temperature,humidity,recoat window,and other applica- tion parameters relevant for proposed coating system. The Contractor shall submit the following items weekly during coating application: 1.Temperature,humidity,and dew point readings during coating applica- tions. 2.Magnetic dry film thickness readings for each coating applied. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Coating:Coating applicator shall be a factory authorized coating company with at least five (5)years continuous experience in applying industrial coatings to tanks and utility piping.The coating applicator's main business line must be surface preparation and application of industrial coatings. Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality control plan necessary to assure conformance to applicable Specifications and plans with respect to materials,workmanship,finish,and functional performance.Inspection shall in- clude an independent National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) Certified Coating Inspector for all work associated with surface preparation and coating application.NACE Certified Inspector is not required for shop fab- ricated and coated tanks,enclosures,and other shop fabricated items pro- vided the fabrication shop has a dedicated Quality Control Inspector whose sole responsibility is Quality Control.Submit fabrication shop's Quality Control Inspector's qualifications for approval. Coatings shall be resistant to unleaded gasoline and diesel. Top coat shall be compatible with an above grade exposure to direct continuous sunlight,and be UV resistant.Oo 09 96 00 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings E.Unless specified herein,the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for shelf life,storing,surface preparation,mixing,thinning, handling,applying,curing,ambient conditions during application and curing, and for all other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed. F.It is the applicator's responsibility to perform work to the requirements of this Specification,and to conduct inspections and tests necessary to ensure com- pliance. 16 COATING SYSTEMS A.Coating systems shall be as specified in the Table below,unless other- wise indicated in the Contract Documents. COATING SCHEDULE (All mil requirements are dry film) ITEM EXTERIOR ABOVE GRADE Above Grade Storage 1 coat Inorganic Zinc based Primer (3-4 mils DFT) Tanks and Exterior -_1 coat Epoxy Intermediate Coat (4-6 mils DFT) Aboveground Fuel 1 coat Urethane Top Coat (2-3 mils DFT) Oil Piping Module Exterior 1 coat Inorganic Zinc based Primer (3 mils DFT)Surfaces 2 coats Epoxy (12 mils DFT) Module Exterior 1 coat Urethane Top Coat (3 mils DFT) Walls and Skids Module Interior 2 coats Epoxy (8 mils DFT) Surfaces All Stairs,Landings,Hot-dipped Galvanized per Section 09 98 00 and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 09 96 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings 2.2 A.General:All products submitted shall conform to federal,state,and local require- ments limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.Specific information may be secured through the local office of the Air Pollution Control Officer. B.Color Pigments:Pure,non-fading,applicable types to suit the substrates and ser- vice indicated. C.Paint Coordination:Provide finish coats that are compatible with prime paints used.Review other sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility.Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required.Notify the Engineer in writing of any antici- pated problems arising from using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. D.Material Quality: 1.Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers.Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard,best grade prod- uct will not be acceptable.Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufactur- ers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufac- turers,but are used to establish the intended finish type and quality.Equiv- alent products of other manufacturers may be used upon proper submittal and acceptance;however,proof of replacement materials being readily available at future dates from established,nationally-recognized sources is required. 2.Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer,and use only within recommended limits. PRIMER A.Aboveground Fuel Tank and Exterior Aboveground Fuel Oil Piping Primer:Pro- vide a two component,chemically cured,reinforced inorganic zinc primer. Provide Devoe Catha-Coat 302H or approved equal.Apply coating 3-4 mils DFT.Coating shall be equal to or provide better performance characteristics than the following: 09 96 00 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings Specification Test Method Minimum Value Solids by Volume ASTM D2697-7 day 78% Volatile Organic Content EPA 24 3.6 Ibs/gal Module Exterior Surface Primer:Provide the same primer type as specified above for the aboveground tanks in color Green.Apply coating 3 mils DFT Module Interior Surface Primer:Provide a two component,chemically cured, multi-purpose epoxy primer.Provide Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646,or ap- proved equal.Apply coating 4 mils DFT and in color White for the walls,floor, and ceiling or Structural Gray 4031 for the walls and floor.Coating shall be equal to or provide better performance characteristics than the following: Specification Test Method Minimum Value Solids by Volume ASTM D2697-7 day 72% Volatile Organic Content EPA 24 2.08 Ibs/gal 2.3.9 INTERMEDIATE COAT A. B. Aboveground Fuel Tank and Exterior Aboveground Fuel Oil Piping Intermediate Coat:Provide a two component,chemically cured,multi-purpose epoxy coat- ing.Coating to be suitable for corrosive environments.Provide Devoe Bar- Rust 236 or approved equal.Apply coating 4-6 mils DFT.Coating shall be equal to or provide better performance characteristics than the following: Specification Sol-Test Method Minimum Value ids by Volume ASTM D2697-7 day 80% Volatile Organic Content EPA 24 1.41 Ibs/gal Module Exterior Surface Intermediate Coat:Provide the same intermediate coat type as specified above for the aboveground tanks in two coats totaling 12 mils DFT.The first coat will be color Gray,the second coat color White. 2.4 TOP COAT A.Aboveground Fuel Tank and Exterior Aboveground Fuel Oil Piping Top Coat: Provide a two component,chemically cured,aliphatic acrylic urethane coating. Tank top coating color to be white and fuel pipe top coating color to be green. Provide Devoe Devthane 389 or approved equal.Apply coating 2-3 mils DFT. Coating shall be equal to or provide better performance characteristics than the following: 09 96 00 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings Specification Test Method Minimum Value Solids by Volume ASTM D2697-7 day 56% Volatile Organic Content EPA 24 3.23 lbs/gal B.Module Exterior Walls and Skids Top Coat:Provide the same top coat as specified above for the aboveground tanks in color White to 3 mils DFT. Module Interior Surfaces Top Coat:Provide Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646,or approved equal.Ceiling color to be White,wall and floor color to be Structural Gray 4031.Apply coating 4 mils DFT.Coating shall be equal to or provide better performance characteristics than the following: Specification Test Method Minimum Value Solids by Volume ASTM D2697-7 day 72% Volatile Organic Content EPA 24 2.08 Ibs/gal 2.55.TANK LABELING A.Signage and placards for all tanks shall be permanently painted with stencils or shop fabricated vinyl letters on a non-reflective white vinyl adhesive back- ground. On all tanks included in the project scope,provide signage indicating product stored and shell capacity,NFPA 704 placarding,and additional signage required by the International Fire Code.For horizontal tanks,provide signage on each headwall 1.Labeling shall be a minimum 2”lettering with 3/8”stroke on hori- zontal fuel tanks. a.Lettering shall be black for the following: 1)Product Stored 2)Tank Capacity 3)Tank Number (example;"KLTD-201”) b.Lettering shall be red for the following: 1)Gasoline,"Danger -Flammable -No Smoking”. 2)Diesel,"Danger -Combustible --No Smoking”. 2.Placarding to conform to the NFPA 704 requirements for color and size for 100 foot visibility.Diesel is 2-2-0.Gasoline 2-3-0. 2.6 TOUCH-UP COATING A.Provide one (1)one-gallon top coat kits,and one (1)one-gallon tinted epoxy intermediate coat kits for future coating maintenance by the Authority. 09 96 00 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. B. Protect,ship,and apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Remove all moisture,dust,loose material,and grit prior to masking. Neatly mask all surfaces not required to be painted.Remove,mask,or otherwise protect hardware,lighting fixtures,switch plates,aluminum surfaces,machined surfaces,couplings,shafts,bearings,nameplates on machinery,and other surfaces not intended to be painted.Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces.Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent paint and other materials from en- tering the motors. Paint shall not be applied in temperatures exceeding the manufacturer's recom- mended maximum and minimum allowable,nor in dust,smoke-laden atmos- phere,damp or humid weather. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F,un- less otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not apply paint in snow,rain,fog,or mist;or when the relative humidity ex- ceeds 85 percent;or to damp or wet surfaces;unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather,only if the areas and sur- faces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits speci- fied by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 09 96 00 -7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska I. High-Performance Coatings Do not apply paint materials when temperature and humidity conditions can rea- sonably be predicted to change from manufacturer's application limitations prior to the elapse of adequate drying time. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A.General: l.Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified for each particular substrate condition. Remove all hardware,hardware accessories,machined surfaces,plates, lighting fixtures,and similar items in place and not to be finish painted;or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.Remove,if necessary for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces.Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workers skilled in the trades involved. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning.Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet,newly-painted surfaces. B.Preparation of Existing Coated Surfaces: 1.Abrasive blast clean external surfaces as follows: Aboveground Fuel Tanks:SSPC-SP-10 Near White Blast Module Exterior Surfaces:SSPC-SP-10 Near White Blast Module Interior Surfaces:SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning Provide a 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 mil sharp angular surface profile.Remove all abra- sive residues either by blowdown or vacuum surfaces. Weld spatter shall be scraped or ground before blasting. All steel shall be free from surface contaminants.Spot samples will be made before blasting and coating.Surface contaminants include rust,oil,grease, salts,mil scale,water,dirt,abrasive residue,and dust. Prepared steel must receive primer within four (4)hours. All sharp edges shall be removed by grinding or sanding.Weld seams shall be rounded by power tool grinding. 09 96 00-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 3.3 High-Performance Coatings APPLICATION OF PAINT C.General: I.Manufacturer's written instructions for applying each type of paint or pro- tective coating shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to application. Cleaned surfaces and all coats shall be inspected prior to the succeeding coat.Schedule such inspection with the Engineer in advance.Apply all coatings in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommenda- tions,as reviewed by the Engineer.Sufficient time shall be allowed be- tween coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. Apply additional coats when undercoats,stains,or other conditions show through the final coat of paint until the paint film is of uniform finish,color, and appearance.Give special attention to ensure that all surfaces including edges,comers,crevices,welds,and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Application: 1.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. Paint the back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers,locker doors,etc.,to match the exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors and frames,on tops,bottoms,and side edges,the same as the exterior faces,unless otherwise indicated. Use foam brushes or rollers on metal doors and frames and similar surfaces to achieve finishes that are completely void of brush stroke tracks and marks. Back-brush inside surfaces of siding,trim,and miscellaneous wood prior to installation and painting when necessary to avoid material cupping or warp- ing. Units to be bolted together and to structures shall be painted prior to assem- bly or installation.- 09 96 00-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings E.Film Thickness: 1.Coverage is listed as either total minimum dry film thickness in mils (MDFT)or the spreading rate in square feet per gallon (SFPG).Per coat determinations are listed as MDFTPC or SFPGPC.The number of coats is the minimum required irrespective of the coating thickness.Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint thickness,de- pending on method of application,differences in manufacturers;products, and atmospheric conditions.Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Metal and wood surfaces shall be visually inspected to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. Particular attention shall be given edges,angles,flanges,etc.Where insuf- ficient film thicknesses are likely to be present,ensure proper millage in these areas. F.Damaged Coatings: 1.Damaged coatings,pinholes,and holidays shall have the edges feathered and repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the paint manu- facturer,as reviewed by the Engineer. All finish coats,including touch-up and damage-repair coats shall be ap- plied in a manner which will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance. G.Unsatisfactory Application: I.If the item has an improper finish color,or insufficient film thickness,the surface shall be cleaned and top coated with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage.Specific surface preparation infor- mation to be secured from the coating manufacturer and the Engineer. All visible areas of chipped,peeled,or abraded paint shall be hand-or power-sanded feathering the edges.The areas shall then be primed and fin- ish coated in accordance with the Specifications.Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance,a finish sanding and topcoat may be required by the Engineer. ) 09 96 00 - Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings 3.4 3.Work shall be free of runs,bridges,shiners,laps,or other imperfections. Evidence of these conditions shall be cause for rejection. 4.Any defects in the coating system shall be repaired by the Contractor per written recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 5.Leave all staging up until the Engineer has inspected the surface or coating. Staging removed prior to approval by Engineer shall be replaced. INSPECTION A.Inspection shall be performed by a National Association of Corrosion Engineers Certified Coating Inspector who may perform additional tests deemed necessary to ensure compliance with this Specification. After surface preparation work,inspect surfaces to receive coatings and repair all defects prior to applying coatings. Before blasting and applying any coating,the coatings applicator and the coatings inspector shall agree on mutually acceptable "hold points”.The Contractor shall not continue work past each hold point until the Inspector has approved the previous work. Use type 1 pull off magnetic dry film thickness gauges. Compressed air for blasting and coating shall be free of oil and water.Conduct blotter tests at a minimum of every 12 hours of operation. If any non-coatable defects are discovered in welds,after abrasive blasting,delay their repair until after application of the first coat of coating material,at no additional cost to the Authority. After the second coat has cured completely,perform a holiday inspection using a low-voltage DC holiday detector over 100%of the coated area.Use a suitable surfactant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Mark all holidays during the inspection with a chloride-free marker.Holiday inspection does not apply to structural framing below the dike floor. The responsibility of the inspector is to approve or disapprove Work according to these Specifications.The inspector does not have authority to direct work. 09 96 00 - Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 96 00 Mertarvik,Alaska High-Performance Coatings 3.5.REPAINTING AND TOUCH-UP A.As directed by the Project Engineer,wire brush to bare metal,and re-paint any areas with imperfections,sags,runs,blushing,blemishes,holidays,thin spots.Sur- face preparation for touch-up paint of field-welded surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP11. Touch-up any minor nicks,scratches with same material following the manufac- turers written instructions. Repainting and touchup shall be at no additional cost to the Authority. END OF SECTION 09 96 00 - Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings SECTION 09 98 00 HOT DIP GALVANIZED COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.Work includes providing all labor,equipment,plant,transportation,supplies, materials,and engineering to provide galvanized coatings on all steel members, sections,fabricated assemblies,and hardware specified on the Plans. This specification applies to but is not limited to: 1.Grip strut walkway,stairs,etc.(See Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing). 2.Structural Steel Fabrications. 3.Fencing components. 4.Pipe supports,clamps,and associated hardware. 5.Nuts,bolts,washers,exposed to the atmosphere. 6.All other components exposed to the atmosphere and not specified as painted. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. D. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing. Section 32 31 13 -Chain Link Fence. Section 09 96 00 -High Performance Coatings. Section 23 13 23 -Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks. 13.SUBMITTALS A.General:Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. No later than 3 weeks prior to galvanizing,submit an electronic of a Certificate of Compliance which states that all galvanizing complies with ASTM A 123 or A 153 as appropriate,and the requirements set forth herein. 09 98 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Inspection shall be carried out at the galvanizer's plant by the Contractor's representative,or at some other place as agreed between Contractor,fabricator and galvanizer.The Authority reserves the right to reject unacceptable galvanizing at the Project site.Inspection rights and privileges,procedures,and acceptance or rejection of galvanized steel material shall conform to ASTM A 123 or A 153 as applicable.Inspections and tests shall include the following: 1.Visual examination of samples and finished products. 2.Tests to determine weight or mass of zinc coating per square foot of metal surface. 15 TRANSPORT,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Galvanized articles shall be loaded and stored as follows to prevent the formation of wet storage stain: 1.The articles shall be stacked or bundled to allow air between the galvanized surfaces during transport from the supplier.Additionally the material shall be loaded in such a manner that continuous drainage could occur. 2.In storage,the articles shall be raised from the ground and separated with strip spacers to provide free access of air to most parts of the surface.They shall also be inclined in a manner which will give continuous drainage. Under no circumstances shall galvanized steel be allowed to rest on cinders or clinkers;neither shall it be stored on wet soil or decaying vegetation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A.Structural steel to be galvanized shall conform to Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing. 2.2 ZINC FOR GALVANIZING A.Zinc for galvanizing shall conform to ASTM B 6. 09 98 00 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A.Structural steel shall be fabricated generally in accordance with Class (I,I,or III) guidelines as shown in Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures as published by the American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association,Inc. Fabrication practices for products to be galvanized shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM A 143,A 384 and A 385,except as specified herein. Care shall be taken to avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel.Before fabrication proceeds,the Project Manager shall be notified of potential warpage problems which may require modification in design. All welding slag and burrs shall be removed prior to delivery to the galvanizer. Holes and/or lifting lugs to facilitate handling during the galvanizing process shall be provided at positions as agreed between the designer,fabricator and galvanizer. Unsuitable marking paints shall be avoided and unwanted grease,oil,paint and other deleterious material shall be removed prior to fabrication. Surface contaminants and coatings which would not be removable by the normal chemical cleaning process in the galvanizing operation shall be removed by the fabricator using blast cleaning or some other method. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A.Surfaces to be galvanized shall be pre-cleaned utilizing a caustic bath,acid pickle and flux.Alternatively,the steel shall be near white blast cleaned to SPCC -SP10 and fluxed. 3.3.GALVANIZING A.Steel members,fabrications,and assemblies shall be galvanized after fabrication, but prior to shipment,by the hot dip process in accordance with ASTM A 123. Bolts,nuts,washers,and iron and steel hardware components shall be galvanized .in accordance with ASTM A 153.Nuts and bolts shall be supplied in accordance with ASTM A 307,A 325,A 394 and A 563,as applicable. Products shall be safeguarded against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A 143. 09 98 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings 3.4 3.5 3.6 D.All articles to be galvanized shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage and to minimize distortion. E.Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing shall be pointed out prior to dipping. F.The composition of metal in the galvanizing bath shall not be less than 98.0% zinc. COATING REQUIREMENTS A.Weight:The weight and thickness of the galvanized coating shall conform with paragraph 6.1 of ASTM A 123 or Table 1 of ASTM A 153,as appropriate. B.Surface Finish:The galvanized coating shall be continuous,adherent,as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article. C.The integrity of the coating shall be determined by visual inspection and coating thickness measurements. D.Where slip factors are required to enable friction grip bolting,these shall be obtained after galvanizing by suitable treatment of the faying surfaces in accordance with the latest edition of the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation. E.Adhesion:The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal handling during transport and erection. WELDING A.Where galvanized steel is to be welded,adequate ventilation shall be provided.If adequate ventilation is not available,supplementary air circulation shall be provided.In confined spaces a respirator shall be used. B.Welding shall be performed in accordance with the American Welding Society publication D19.0-72,Welding Zinc Coated Steel. C.All uncoated weld areas shall be touched up. TOUCH UP AND REPAIR A.Mechanical Damage' 09 98 00 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska B. Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings Areas damaged by welding,flame cutting,or during handling,transport or erection shall be repaired by one of the following methods whenever the damage exceeds 3/16"in width: 1.Cold Galvanizing Compound Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-rich paint shall be clean,dry, and free of oil,grease and corrosion products. Areas to be repaired shall be power disc sanded to bright metal.To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected,surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating. Touch-up paint shall be an organic cold galvanizing compound having a minimum of 94%zinc dust in the dry film. The paint shall be spray or brush applied in multiple coats until a dry film thickness of 8 mils minimum has been achieved.A finish coat of aluminum paint shall be applied to provide a color blend with the surrounding galvanizing. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 2.Zinc Based Solder a.Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-based solder shall be clean,dry and free of oil,grease and corrosion products. Areas to be repaired shall be wire brushed. Heat shall be applied slowly and broadly close to,but not directly onto the area to be repaired.The zinc-based solder rod shall be rubbed onto the heated metal until the rod begins to melt.A flexible blade or wire brush shall be used to spread the melt over the area to be covered.The zinc based solder shall be applied in a minimum thickness of2 mils. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. Wet Storage Stain 09 98 00-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 09 98 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings Any wet storage stain shall be removed by the galvanizer if formed and discovered prior to leaving the galvanizer's plant.Wet storage stain shall be removed before installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Wet storage stain shall be removed as follows: 1.The objects shall be arranged so that their surfaces dry rapidly. 2.Light deposits are to be removed by means ofa stiff bristle (not wire) brush.Heavier deposits are to be removed by brushing with a 5%solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1%by volume of concentrated sulfuric acid.This is to be applied with a stiff bristle brush and left for about 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying. Alternatively a proprietary product such as Oakite Highlite,or equal, which is intended for this purpose,may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.A coating thickness check must be made in the affected areas to ensure that the zinc coating remaining after the removal of wet storage stain is sufficient to meet or exceed the requirements of the specification. END OF SECTION 09 98 00 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 10 44 16.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Portable Fire Extinguishers SECTION 10 44 16.13 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1.SECTION INCLUDES A.Fire extinguishers at locations indicated in the project drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A.UL "A”Building Materials Directory. B.NFPA No.10 Fire Extinguishers,Portable. C.NFPA No.30 Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTINGUISHERS A.Manufacturer:Larsen's Manufacturing Co.,7421 Commerce Lane,N.E., Minneapolis,MN 55432,(612)571-1181,or approved equal. B.Extinguisher shall have a minimum rating of 3-A,40-B:C and a 20 lb.capacity. Fire rating in accordance with NFPA No.10 and No.30. 1.Gasoline Fires:Class II Hazard;BC. 2.Fuel Oil Fires:Class II Hazard;BC. 3.Wood,Paper and All Above:Class I,Il,or HI;ABC. C.Extinguisher Brackets:Larsen's Manufacturing Co.,bottom support,quick release strap-buckle type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Mount top of extinguishers 3 to 4 feet above ground,pavement,or floor. 10 44 16.13 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 10 44 16.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Portable Fire Extinguishers B.Fasten extinguisher brackets securely to structure.Provide additional brackets, uni-strut,fasteners,and components as required.All miscellaneous hardware shall be hot dip galvanized. END OF SECTION 10 44 16.13 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression SECTION 21 13 29.10 FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.The work involves design,installation,testing,and certification of an automatic fire suppression system for a power generation module.The module will contain three diesel engine generators as indicated. The module will be completely fabricated in Anchorage (shop fabrication).All fire suppression system installation,and the initial testing will occur in Anchorage. Upon acceptance of shop fabrication testing by the Authority,the module will be shipped to Mertarvik,Alaska,remote location for installation and commissioning.All final system testing,certification,and training will occur in Mertarvik. Work herein shall include but not be limited to: Obtain a State of Alaska,Fire Marshal Plan Review Permit. Furnish and install a complete system. Programming fire control panel. Acceptance testing and certification of completed system.vwFYNn>Minimum four hours operation training with local operators and Authority staff. 6.Operation and Maintenance Manuals including as-built drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Submittals including CAD drawings. Division 1. Division 23. Division 26. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.All equipment shall be new and shall be listed for the intended application.The entire system shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and industry practices. Design shall be prepared by a registered mechanical engineer or technician with minimum NICET Level 3 certification.Designer shall have an appropriate State of Alaska design permit. The Contractor shall be authorized by the fire suppression system manufacturer to furnish and install the specified system.Field installation shall be performed by technicians certified by the manufacturer to install the specified system. 21 13 29.10 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression 1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS: A. B. C. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)750:Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. B.mProvide submittals in the manner described herein and in Division 1. Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 21 specifications and shown on the Drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project.Submittal to include: 1.Manufacturer,model numbers and quantity of each device. Manufacturer and model of control panel,including installed options. Agent piping layout including size and quantity of nozzles. 2 3. 4.Calculations. 5.Shop drawings shall indicate compliance with all requirements of the specifications and shall contain at a minimum: a.Floor Plans and Isometrics for agent piping. b.Floor Plans and Diagrams for Wiring complete with circuit designation in accordance with Wire Schedule on the Drawings (A-B-C-D-E). c.Panel and device installation details. d.Bill of Materials e.Installation notes and system Sequence of Operation. Based upon review comments by the Authority issue final revised submittal including final construction drawings. Submit a copy of State of Alaska,Fire Marshal Plan Review Permit to the Authority. Prior to on-site testing,certification,and training provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals.Manuals to include system description,manufacturer's catalog information, programming,instructions,operations and maintenance literature,Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for extinguishing agent,and as-built drawings of completed system. Deliverables to include one bound copy plus 4 CD's with PDF format electronic files of the entire manual. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A.All substitutions shall be noted on equipment submittals. 1.7 WARRANTY A.Division |-Closeout Requirements:Warranties. 21 13 29.10-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression B.Provide a one-year manufacturer's warranty covering all materials and workmanship of all products supplied.Warranty shall commence from the date of system certification. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION AGENT A.A high pressure water mist fire suppression system shall be furnished,Marioff Hi-Fog or approved equal.In order for a substitution of the suppression system to be approved it must have at a minimum the following salient features: 1) 2) 3) 4) The system must use water mist as the sole extinguishing agent. The system must use high pressure (2,000 PSI nominal)nitrogen as the sole driving agent without the aid of any pumps. The system shall be a single pipe system utilizing stainless steel tubing not exceeding 1”outside diameter. The complete agent rack including all water and nitrogen storage for one zone of coverage shall not exceed the following dimensions:4'-6”Long x 1'-4”Wide x 7-6”High. 2.2 AGENT RACK AND WATER TANK A.Wall or floor mounted racks shall be provided that contain the agent cylinders,nitrogen cylinder,and piping.Marioff Hi-Fog MAU 150 FS or approved equal. B.The racks shall be designed for the appropriate seismic code and shall be adequately anchored to the building structure. 2.3 FIRE CONTROL PANEL The Fire Control Panel shall be a Fike Cheetah XI-50 10-071-R1 or approved equal,and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU).The CPU shall communicate with,supervise and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system:intelligent self-calibrating smoke and flame detectors,addressable modules,annunciators,and other system controlled devices. A. Basic equipment to be included with Fire Control Panel shall be main board with display and keypad,door,hardware,and backbox for panel surface mount installation. System Capacity and General Operation 1. 2. The control panel shall be capable of 50 intelligent/addressable devices. The system shall include two Class B (NFPA Style Y)programmable Notification Appliance Circuits.It shall also include three additional programmable Form-C alarm and trouble relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. The system shall support up to 99 programmable EIA-485 driven relays for an overall system capacity of 301 circuits. The Fire Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display,individual, 21 13 29.10 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression color coded system status LEDs,and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire system. 5.All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment,and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Control Panel. 6.The Fire Control Panel shall provide the following features: a.=oom9Automatic detect test and drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life (smoke and flame detectors monitored and automatically calibrated) Sensitivity Test,meeting requirements of NFPA 72,Chapter 5. Maintenance Alert to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. System Status Reports to display. Positive Alarm Sequence pre-signal,meeting NFPA 72 3-8.3 requirements. Periodic Detector Test,conducted automatically by software. Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning. Cross Zoning with the capability of:counting two detectors in alarm,two software zones in alarm,or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. Walk Test,with check for two detectors set to same address. Adjustable delay and discharge timers. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72,Chapter 7 requirements and be certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment. Event history file in nonvolatile memory. Panel to have abort option to manually prevent release of extinguishing agent. Battery back-up in the event of normal AC power failure. Unit to be able to release extinguishing agent in at least two independent hazard zones. 2.4 SECONDARY POWER SOURCE BATTERIES A.Secondary power shall be provided by 12 volt,gelled electrolyte batteries.The batteries shall be completely maintenance free.Fluid level checks and refilling shall not be required. B.Batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire system for not less than twenty- four hours standby operation plus 30 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. Note that this is in excess of minimum NFPA requirements. 2.5 HEAT DETECTOR A.UL Listed,adjustable temperature heat detector.Fike 60-1039 or approved equal.Set to activate at 135°F for normal temperature and 190°F for high temperature. 2113 29.10-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression 2.6 FLAME (OPTICAL)DETECTOR A.UL Listed,flame detectors shall be multi-spectrum,electro-optical,automatic calibrating,digital fire detectors.Fire Sentry Corporation Model SS4-A2 or approved equal.Install on SM4 swivel mount. 2.7 SMOKE (PHOTOELECTRIC)DETECTOR A.UL Listed,automatic calibrating type,photoelectric smoke detector.Detector to be addressable and provide analog signal to the control panel which may be used for maintenance of detector.Fike 63-1052 or approved equal. 2.86 ANNUNCIATORS A.Interior Annunciator (Alarm and Discharge)-UL Listed,Horn/strobe combination, minimum 75 candela.Gentex GEC3-24WR or approved equal. B.Exterior Annunciator (Alarm)-Weatherproof,UL Listed horn/strobe combination, minimum 75 candela.Gentex WGEC24-75WR or approved equal. C.Exterior Strobe (Discharge)-Weatherproof,UL Listed strobe,minimum 75 candela. Gentex WGEC24-75WR or approved equal. 2.9 MANUAL PULL STATION A.Manual pull station(s)shall be UL Listed,addressable,double action,and provide visible indication that station has been operated.Fike 02-3710 or approved equal. 2.10 ABORT STATION A.UL Listed,mushroom button abort station.Station coloring to be highly visible.Label or provide placard.Fike 10-1639 or approved equal. 2.11 DEVICE MONITORING MODULES A.UL Listed modules designed for use with intelligent and addressable equipment as required.Fike Series 55 or approved equal. 2.12 PLACARDS A.Provide placards in compliance with NFPA as required.Provide additional warning placards as indicated on the plan in accordance with the Placard Schedule. 2.13 RACEWAYS AND CONDUCTORS A.Route all wiring in separate dedicated raceways for all fire suppression system wiring at no cost to Contractor.All raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).All raceways,junction boxes,pull boxes,and cover plates shall be painted red. B.All conductors shall be soft drawn copper,Type XHHW insulation;600V and 75C rated;gauge and color as indicated by service in accordance with the following schedule: 120V AC Power -12 AWG,stranded,color per station service scheme. 24V DC Power,Detection,and Alarm Circuits -14 AWG,color in accordance with the Wire Schedule. 21 13 29.10 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression 2.14 NOZZLES A.In Total Flooding and Local Application zones nozzles shall be open spray head type, Marioff4S IMC 8MB 1000 or approved equal. 2.15 PIPING A.Contractor shall furnish,install,and pressure test agent discharge tubing/piping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.16 SUPPORT A.Contractor shall furnish and install industry standard hangers for agent discharge piping, raceways,panel and all devices. 2.17 FITTINGS,VALVES,CONTROLS,AND DEVICES A.Contractor shall furnish and install all required fittings,valves,control devices,and accessories as required to provide the types of coverage required for each zone as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN A.Design fire suppression system with two zones of coverage as shown on the Drawings. 1.Zone 1 (Generation Room)shall contain agent rack,discharge piping and nozzles. Two flame detectors shall!be cross-zoned so that any one detector will set off alarm and shut-down generators.Any second detector will begin a 30 second countdown to agent release.Two high temperature heat detectors shall be cross- zoned in the same sequence as the flame detectors.Exit shall have a manual "Agent Release”pull station which will begin a 30 second countdown to agent release when activated. 2.Zone 2 (Control Room)shall contain the control panel,one smoke detector and one normal temperature heat detector.Either detector will set off alarm and will shut-down generators.Exit shall have a manual "Agent Release”pull station which will begin a 30 second countdown to agent release when activated.An abort station shall be located near the control panel.In the event of a false alarm, pressing and holding the abort button will stop the 30 second countdown to release,and silence audible alarms.Once released,audible alarms will resume and 30 second countdown will restart.The abort will not function in the event ofa Manual Agent Release. B.Provide annunciators and other devices where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 3.2.EXECUTION A.The system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the latest adopted editions of all applicable codes and standards and manufacturer's requirements. B.Contractor shall perform all work with skilled craftsmen specializing in said work with all required certifications.Install all materials in a neat,orderly,and secure fashion,as 21 13 29.10-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 21 13 29.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Fire Suppression required by these specifications,manufacturer's requirements,and commonly recognized standards of good workmanship. C.Upon completion of shop testing,all water shall be drained and/or blown out of the system to prevent freeze damage.The system shall be left with one fully charged nitrogen cylinder installed in each rack plus one fully charged spare nitrogen cylinder for each rack. D.Contractor shall provide a minimum of two weeks'notice to Authority prior to final on- site testing and operator training. END OF SECTION 21 13 29.10-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Mechanical SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK A.The work to be included in these and all other mechanical subsections shall consist of providing,installing,adjusting and setting into proper operation complete and workable systems for all items shown on the Drawings,described in the specifications or reasonably implied.This shall include the planning and supervision to coordinate the work with other crafts and to maintain a proper time schedule for delivery of materials and installation of the work. B.Section includes: 1.General mechanical work. 2.Painting and marking. 3.Valve tags,signs,and placards. RELATED SECTIONS A.Division 1 B.All other Division 23 Specifications C.Divisions 21 and 26 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A.In addition to other requirements of Division 1,mark up a clean set of drawings as the work progresses to show the dimensioned location and routing of all mechanical work which will become permanently concealed.Show routing of work in concealed blind spaces within the building. B.Provide one set of drawings clearly marked up with all as-built information to the Authority within two weeks of completion. C.Atcompletion of project,deliver these drawings to the Authority and obtain a written receipt. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 23 specifications and shown on the Drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project.Provide submittals in the manner described herein and in Division 1. B.Painting and Marking:Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C.Valve Tags:Submit manufacturers catalog literature for tags as indicated on the Schedule on Sheet M1.2. 23 05 00 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Mechanical D.Signs and Placards:Submit manufacturers catalog literature as indicated on the Schedule on Sheet M1.2. E.Equipment:Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each item indicated on the Mechanical Schedules on Sheet M1.1 under the Division 23 Sections that follow.See specific requirements under each section. 1.5 RECEIVING AND HANDLING A.See general conditions and the general requirements in Division 1 regarding material handling. B.Deliver packaged materials to the jobsite in unbroken packaging with manufacturer's label,and store to facilitate inspection and installation sequence. C.Protect all materials and equipment during the duration of construction work against contamination and damage.Replace or repair to original manufactured condition any items damaged during construction.Immediately report any items found damaged to the Authority prior to commencing construction. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Division 1 -Material and Equipment:Storage and protection. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Perform all work in accordance with the latest adopted editions of the International Fire Code,the International Building Code,and the International Mechanical Code including State of Alaska amendments.Comply with all applicable State and Federal regulations. C.Perform work with skilled craftsman specializing in said work.Install all materials in a neat and orderly,and secure fashion as required by specifications and commonly recognized standards of good workmanship. 1.8 SCHEDULE OF WORK A.The work must be expedited and close coordination will be required in executing the work.The various trades shall perform their portion of the work at such times as directed so as to meet scheduled completion dates,and to avoid delaying any other trade. B.The Authority will set up completion dates.Each Contractor shall cooperate in establishing these times and locations and shall process his work so as to ensure the proper execution of it. 1.9 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.Contact the Authority one week prior to completion of all work to schedule substantial completion inspection.The Authority will generate a punchlist of corrective action items during the inspection.Work will not be considered complete until all corrective action items in the Authority's punch list have been satisfactorily completed and photographic or other positive documentation has been provided to the Authority. 23 05 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Mechanical 1.10 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A.The Contractor for the work under each section of the specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications,and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped,hindered or delayed at any time. B.Atall times during the progress of the work,the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris.The Contractor shall,on direction at any time from the Authority,clear any designated area or areas of materials and debris.On completion of any portion of the work,the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work,leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.11 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A.Ensure that the appropriate safety measures are implemented and the all workers are aware of the potential hazards from electrical shock,burn,rotating fans,pulleys,belts, hot manifolds,noise,etc.associated with working near power generation and control equipment. 1.12 WARRANTY A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements:Warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.Provide all equipment and materials required for a complete system. B.All equipment and materials supplied under this Contract are new unless specifically indicated as existing.Where additional or replacement items are required,provide like items by the same manufacturer to the maximum extent practical. C.Install all material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.2 PAINTING A.Carbon Steel Pipe -Paint all exposed carbon steel pipe that is not insulated except for engine exhaust.Wire brush and wipe down with solvent.Prime and finish with two coats of direct to metal alkyd enamel,Sherwin Williams DTM or approved equal,color Structural Gray 4031. B.Paint all steel fabrications and tanks.Sandblast or wire brush to bare metal and wipe down with solvent.Prime and finish with two coats of self-priming epoxy,Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 or approved equal,color Structural Gray 4031. C.Touch-up -finish all cut ends and damaged surfaces of galvanized and zinc plated supports and fasteners with spray on Cold Galvanizing Compound,ZRC or approved equal.Touch up paint on fabricated items to match original. 23 05 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Mechanical 2.3 VALVE TAGS A.Specific Function Valve Tags -For all valves marked with a specific function,provide 2.4 2.5 tags color coded and worded as indicated on the Schedule on Sheet M1.2. B.Standard Valve Tags -For all valves not marked with a specific function,provide NO/NC tags as indicated on the schedules. C.Install all tags as noted. SIGNS AND PLACARDS A.Provide decals and sign boards,color coded and worded as indicated on the Schedule on Sheet M1.2.Install as noted. PIPE MARKING A.Install flow arrows on diesel fuel,used oil,cooling,and heat recovery piping.On insulated piping install flow arrows over jackets.Black arrows over colored backgrounds,self-adhesive vinyl,Seton arrows on roll or approved equal.Background color scheme to match the Specific Function Valve Tags. PART 3 -EXECUTION DRAWINGS3.1 3.2 3.3 A.The mechanical Drawings are generally diagrammatic and do not necessarily show all features of the required work.Provide all equipment and materials required for a complete system.Complete details of the building which affect the mechanical installation may not be shown.For additional details,see Civil,Architectural,Structural, and Electrical Drawings.Coordinate work under this section with that of all related trades. Contractor to field verify all dimensions and conditions prior to start of construction. Immediately contact the Authority for clarification of questionable items or apparent conflicts. CUTTING,FITTING,REPAIRING,PATCHING,AND FINISHING A.Where previously completed building surfaces or other features must be cut,penetrated, or otherwise altered,such work shall be carefully laid out and patched to the original condition.Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B.Do not cut,drill,or notch structural members unless specifically approved by the Authority.Minimize penetrations and disruption of building features. C.Seal all exterior ceiling and wall penetrations as indicated. EXAMINATION A.Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. 23 05 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Mechanical 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. B. C. Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials Unless otherwise indicated,support all equipment and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals. Maintain manufacture recommended minimum clearances for access and maintenance. Where equipment is to be anchored to structure,furnish and locate necessary anchoring and vibration isolation devices. Furnish all structural steel,such as angles,channels,beams,etc.required to support all piping,ductwork,equipment and accessories installed under this Division.Use structural supports suitable for equipment specified or as indicated.In all cases,support design will be based upon data contained in manufacturer's catalog. Openings:Arrange for necessary openings in buildings to allow for admittance and reasonable maintenance or replacement of all apparatus furnished. 3.5 SCOPE OF ISOLATION AND RESTRAINT WORK A. B. All vibrating equipment and the interconnecting pipe and ductwork shall be isolated to eliminate the transmission of objectionable noise and vibration from the structure. Mechanical equipment shall be carefully checked upon delivery for proper mechanical performance,which shall include proper noise and vibration operation. All installed rotating equipment with excessive noise and/or vibration,which cannot be corrected in place,shall be replaced at no cost to the Authority. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1. 2 3. 4. 5 Pipe hangers and supports. Hanger rods. Flashing. Sleeves. Formed steel channel. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 --Common Work Requirements for Mechanical B.Section 23 21 13 -Hydronic Piping C.Section 23 11 13 -Fuel and Lube Oil Piping D.Section 23 35 16.10 -Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping 1.3 >REFERENCES A.American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. 2. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. ASME B31.9 -Building Services Piping. B.ASTM International: I. 3. 4. ASTM E119 -Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. ASTM E814 -Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. ASTM F708 -Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. ASTM E1966 -Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C.American Welding Society: 1.AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel. D.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. 2. MSS SP 58 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Materials,Design and Manufacturer. MSS SP 69 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and Application. 23 05 29-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 3.MSS SP 89 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Fabrication and Installation Practices. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data:Hangers and Supports:Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.Indicate finish for interior and exterior applications. C.Design Data:Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze,multiple pipe,and riser support hangers.Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,and riser support hangers. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Conform to applicable code for support of coolant and hydronic piping. C.Perform Work in accordance with State of Alaska Standards. QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B.Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept materials on site in original factory packaging,labeled with manufacturer's identification. B.Protect from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and damage,by storing in original packaging. FIELD MEASUREMENTS aa A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A.Miscellaneous shapes and plate:ASTM A-36. B.Rectangular tubing:ASTM A-500 Grade B. C.Structural Pipe:ASTM A-53 or ASTM A-106B. D Paint as indicated. 23 05 29 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Support equipment and raceways on strut,brackets,trapeze hangers,or as detailed. Anvil,B-Line,Grinnell,Unistrut,or approved equal. FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A.Strut:Cold formed mild steel channel strut,pre-galvanized finish and slotted back unless specifically indicated otherwise. B.Standard Strut:12 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 1-5/8”,B-line B22-SH-Galv or equal. C.Double Strut:12 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 3-1/4”,B-line B22A-SH-Galv or equal. D.Shallow Strut:14 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 13/16”,B-line BS4-SH-Galv or equal. E.Where strut is welded to tanks or structures provided plain (unfinished black)solid back strut:12 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 1-5/8”,B-line B22-PLN or approved equal. F.On all exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized strut and fittings. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A.Provide fittings,brackets,channel nuts,and accessories designed specifically for use with specified channel strut.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. B.Pipe Clamps:Two piece pipe clamp designed to support pipe tight to strut,B-line B20##, or approved equal,as indicated on the Pipe/Tubing Strut Clamp Schedule on Sheet M1.1. Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. C.Pipe Straps:Two-hole steel pipe strap.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. FASTENERS A.All bolts,nuts,and washers to be zinc plated carbon steel except as specifically noted otherwise. B.On exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized or stainless steel bolts,nuts,and washers. C.On exhaust piping flanges provide plain carbon steel (black)or stainless steel bolts,nuts, and washers.Coat with high temperature anti-seize prior to assembly. D.Hanger Rods:Continuous threaded rod.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. EARTHQUAKE ANCHORAGE A. B. Anchor equipment weighing more than 100 pounds to the building structure to resist lateral earthquake forces. Total lateral (earthquake)force shall be 1.00 times the equipment weight acting laterally in any direction through the equipment center of gravity.Provide adequate backing at structural attachment points to accept the forces involved. 23 05 29 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment C.Provide equipment supported by flexible isolation mounts with earthquake restraining supports positioned as close to equipment as possible without contact in normal operation (earthquake bumpers).The maximum lateral displacement due to the computed earthquake force from above shall not exceed 1.5 inches. 2.7 FLASHING AND SEALING A.Caps &Coverings:Steel,16 gauge minimum. B.For penetration of all interior wall penetrations seal with polyurethane caulking. C.For piping smaller than 2”through exterior walls seal with polyurethane caulking. D For piping 2”and larger through exterior walls install flashing as indicated on Drawings. Oatey Master Flash or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Obtain permission from the Authority before drilling or cutting structural members. 3.3.INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Support piping and equipment as shown on Drawings using specified supports and fasteners.If not detailed on Drawings,support from structural members with pipe hangers,clamps or pipe straps specifically intended for the application. B.Independently support pumps and equipment.Supporting piping from connections to equipment shall not be permitted.OSupport horizontal piping as scheduled.-- D.Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow or as indicated.™Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. H.Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I.Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J.Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.Refer to Section 23 07 19. K.For specific piping and equipment support details reference Drawings. 23 05 29-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment 3.4 INSTALLATION -FLASHING A.Seal and flash all wall penetrations as indicated. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. 3.6 SCHEDULES A.Copper Tube and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE SIZE Copper Tube |Steel Pipe Copper Tube |Steel Pipe Inches Maximum Maximum Hanger Rod Hanger Rod Hanger Hanger Diameter (In)|Diameter (In)Spacing (Ft)|Spacing (Ft) 1/2 &3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8 1 &1-1/4”6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 3 10 10 1/2 1/2 4 12 10 1/2 5/8 END OF SECTION 23 05 29 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 07 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Piping Insulation SECTION 23 07 19 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Piping insulation,jackets and accessories. 2.Exhaust piping insulation,jackets and accessories. RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 21 13 -Hydronic Piping. D.Section 23 35 16.10 -Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping. REFERENCES A.ASTM International: 1.ASTM B209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2.ASTM C450 -Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping,and Vessel Lagging. ASTM C547 -Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 4.ASTM C585 -Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 5.ASTM C1136 -Standard Specification for Flexible,Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data:Submit product description,thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service,and location. C.Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control 23 07 19-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 07 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Piping Insulation 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 B.Pipe insulation maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. C.Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters. D.Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. B.Applicator:Company specializing in performing work specified in this section. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept materials on site in original factory packaging,labeled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness. B.Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic,dirt,water,chemical,and damage,by storing in original wrapping. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 COOLANT/HEAT RECOVERY PIPE INSULATION A.TYPE P-1:ASTM C547,1”preformed rigid fiberglass pipe insulation.Thermal Conductivity:0.23 at 75 degrees F.Operating Temperature Range:0 to 850 degrees F. Vapor Barrier Jacket:ASTM C1136,Type I,factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints.Jacket Temperature Limit:minus 20 to 150 degrees F.Johns- Manville "Micro-Lok”or approved equal. EXHAUST PIPE INSULATION A.TYPE P-2:ASTM C547,1-1/2”preformed rigid mineral wool fiber insulation made with basalt rock and slag.Thermal Conductivity:0.25 at 100 degrees F.Maximum Operating Temperature:1200 degrees F.ROXUL Techton 1200 or approved equal. B.Wall Penetrations:Where indicated on Drawings install TYPE 1 mineral wool fiber batt insulation.Rockwool Safe-N-Sound or approved equal.Fill entire void with insulation. 23 07 19-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 07 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Piping Insulation 2.3.PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. B. Aluminum Pipe Jacket:ASTM B209.Exterior grade,0.016 inch thick sheet,embossed finish. Fittings:Pre-formed aluminum covers.PABCO or approved Equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. Verify piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed. Verify piping has been painted up to areas to be insulated. 3.2.INSTALLATION -PIPING SYSTEMS A. B. C. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install insulation where indicated on Drawings. Cover all piping insulation with aluminum jackets.Join with longitudinal slip joints and minimum2 inch laps. END OF SECTION 23 07 19-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 09 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Instrumentation and Control Devices SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1. 2 3. 4 5 Instrumentation Equipment Pressure gauges. Differential Pressure gauges. Thermometers. Thermometer thermowell. 1.2)RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 21 16 -Hydronic Equipment and Specialties. C.Division 26 -Electrical 13 REFERENCES A.American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. 2. 3. 4, ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. ASME B40.1 -Gauges -Pressure Indicating Dial Type -Elastic Element. ASME Section VIII -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code -Pressure Vessels. B.ASTM International: I.weYNASTM A126 -Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. ASTM A536 -Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. ASTM B32 -Standard Specification for Solder Metal. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. ASTM B280 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. ASTM D2737 -Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)Plastic Tubing. ASTM EI -Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. 23 09 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 09 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Instrumentation and Control Devices C. D. 8.ASTM E77 -Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers. American Welding Society: 1.AWS A5.8 -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. National Fire Protection Association: 1.NFPA 72 -National Fire Alarm Code. 2.NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. B. Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. Note that related Electrical Instrumentation devices are specified under Division 26 and are not included in this section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT A. B. C. Division 1 -Closeout Requirements Project Record Documents:Record actual locations of control components,including panels,thermostats,and sensors. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit inspection period,cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials,and calibration tolerances. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. B. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage. 1.8 COORDINATION A.Coordinate installation of control components in work of Divisions 26 and 33. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES A. B. Dry type stainless steel case,tube,and socket,1/4"NPT bottom connection,2-1/2”dial size.Range as indicated on Drawings. Range 0-15 psi:Trerice Model 700SS-25-02-L-A-080 or approved equal. Range 0-100 psi:Trerice Model 700SS-25-02-L-A-110 or approved equal. 23 09 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 09 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Instrumentation and Control Devices 2.2.DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES A.Diaphragm type,brass body,1/4"FPT in-line connections,2-1/2”size basic dial, hermetically sealed SPDT switch with terminal strip. B.Orange Research 1516DGS-1E-2.5B-C-0-15PSID or approved equal. 2.3 THERMOMETERS A.3”diameter dial,bimetal type,stainless steel case and stem,1%of full accuracy, adjustable angle and swivel head,2-1/2”stem length,20-240°F range dual scale. B.Trerice B836-02-05 or approved equal. C.Provide all thermometers with a 3/4"NPT brass thermowell. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged equipment as required or replace with new equipment. B.Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before installation. C.Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate. 3.2.INSTALLATION A.Install instrumentation where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level.Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle,clean windows and lenses,and calibrate. Isolate hydronic pressure gauges during pressure testing. Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26.amooOAfter completion of installation,test and calibrate all instrumentation. END OF SECTION 23 09 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping SECTION 23 11 13 FUEL AND LUBE OIL PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Scope:This section applies to all diesel fuel and lube oil (oil)piping systems. B.Section includes: 1.Fuel oil piping. 2.Lube oil (used oil)piping. 3.Unions and flanges. 4.Valves and strainers. 1.2)RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 12 13 -Fuel and Lube Oil Equipment and Specialties. D.Section 26 32 13.10 -Engine Generators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Minimum Working-Pressure Rating:Unless otherwise indicated,minimum pressure requirement for fuel and lube oil piping is 150 psig. 1.4 REFERENCES A.American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. ASME B31.9 -Building Services Piping. ASME B16.5 Flanges and Flanged Fittings ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings,Socket-Welding and Threaded ASME Section IX -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B.ASTM International: 1.ASTM A106B -Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Services. 2.ASME B16.11Forged Fittings,Socket-Welding and ThreadedAAFYN 23 1113-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping C.Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:UL 142 -Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. B. C. Provide piping of material as specified in PART 2. Provide flanges,unions,or couplings at locations requiring servicing.Use unions, flanges,or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections.Do not use direct welded connections to valves,equipment. Provide pipe hangers and supports per Drawings and specifications. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. C. Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. Product Data: 1.Piping:Submit manufacturers catalog information for pipe materials,fittings,and accessories. 2.Valves and Strainers:Submit manufacturer's catalog information with data and ratings for each service. Welders'Certificate:Include welders'certification of compliance in accordance with Quality Assurance below. 1.7 CLOSEOUT A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. Division 1 Quality Control. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. Perform pipe welding with experienced welder with current API or equivalent certification for pipe welding in all positions. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. B. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with current certification. 1.10 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.Inspect for damage. 23 11 13-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping B.Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified.All items of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. B.Oil pipe shall have welded joints except for threaded connections to equipment and valves as required and shown.Provide flanged joints where indicated on Drawings to allow removal of individual components. C.Provide butt weld joints for all pipe 1-1/2 inches in diameter and larger and on smaller pipe where specifically indicated on Drawings.Provide socket weld or threaded joints for all piping smaller than 1-1/2 inches in diameter unless indicated otherwise. D.Vent piping shall be galvanized with threaded joints. 2.2 PIPE A.Oil Pipe (DFS,DFR,UOR):ASTM A106B seamless black steel pipe,Schedule 80. B.Vent Pipe:ASTM A53B ERW welded galvanized steel pipe,Schedule 40. 2.3.PIPE FITTINGS A.Fittings:ASTM A235 seamless carbon steel butt weld fittings for all pipe 1-1/2 inches in diameter and larger and on smaller pipe where specifically indicated on Drawings. Provide socket weld or threaded joints for all piping smaller than 1-1/2 inches in diameter using ASTM 105,forged steel fittings,minimum 3000 Ib. B.Flanges:ASTM A105 forged steel,ANSI 150#raised face unless indicated otherwise. Butt or socket weld as indicated. C.Flange Gaskets:Spiral wound metallic gaskets,Flexitallic or approved equal.Coat with anti-seize prior to assembly. D.Flange Bolts:On all exterior piping provide stainless steel bolts,nuts,and washers.Coat with anti-seize prior to assembly. E.Vent pipe shall have threaded joints with minimum 300#galvanized threaded fittings. 2.4 BALL VALVES A.Flanged Ball Valves:Reduced port,carbon steel uni-body,ANSI 150#raised face flanged ends,stainless steel ball and trim,TFM seat and PTFE seals for NACE MRO175 service,lockable handle,150 psig minimum working pressure.PBV C-5410-31-2236- FTNL or approved equal.Note that for a substitute valve to be approved it must be a domestic manufactured high quality industrial valve such as Apollo or Nibco. 23 1113-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping B.Threaded Ball Valves:Carbon steel body,threaded ends,stainless steel ball and trim, PTFE seat and Graphite/PTFE seals for NACE MRO175 service,lockable handle,150 PSIG minimum working pressure.PBV C-5312-38-2236-TL-NC,PBV C-5322-38-2236- TL-NC or approved equal.Note that for a substitute valve to be approved it must be a domestic manufactured high quality industrial valve such as Apollo or Nibco. 2.5 CHECK VALVES A.Threaded Check Valves:Brass body,threaded ends,swing check style,150 psig minimum working pressure.Domestic only.Hammond,Milwaukee,Nibco,or approved equal. 2.6 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A.Threaded Pressure Relief Valves:Bronze body,hard seat,MPT inlet by FPT outlet,size and pressure setting as indicated on the Drawings,Kingston 103SS or approved equal. 2.7 FUSIBLE VALVES A.Fusible Link Valves:Brass body,FPT ends,165°F fusible head.Firomatic or approved equal.Size as indicated on Drawings: 1/2”Valve Model #12130,3/4”Valve Model #12112,1”Valve Model #12113. 2.8 SOLENOID VALVES A.Normally Closed Solenoid Valves:Brass body,1/2"FPT ends,1/2"NPT conduit connection,120VAC,stainless steel core,molded epoxy coil enclosure,internal pilot operated,150 PSI differential opening pressure,liquid tight and full modulation at 0 PSI differential.Asco Catalog No.8210G94 or approved equal. B.Normally Open Solenoid Valves:Brass body,1/2"FPT ends,1/2"NPT conduit connection,120VAC,stainless steel core,molded epoxy coil enclosure,internal pilot operated,150 PSI differential closing pressure,liquid tight and full modulation at 0 PSI differential.Asco Catalog No.8210G34 or approved equal. 2.9 STRAINERS A.Type Y pattern,bronze body,screwed ends,gasketed cap,20 mesh stainless steel screen. 200 psig minimum working pressure,Mueller No.351 or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Ream threaded pipe ends and remove burrs.Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside,before assembly. B.Thoroughly coat male pipe ends with Teflon tape and Teflon pipe joint compound prior to assembling. 23 11 13-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping C.Coat flange gaskets and bolts with anti-seize compound prior to assembling joints. 3.3.INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Drawings and Section 23 05 29. 3.4 INSTALLATION -PIPING A.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. B.Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. C.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. D.Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,not inverted.Provide access where valves are not exposed. E.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system. F.Prepare and paint pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories not pre-finished in accordance with Section 23 05 00. G.Install identification on piping systems in accordance with Section 23 05 00. 3.5 TESTING A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Test all oil piping with minimum 125 psig air.Test 100%of welds visually for leaks with each joint soaked in a foaming soapy water solution,and visually inspect each joint for leaks.Isolate and pressure test each run of piping for a minimum of one hour.Provide blind flanges,threaded caps or plugs at each end of the test section as needed.Do not conceal pipe joints before pressure testing is complete.Isolate equipment and components rated for lesser pressures so as not to damage these. C.Pressure test piping system again after all equipment is installed at 50 psi for a minimum of one hour,or the maximum rated pressure of the weakest component,whichever is less. D.Submit written procedures for testing,including test pressures,equipment to be used and items to be tested. E.Notify the Authority in writing seven (7)days in advance of pressure tests.The Authority shall be present at all testing.Pressure testing performed without the Authority present will be rejected,unless prior written approval is received from the Authority. F.Cut out,re-weld and re-test all leaking welded joints.Repair any leakage found and retest until system proves leak-free.Retesting after the repair of defects shall be performed at no cost to the Authority. G.Certified test results shall be submitted to the Authority for approval.Test certification shall include gauge pressure,air temperature,time,date,witness,and pipeline identification. 23 1113-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 11 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Piping 3.6 SYSTEM STARTUP A.Prime equipment and piping prior to testing and verify operation as indicated in 23 12 13. END OF SECTION 23 11 13-6 Mertarvik Rural Power Systems Section 23 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Tank Appurtenances SECTION 23 12 00 FUEL TANK APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section includes furnishing and installing fuel tank appurtenances.The intent of this specification,along with other specifications,and the accompanying Contract Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown,specified and required by applicable codes. 12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Design Service Conditions:All fuel tank appurtenances shall be rated for the following service conditions: 1.Fluid:Diesel fuel and Gasoline fuel. 2.Operating temperature range:-50°F to 120°F Any referenced standards that do not comply with these service conditions shall be brought to the Engineer's attention immediately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Furnish and install tank accessories as required and as shown on the drawings. 2.2 TANK ACCESSORIES &APPURTENANCES A.The following tank accessories and appurtenances shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for delivery to the site and installation. 1.8”MPT Primary Emergency Vent:Provide heavy emergency vent,cast iron body,and flanged connection emergency vent with internal screen, set to open at 16 oz /sq-in pressure.Emergency vents shall be sized in accordance with UL 142,or as shown on drawings.Loose manholes not permitted.Morrison Bros.,Co model no.2440F with flanged adapter,or approved equal. 2.Pressure/Vacuum Vent:Combination vent /overfill alarm shall be a threaded 2"pressure/vacuum vent with integral whistle overfill alarm.Set vent to open at 8 oz/sq-in pressure and 1 oz/sq-in vacuum.Set whistle to 23 12 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 10. 11. Fuel Tank Appurtenances start at 85%of tank capacity unless otherwise indicated.Provide Morrison Bros.Model 922 or approved equal. Manhole:Provide 24-inch manhole with 5/16"steel lid (single punch), 1/4"mild steel ring with 7"riser height.Provide a complete set of bolts and buna-n gasket for lid.24"manhole nominal size.Clay &Bailey model no.MR820-0600 or approved equal. Fuel Tank Level Sensor Probe:Provide level sensor probe for the 10,000- gallon fuel tank as shown in the Contract Drawings.See Electrical Instrumentation Schedule in Drawings for probe specifications.Refer to Civil Drawings for sensor lengths and probe elevations. Fill Limiter:Provide 2-inch FPT fill limiting valve,float type,mechanical shut-off valve,aluminum body,closed cell buna-N float,brass plunger, stainless steel trim,100 PSI shut-off pressure.Provide valve with drop tube capable of being installed through 4-inch coupling for a 2-inch unit, valves shall be set as shown on drawings.Morrison Co.model 9095AA with model 419 drop tube,or approved equal. Clock Gauge:2-inch liquid level gauge shall be ss float operated clock gauge with readout in feet and inches,in 1/4 inch increments up to 12 feet. Aluminum body.2-inch mpt connection,float shall be sized to fit through a 2-inch bung opening and operate in a 2”stilling well.Morrison Bros., Co.model no.818,or approved equal. Water Draw:Provide 1”water draw on 2”bung per drawings.Provide locking 1°”Ball Valve and locking Camlock cap.Provide locks for Ball Valve and cap. Gauge Hatch:2”FTP gauge hatch on 2”x4”nipple,lockable brass cap, brass adapter,and brass chain,Buna-N gasket,2-inch FPT connection. Morrison Bros.,Co.Model No.178,or approved equal. Mushroom-Style Vent:Provide threaded 2”downward mushroom-style vent. EMGO Wheaton Retail Part No.EWA785-005 or approved equal. Flange Gaskets:Spiral wound metallic gaskets,Flexitallic or approved equal. Coat with anti-seize prior to assembly. See Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Schedule for motorized valve specification. 23 12 00-2° Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Tank Appurtenances 2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS A.All pipe supports shall be concrete or timber support,as shown in the Drawings. Clamps,fittings,and hardware shall be Hot Dip Galvanized in accordance with Section 09 98 00. Support Strut:Cold formed mild steel channel strut,hot dipped galvanized finish and slotted back unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1.Standard Strut:12 gage,1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch,Unistrut P1000T (HG), or approved equal. 2.Double Strut:12 gage,1-5/8 inch by 3-1/4 inch,Unistrut P1001 (HG),or approved equal. 3.Solid Back Strut:For welding to tanks or structures,12 gage,1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch,unfinished black steel,Unistrut P1000 (PL),or approved equal. Provide galvanized carbon steel fitting,brackets,channel nuts and accessories designed specifically for use with supplied strut. Pipe Clamps:Galvanized carbon steel two-piece pipe clamp designed to support pipe tight to strut.Unistrut P1117E-EG and P1119E-EG,or approved equals. Pipe Straps:Carbon steel two-hole pipe strap.Unistrut P2558 (EG),or approved equal. Fasteners: 1.Bolts,nuts,and washers shall be galvanized or zinc plated carbon steel unless stainless steel is specifically shown.Stainless steel shall be Type 316L. 2.Flange Bolts:On all exterior piping provide stainless steel bolts,nuts,and washers.Coat with anti-seize prior to assembly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install tank appurtenances in accordance with applicable codes and per the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.2.TESTING A.Calibrate level gauges to the tank and verify correct readings. 23 12 00-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Tank Appurtenances B.Check operation of fill alarms and overfill protection valves prior to completion of the work. END OF SECTION 23 12 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Equipment and Specialties SECTION 23 12 13 FUEL AND LUBE OIL EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Scope:This section applies to all fuel and lube oil (oil)piping systems. B.Section Includes: 1.Fuel and Lube Oil System Equipment. 2.Day Tank,Hopper,and Filter. 3.Hoses. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 11 13 -Fuel and Lube Oil Piping D.Division 26 -Electrical 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data: 1.Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each item indicated on the Fuel System Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1. 2.Submit manufacturer's catalog information for hoses and all other items specified herein. C.Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for fabrication of day tank,hopper,and filter bank.Note that if all items will be fabricated exactly as indicated on the Drawings,the design Drawings can be submitted in lieu of shop drawings. 1.4 CLOSEOUT A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. B.Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation instructions,assembly views,servicing requirements,lubrication instruction,and replacement parts list. 23 12 13-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Equipment and Specialties PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.1 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.Provide pumps,meters,gauges,equipment,and appurtenances as indicated in the Fuel System Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1. B.Day Tank Filter:Provide Day Tank Filter as indicated in the Fuel System Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1.Provide wrench and five spare filter elements as indicated. C.Used Oil Blender Filter Elements:Provide elements of each type as specified below.In addition to elements installed in filter bank assembly,provide two spare elements of each type: 1.Water Blocking:10 Micron Hydrosorb II Filter Cartridges.Cim-Tek #300342 or approved equal. 2.Particulate:2 Micron Particulate Filter Cartridges.Cim-Tek #30066 or approved equal. 2.2 DAY TANK,HOPPER,AND FILTER BANK A.Day Tank:Rectangular heavy gauge welded steel tank,capacity and configuration as indicated,manufactured in accordance with UL standard 142 and Drawings. Furnish and install all accessories as indicated. B.Hopper:Welded steel assembly manufactured as shown on Drawings.Furnish and install all accessories as indicated. C.Filter Bank:Welded steel assembly manufactured as shown on Drawings.Furnish and install all accessories as indicated. 2.3 HOSES A.Fuel rated hose,Eaton Weatherhead H569,Aeroquip FC300,or approved equal. Sized as indicated on Drawings.Provide re-useable plated steel straight JIC swivel ends with NPT adapters. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.-Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged equipment as required or replace with new equipment. 3.2.PREPARATION A.Protect bright finished shafts,bearing housings,and similar items until in service. No rust will be permitted. 23 12 13-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 12 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel and Lube Oil Equipment and Specialties 3.3 INSTALLATION A._Install pumps and associated equipment in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Install fuel oil day tank,hopper,and filter bank as indicated on Drawings. C.Electrical installation shall be in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. 3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP A._Prior to starting fuel and oil pumps,prime cavities with lube oil then energize momentarily to verify proper rotation. B.Fuel Piping:Prime all piping,fill filters with diesel fuel,and bleed off air prior to starting pumps. C.Verify operation of all day tank and blender controls including timers and level alarms. END OF SECTION 23 12 13 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks SECTION 23 13 23 FACILITY ABOVEGROUND FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section includes the furnishing of all labor,tools,equipment,and materials necessary to fabricate,coat,and package for shipment one 10,000-gallon,double wall,horizontal,skid mounted,aboveground bulk storage tank.Outer tank dimensions shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings (UL 142). The tank shall be constructed in accordance with this specification and the Contract Drawings,and shall be furnished with the fittings and appurtenances in the Contract Documents. The tank shall,at a minimum,meet the requirements of the most current edition of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL)Standard for Safety UL 142,"Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.”AI horizontal tanks must be shop-constructed and UL listed and labeled. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing Section 09 98 00 -Hot Dipped Galvanized Coating Section 23 12 00 --Fuel Tank Appurtenances 1.3 REFERENCES A.The latest revision of the following standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),and other listed standards,are hereby made part of this Specification.The publications may be referred to in the text by basic designation only. Reference to a particular organization's standards shall be in accordance with those standards unless more restrictive criteria are listed herein or on the Contract Drawings. Where Contract Drawings or Specifications call for material or construction of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the codes,rules and regulations listed below,the provisions of the Contract shall take precedence. »23:13 23-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska ASTM A 36 ASTM A 283 ASTM A 570 OSHA UL 142 UL 2085 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. B. Section 23 13 23 Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet and Strip,Carbon,Hot- Rolled,Structural Quality Occupational Safety and Health Administration;Chapter 20, Fixed Ladders Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids Protected Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids Submit material samples and manufacturer's literature. Shop Drawings: 1.Submit shop drawings,prior to fabrication,showing all principal dimensions of the tanks,details and locations of all accessories, penetrations and appurtenances,thickness of sheets and plates,details of joints and welds,and description of coating system.All deviations from these Specifications and the Contract Drawings shall be clearly shown and identified on the shop drawings. 2.Submit material lists with catalog cuts for any proposed substitutions. Packing Lists:The Contractor shall submit shipping packing lists,detailing all materials shipped and referencing the crate number each component is in.The packing lists will be provided to the Project Manager prior to the delivery date of the tanks. The Contractor shall submit the following prior to the start of tank erection: 1.Certified Welding Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) 2.Certified Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) 23 13 23-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks 3.Certified Welder Performance Qualifications (WPQs) 4,Nondestructive Testing (NDT)Procedures and NDT Personnel Certifications 5.Welding Inspector Certification 6.Quality Control Plan E.Contractor shall submit weld and pressure test results to the Engineer for approval within ten (10)working days of each test. F.For Tank Painting Schedule see Section 09 96 00 -High Performance Coatings. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Packing,Shipping,and Handling: l.Packaging must meet the shipping requirements of all anticipated carriers and shall prevent abrasion,scratching or damage of the materials during overland transport and ocean barge shipment.Exterior ladders,catwalks and pipe supports shall be packaged and shipped separately from tanks. Packaging shall be sufficient to prevent damage during shipping.Extra care shall be taken to protect tank stand offs to ease field installation of bolt on components. All threaded tank openings shall be sealed for shipping with plastic or tin plugs.All flanged tank openings shall be blind flanged for shipment. Provide provision for relief of excess pressure/vacuum,which may damage the tank,while preventing precipitation or salt water spray from entering tank.Minimum vent opening shall be 42”diameter. Lifting connections shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings and as required for proper tank handling. Shipping crates shall be clearly labeled with community name and crate number in large,waterproof,lettering for easy identification at the construction site.Two (2)packing lists shall be securely attached to each shipping container (one inside and one outside)in watertight,re-sealable, plastic bags. 23 13 23 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks Storage:The packaging shall provide adequate protection for the fabricated materials and appurtenances for outside storage at the site throughout the construction project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Tank manufacturers shall have a minimum of 10 years'experience,including the manufacture of at least five similar tanks in the previous three years. Testing:Provide independent testing firm to perform testing and inspection for tank welding. Tank Leak Test:Provide tank integrity testing in the form of a hydrostatic test in accordance with UL 142. Tank Integrity Testing After Onsite Installation of Tank and Tank Connections: Tanks and connections shall be tested by the Contractor for tightness after installation and before being placed into service in accordance with NFPA 20 Sections 21.5.2.2 through 21/5/2/8,as applicable.Requirements for hydrostatic or pneumatic tightness testing for shop fabricated aboveground horizontal tanks are included in NFPA Section 21.5.2.4. 1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.General: 1.Horizontal tank design criteria shall be in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code,2012 International Fire Code,the most current criteria of the American Society of Civil Engineers,and the most current edition of UL 142.Design shall use the following parameters: a.Specific Gravity =0.8 b.Classification of Structure:Category IV,Essential Facility c.(ASCE/SEI 7-05)"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures” d.Importance Factors (IBC 2012,ASCE7-10): Seismic =1.5 Snow =1.20 23 13 23 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks e.Wind Risk Category =IV f.Design Loading: Seismic =Site Class D;Short Period Response Acceleration:Ss = 0.20,One Second Period Response Acceleration (S1)= 0.10. Ground Snow Load =40 PSF Wind =120 MPH,3 Second Gust,Exposure D The tanks shall be designed,or supplemented,for anticipated shipping and handling loads.Lifting connections shall be provided in accordance with UL 142 where required for shipping and handling.The lifting eyes shall be capable of fully supporting the static weight of the completed tank (empty)without damage to the tank. The tanks shall include the nozzles and fittings shown on the Contract Drawings.Provide water draw assemblies and clock gage stilling wells on all tanks as detailed on the Contract Drawings. Tank dimensions and capacity shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. The tanks shall be anchored as shown on the drawings.If additional anchoring is required by UL 142 for the Contractor's tank design, Contractor shall design,fabricate and install anchors as required to attach to the structural steel framing at no additional cost to the Owner. Tank bottoms and skids shall be designed with sufficient strength and thickness to span the structural steel framing shown on the drawings. B.Design Service Conditions:Unless noted otherwise,all fuel tank appurtenances shall be rated for the following service conditions: 1. 2. 3. Fluid:Diesel fuel and Gasoline Operating temperature range:-50°F to 120°F. Design working pressure:150 psig (min)working pressure at -50°F. 23 13 23-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks 1.8 DRAWINGS A.Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general design,arrangement, and extent of the facility.Due to the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to show all offsets,fittings,and accessories which may be required.Contractor shall carefully investigate the field conditions and work requirements for all trades and arrange accordingly. B.Contractor is responsible for verifying drawing dimensions by making field measurements and preparing separate shop drawings. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.Submit in accordance with the Division 1 specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Materials and apparatus shall be new unless otherwise specified,and each shall have all necessary accessories to make it functionally complete.All items of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.2.MATERIALS A.Steel -Steel Sheets,Plates and shapes shall meet the requirements of Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing of these Specifications as delineated by UL 142. B.Threaded Penetrations -Threaded penetrations shall be female pipe thread,size as indicated. C.Flanged Penetrations -Flanged penetrations shall be class 150#,size as indicated. D.Gaskets -Gaskets shall be Buna-N. 2.3.TANK COMPONENTS A.Factory Coated welded steel fuel storage tanks: 1.Tank Joints: a.Head and shell joints for horizontal cylindrical tanks: 23 1323-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks Primary tank head joints shall incorporate double welded full fillet lap joints in accordance with UL 142 Figure 6.2,No.6, Horizontal seams on the ends of all horizontal tanks shall be either vertical or horizontal.Skewed seams shall be cause for rejection of tanks. 2.Horizontal Tank Ladders and Catwalks: Equip horizontal tanks with exterior bolt on ladders and catwalks as shown on the Contract Drawings.All bolt on components shall be designed and constructed in accordance with federal OSHA, 2003 International Building Code,2003 International Fire Code and UL 142 requirements. Exterior ladder and catwalk components shall be shop assembled for field installation and hot dipped galvanized as specified in Section 09 98 00 -Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings.Design shall permit field installation of exterior ladders and catwalks without field welding. Verify fit of bolt-on ladder components to tanks prior to painting tanks;remove and package separately for shipping. 3.Pipe/conduit standoffs: a.Equip tanks with all,fittings,supports and appurtenances as shown on the Contract Drawings. b.All components shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the Specifications and applicable Federal OSHA,2012 International Building Code,2012 International Fire Code and UL 142 requirements. c.All piping shall be Schedule 80 with welded joints unless shown otherwise in the Contract Drawings. 4.Fabricated Materials: a.Tolerances for fabricated materials shall conform to the following: i.Shear:1/16 Inch 23 13 23-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks li.Rolling: Out of Round:+-3% Circumference:+-3/16 Inch Radius:+-1.5% ili.Circle Shearing:+-1/8 Inch iv.Frame Cutting:+-1/16 Inch V.Squareness:<1/8 Inch 5.Horizontal tank saddles and skids: a.All horizontal tanks to be provided with integral steel saddles and skid foundations in accordance with UL 142,Section 31 and the Contract Drawings. b.Saddles to be seal welded to tank -bolt on or strap on saddles will not be accepted.Space saddles as shown on the Contract Drawings. c.Provide minimum W8x35 skid foundations. d.Skids to extend 12"or 24”beyond each end of tank assembly,as shown on the Contract Drawings,be capped with a %inch thick end plate at 45 degree angle to horizontal,and be provided with 4" diameter schedule 80 steel pipe tow bars at each end to allow dragging of the tank and lifting from one end with no damage to the tank assembly. e.Skid and saddles shall be constructed such that the vertical distance between the bottom of the tank skid and the bottom of the tank is no less than 8 inches and no greater than 10 inches. 6.Tank Labeling a.All tanks shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of the 2012 IFC Chapter 34 and NFPA 704.Each end of dual- compartment tanks shall be labeled for volume (gallons)and 23 13 23-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks product type.All tank penetrations shall be labeled in accordance with the Contract Drawings in 2-inch high black lettering. 2.4 TANK COATINGS A.Coating System 1.The tanks,skids,fittings,nozzles,and standoff supports shall be shop coated in accordance with Section 09 96 00 and in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.All ladders,ladder cages, catwalks and railings shall be hot dipped galvanized per Section 09 98 00. a.Surfaces to be coated: i.All exterior surfaces of tanks,including skids,pipe supports,fittings,pipes. b.Surfaces not coated:Flange faces,and penetration threads. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TANK PLACEMENT A.Install tanks on new tank foundation decking in accordance with the Contract Drawings,the referenced publications,and the manufacturer's written instructions,checklists,and warranty requirements for each system component. 3.2 COATING REPAIR A.Any damage to the factory-applied coating shall be repaired and restored to the original finish in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.TESTING A.Pressure test all tanks prior to installation and painting.Pressure test tanks in accordance with the International Fire Code and UL Standard 142. 3.4 WARRANTY A.The Contractor shall warrant the tanks against any defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of shipment. 23 13 23-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 13 23 Mertarvik,Alaska Facility Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks B.In the event any such defect should occur,the Project Manager shall report it in writing to the Contractor during the warranty period. END OF SECTION 23 13 23-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Scope:This section applies to all hydronic (glycol)piping systems. B.Section includes: 1. 2 3. 4 5 Coolant (engine cooling)piping. Heat recovery piping. Unions and flanges. Valves and strainers. Engine coolant (ethylene glycol). 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B C. D E. Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. Section 23 07 19 -Piping Insulation Section 23 21 16 -Hydronic Specialties. Section 26 32 13.10 -Engine Generators. 13 >REFERENCES A.American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.AYPYNASME B16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. ASME B16.4 -Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. ASME B31.9 -Building Services Piping. ASME Section IX -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B.ASTM International: l. 2. ASTM AS3B -Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. C.American Welding Society: 1.AWS AS.8 -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 232113-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.AWSDI1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel. D.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1.MSS SP 58 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Materials,Design and Manufacturer. 2.MSS SP 69 -Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and Application. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Where more than one piping system material is specified,provide compatible system components and joints. B.Provide flanges,unions,and couplings at locations requiring servicing.Use unions, flanges,and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. C.Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Drawings and specifications.]Use ball valves or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment where indicated. E.Use gauge cock isolation valves to isolate instrumentation and small devices where indicated. F.Use hose end drain valves with cap for drains where indicated. G.Flexible Connectors:Use flexible connectors and hoses where indicated. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data: 1.Piping:Submit manufacturers catalog information for pipe materials,fittings,and accessories. 2.Valves and strainers:Submit manufacturer's catalog information with data and ratings for each service. CLOSEOUT A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems. C.Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. 2321 13-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping B.Fabricator or Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section with current certification. 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.Inspect for damage. B.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings.Maintain in place until installation. C.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the Work,and isolating parts of completed system. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 PIPING A.Provide copper tube mains and branch piping as indicated on Drawings. 1.Copper Tubing:ASTM B88,Type L drawn. 2.Fittings:ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 3.Joints:soldered with 95-5 tin-antimony solder or silver solder except on tee drill connections use copper brazing rod. UNIONS AND FLANGES A.Unions: 1.Copper Piping:Bronze unions with solder ends except where specifically indicated as fitting unions provide solder by NPT bronze unions. B.Flanges: 1.Copper Piping:Class 150,bronze companion flanges for transition to steel piping or flanged valves and equipment. 2.Flange Gaskets:Full faced 1/8”thick nitrile rubber,Alaska Rubber or approved equal. 3.Flange Bolts:On all exterior piping provide stainless steel bolts,nuts,and washers. Coat with anti-seize prior to assembly. BUTTERFLY VALVES A.Lug style ductile or cast iron body,ANSI 150#flange pattern ends,stainless steel stem with bronze bushing,bronze disc,EPDM seats,locking handle.Milwaukee ML-233E, Bray Series 31,or approved equal. 23 2113-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 BALL VALVES A.Threaded or soldered end as indicated and required,bronze body,chrome plated bronze or brass ball,full port,TFE or Viton packing and seat ring,minimum 200 psig WOG rating.Domestic only.Apollo,Hammond,Milwaukee,Nibco,or approved equal. CHECK VALVES A.Threaded or soldered end as indicated and required,bronze body,swing check style, minimum 200 psig WOG rating.Domestic only.Hammond,Milwaukee,Nibco,or approved equal. DRAIN VALVES A.Bronze body,1/2”or 3/4”size and solder cup or MPT connection to match associated pipe connection,3/4"male hose end with cap and jack chain.FNW 426D,426F,427D, or 427F or approved equal. GAUGE COCK ISOLATION VALVE A.Brass body,MPT by FPT ends,T-handle,Legend Valve item 101-531 (1/4”)or Item 101-532 (3/8”),or approved equal. B.Install on all pressure gauges,small hose connections,and where indicated on Drawings. STRAINERS A.Type Y pattern,bronze body,solder ends,gasketed cap,20 mesh stainless steel screen. 200 psig minimum working pressure,Mueller No.358S or approved equal. ENGINE COOLANT (ETHYLENE GLYCOL) A.Glycol Solution for Engine Cooling Service:The glycol shall be extended life (heavy duty)ethylene glycol,Shell Rotella ELC,or approved equal.Note that standard life coolant will not be accepted. B.The solution shall be premixed to a ratio of 50%ethylene glycol to 50%water.The water shall be treated in accordance with glycol manufacturer's recommendations.The mixed solution shall be dyed bright pink,no exceptions. C.The solution shall be packaged in sealed 55 gallon drums and labeled "Ethylene Glycol" with pink lettering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 EXAMINATION A.Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. PREPARATION A.Ream pipe ends and remove burrs.Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside,before assembly. 23 2113-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping B.Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt.Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. C.On copper tube and solder fittings mechanically clean to bright metal and flux prior to assembling. D.On threaded pipe and fittings thoroughly coat male threads with Teflon tape and Teflon based pipe joint compound prior to assembling. 3.3.INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. 3.4.INSTALLATION -PIPING SYSTEMS A. B. G. H. Route piping in orderly manner and slope to drain at low points and vent at high points. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,not inverted.Provide access where valves are not exposed. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system. Prepare and paint piping,supports,and accessories not pre-finished in accordance with Section 23 05 00. Insulate piping in accordance with Section 23 07 19. Install identification on piping systems in accordance with Section 23 05 00. 3.5 COOLING SYSTEM SHOP TESTING AND FLUSHING A. B. D. Install conical "witch hat”strainers on inlets to radiators.Orient "witch hat”to collect debris inside cone. Fill the entire system with potable water and hydrostatically test all piping at 100 psig minimum for one hour with no noticeable water leaks or pressure drops except as caused by temperature change.Isolate engines and radiators prior to pressure testing. Flush the entire system with potable water.Run engines briefly with limited load as required to obtain circulation through the entire system.To ensure engines are not damaged,do not run under high load or for extended periods of time with potable water. Drain system completely.Remove "witch hat”strainers. 3.6 COOLING SYSTEM SHOP FILLING AND CHARGING A.After pressure testing and flushing,fill entire system with ethylene glycol solution. Perform all functional testing of the module required by the Contract Documents.Ensure 23 21 13-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping B. C. that engines are operated long enough with adequate load to get thermostats fully open and to circulate glycol through all piping and accessories. Operate control room heating system to ensure it is fully charged with glycol. Verify proper function of all instrumentation and calibrate all devices. 3.7 COOLING SYSTEM SHOP DRAINING AND BREAKDOWN A.Upon completion of testing allow system to cool down to ambient temperature.Isolate piping system with valves as required to allow portions of piping to be removed as indicated on the Drawings for module breakdown and shipping.Drain all external portions of the piping and place the glycol solution in the original ethylene glycol drums and seal for shipping with the module. 3.8 COOLING SYSTEM ON-SITE FILLING AND CHARGING A. B.m7Reinstall radiators and reconnect piping as indicated on the Drawings then fill with ethylene glycol solution.Fill glycol storage tank to 90%level. Hydrostatically test all piping at 100 psig minimum for one hour with no noticeable water leaks or pressure drops except as caused by temperature change.Isolate engines and radiators prior to pressure testing. Perform all functional testing of the module required by the Contract Documents.Ensure that engines are operated long enough with adequate load to get thermostats fully open and to circulate glycol through all piping and accessories.Operate control room heating system to ensure it is fully charged with glycol. Verify proper function of all instrumentation and re-calibrate all devices as required. Top off piping with glycol solution to bring the level in the expansion tank to approximately 2/3 full with system up to 180F minimum. Consolidate all remaining glycol solution into the original ethylene glycol drums,seal, and leave with the module for future use. 3.9 HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM SHOP TESTING AND FLUSHING A. B. Install temporary pipe or hose jumper between flanges where module heat recovery pipe terminates. Hydrostatically test all piping at 100 psig minimum for one hour with no noticeable water leaks or pressure drops except as caused by temperature change. Fill the entire system with potable water and flush thoroughly.Run pumps as required to obtain circulation through the entire system. Operate heat recovery system with engines under load and engine cooling system up to normal temperature.Verify proper function of all instrumentation and calibrate all devices. 23 2113-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Piping 3.10 HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM SHOP DRAINING AND BREAKDOWN A.Upon completion of testing allow system to cool down to ambient temperature.Drain system completely.Blow out with air as required to ensure freeze protection. B.Remove portions of piping as indicated on the Drawings for module breakdown and shipping. END OF SECTION 23 2113-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Equipment and Specialties SECTION 23 21 16 HYDRONIC EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SUMMARY A.Scope:This section applies to all hydronic (glycol)piping systems. B.Section includes: 1.Engine Cooling System Equipment. 2.Heating Recovery and Plant Heating Equipment. 3.Expansion tank sight gauge and cap. 4.Hoses. RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 --Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. C.Section 23 21 13 -Hydronic Piping. D.Division 26 -Electrical. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data: 1.Submit manufacturers catalog literature including manufacturer's installation instructions for each item indicated on the Cooling System Equipment Schedule and the Heat Recovery &Plant Heating Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1. 2.Submit manufacturer's catalog information for hoses and all other items specified herein. C.Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for glycol storage and expansion tank fabrication. Note that if all items will be fabricated exactly as indicated on the Drawings,the design Drawings can be submitted in lieu of shop drawings. CLOSEOUT A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. B.Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation instructions,assembly views,servicing requirements,lubrication instruction, and replacement parts list. 23 21 16-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Equipment and Specialties 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. B.Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Accept material on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.Inspect for damage. B.Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,caps and closures, completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system until installation. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Division 1 -Material and Equipment:Storage and Protection. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 COOLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.Provide all equipment and appurtenances as indicated in the Cooling System Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1 except for radiators as indicated on the Drawings. HEAT RECOVERY &PLANT HEATING EQUIPMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A.Provide all equipment and appurtenances as indicated in the Heat Recovery &Plant Heating Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1. LIQUID LEVEL SIGHT GAUGE A.Borosilicate glass tube,aluminum body,Buna n seals,1/2"MPT connections,9”centers. Lube Devices G607-09-A-1-4 or approved equal. EXPANSION TANK CAP A.Pre-Vent Fill Cap,2-1/2 PSIG Pressure,1-1/2 Oz.Vacuum,2"NPT Connection.Cim- Tek 60001 or approved equal HOSES A.Wire reinforced corrugated silicone hose.Parker 6621 or approved equal.Sized as indicated on the Drawings. B.Install on barbed hose (king)nipples with stainless steel T-Bolt clamps,Nyco Supra W2, or approved equal. 2321 16-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 21 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Hydronic Equipment and Specialties PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged equipment as required or replace with new equipment. 3.2.INSTALLATION A.Install equipment and accessories in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install piping system and appurtenances as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A.Clean and flush glycol system before adding glycol solution.See Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping. END OF SECTION »2321 16-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Ducts and Ventilation Equipment SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 A. SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Duct Materials. 2.Fans. 3.Dampers. 4.Actuators. RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. B.Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. C.Division 26 -Electrical. REFERENCES A.ASTM International: 1.ASTM A653 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2.ASTM B209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B.Air Movement and Control Association International,Inc.:AMCA 500 -Test Methods for Louvers,Dampers,and Shutters. C.National Fire Protection Association:NFPA 90A -Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:SMACNA -HVAC Duct Construction Standard -Metal and Flexible. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. SUBMITTALS Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data: 23 3113-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Ducts and Ventilation Equipment 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.Submit data for duct materials and accessories. 2.Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each item indicated on the Ventilation Equipment Schedule on Sheet M1.1. C.Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings for fabrication of ductwork.Note that if ductwork will be fabricated exactly as indicated on the Drawings,the design Drawings can be submitted in lieu of shop drawings. CLOSEOUT A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. B.Project Record Documents:Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.Record changes in fitting location and type.Show additional fittings used. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA -HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and International Mechanical Code. QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. B.Installer:Company specializing in performing work of this section. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B.Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet,lock-forming quality, having zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90. B.Aluminum:Type 5052 alloy,minimum 0.090”thick.2)Fasteners:Rivets,bolts,or sheet metal screws except where indicated as welded. D.Sealants,Mastics and Tapes:Conform to UL 181A.Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings. 23 3113-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Metal Ducts and Ventilation Equipment 2.2 FABRICATION A.Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible and as indicated on the Drawings.Provide duct material,gages,reinforcing,and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B.Fabricate assemblies from galvanized steel or aluminum as indicated on the Drawings. Galvanized sheet metal assemblies shall have standard mechanical joints sealed airtight. Aluminum assemblies shall have continuous welded joints.Grind weld joints smooth after fabrication. C.Exterior Hood Fabrications:fabricate all exterior hoods from minimum 0.090”thick Type 5052 aluminum using welded joints. 2.3 CONTROL DAMPER A.Opposed blade low-leakage control damper,galvanized steel constructions,304 stainless steel bearings and jamb seals,EPDM blades seals,Greenheck VCD-23 or approved equal.See fabrication details on Drawings for sizes. 2.4 ACTUATORS A.On duct dampers install 120V spring return actuator,Belimo AFBUP or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged equipment as required or replace with new equipment. B.Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. 3.2.INSTALLATION A.Fabricate and install ducts as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. B.Verify proper operation of fans and dampers. END OF SECTION 23 3113-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 35 16.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping SECTION 23 35 16.10 ENGINE EXHAUST AND CRANK VENT PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Engine Exhaust piping 2.Crank Vent piping 3.Mufflers 4.Flanges and Gaskets 5.Crank Vent Hose 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Requirements for Mechanical. Section 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment. Section 23 07 19 -Piping Insulation. Section 26 32 13.10 -Engine Generators. 1.3 >REFERENCES A.American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. 2.ASME B31.9 -Building Services Piping. 3.ASME Section IX -Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. ASTM International: 1.ASTM AS53B -Standard Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.UL 536 -Flexible Metallic Hose. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. B. Provide piping of material as specified in PART 2. Where more than one piping system material is specified,provide compatible system components and joints.Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. Provide flanges or couplings at locations requiring servicing and where indicated.Do not use direct welded connections to equipment. 23 35 16.10 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 35 16.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 D. E.Flexible Connector:Use at exhaust piping connections to engine as indicated in Drawings. SUBMITTALS A.Provide submittals for all products and systems described herein.Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for Mechanical and Division 1. B.Product Data: 1.Piping:Submit manufacturers catalog information for pipe and fittings,both carbon steel and stainless steel as indicated. 2.Flanges and Gaskets:Submit manufacturer's catalog information with data and ratings for each service. Mufflers:Submit manufacturer's catalog information. 4.Rain Caps:Submit manufacturer's catalog information. Crank Vent Hose:Submit manufacturer's catalog information. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Division 1 -Quality Control B.Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. C.Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. D.Perform pipe welding with experienced welder with current API or equivalent certification for pipe welding in all positions. QUALIFICATIONS A.Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. B.Fabricator or Installer:Company specializing in performing Work of this section. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Division |-Material and Equipment:Transportation and Handling. B.Accept piping and materials on site in shipping containers with labeling in place.Inspect for damage. C.Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Provide pipe hangers and supports per Drawings and specifications. Maintain in place until installation. 23 35 16.10 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 35 16.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 PIPING (EXHAUST,CRANK VENT) A.Interior Exhaust Pipe (riser from engine to muffler):ASTM A53 welded black steel pipe, Schedule 40,with ASTM A235 seamless carbon steel butt weld fittings and ASTM A105 weld flanges.Note that at Contractors option interior piping may be stainless equivalent to exterior. B.Exterior Exhaust Pipe:ASTM A312 Type 304L welded low carbon stainless steel pipe, Schedule 10,with ASTM A403 Type 304L low carbon stainless steel butt weld fittings and ASTM A182 weld flanges. C.Interior Crank Vent Pipe:ASTM A106B black steel pipe,Schedule 40,with ASTM A105 socket weld fittings.Note that at Contractors option interior piping may be stainless equivalent to exterior. D.Exterior Crank Vent Pipe:ASTM A312 Type 304L welded low carbon stainless steel pipe,Schedule 40,with ASTM A403 Type 304L low carbon stainless steel butt weld fittings and ASTM A182 weld flanges. E.Perform pipe welding with experienced welder with current API or equivalent certification for pipe welding in all positions. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.Exhaust Pipe Flexible Connectors:Furnished with Engine Generator,see Section 26 32 13 -Engine Generators. FLANGED JOINTS A.Flanges:ANSI 150#,configuration as indicated on Drawings. B.Flange Gaskets:High temperature,full face,Frenzelit Novatec 925F or approved equal. C.Flange Bolts:Plain carbon steel (black)or stainless steel bolts,nuts,and washers.Coat with high temperature anti-seize prior to assembly. MUFFLERS A.Mufflers to be disc style,bottom center in and side out,ASA 125#flanges,2”internal acoustical/thermal wrap,four mounting tabs,high temperature satin black finish. Mufflers shall be critical grade with minimum 28db reduction at 125Hz.E.M.Products DCK2,G.T.Exhaust Systems H1-5,or approved equal.See Drawings for size. RAIN CAPS A.Exhaust rain caps,hinged type,all stainless steel construction,G.T.Exhaust Systems or approved equal.See Drawings for size 23 35 16.10 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 23 35 16.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Exhaust and Crank Vent Piping 2.6 CRANK VENT HOSE A.Crank Vent Hose:Heavy duty oil resistant PVC suction hose.Tigerflex ORV or approved equal.See design drawings for size. B.Install on barbed hose (king)nipples with stainless steel T-Bolt Clamps Fasten with lined stainless steel T-bolt clamps,Nyco Supra W2,or approved equal PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 EXAMINATION A.Check materials for damage that may have occurred during shipment.Repair damaged materials as required or replace with new materials. PREPARATION A.Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside,before assembly. INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Drawings and specifications.Refer to Section 23 05 29. INSTALLATION -PIPING A.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. B.Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. C.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. D.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the work,and isolating parts of completed system. E.Prepare and paint crank vent pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories in accordance with Section 23 05 00. F.Piping Insulation:Insulate interior exhaust piping as indicated on the Drawings. INSTALLATION --MUFFLER A.Install muffler in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and support as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 23 35 16.10 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A.Provide the labor,materials,equipment and test equipment necessary to furnish, install,and place into operation the power,motor,lighting,control,alarm,and associated electrical systems of this Contract.Connect motors,meters,panels, sensors,switches,and outlets or any other electrical device installed or provided as part of the project.Mark and identify circuits,terminal boards,equipment, enclosures,etc.with identification numbers,wire numbers,nameplates,and warning signs.Test,adjust and calibrate equipment and start-up all electrical equipment and its associated mechanical attachments as necessary to place the project into operation. B.Provide and install all control equipment and wiring to instruments and devices installed by others. C.Where the work of several crafts is involved,coordinate all related work to provide each system in complete and in proper operating order. D.Cooperate with all others involved in the project,with due regard to their work,to promote rapid completion. E.Local Conditions:The Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the work as well as the local conditions under which the work is to be performed. Schedule work with regard to seasons,weather,climate conditions,and all other local conditions which may affect the progress and quality of work. F.See Division 1 of which contain information and requirements that apply to work specified herein. G.The Contractor shall provide electrical service to,connection and/or intercon- nection of various units of equipment supplied by others.The Contractor shall not be required to set in place or align motors or calibrate devices supplied as an integral part of equipment provided by others. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.This section applies to all Division 26 work. B.See Divisions 1,21,23,26,and 33 which contain information and requirements that apply to work specified herein. 26 05 00-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical 1.03 TELEPHONE SERVICE A.Telephone service is not a part of this project. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Codes:Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable national,state, and local codes;including,but not limited to the latest legally enacted editions of the following specifically noted requirements: 1.NFPA 70,National Electric Code -NEC; 2.ANSI-C2,National Electrical Safety Code -NESC; 3.International Building Code -IBC;and 4.International Fire Code -IFC. Standards:Reference to the following standards infers that installation, equipment,and materials shall be within the limits for which it was designed, tested,and approved,in conformance with the current publications and standards of the following organizations: 1.American National Standards Institute -ANSI; 2.American Society for Testing and Materials -ASTM; 3.American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Consultants -ASHRAE (Standard 90-75); Factory Mutual -FM; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Consultants -IEEE; National Electrical Contractors Association -NECA; National Electrical Manufacturers'Association -NEMA; National Fire Protection Association -NFPA,and oeFeNDYYFSUnderwriters Laboratory -UL 1.05 SPECIFIC TERMINOLOGY A.Streamlining:In many instances,the products,reference standards,and other itemized specifications have been listed without verbiage.In these cases,it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the products and perform in accordance with the references listed. The word "Contractor"as used in Division 26 specifications shall mean "Electrical Contractor." 26 05 00 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical C.The word "General Contractor"as used in Division 26 specifications shall mean the Contractor responsible for the project. "Furnish"means to purchase material as shown and specified,and cart the material to an approved location at the site or elsewhere as noted or agreed to be installed by supporting crafts. "Install"means to set in place and connect,ready for use and in complete and properly operating finished condition,material that has been furnished. "Provide"means furnish all products,labor,sub-contracts,and appurtenances required and install to a complete and properly operating,finished condition. "Rough-in and Connect"means provide an appropriate system connection such as conduit with "J"boxes,wiring,switches,disconnects,etc.,and all wiring connections.Equipment furnished is received,uncrated,assembled and set in place under the Division in which it is specified. "Accessible"means arranged so that an appropriately dressed man 6-foot 2 inches tall,weighing 250 pounds,may approach the area in question with the tools and products necessary for the work intended,and may then position himself to properly perform the task to be accomplished,without disassembly or damage to the surrounding installation. "Serviceable"means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly removed and replaced without disassembly,destruction,or damage to the surrounding installation. "Product"is a generic term which includes materials,equipment,fixtures,and any physical item used on the project. 1.06 DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS &SYMBOLS A.The Drawings and Specifications are complementary;what is shown on one is as binding as if called for in both.Do not scale the Drawings.Locations of devices, fixtures,and equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. The Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not show precise routing of conduits or exact location of all products,and may not show in minute detail all features of the installation;however,provide all systems complete and in proper operating order. Drawing symbols used for basic materials,equipment and methods are commonly used by the industry and should be universally understood.Special items are identified by a supplementary list of graphical illustrations,or called for on the Drawings or in the specifications. 26 05 00 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical 1.07 SUBMITTALS,MANUALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A.Submittals:Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 26 specifications and shown on the Drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project.Furnish submittals in the manner described herein, and in Division 1.In addition,include data for review,and organize data,as noted below:In addition,include data for review,and organize data,as noted below: 1.Specific reference and/or drawings reference for which literature is submitted for review with an index,following specification format,and item by item identification. 2.Manufacturer's name and address,and supplier's name,address,and phone number. 3.Catalog designation or model number with rough-in data and dimensions. 4.Operation characteristics. 5.Complete customized listing of characteristics required.Indicate whether item is "As Specified"or "Proposed Substitution.”Indicate any deviations on submittal.Mark out all non-applicable items.The terminology "As Specified"used without this customized listing is not acceptable. 6.Wiring diagrams for the specific system. 7.Coordination data to check protective devices. 8.Working construction Drawings (Shop Drawings). Submittal Data: a.Individual Special Systems (Control Panels,etc.) b.Transformers. c.Potential and current transformers. d.Electrical Utilities material and equipment. e.Lighting Fixtures,Lamps and Accessories f.Service,Disconnects. g.Raceways,Fittings,and Supports. h.Conductors. i.Wire and Cable. 26 05 00 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical j.Wiring Devices. k.Instrumentation. .Additional items that may be listed on the Schedules,Bill of Materials or specified on the drawings. Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only and does not relieve the Contractor from any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity,dimension,fit or proper technical design of manufactured equipment.Where deviations of substitute product or system performance have not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor,provision of a complete and satisfactory working installation of equal quality to system specified is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1.08 TESTS A. B. Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for field testing all station service and other electrical systems and equipment shown on the drawings.Testing of the generators and switchgear will be performed by the AUTHORITY after substantial completion. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a test plan for review and approval by the AUTHORITY. 1.Field testing cannot take place without an approved test plan. a.The Test Plan shall outline the tests planned for each item of equipment. b.The Test Procedures shall identify the test equipment to be utilized,the action of each test step and the expected result so that a test technician who has no knowledge of the details of the equipment design shall be able to successfully conduct the test. 2.In the presence of the AUTHORITY, a.Test the equipment and electrical circuits for proper connection, continuity,and absence of undesirable shorts and grounds. b.Test wire and cable installation,when complete. c.Check for continuity,visual damage,marking,and proper phase sequence before performing insulation testing. 26 05 00-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 10. Common Work Results for Electrical 1)Megger bus work,switches,breakers and circuits phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground disconnecting and reconnecting equipment which cannot be meggered otherwise. 2)The minimum acceptable steady-state value is 50 megohms.Ambient temperature and humidity during testing shall be recorded. Verify operation,calibration,and settings of the meters,relays and indicating devices. Check all auxiliary equipment,i.e.,heaters,thermostats,lights,and all illuminated indicating devices and lamps,and all audible alarm devices to verify that they function properly. Take station service equipment test load readings after all loads are connected.Obtain the maximum reading for each phase and neutral with all lighting,appliances,motors (as applicable use largest combination), and other loads connected to the panels in service. Check fuses with an ohmmeter;ring out wiring and busing;check operation of control and safety interlocks. Test motor driven equipment motors before energization.Insulation test shall consist of megohmeter check phase-to-ground,per IEEE Standard 43 or manufacturer's recommendations. Load test each motor of motor driven equipment showing the following: a.Nameplate ratings (horsepower),(speed),(voltage),(phase), (ampere rating of motor at full load). b.Measured load in amperes on lines 1-2. Load test pump motors,noting the operating conditions at the time of the test.Motor test data shall show suction and discharge conditions (pressure, temperature,humidity,to where such conditions affect load). Overload heaters shall be checked and the size on each phase shall be noted at this time on the test sheet. D.Report all test results in writing.Where tests disclose problem areas,retest after the defect has been corrected. E.Demonstrate that the electrical installation is working by operating all electrical systems and equipment.Simulate control inputs,responses to outputs and alarm conditions and their acknowledgement,artificially where necessary,for complete system tests. 26 05 00 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical F,Operate the electrical systems until acceptance of the work.Instruct operators in the correct operation of all electrical and control systems under your jurisdiction. G.Any rework or repair of equipment required during or as a result of the testing shall be done by the Contractor at no additional expense to the AUTHORITY. H.The Contractor shall furnish to the AUTHORITY at the time the project is accepted,any special tools,calibration equipment,and testing apparatus specified or furnished by the equipment manufacturer for the proper adjustment and maintenance of the electrical equipment provided. 1.09 CODES AND INSPECTIONS A.Electrical work shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code and local and state codes in legal force in the project area. 1.If the Contractor observes that the Drawings and/or Specifications are at variance with such codes and regulations,he shall promptly notify the AUTHORITY in writing. 2.Should the Contractor perform any work in non-compliance with the above-mentioned codes and regulations without such notice to the AUTHORITY,the Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The above codes are referenced to establish minimum requirements and wherever this specification requires higher grades of material or workmanship than required by the codes,this specification shall prevail. All electrical work shall be performed by Alaska licensed Journeyman Electricians or licensed Apprentice Electricians under the direct supervision of a licensed Electrical Administrator. Submit written proof of all Journeyman and Apprentice Electricians'current licenses. Submit certification for tests and inspections required by the electrical inspector having jurisdiction.Certificates of approval that are issued shall be transmitted to the AUTHORITY. The Contractor shall pay all costs and fees required by inspecting and other agencies required for his work. Cooperate with the AUTHORITY and provide assistance at all times for the inspection of the electrical work performed under this Contract.Remove covers, operate machinery,or perform any reasonable work which,in the opinion of the AUTHORITY,will be necessary to determine the completeness,quality,or adequacy of the work. 26 05 00 -7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical 1.10 COORDINATION A.Electrical Drawings are partly diagrammatic and it is not the intent to show in 1.11 1.12 detail all features of work or exact physical arrangement of equipment.The location of outlets and equipment are approximate unless dimensioned.The exact locations and routing of conduits shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interferences and by the location of electrical terminations on equipment. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. If conduit is placed incorrectly with respect to equipment connections or if equipment connections are relocated without appropriate changes in the electrical work,and the resulting work is not coordinated,the work affected shall be removed and re-installed at the Contractor's expense,even if removal and replacement of structural and/or mechanical parts of the work are necessary. The Contractor shall schedule his work to coordinate through the General Contractor and with all other subcontractors,power and telephone utilities in order to maintain job progress and to avoid conflicts with equipment installation or work done by the various trades. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining required clearspace.Should the Contractor become aware of a clearspace violation or if the installation of electrical equipment as shown produces a clear pace violation,notify the AUTHORITY in writing before proceeding with the installation. LOCATIONS A.If hazardous location boundaries exist,they will be shown on the drawings. Locations for seal-off fittings shall be field determined by the Contractor. Wet Locations:Wet locations shall include all areas underground (below grade), in direct contact with the earth,areas subject to saturation with water or other liquids from splashing,surface water,exposed to the weather and unprotected. RECORD DRAWINGS A. B. Division 1 -Project Record Documents. Reference requirements stated elsewhere in these specifications. In addition to other requirements,mark up a clean set of Drawings as the work progresses,to show the dimensioned location and routing of all electrical work which will become permanently concealed.Show routing or work in permanently concealed blind spaces within the facility.Show complete routing and sizing of any significant revisions to the systems shown. 26 05 00-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical 1.13 1.14 D.Maintain Record drawings in an up-to-date fashion in conjunction with the actual progress of installation."Record"progress mark-ups shall be available on-site for examination by the AUTHORITY at all times. Prepare wiring diagrams on reproducible media using AutoCAD V.2012 or later for all individual special systems as installed.Identify all components and show all wire and terminal numbers and connections. Prior to substantial completion,deliver these drawings and their electronic files in both .dwg and full size .pdf format to the AUTHORITY and obtain a written receipt. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Prior to final acceptance,instruct operators on the proper operation and maintenance of all electrical systems and equipment under this contract.Make available a qualified technician for each component of the installation for this instruction.Give these operating instructions after the operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished to the AUTHORITY. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals in the manner described elsewhere in these specifications.In addition,organize manual and include data and narrative as noted below.Submit in accordance with Division 1. Provide a separate chapter for each section of the electrical specifications with subchapters for each class of equipment or system.Provide a table of contents for each chapter,and each major item in each chapter,to indicate the page number of each.Label all pages to assure correct placement in manual.Identify each piece of equipment with its associated nameplate number,i.e.pump P-1A,etc. Operating Sequence Narrative: 1.In each chapter,describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. 2.Describe procedures for start-up,operation,emergency operation and shutdown of each system.If a particular sequence is required,give step- by-step instructions in that order. 3.Describe all seasonal adjustments which should be accomplished for each system. 4.Provide the above descriptions in typewritten,simple outline,narrative form. Maintenance Instructions: 26 05 00-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical 1.Provide complete information for preventive maintenance for each product,including recommended frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task. 2.Provide all information of a maintenance nature covering warranty items, etc.,which have not been discussed in the manufacturer's literature or the operating sequence narrative. 3.Provide complete informational data for all the spare and replacement parts for each product and system.Properly identify each component by part number and manufacturer. Manufacturers'Brochures:Include manufacturers'descriptive literature covering all products used in each system,together with illustrations,exploded views and renewal parts lists.Highlight all applicable items and instructions,or mark-out non-applicable items.Brochure bearing submittal review stamp are not acceptable. Shop Drawings:Provide a copy of all corrected,approved shop drawings for the project either with the manufacturers'brochures or properly identified in a separate subsection. 1.15.INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL A.Provide services of qualified representative of supplier of each item or system listed below to instruct operators in operation and maintenance of item or system. Make instruction when system is complete of number of hours indicated,and performed at time mutually agreeable. 1.Electrical Distribution Equipment:2 hours 2.Alarm and Control Panels:2 hours per panel Have approved operating and maintenance data,and parts lists for all equipment on hand at the time of instruction. 1.16 PROJECT COMPLETION AND DEMONSTRATION A. B. Division 1 -Closeout Requirements. Tests:During final inspection,conduct operating tests for approval. Demonstrate installation to operate satisfactorily in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.Should a portion of installation fail to meet requirements of Contract Documents,repair or replace items failing to meet requirements until items can be demonstrated to comply. 26 05 00-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical D.Have instruments available for measuring,voltage and current values and for demonstration of continuity,ground,or open circuit conditions.Furnish personnel to assist in taking measurements and making tests. E.In the event that systems are not complete and fully operational at the time of Final Inspection,all costs of any subsequent inspections shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the AUTHORITY. 1.18 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION A.Submit,at time of request for Final Inspection,a completed letter in the following format: I,(Name),of (Firm),certify that the Electrical Work is complete in accordance with Contract Drawings and Specifications,and authorized change orders (copies of which are attached hereto),and will be ready for Final Inspection as of (Date).I further certify that the following Specification requirements have been fulfilled: 1.Megger readings performed,copies of log attached. 2.Operating manuals completed and instructions of operating personnel performed (Date). (Signed) Alaska Energy Authority 3.Record drawings up-to-date and ready to deliver to the AUTHORITY. 4.Emergency systems tested and fully operational. All other tests required by Specifications have been performed. 6.All systems are fully operational.Project is ready for Final Inspection. SIGNED:DATE: TITLE: PART 2 --MATERIALS Not used. PART 3 --EXECUTION Not used. 26 05 00 -11 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Common Work Results for Electrical END OF SECTION 26 05 00 -12 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Basic Electrical Materials and Methods SECTION 26 05 02 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A.This Section describes specific requirements,products,and methods of execution which are typical throughout the Electrical Work of this Project.Additional requirements for the specific systems will be found in the Division specifying those systems. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Division 1 B.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Cc.All other Divisions 21,23,26,and 33 Specifications COORDINATION A.Layout all the work in advance and avoid conflict with other Work in progress. Physical dimensions shall be determined from Civil and Structural Drawings. Verify locations for junction boxes,disconnect switches,stub-ups,etc.,for connection to equipment furnished by others,or in other Divisions of this Work. SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS A.Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of serviceable components to access space provided. B.Coordinate installation of all products to allow proper service areas for any items requiring periodic maintenance inspection or replacement. C.Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed. ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS A.Arrange all work to provide access to all serviceable and/or operable products. Layout work to optimize net usable access space within confines of space available.Advise the Authority,in a timely manner,of areas where proper access or required clearspace cannot be maintained.Furnish Layout Drawings to verify this claim,if requested. B.Provide access doors in ceilings,walls,floors,etc.,for access to j-boxes, automatic devices,and all serviceable or operable equipment in concealed spaces. 26 05 02 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Basic Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 2.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED IN DIVISION 26 A. B. All products furnished and installed in permanent construction shall be new,full- weight,standard in every way,and in first class condition. All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Incorporated,(UL)or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local Code-enforcement agency having jurisdiction. Products shall be identical with apparatus or equipment which has been in successful operation for at least two years.All products of similar class or service shall be of one manufacturer. Capacities,sizes,and dimensions given are minimum unless otherwise indicated. All systems and products proposed for use on this project shall be subject to review for adequacy and compliance with Contract Documents. PRODUCTS FURNISHED IN OTHER DIVISIONS A.Controls,including conduit,wiring,and control devices required for the operation of systems furnished in other Divisions shall be installed in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Incorporated (UL)or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local Code-enforcement agency having jurisdiction. All work on the project that falls under the jurisdiction of the electrical trade shall be performed by Licensed Electricians in possession of Alaska State Fitness Cards in conformance with the Electrical Specifications. Provide complete power connections to equipment including but not limited to feeders,connections,disconnects and motor running overcurrent protection. Where starters are provided as part of a packaged product,overcurrent heaters shall be provided. IDENTIFICATION A.Equipment Labels and Nameplates: 1.Provide rigid engraved labels and nameplates of laminated plastic 1/16- inch thick with white letters on a black or gray background.Label for emergency equipment shall be red with white letters. a.Securely attach labels with two screws,minimum,per label,unless rating of panel is affected,use epoxy. 26 05 02 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Basic Electrical Materials and Methods b.Temporary markings not permitted on equipment.Repaint trims housings,etc.,where markings cannot be readily removed. Refinish defaced surfaces. c.No labeling abbreviations will be permitted without prior approval. 2.Label and Nameplate Locations: a.Provide 1/2-inch minimum height letters on following equipment: 1)Service disconnects (red background). 2)Secondary feeder breakers in distribution equipment. Designation as required by load served. 3)Special equipment housed in cabinets,as designated on Drawings,on outside of door. b.Provide 1/4-inch minimum height letters on: 1)Disconnects and starters for motors or fixed appliances - (include item designation and branch feeder circuit number);and 2)Designated electrical equipment. B.Branch Circuit Panelboard Schedules:Provide neatly typed schedule (odd numbered circuits on left side or top,even on right side or bottom)under plastic jacket or protective cover to protect the schedule from damage or dirt.Securely mount on inside face of panelboard door.Define briefly,but accurately,nature of connected load (i.e.,Lighting,interior;receptacles,work bench;etc.)as approved. C.Empty Conduits:Provide tags with typed description of purpose,and location of opposite end,wired to each end of conduits provided for future equipment. D.Conduits:Mark all conduits entering or leaving panels with indelible black magic marker with the circuit numbers of the circuits contained inside. E.Junction Boxes:Mark the circuit numbers of wiring on all junction boxes with steel covers.Mark with indelible black marker. F.Conductors: I.Conductors shall be color coded as indicated on the Electrical Conductor Schedule on Sheet E1.1. 2.Control and alarm circuit conductors a.Field conductors shall be identified by destination panel and terminal block designations. b.Internal (Control Panel)numbering system shall be provided by the Contractor.The numbering system shall assign each logical conductor set a unique identification number that will be reflected on the as-built drawings. 26 05 02 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Basic Electrical Materials and Methods PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Division 1 -Material and Equipment. B.All items shall be delivered and stored in original containers,which shall indicate manufacturer's name,the brand,and the identifying number. C.Items subject to moisture and/or thermal damage shall be stored in a dry,heated place. D.All items shall be covered and protected against dirt,water,chemical and/or mechanical damage. PROTECTION OF PRODUCTS A.The Contractor shall be held responsible for products to be installed under this Contract. B.The Contractor will be required to make good,at his own cost,any injury or damage which said products may sustain before Final Acceptance. INSTALLATION A.All products shall be installed by skilled craftsmen.The norms for execution of the work shall be in conformity with NEC Chapter 3 and the NECA "Standards of Installation,”which herewith is made part of these Specifications. B.Provide working space in accordance with NEC 110.26 to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of equipment. C.Repair all surfaces and furnish all required products and labor to maintain fire- proof,air-tight and water-proof characteristics of the construction. D.Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SUPPORT SYSTEMS A.All interior materials used shall be galvanized or zinc plated. B.All exterior materials used shall be stainless steel.Where support elements are field cut,exposed metal shall be coated with spray-on galvanizing. C.Support from structure only. D.Conduits shown to be run at grade shall be supported by wood sleepers as shown on the drawings.Conduits may share fuel piping sleepers if installed such that neither system will require removal during maintenance or replacement. MOUNTING HEIGHTS A.Mounting heights shall be above finished floor (AFF)or above finished grade as noted below,unless otherwise shown or indicated. 26 05 02 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.Lighting Switches,48 inches to center 2.Receptacles shall be mounted as indicated on the Drawings. B.Other mounting heights are indicated on the Drawings by detail. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.07 3.08 3.09 3.10 A.Obtain written permission from the AUTHORITY before cutting or piercing structural members. B.Sleeves through floors and walls to be galvanized iron pipe,flush with walls, ceilings or finished floors,sized to accommodate the raceway.Interstitial space around conduit passing through sleeves shall be filled with non-hardening duct sealant. PROTECTIVE FINISHES A.Take care not to scratch or deface factory finish on electrical apparatus and devices.Repaint all marred or scratched surfaces. B.Provide hot dip galvanized components for ferrous materials exposed to the weather. CLEAN-UP AND COMMISSIONING A.Throughout the Work,the Contractor shall keep the work area reasonably neat and orderly by periodic clean-ups. B.As independent parts of the installation are completed,they may be commissioned and utilized during construction. WARRANTY A.Division 1 -Closeout Requirements:Warranties. B.Unless otherwise specified,the Warranty starts on the date Written Notice is given that the project is complete and all required corrections have been made. Warranty shall certify that all defects in products or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Contractor,to the satisfaction of the AUTHORITY,for a period of one year,except when,in the opinion of the AUTHORITY such failure is due to neglect or carelessness by the AUTHORITY. OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS A.The Contractor shall instruct operators in the operation of the products shown and/or specified. END OF SECTION 26 05 02 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 26 Mertarvik,Alaska Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems SECTION 26 05 26 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section describes general requirements,products,and methods of execution relating to the furnishing and installation of a grounding system complete as required for this project. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 26 05 02 Basic Materials and Methods 1.03 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A.The minimum requirement for the system shall conform to Article 250 of the NEC. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND CONNECTIONS A.All underground ground connections shall be made with exothermic welds. B.Grounding conductor connections to building structure and generator skids shall be made with mechanical lugs as indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE AND STRUCTURE GROUND A.Provide Service Ground. B.Create a Grounding Electrode System (GES)for this project by connecting the following: 1.Grounding grid as shown on the Drawings. 2.Generators,switchgear,and transformers grounded as shown on the Drawings. 3,The neutral conductors grounded only where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 26 05 26-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 26 Mertarvik,Alaska Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. 4.Other items or equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 5.Current carrying capacity of the grounding and bonding conductors shall be in conformity with Tables 250.66 and 250.122 of the NEC. All structure bonding shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practice. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUND A.The raceway system shall be bonded in conformity with NEC requirements to provide a continuous ground path.Where required by code or where called for on the Drawings,an additional grounding conductor shall be sized in conformity with Table 250.122 of the NEC. Provide a separate copper equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated.Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors,and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less.Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur,provide a grounding conductor in each raceway.Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panel boards,and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral.All grounding conductors shall be sized in conformity with Table 250.122 of the NEC. Provide separate grounding conductor securely bonded and effectively grounded to both ends of all non-metallic raceways and all flexible conduit. If non-metallic enclosures are provided,all metal conduits terminating or entering the enclosure shall be bonded together with approved bonding bushings and #6 AWG copper cable. END OF SECTION 26 05 26-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 --GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A.Support and align raceways,cabinets,boxes,fixtures,etc.,in an approved manner and as specified. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 26 05 02 Basic Materials and Methods C.Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Support equipment and raceways on strut,brackets,trapeze hangers,or as detailed.Anvil,B-Line,Grinnell,Unistrut,or approved equal. 2.02 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A.Strut:Cold formed mild steel channel strut,pre-galvanized finish and slotted back unless specifically indicated otherwise. B.Standard Strut:12 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 1-5/8”,B-line B22-SH-Galv or equal. C.Double Strut:12 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 3-1/4”,B-line B22A-SH-Galv or equal. D.Shallow Strut:14 gauge thick steel,1-5/8”x 13/16”,B-line B54-SH-Galv or equal. E.On all exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized strut and fittings. 2.03 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A.Hanger Rods:Continuous threaded rod.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. 26 05 29 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 29 Mertarvik,Alaska Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems B. D. Provide fittings,brackets,channel nuts,and accessories designed specifically for use with specified channel strut.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized. Pipe Clamps:Two piece pipe clamp designed to support pipe tight to strut,B-line B20##,or approved equal.Zinc plated carbon steel except for exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized Fasteners:All bolts,nuts,and washers to be zinc plated carbon steel except on exterior installations provide hot dip galvanized or stainless steel. 2.04 EARTHQUAKE ANCHORAGE A. B. Anchor equipment weighing more than 100 pounds to the building structure to resist lateral earthquake forces. Total lateral (earthquake)force shall be 1.00 times the equipment weight acting laterally in any direction through the equipment center of gravity.Provide adequate backing at structural attachment points to accept the forces involved. Provide equipment supported by flexible isolation mounts with earthquake restraining supports positioned as close to equipment as possible without contact in normal operation (earthquake bumpers).The maximum lateral displacement due to the computed earthquake force from above shall not exceed 1.5 inches. Floor mounted equipment weighing less than 2000 pounds may have one 6-inch by 6-inch by 3/8-inch by 18-inch steel angle bolted to the floor with four 5/8-inch diameter bolts placed on each of four sides of the equipment. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. B. Conduits and equipment shall be mounted using strut or similar supports unless otherwise noted. Do not strap conduits to piping.When run in parallel with piping maintain adequate separation to allow maintenance to take place on either piping or conduit system so that the other does not have to be removed when maintenance is required. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 33 Mertarvik,Alaska Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section describes specific requirements,products,and methods of execution relating to conduit and conduit fittings approved for use on this project.Type,size and installation methods shall be as shown on the Drawings,required by Code and specified in these specifications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 21 13 29.10 -Fire Suppression B.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical C.Section 26 05 02 Basic Materials and Methods D.Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Conduit and conduit fittings shall be standard types and sizes as manufactured by a nationally recognized manufacturer of this type of materials and be in conformity with applicable standards and UL listings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT (GRC) A.Galvanized rigid conduit shall be mild steel with continuous welded seam,hot-dip galvanized complying with ANSI C80.1 and shall be UL listed. B.Elbows,bends,and fittings shall be made of full weight materials complying with the above and shall be coated and threaded the same as conduit. C.Threads for conduit shall be tapered and clean cut.All threads shall be hot dip galvanized after cutting. D.Conduit shall be 1/2-inch trade size or larger and shall be manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.,Triangle PWC,Inc.,or approved equal. 26 05 33 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 33 Mertarvik,Alaska Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 2.02 2.03 2.05 2.06 2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A.Steel tubing,galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating;UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797;conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A.Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be manufactured from galvanized steel strip, sealed with a polyvinyl!outer jacket and shall be UL listed. B.Fittings shall be designed for use with liquidtight flexible conduit and shall maintain electrical continuity throughout fittings and conduit. C.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be 1/2-inch trade size or larger and shall be manufactured by O-Z/Gedney Co.,Southwire Co.,or approved equal. FITTINGS A.Expansion fittings shall be O.Z.type AX,EX,EXDS,TX,or EXE;Crouse Hinds type XJ;or approved equal. B.Fittings utilized with rigid steel shall be galvanized steel.Conduit bushings shall be of the insulated type.Where grounding bushings are required,insulated grounding bushings with pressure type lugs shall be provided.Lock rings shall be of the sealing gland type.Provide conduit bushings on all penetrations without hubs. C.Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors.The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during pulling operations. D.Fittings for liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be steel or malleable iron,of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone,nylon or plastic compression ring,and a tightening gland,providing a low resistance ground connection.All throats shall be insulated. WIREWAY A.Interior Use:UL listed;NEMA 1,enamel finished;hinged covers except where indicated otherwise.Furnish complete with all fittings,couplings,hangers and accessories;Hoffman,B-Line or equivalent. HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE)CONDUIT DUCT A.Schedule 40 high-density polyethylene conduit duct,color black,diameter as indicated on the Drawings.Conduit shall be UL Listed HDPE conduit and shall be compliant with Article 353 of the National Electrical Code,and shall be UL651B listed. 26 05 33 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 33 Mertarvik,Alaska Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT USAGE A. B. INTERIOR-All interior locations shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except where specifically indicated as wireway or GRC. EXTERIOR-All exterior above grade locations shall be galvanized rigid conduit (GRC). BURIED-All exterior below grade locations shall be high-density polyethylene (HDPE)duct. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used in lengths 18 to 24 inches for connections to motors or equipment subject to vibration and where indicated on the Drawings.Longer lengths may be used for equipment connection if grounding conductor is installed through conduit. Fire System -All fire suppression system conductors shall be routed in separate dedicated raceways.All conduit,junction boxes,pull boxes,and cover plates shall be painted red in accordance with Section 21 13 29.10. 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. B. Conduit field joints shall be cut square and reamed smooth.Threads shall be cleanly cut and joints drawn up tight.Running threads shall not be permitted. After cutting and threading exterior GRC,threads shall be cleaned and degreased and shall receive two coats of cold galvanizing compound. Offsets and bends shall be made carefully,without reducing cross sectional area, and shall not be less than the radius of standard elbows. Convenience outlets,switches,and other devices located on walls shall be serviced from above,unless otherwise indicated. Raceways penetrating vapor barriers or traversing from warm to cold areas shall be sealed (at the penetration point)with a non-hardening duct sealing compound to prevent the accumulation of moisture. All metal conduits shall have insulating bushings and shall have locknuts inside and outside of enclosure box,etc.Conduits smaller than 1-1/4-inch trade size shall be equipped with bushings and shall have locknuts inside and outside of enclosure. All conduit runs shall be grounded in an effective and approved manner at point of origin and shall maintain a continuous ground throughout all runs,cabinets, pull boxes,and fittings from point of service to all outlets. Conduit Supports: 26 05 33 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 05 33 Mertarvik,Alaska Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.Support conduits by wall brackets,pipe straps and strut sections,or trapeze hangers spaced not more than 10 feet on center. 2.Conduits shall be supported from the structural system.Provide additional support as required for junction and pull boxes. J.All conduit runs shall be completed and cleaned free from foreign matter inside before conductors are drawn in.After installation conduit ends shall be plugged or capped to prevent the entrance of foreign materials. K.All conduits not used by this Contract shall have a pull wire installed and securely tied off at each end for future conductor installation. END OF SECTION 26 05 33-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear SECTION 26 23 00.10 PRIME POWER LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE1.1 A.The Work included herein shall consist of providing design,drawings,materials, and accessories as specified for paralleling switchgear to be used to parallel diesel generating units for prime power generation in the quantities indicated on the project design drawings.The Work included herein shall consist of,but not be limited to,designing,fabricating,and factory testing,and providing a complete switchgear as specified herein. Project design drawings shall be used in the design of the switchgear. The specifications and drawings are complementary.What is shown on one is binding whether or not it is shown or specified in the other.Failure to check both the drawings and specifications will not be grounds for a change order if additional equipment or material is required to be provided by the Fabricator after the Engineer reviews the drawings,or deficiencies are identified during testing, either in the Factory or the field. The Fabricator shall provide a complete and operational system as specified herein.Certain components are identified in these specifications to be provided by the Fabricator.However,the components identified shall not be construed to be the complete list of components required for the successful operation of the system as specified.The Fabricator shall provide all components and design required for the complete and successful operation of the system,conforming to all of the requirements specified herein,whether the components are identified or not.The Fabricator shall ensure that all devices are installed and operate within their intended purposes.The Fabricator shall check all catalog numbers indicated and shall coordinate all devices installed. The paralleling switchgear shall be capable of unattended automatic and manual operation as described herein.The switchgear shall be a fully coordinated system that provides the functions and features as specified herein. The automatic control and overall sequencing and starting and stopping of the generators shall be performed by a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Failure of the PLC shall not inhibit manual control and operation and paralleling of the individual generator units. Automatic start/stop and demand control shall be accomplished through the Genset Controllers (GC).Each generator shall have an electrically operated circuit breaker to perform the normal on line/off line paralleling functions of the generator load controlled by the GC. 26 23 00.10 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 1.2 1.3 H.The distribution feeder shall have an electrically operated circuit breaker for equipment and conductor protection. I.Variable frequency drives shall be incorporated into the switchgear for radiator fan control as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. J.The Fabricator shall fully test the switchgear separately from the generating equipment as specified herein. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 26 05 02 Basic Materials and Methods C.Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators SUBMITTALS A.Provide in accordance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical and Division 1. B.Provide complete and accurate shop drawings of the equipment including outline drawings and dimensional data which fully describe the height,width,and depth of the equipment;cabinet construction;one-line and three-line diagrams; schematics;wiring diagrams,and other relevant details. C.Show the dimensioned location of the GC interface screen. D.The one-line diagram provided with the Contractor's submittal shall show all breakers,protective devices,and control devices and shall use standard ANSI symbols. E.The drawings shall show the switchgear layout,shall show all terminal blocks and all connections between terminal blocks,auxiliary switch contacts,control devices,instrumentation,protection devices,etc.Drawings shall also show all details of enclosure construction.The current revision,issue number,and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data. F,Provide a bill of material for all equipment or material provided as part of the switchgear. G.Provide manufacturer's catalog literature for all accessories and equipment. Manufacturer's literature for all components shall be included in the submittal. Literature shall be limited to only the items furnished and shall not include entire sections of catalogs or data sheets for items not used.Items shall be marked electronically such that it is clear which items is for what purpose. H.In addition to other submittal requirements,all drawing files shall be provided upon request in AutoCAD 2012 format,complete with all title blocks and external references such that the AutoCAD file provided appears like the PDF file when the proper fonts are used.Special fonts that may be required shall be provided by the Contractor. 26 23 00.10 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear I.Drawings.Provide the following drawings for review. 1. 10. All drawings submitted shall be drawn to accurate scale on sheets not less than 11”x 17";except for actual pattern or template type drawings,the maximum sheet size shall not exceed 24"x 36".The preferable sheet size is 22”x 34”.Indicate the name of the firm that prepared each shop drawing and provide appropriate project identification in the title block. Do not reproduce contract documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of shop drawings. All drawings shall use standard ANSI symbols. Provide drawings showing all details of enclosure construction. Provide internal wiring and connection diagrams for each section of the switchgear,a one-line diagram,and three-line diagrams.The one-line diagram shall show all breakers,protective devices,control devices,and cable sizes for all power conductors. Provide drawings of all AC and DC wiring.Provide a communication connection diagram showing all buses,devices,and expansion block cables. Provide schematics of all controls.Schematics shall be in ladder diagram format and shall show all control devices and external terminal block numbers. Provide drawings showing terminal block layouts and interconnecting wiring.The drawings shall show the physical layout of the terminal blocks with their appropriate designations and all connections between terminal blocks,auxiliary switch contacts,control devices, instrumentation,protection devices,etc. Provide drawings that show nameplate engraving.Provide drawings of control switches showing all terminals with numbers,including terminals not used.Identify the use of the terminals. Provide pertinent information for the PLC.Pertinent information shall include a complete ladder diagram showing all address numbers,rung reference numbers,all preset register values,extensive commentaries describing the purpose of each rung,complete tables or schedules listing all utilized I/O addresses,internal relay addresses,and timer,counter,and register addresses and values,and the date of the latest revision. All shipping splits shall be clearly identified.Wiring harnesses shall be provided between shipping splits for any control wiring required to connect between units.Drawings shall clearly indicate the wiring harness and connections.Terminal blocks shall be provided between the shipping splits for ease in wiring in the field. J.Provide proposed settings for review for the GC and Feeder Protection Relay (FPR)as specified herein. 26 23 00.10 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.All equipment shall be designed,fabricated,and assembled in accordance with 1.5 1.6 recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practices.Equipment shall not have been in service any time prior to delivery,except as required by testing. The paralleling switchgear shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code for Essential Electrical Systems.The switchgear shall be listed as an assembly under UL Standard 891 for switchboards or equivalent independent testing laboratory standard recognized by the State of Alaska.A nameplate indicating the listing shall be permanently affixed to each section of the switchgear. The switchgear shall also be assembled and tested in strict accordance with the applicable standards of UL 508A,NEC,ANSI,IEEE and NEMA,for metal enclosed low voltage switchgear. Solid-state circuitry shall meet or exceed the Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test per NEMA ICS1-109 and the Surge Withstand Capability Test (SWC)per IEEE Standard 472 (ANSI C37.90A).In addition,where UL Standards exist for components,devices and/or assemblies,such standards shall apply. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A.The switchgear shall be designed,assembled,and tested by a qualified fabricator (Fabricator)who is regularly engaged in the business of providing generation switchgear.A list of five prior projects that key staff have worked on may be requested by the Authority after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Fabricator qualifications.The list shall include installation date, description of installation,and a reference contact for each installation. At the time of bid submittal,the Fabricator shall have current authorization from a third party listing agency to provide listed switchgear as required by the specifications.Evidence of authorization may be requested by the Authority after the bid opening in order to verify Fabricator qualifications. CONTRACTOR WARRANTIES A.The Contractor shall warrant the work for a period of not less than one-year after energization of the equipment.In the event of equipment or component failure during the warranty period,the Contractor shall replace such defective equipment or components and bear all associated costs.The Contractor shall pursue manufacturer's warranties to the extent necessary to obtain replacement equipment and provide proof of action taken upon request.Assist Authority as directed in determining cause of failure. The warranty shall state in clear terms exactly what warranty coverage the seller provides,for each unit and attachments.This shall include the terms,length of coverage,reporting responsibilities,how the warranty applies to accessory equipment,restrictions,locations of local facilities for handling warranty and 26 23 00.10-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear other repairs (including contact names),and any other available information pertaining to warranty. The Contractor shall repair or replace any part of the equipment found to be defective. Provide a nametag on each piece of equipment that clearly identifies the party responsible for the warranty.Nametag shall include the name,address,and phone number,and shop order or Fabricator's serial number. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. B. Provide operation and maintenance (O&M)manuals for all equipment provided under this contract. The O&M manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts list packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered,or any information submitted for review. Include the following information in the O&M manuals: 1.Theory of operation of the switchgear system. 2.Equipment function,normal operating characteristics,and limiting conditions. 3.Assembly,installation,alignment,adjustment,and checking instructions. 4.Operating instructions for start-up,routine and normal operation, regulation and control,shutdown,and emergency conditions. 5.Guide to "troubleshooting." 6.Parts lists,with vendor name and telephone number,and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7.Complete as-built drawings showing all details of construction. The O&M manuals shall consist of a single CD,or flash drive,with a single Adobe Acrobat PDF file.O&M manuals shall be complete with all revisions and as-built data and shall reflect the actual equipment and material installed.The O&M manual shall be organized as follows: 1.The PDF file shall be provided with book marks that will allow easy navigation within the PDF file.Each chapter shall have its own book mark and the chapter shall be broken down into subsections based on each different item provided in that chapter,or tab.Each item in the chapter,or tab,shall be bookmarked such that each item can be navigated to from the bookmark. 2.The PDF file shall be provided with a Bill of Material that shall be near the front of the file.The Bill of Material shall be organized in such a manner that each item listed is identified with the chapter or subchapter that the item documentation is located. 3.The PDF file shall be organized into chapters or tabs that separate the different components of the switchgear into logical groupings,i.e.theory of operation,warranty,bill of material,breakers,enclosures,battery 26 23 00.10 -5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear system,meters,etc.At the beginning of each section,provide a page with the section number. 4.At the end of the PDF file,provide all drawings,inserted horizontally. Provide a chapter tab for the drawings and each drawing shall be individually bookmarked. Mail three CDs,or flash drive,with the final O&M file directly to the Authority. F.Ship one CD,or flash drive,with the final O&M file one complete hardcopy of the switchgear drawings with the switchgear.Drawings shall be printed on 11”X17”paper and placed inside the switchgear enclosure along with the CD,or flash drive. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 GENERAL All equipment and material shall be new.Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with the drawings, specifications,engineering data,instructions,and applicable standards. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF SWITCHGEAR COMPONENTS A.Specific parts manufacturer and model have been specified in the following paragraphs not only to meet performance function but also to coordinate and interface with other devices and systems.Approved equal substitutions will be allowed only by Engineer's approval.To obtain approval,submittals shall clearly demonstrate how substitute item meets or exceeds specified item quality and performance characteristics and also complies with electrical connections and physical layout requirements. B.The following products are specified by brand and part number to maintain commonality for programming and service with similar switchgear used in other rural Alaskan communities.Substitutes will not be allowed for the following components: 1.Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):Allen-Bradley. 2 Genset Controller (GC):Woodward. 3.GC Interface Screen:Technologic Systems,Inc. 4 Feeder Protection Relay (FPR):Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories. Inc. 5.Variable Frequency Drives (VFD):Square D. C.Acceptable manufacturers of all components not otherwise indicated shall be: Allen-Bradley,Eaton,General Electric,IDEC,or Square D. SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE The following paragraphs describe general fabrication requirements for the switchgear enclosure. 26 23 00.10 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear A.Provide a freestanding enclosure that is factory built,wired,and tested by the switchgear fabricator.Hinged front-opening doors shall provide required access to all components.Control wire shall have termination identification of each wire for ease of tracing.Terminal blocks shall be provided for control wires that run between the switchgear and external equipment such as generator sets. Nameplates shall be provided to identify each device or function. The switchgear shall be front access for all control devices. All switchgear sections shall be dead front type NEMA 1A construction and labeled in accordance with UL-891,or equivalent.The enclosure shall be divided into individual sections as indicated on the project design drawings.The maximum dimensions of each section shall be as indicated by the enclosure layout detail on the project design drawings.All sections shall be rear aligned and shall be capable of being rolled,moved or lifted into the installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the addition of floor sills.Each switchgear section shall be a completely self-supporting structure.Individual sections shall be bolted together to form the required arrangement. The structure frame shall be die formed 12 gauge steel with reinforcing corner gussets internal and external to the structure members.Alternatively,a 2”x 2”x 3/16”steel angle frame may be used.Bolt-on side,top and rear covers shall be code gauge steel,minimum. Each section shall be provided with an individual door.Doors shall be provided with latches and concealed hinge construction. Latches shall be one of the following. 1.One three-point single handle operated latch. 2.Multiple single-point latches consisting of captive knurled handle quarter- turn cam fasteners.Doors which are 36 inches or less in height shall have a minimum of two single-point latches;doors which are greater than 36 inches in height shall have three single-point latches. The individual generation sections shall be divided into high and low voltage cubicles using interior barrier panels to ensure isolation of equipment for safety to personnel during service and maintenance or cable pulling.The upper portion of the generator cubicles shall be the low voltage (120V max)controls cubicle.The lower portion of the generator cubicles shall be the high voltage (480V)power cubicle. The control cubicles shall be provided with back and or side pans as required for mounting equipment and wiring.Mounting attachments shall be welded studs or other approved methods.No bolts,screws,or other attachment hardware shall be visible from the exterior. Control cubicles shall have hinged doors.The master cubicle door shall swing so the door front is visible from the control cubicles.Warning labels and source voltage labels shall be provided.The switchboard shall have one cubicle 26 23 00.10 -7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.4 2.5 K. designated as a master cubicle.See the enclosure layout detail on the project design drawings. Power and control cables shall enter from the top of the enclosure as indicated by the enclosure layout detail on the project design drawings.A cable area shall be provided behind the controls cubicle of each engine/generator cubicle to allow power cables to be installed behind the controls.Isolation barriers shall be provided between each cable area such that each cubicle is completely isolated from any adjacent cubicle.Where top cable entry is indicated by the enclosure layout detail on the project design drawings,a removable cover plate shall be installed on top of the cable area large enough to terminate a 3”rigid conduit with locknuts and conduit bushing.The removable cover plate shall cover the entire cable area. Where the main bus is not isolated by barrier plates,it shall be provided with a glastic cover for isolation over the entire length of the bus. The top of the GC interface screen shall not exceed 60”above the bottom of the switchgear. PAINTING A.Steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in the shop.Surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment.Surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared in the shop.All mill scale,oxides,and other coatings shall be removed. All metal enclosure parts shall be phosphatized to ensure that the metal is properly degreased and cleaned. Exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth,thoroughly cleaned and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting and painted with one or more coats of primer and two or more finish coats of alkyd resin machinery enamel or lacquer as required to produce a smooth hard durable finish.The color of the finish coats shall be light gray. Provide a premium painting system throughout the painting process from initial cleaning to final assembly to assure a superior paint finish.All coatings shall be applied using an electro static paint system. Interior shall be light gray,except that back and side pans shall be white. All parts of the switchgear enclosure shall be painted.No interior surfaces may be left unpainted except interior surfaces may be galvanized,except where specified otherwise. CONTROL WIRING A.All control wiring shall be minimum 600 volt,copper 16 gauge,strand type SIS wire or equivalent.The Fabricator shall be responsible for sizing the appropriate wire for each component and circuit.Current transformer wiring shall be 12 gauge wire. 26 23 00.10-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.6 B.mOnly one wire shall be inserted into a lug.Lugs shall be installed with a ratcheting type crimping tool.All wires shall be tagged with wire markers at both ends. All wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks or devices.No more than two wires shall be connected to a termination point.Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be 20 amp,600 volt.All terminal blocks and exposed relays located in the controls compartment shall be provided with a plastic safety cover.Terminal blocks for DC circuits shall be separated from terminal blocks for 120V AC. Splicing of control or CT wires is not allowed. All control wiring landing on screw terminals shall have solderless terminals, T&B Sta-Kon or approved equal.Solderless terminals for current transformer leads shall be insulated ring-tongue type,all others shall be insulated fork-tongue type.All lugs and solderless terminals shall be tin-plated copper. Current transformer leads shall be wired to shorting type terminal blocks. Shorting pins shall be provided with storage locations for the shorting pins. Terminal blocks shall be clearly labeled and shall match the designation shown on the Fabricator's drawings.A separate terminal strip shall be provided for interconnection with each generator.The generator terminal strip shall be arranged and numbered exactly as shown by the terminal strip detail on the project design drawings. Each end of each wire shall be identified per the marking and numbering shown on the wiring drawings with heat shrink or wrap-around adhesive labels.Each conductor shall have the terminal or device the conductor is terminated to at both ends positively identified at both ends of the conductor. Wiring shall be installed neatly in bundles and wireways.Adhesive backed tywrap bases shall not be used to support bundles.All wiring bases shall be securely attached with metal screws. BUS BAR AND GROUNDING A.2)The switchgear shall be provided with silver-plated copper main bus bars.The main bus shall be rated 1,000 amperes.If the actual ampacity of the bus installed exceeds this value,the switchgear bus shall be rated 1,000 amperes. The main bus shall be well braced to meet the short circuit ratings of the generators.Minimum bus bracing shall be 30,000 amperes symmetrical,unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.The main bus shall be installed on insulators to provide proper clearances between phases and phase to ground. Generator and feeder circuit breakers shall be connected to the common bus bar. An isolated copper neutral bus shall be provided and shall have the same ratings as the main bus.The neutral bus shall have a single removable connection to the ground bus.The connection shall be accessible in the feeder section. 26 23 00.10 -9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.7 E.The switchgear shall have a bonded copper ground bus minimum size 2”x 1/4", or as required for the bus ampacity. Horizontal bus joints between each section shall be silver-plated copper.Bus joints shall be bolted with high tensile steel bolts with spring loaded Belleville type washers. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left-to-right,top-to-bottom,front-to-back)shall be used throughout to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance. Termination bars shall be provided on the load side of the feeder breaker and on the line side of the generator breakers for termination of field wiring.Provide holes in the termination bars for field connection of lugs suitable for termination of #4/0 AWG cables,minimum 2 for each phase.Provide additional holes where specifically indicated. The feeder,generator,VFD,and station service circuit breakers shall be connected to the main bus by cables.All cables and connections shall be rated for the full ampacity of the circuit breaker frame. SWITCHGEAR DEVICES. A.Nameplates.All nameplates shall be black with white core type.Nameplates shall have beveled edges and shall be secured with a minimum of two mounting screws.Nameplates shall be provided for each device on the front of the switchgear and inside the switchgear.Inside the switchgear compartments,all relays,control switches,lights,etc.to which control or instrument transformer wiring connects,shall be marked by nameplates,with designations corresponding to the same device designations used on the wiring drawings and approved by the Engineer.Nameplates inside the switchgear located on the front doors may be attached using adhesive epoxy. Relays shall have the nameplates installed separate from the relay such that the relay can be removed without affecting the nameplate.All wiring shall be routed such that it does not inhibit the visibility of the nameplate or interfere with the removal of the relay. Overall nameplate.Provide an overall nameplate that provides the following information: Fabricator's name and address. Fabricator's type designation (optional). Fabricator's shop order number. Third party listing identification. Rated maximum voltage. Rated bus ampacity. Rated bus interrupting capacity.NAYRWND>Third Party Listing Tag.Provide a tag identifying the third party listing of the equipment.If the enclosure was fabricated by a subcontractor,the enclosure shall be provided with the third party listing tag.The overall assembly shall also be 26 23 00.10-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear provided with a third party listing identification tag that meets the requirements of the State of Alaska. D.Selector Switches.|Selector switches shall be heavy-duty type.Contacts shall have silver butting or sliding contacts,rated 10 amperes continuous at 120 volts AC.Contact configuration shall be as required for the application.Legends shall be engraved on the switch nameplate. Unless otherwise specified,all selector switches located on the front of the enclosure shall be Electroswitch Series 24,or approved equal. E.Annunciator Lights.Annunciator lights shall be panel mount LED cluster type lamps.IDEC Corp.Series SLC40,or approved equal. F.Control Relays/Time Delays.Relays and timers for control operations or isolation shall be of the plug-in socket base type with dustproof plastic enclosures unless noted otherwise.Relays and timers shall be UL recognized,have 120-volt AC or 24-volt DC coils,depending on the application.Relays shall not have less than double-pole,double-throw contacts.Control circuit relays shall have silver- cadmium oxide contacts rated for 10 amperes at 120 volts AC.Electronic switching duty relays shall have gold-plated or gold alloy contacts suitable for use with low-level signals.Relays utilized for PLC input,alarm input or indicating light service shall have contacts rated not less than 3 amperes.All relays and timers shall be provided with indicating lights.IDEC Corp.or approved equal. G.Relays for use on 24-volt DC circuits shall be provided with different bases than those for use on 120-volt AC circuits to prevent inadvertent swapping of relays. H.Auxiliary power relays shall be Allen-Bradley series 700,minimum 20A rated,or approved equal. I.Circuit Breakers. 1.Protective devices shall be resettable circuit breaker type for all AC and DC circuits in the switchgear.Replaceable fuse type devices are not acceptable. 2.Circuit breakers shall be molded case circuit breakers of the amperage, voltage,short circuit capacity,and number of poles required for the application or as indicated on the one-line diagram. 3.The station service transformer shall be protected by a manually operated molded case circuit breaker,sized as indicated by the one-line diagram on the project design drawings.Auxiliary contacts shall be provided to indicate position.The closed position contact shall be wired to the PLC to provide alarm indication any time the breaker is not closed (either tripped or manually opened).The station service circuit breaker shall be mounted in the face of the switchgear and shall be provided with a protective guard. 4.Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)shall be protected by a manually operated molded case circuit breaker as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 26 23 00.10 -11 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 5.Generator and feeder circuit breakers shall be provided as specified herein. J.Current_Transformers.Instrument current transformers shall be specifically designed for installation in switchgear.The design shall coordinate the thermal, mechanical,and insulation limits of the current transformers with those of the breakers and bus of the switchgear in which they are to be installed.Current transformers shall be of the wound or window type,with silver-plated primary terminals.Insulation shall be suitable for 600 volt. 1.Current transformers for relay service shall be provided with a minimum C20 accuracy class with a rating factor of 2.0. 2.Current transformers for totalizing and feeder meters shall be metering class with a minimum 0.3%accuracy and with a rating factor of 2.0. 3.Current transformers for the station service meter shall be metering class with a minimum 0.3%accuracy. 4.Current transformers identified as multi-ratio shall be provided in the ratios indicated and shall be provided with the accuracy specified at full distributed windings. 5.The CT burden shall be suitable for the devices attached without saturating. Potential Transformers.Instrument rated potential transformer shall be provided in the quantity and ratio as indicated on the drawings. 1.All potential transformers shall have primary and secondary protection using circuit breakers as specified herein. 2.All potential transformer grounds shall be made directly to switchgear ground bus. Protective Relays.Protective relays shall be provided with indicating lights and time delays as specified. 1.Generator protection shall be provided by use of the GC as specified herein. 2.Distribution feeder protection shall be provided by use of the FPR as specified herein. 3.The Fabricator shall determine complete settings for the FPR and each GC provided as part of the switchgear.Submit proposed settings for review prior to witness testing. 2.8.GENSET CONTROL PACKAGE A.Genset Control Package (GC).Provide the following components to make up the GC. 1.Genset Control Package (GC):EasYgen 3100XT back mounted controller without display,Woodward part number 8440-2081,no substitutes. 26 23 00.10-12 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.9 B. C. 2.EasYgen digital I/O expansion module,8 inputs,8 outputs.DIN rail mounting,24V DC.Woodward part number 8440-2028,no substitutes. 3.GC Interface Screen.Technologic Systems,Inc.catalog number TS-TPC- 8900 or approved equal. 4.800 MHz ARM Cortex-A8 Macrocontroller with 256 MB RAM and 256 MB XNAND drive,RoHS.Technologic Systems,Inc.catalog number TS-4800-258-256XF or approved equal. 5.DB9M-IDC-10 serial ports.Technologic Systems,Inc.catalog number RC-DB9 or approved equal. Additional items,components,or wiring that may be required for a complete and operational system as specified herein. Quantities as required to meet the intent and requirements of the specifications. GENERATOR AND DISTRIBUTION FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKER A.mooEach generator shall be provided with an electrically operated stationary mount type circuit breaker.Circuit breakers shall be the Square D Masterpact NT, General Electric EntelliGuard G,or Eaton Magnum DS.Other substitutes will not be accepted. Circuit breakers shall be designed for continuous operation at 100%of the circuit breaker rating.Circuit breakers shall be suitable for power flow in either direction through the breaker. Minimum interrupting rating of breakers shall be 50,000 amperes symmetrical. Breakers shall be provided with a frame size as indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breakers do not require a protective trip element as protection will be provided by the GC for the generator breakers and by the FPR for the distribution feeder breaker. The circuit breakers shall be provided with the following features: Three-pole stationary mount. Remote open/close. Shunt trip. 24V DC control voltage. 120V AC spring charging motor for automatic recharging of the breaker stored energy mechanism.The stored energy mechanism shall be capable of an open-close open cycle without recharging. Anti-pumping feature. Manual spring charging mechanism. Mechanical operation counter. Auxiliary switch module. 0.Lockable push button cover.wkwWN>BePND26 23 00.10-13 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.10 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER A.Programmable Logic Controller.Allen-Bradley,CompactLogix 1769,no substitutes.Provide the following: 2.11 1 2 3 4. 5 6 24V DC power supply.Allen-Bradley 1769-PB4. CPU (1.5 Mb Memory,Ethernet).Allen-Bradley 1769-L33ER. Device Net Scanner.Allen-Bradley 1769-SDN. ModBus TCP/IP Communications Module.Pro-Soft MVI69E-MBTCP. Right End Cap/Terminator.1769-ECR. Compact Blocks,24V DC,as required which may include the following: a.LDX I/O input base module 16 point,universal. Allen-Bradley 1790D-T16BVO. b.LDX I/O input expansion module 16 point,universal. Allen-Bradley 1790D-T16BVOX. c.LDX I/O output base module 16 point,sourcing. Allen-Bradley 1790D-TOB16. d.LDX J/O output expansion module 16 point,sourcing. Allen-Bradley 1790D-TOB16X. e.LDX //O input/output base module 8 point in,8 point out sourcing. Allen-Bradley 1790-T8BV8B. f.LDX I/O input/output expansion module 8 point in,8 point out sourcing.Allen-Bradley 1790-T8BV8BX. g.LDX I/O output base module 16 point,sourcing. Allen-Bradley 1790-T0B16X. h.LDX I/O analog input module,4 channel,4-20 mA DC. Allen-Bradley 1790D-TN4C0. i.LDXI/ORTD input module,4 channel. Allen-Bradley 1760D-T4R0 Provide additional items as may be indicated on the project design drawings or required for the proper and complete operation of the system as specified. B.Cables,connectors,and interface devices required for a complete and operational system shall be provided. OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT An operator interface unit (OIU)shall be provided and installed on the front of the switchgear enclosure as indicated on the drawings.The OIJU shall be provided as follows: 26 23 00.10-14 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska A. B. A. Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear An integrated touch screen display computer with solid state drives shall be provided for the operator interface and have the following minimum requirements;PweNSenIanyY15”display with minimum of 1024 x 768 pixel resolution. LCD Color:16.2M,Pixel Pitch (mm):0.297 (H)x 0.297 (V). Projected Capacitive Touch. Intel Atom Processor E3845 Quad Core.2 GB SO-DIMM DDR3L 1066/1333MHz memory,40 GB SATA Solid State Hard Drive,Compact Flash Drive. 3 USB 2.0 Ports,1 USB 3.0 port,10/100M Ethernet Port,serial port. 24V DC power supply. Windows 10 Professional,64 bit. Passive cooling without fan. Logic Supply CV-115C-P1001,or approved equal. 2.12 FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY Feeder protection relay (FPR)shall be Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories,Inc. model SEL-751A,no substitutes,with the following protection features. Contractor shall develop the actual configuration part number to provide a relay that meets all requirements as follows.SOSNNDMPSWNDSmoaneUnder/over frequency. Under/over voltage. Instantaneous overcurrent (phase/neutral). Time overcurrent (phase/neutral). Residual instantaneous overcurrent. Residual time overcurrent. Neutral instantaneous overcurrent. Neutral time overcurrent. Synchronism check. The FPR shall also be provided with the following additional features: EIA-232 Rear,Single 10/100BASE-T Ethernet,Modbus TCP,IEC 61850. 24V DC power supply and input. DI/DO as required to meet the requirements of the specifications. Three-phase voltage and current input.Five amp current. Synchronism check element. Metering to include the following: e Voltage,L-L and L-N. Current;three phase and neutral. Percent voltage imbalance. Apparent power (kVA). Real power (kW). 26 23 00.10 -15 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.13 2.14 2.15 °Reactive power (kVAR),positive or negative. e Power factor. g.Other features that might be required to meet the intent of the specifications. METERING EQUIPMENT A. C. Totalizing (Bus)and Station Service Meters.Class 10 current inputs,120V AC input,18-60V DC power supply.Provide with Ethernet communications port, panel mount remote display module,and cable.SHARK 200-60-10-V2-D- INP100S-20mAOS,or approved equal. Station Service Metering Unit.The station service metering unit shall be identical to the bus meter except without the optional 4-20mA I/O card.SHARK 200-60- 10-V2-D-INP100S-X,or approved equal. Provide all cables,connectors,and other devices including CT shorting terminal blocks as required for a complete and operational metering system. DATA STORAGE SERVER. A.An industrial fanless mini PC server shall be installed in the switchgear.The server shall be used for storage of historical and real time data from the PLC and Totalizing and Station Service Meters.The server shall have remote access capabilities via Ethernet for data retrieval,remote monitoring,and programming. The mini PC shall be as follows: Processor:Intel Celeron N2930,1.83 GHz. Ram:4GB,DDR3L SO-DIMM (non-ECC). Hard drive:minimum 128 GB SATA 6.0 Gb/sec. Windows 10 Professional,64 bit. Mounting as required. 24V DC power supply,Auto power on. Logic Supply ML100G-10,or approved equal. The Fabricator shall: 1.Install the server in the master section.NAYSYWNE2.Furnish and install all cables and interface devices required for a complete and operational system plus any additional devices that may be required to meet the requirements as indicated on the Drawings and elsewhere in this specification. 3.Install all software required as part of this project on the server. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION A.The Contractor shall furnish the following software,no substitutes. 1.AB Studio 5000 Mini Edition EN License (PLC programming software). 2.Woodward Toolkit Easygen (GC configuration software). 26 23 00.10-16 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 3.Schweitzer AcSELerator.(FPR software,latest version). 4.SHARK metering software (latest version).Or software for metering 2.16 2.17 2.18 equipment provided. 5.Square D SOMOVE).Or software for VFD provided. The contractor shall also furnish any other software referenced elsewhere in this specification or required for setup and operation of any devices installed in the switchgear such as variable frequency drives or draw out circuit breakers. The original licensed copy of each software package installed on the server shall be provided to the Authority and shipped with the switchgear.All licenses shall be in the name of the Alaska Energy Authority. REMOTE ACCESS OF EQUIPMENT A. C. The server shall be provided with an Ethernet connection,which will allow the server to be accessed via high speed internet.The server will provide the primary means for remote monitoring of the system and data acquisition. The PLC shall be provided with an Ethernet connection which shall allow access via high speed internet.Remote access shall allow a technician in another location to modify and/or view all operational screens and all logic in the PLC. Provide communications connections as indicated on the project design drawings or required for the proper operation and control of the systems. SCADA AND SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A.The Fabricator shall provide all programming for the PLC and GC as required to meet the intent of the specification. B.The Fabricator shall provide a complete tag list of all of the input/output devices including,but not limited to,the PLC,GC,and all external devices to the Authority for their use in developing the SCADA programming. C.The Tag List shall be in the form of a spreadsheet.If additional I/O or tags are requested by the Authority the Fabricator shall provide that information. D.The Authority,or their SCADA Contractor,will develop the SCADA system and programming for the OIU and the GC Interface Screens and will provide the programming to the Fabricator.The Fabricator shall install the software in the systems. E.The Fabricator shall use the SCADA system and programming provided by the Authority during testing of the switchgear as specified herein. CONTROL POWER A.Control power for the switchgear shall be 24V DC except where specifically noted as 120V AC.All meters and other components requiring auxiliary power to operate shall operate from the 24V DC control power source,unless otherwise specified.All control circuits shall be 24V DC. 26 23 00.10 -17 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear B.24V DC Power -A complete 24V DC power supply with backup shall be provided as part of this switchgear and shall include all items described below plus any other components required for a complete system.The primary source shall be from a 120V AC to 24V DC power converter using 120V AC station service power.The secondary source shall be from a 24V-24V DC battery voltage converter using 24V DC power from the engine batteries as described below.The two power supplies shall be coordinated to automatically switch from the 120V AC source to the 24V DC source upon loss of AC power and automatically switch back when the AC power is restored.The system shall provide continuous power without interruption.The 24V DC control power system shall include the following features: 1.One control power supply shall be installed in the master section.The control power supply shall be 120V AC primary input,20 amp 24V DC output.Allen-Bradley 1606-XLS480E,or approved equal. 2.One battery voltage converter shall be installed in the master section.The converter shall be 22-29V DC input,minimum 15 amp,24V DC output. The converter shall include capacitors to buffer power during engine crank cycles with a minimum capacity of 15A for 9 seconds.Siemens 6EP1933- 2EC51,or approved equal. 3.Each generator battery supply shall enter in the respective cubicle.See the terminal strip detail on the drawings.A 20A circuit breaker shall be installed on the 24V DC battery power supply. 4.The 24V outputs from each engine section shall be connected to the 24V input on the battery voltage converter in the master section through a power bridge rectifier,minimum 35A,rated,Powersem or approved equal. Provide multiple rectifiers as required for the quantity of inputs. 5.The 24V DC power supply to each switchgear section (engines,master, and feeder/VFD)shall be isolated through a 15A circuit breaker in each respective section. 6.Each major device or meter shall be individually protected by circuit breakers.Clearly mark each circuit breaker for the intended service. 120V AC Circuit Breaker Charging -Power for the generator and distribution feeder circuit breaker spring charging motor(s)shall be derived from a control power transformer connected to the main bus.Power for the generator circuit breaker spring charging motors shall be derived from a control power transformer connected on the generator side of the circuit breaker. 120V AC Control and Utility Power -Provide 2 sets of terminals for connection of incoming 120V AC power,20A,single phase.One shall be for utility power and one for control power as indicated.The 120V AC system shall include: 1.Utility Power -One circuit shall provide power to all sections of the switchgear for convenience receptacles,lights,and ventilation fans as indicated and required for each section. 26 23 00.10-18 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.Control Power -One circuit shall provide power to the UPS and to the 120V AC to 24V DC power converter.No other devices shall be connected to this circuit. 3.UPS -The UPS shall be a packaged unit for installation on a standard 19” rack.It shall be complete with a sealed leak-proof maintenance free lead acid battery.It shall be 120V,60Hz input and 120V,60Hz,2200VA output.APC SMX 2200RMLV2U,or approved equal. 4.The UPS shall be installed on the rack in the master section.It shall be connected to provide 120V AC power to the data storage server and to the OIU. 2.19 GENERAL CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS A. D. The generator switchgear shall provide controls to automatically and manually connect and parallel all engine generator sets to the switchgear main bus.The PLC shall control the overall sequencing and starting and stopping of the engine- generators.The GC shall control all functions and features of the individual generator,both manual and automatic.The GC shall start,stop,synchronize,and provide load sharing of the generator.Each GC shall communicate with adjacent Genset Controllers for load sharing information.If the communications bus is disabled,the GC shall be fully capable of operating the individual generator without the aid of the PLC.The GC shall be configured to control the voltage regulator through the voltage regulator auxiliary voltage bias input. The Contractor shall review all drawings and information provided and shall incorporate all engine safety functions into the GC. Automatic Master Control at the generator switchgear shall be PLC based. Automatic start and demand control shall be performed by the PLC.An Operator Interface Unit (OIU)with touch screen shall be provided as the operator's interface to the PLC.The OJU shall modify demand control parameters and monitor the current demand system status. The generator voltage regulator and droop current transformer will be located at the generator terminal compartment. 2.20 ENGINE FUNCTION MONITORING A.Through the GC,provide remote monitoring and control based on the following sensors and switches for each engine: 1.J1939 CAN bus from engine ECU.Use for monitoring of engine speed, jacket water temperature,lubricating oil pressure and fuel flow rate. 2.Exhaust Gas Temperature.Sensor shall be 2-wire RTD Type,100 ohm, provided separately from the switchgear.Provide 4-20mA_signal converter,INOR or approved equal. 26 23 00.10 -19 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska 2.21 2.22 Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear Oil Level Switch.A normally open switch,provided separately from the switchgear,will close when the oil level drops below or rises above a pre- determined level. Air Filter Vacuum Sensor.Sensor shall be 2-wire,4-20mA,-408”H20 to 0 PSIG range,provided separately from the switchgear.Power supply for the transmitter shall be provided from the GC power supply. Log and maintain run time on the engine.Time shall be expressed in hours and minutes. Through the PLC and the OIU,provide monitoring and display of the temperatures and alarms. AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE MONITORING Through the PLC and the OIU,provide monitoring and display of ambient temperatures. A.Provide three ambient air temperature sensors,one for outside air temperature, one for inside air temperature,and one for VFD cubicle temperature. B.Sensors shall be moderate temperature range,2-wire,platinum RTD,100 ohms +/-0.15%,@ 0°C tolerance.Pyrocom RLB73203E10S,or approved equal. C.Furnish outside air and inside air temperature sensors loose for field installation. Fabricator shall install!VFD temperature sensor inside VFD cubicle. FUEL SYSTEM MONITORING A.Through the PLC,provide remote monitoring and control of the following sensors and switches (quantity as indicated): 1.Plant Total Fuel Consumption (one only).A pulser in the day tank supply meter,provided separately from the switchgear,will provide one pulse per each gallon of fuel.The PLC shall calculate the total plant fuel consumption. Plant Fuel Efficiency -At the end of each day tank fill cycle the PLC shall calculate the overall plant fuel efficiency (kW-h/gallon)by dividing the total kW-h generated since the end of the last fill cycle (from bus power meter)by the gallons of fuel pumped into the day tank during the latest fill cycle. Low Fuel Level Alarm (one only).A normally closed contact on the day tank control panel will!open when the fuel level in the day tank drops belowa preset level. Generator Fuel Consumption.The PLC shall read the instantaneous fuel flow rate (gallons per hour)and the total fuel consumption (gallons)for each engine from the engine ECU via J1939. 26 23 00.10-20 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.23 HEAT RECOVERY MONITORING A.Through the PLC and the OIU,provide monitoring and display of the following inputs: I.Heat Recovery Supply Temperature.Sensor shall be 2-wire,4-20 mA,20- 240F range,provided separately from the switchgear.Power supply for the transmitter shall be provided from the switchgear 24V DC power supply. Heat Recovery Return Temperature.Sensor shall be 2-wire platinum RTD,4-20 mA,20-240F range,provided separately from the switchgear. Power supply for the transmitter shall be provided from the switchgear 24V DC power supply. Heat Recovery Pressure.Sensor shall be 2-wire,4-20mA,0 to 60 PSIG range,provided separately from the switchgear.Power supply for the transmitter shall be provided from the switchgear 24V DC power supply. Heat Recovery Flow Rate.A remote flow meter shall provide a 4-20mA signal with 4mA equal to 0 GPM and 20mA equal to 100 GPM. Engine Coolant Return Temperature.Sensor shall be 2-wire,4-20 mA,20- 240F range,provided separately from the switchgear.Power supply for the transmitter shall be provided from the switchgear 24V DC power supply. Through the PLC and the OIU,provide the following alarms and calculations: 1.Heat Recovery No Load Warming.When the heat recovery return temperature is greater than the heat recovery supply temperature for a minimum of 1 hour,an amber lamp "NO LOAD ON HEAT RECOVERY”shall illuminate.When the heat recovery supply temperature is a minimum of |degree Fahrenheit greater than the heat recovery return temperature the lamp shall turn off.If either the supply temperature or the return temperature signal is lost,the system shall provide a message on the OIU to read "HEAT RECOVERY SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SIGNAL LOST”or "HEAT RECOVERY RETURN TEMPERATURE SIGNAL LOST”. Heat Recovery Loss of Pressure Alarm.When the heat recovery system pressure drops below 15 PSIG for a minimum of 15 minutes,a red lamp "HEAT RECOVERY LOSS OF PRESSURE?”shall illuminate.When the pressure rises above 18 PSIG the lamp shall turn off. Heat Recovery Loss of Flow Alarm.When the heat recovery system flow rate drops below 10 GPM for a minimum of 15 minutes,a red lamp "HEAT RECOVERY LOSS OF FLOW”shall illuminate.When the flow rate rises above 15 GPM the lamp shall turn off. Recovered Heat Output.The PLC shall calculate the instantaneous rate of energy delivered based on the supply temperature,return temperature,and 26 23 00.10 -21 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.24 flow rate.A specific heat of 450 BTUH/GPM-F shall be used for the fluid. 5.Total Recovered Heat Delivered.The PLC shall calculate the total energy delivered.The value shall be displayed for every 100,000 BTU of heat delivered with no decimal places. 6.Engine Coolant Return High Temperature Alarm.When the engine coolant return temperature rises above 190°F for a minimum of 2 minutes, a red lamp "HIGH COOLANT RETURN TEMPERATURE”shall illuminate.Lamp shall remain on until master reset button is pressed. 7.History.The PLC shall maintain a running total of energy delivered. Note that all heat recovery alarms shall be tied to the dead bus signal to prevent alarm indication when the power system is off-line. ENGINE/GENERATOR CONTROL SECTION. The following components shall be supplied for each generator section to allow automatic or manual operation and control of the generators.Note that some components have been previously specified. A.Genset Control (GC)as previously specified.The GC shall perform the cranking and disconnecting of the starter using feedback from the magnetic pickup,located on the engine,and shall power the engine speed control module.The engine speed shall be controlled using 0.25-4.75V DC signal connected to the engine ECU.Time delays shall be incorporated in the PLC that shall be able to be adjusted through the OIU as required.Use relays and PLC logic for automatic start/stop.Use discrete outputs on the GC for safety shut downs and annunciation through the PLC via device net blocks.The GC shall also perform automatic paralleling,load sensing,generator breaker control,generator protection,and automatic synchronization. GC Interface Screen as previously specified.The GC Interface Screen shall provide display of engine and generator data from the GC using the Authority furnished SCADA program. GC Interface Controls.The GC Interface Controls shall provide manual control over the GC modes and functions.Provide pushbuttons,lighted pushbuttons,and lighted switches as indicated on the Drawings.Allen Bradley Series 800,Eaton Series 10250,or approved equal.Provide auxiliary contact blocks as required to perform the required functions. Gen Lockout Switch.Key operated RUN/OFF switch mounted in GC Interface Controls,Allen Bradley Series 800,Eaton Series 10250,or approved equal. When in the OFF position the switch shall disable the GC and prevent engine starting.All switches for the entire project shall utilize a common key.Provide two keys for each engine section. 26 23 00.10-22 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear E.Annunciation LED's,mount near top of cabinet,left to right: Top Row 1.Engine Running (green). 2.Alarm/Lockout (red). 3.Low Oil Pressure (red). 4.Oil Level (red). 5.High Coolant Temperature (red). 6.Over Speed (red). 7.Over Crank (red). 8.Running Timeout (red). 9.Battery Charger Failure (red). 10.'Air Filter Plugged (red) 11.High Exhaust Temp (red). 12.Spare (red). Second Row 13.Lead Engine (green).Note that this is only for units with two or more identical size engines.For single-size engines this will be a spare. 14.|Normal Stop (amber). 15.Not in Auto (red). 16.Generator Breaker Trip (red). 17.Fail to Synchronize (red). 18.Over Current (red). 19.Under Voltage (red). 20.Over Voltage (red). 21.|Under Frequency (red). 22.Over Frequency (red). 23.Reverse Power (red). 24.Spare (red). For sections that do not require a specific lamp provide spare lamp with blank nameplate. Configure the system so that pressing the ALARM RESET button on the GC interface clears all alarms. 26 23 00.10 -23 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.25 7Potential Transformers,quantity and ratio as indicated on the Drawings. Control power transformer for spring charging motor,size as indicated on the Drawings. H.Current Transformers for relaying,quantity and size as indicated on Drawings. Provide with shorting terminal blocks. I.24V DC 1S5A circuit breaker for control power. J.LED panel illumination kit,complete with door switch.Hoffman LED24V15,or approved equal. K.Terminal Blocks,Relays,Timers,Bases. L.Generator Circuit Breaker as previously specified. M.Generator breaker Status Annunciation LEDs (mount immediately above generator breaker control switch): 1.Breaker Closed (red). 2.Breaker Open (green). MASTER SECTION The load demand system shall be controlled by a programmable logic controller,with operator interface unit,providing operator access to the demand system and shall display the demand system operating status.The following components shall be supplied for the master section.When a part number is specified no substitutes will be allowed unless noted "or approved equal”.Note that some components may have been previously specified. A.Totalizing Meter as previously specified. B Station Service Meter as previously specified. C.Operator Interface Unit as previously specified. D Master Control Switch,Electroswitch,24201C or approved equal.Configure for two position operation,AUTO /MAN ISOCH. Emergency Stop Button,maintained pushbutton with guard. F.Dead bus relay.IDEC RR3BUL-AC120V with SR3B-05 base,or approved equal. G.PLC as previously specified. H.Current Transformers for generators,feeders,and totalizing and station service meters,quantity and size as indicated on the Drawings.Provide with shorting terminal blocks. I.Potential Transformers,quantity and ratio as indicated on the Drawings. J.Terminal Blocks,Relays,Timers,Bases. K.Control Power Supply,120V AC /24V DC as previously specified. 26 23 00.10 -24 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear L.Battery Voltage Converter as previously specified. M.UPS/Server Rack -One standard 4-post rack,19”wide for installation of the UPS and the data storage server. N.Uninterrupted Power System (UPS)as previously specified. O.Data Storage Server as previously specified. P.Net burner,quantity two.Configured to support RS-232,RS-422,and RS-485 with power two pin terminal connector.NetBurner SB800EX-TDD-IR or approved equal with DIN 200 mounting bracket. Q.One 15-amp circuit breaker for the switchgear AC power to the lights,and receptacle.Power supply shall be from the station service power.Provide terminals for external power connection. R.Convenience outlet:120 volt duplex receptacle,din rail mount,15 ampere rating, GFI.Phoenix Contact 5600639,or approved equal. S.LED panel illumination kit,complete with door switch.Hoffman LED24V15,or approved equal. T.Provide a single RESET push button that manually resets all master section alarms. U.Provide a single LAMP TEST push button that tests all annunciation LEDs simultaneously.Note that this includes all master and generator section lamps but does not include VFD lamps. V.Master annunciation LED's,mount near top of cabinet,left to right: Top Row Fire Alarm (red). Emergency Stop (red). Low Coolant Level (red). Fuel Level (red). PLC Failure (red). System Not In Auto (amber). Station Service Breaker Open (red). VFD Main Breaker Open (red). Feeder Breaker Trip (red). 0.Feeder Fail To Close (red). Second Row 11.Spare (red). 12.Spare (green). 13.Spare (red). 14.|No Load On Heat Recovery (amber). 15.|Heat Recovery Loss Of Pressure (amber). 16.Heat Recovery Loss Of Flow (amber). 17.High Coolant Return Temp (red).SMPASNanvVPYWnNS26 23 00.10 -25 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 18.Spare (red). 19.Spare (red). 20.Spare (red). Communications interfaces shall include the following devices and shall be connected as indicated on the Drawings for the respective community,quantity as indicated. 1.Provide a minimum of 2 each industrial switches,16 port Ethernet,10/100 MBPS,24V DC.N-Tron 116TX or approved equal. All equipment shall be connected as indicated and shall provide seamless communication between the devices,PLC,and the Ethernet connection. Spare Input/Output 1.Input:Provide a minimum of 2 spare PLC discreet input pairs wired to terminal blocks. 2.Output:Provide a minimum of 2 spare two-pole relays wired to terminal blocks and controlled by PLC. 2.26 DISTRIBUTION FEEDER SECTION The distribution feeder section of the switchgear shall be located as indicated by the enclosure layout detail on the project design drawings.The following components shall be supplied for the feeder section.When a part number is specified no substitutes will be allowed unless noted "or approved equal”.Note that some components may have been previously specified. A. B.OFeeder protection relay as previously specified. Station Service Circuit Breaker,manually operated,with auxiliary contact,sized as indicated on the Drawings. Feeder Circuit Breaker as previously specified. Feeder breaker manual control switch,open/close spring return to center, Electroswitch or approved equal. Feeder breaker Status LED indicating lights (mount immediately above feeder breaker control switch): Feeder Breaker Open (green). Feeder Breaker Closed (red). Control power transformer for spring charging motor,size as indicated on the Drawings. Current Transformers for relaying and metering,quantity and size as indicated on Drawings.Provide with shorting terminal blocks. 24V DC ISA circuit breaker for control power. LED panel illumination kit,complete with door switch.Hoffman LED24V15,or approved equal. 26 23 00.10 -26 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska 2.27 Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES The variable frequency drives (VFD)shall be located above the feeder breaker enclosure as indicated on the Drawings.Requirements for the VFD's shall be as follows. A.Provide the following equipment: 1.Main circuit breaker,manually operated molded case circuit breaker,15A, 3 pole,Allen Bradley 1489-A3D150,or approved equal.Furnish with auxiliary contacts and shunt trip.Auxiliary contacts shall be provided to indicate position.The closed position contact shall be wired to the PLC to provide alarm indication any time the breaker is not closed (either tripped or manually opened).The shunt trip shall be wired to the overload in the VFD. A three-position selector switch to select between VFD,Bypass,and Off operating modes.The switch shall be rated for occasional switching of motors of the size and voltage indicated,Salzer Part #H216-71322-013V1 or approved equal.Furnish with a minimum of 2 each auxiliary contacts. Nameplate on the door above the indicator lights identifying the VFD for Radiator No.1,etc. LED indicating lights,left to right. Top Row a.VFD Mode (green). b.VFD Running (green). c.Bypass Mode -(amber). Second Row d.VFD Fault (red). e.VFD Breaker Open (red). f.Spare (amber). Cooling fan,with filter and grille,sized to keep the VFD operating within its temperature limitations based on a 100°F ambient temperature.When more than one VFD is installed in a common enclosure install a minimum of two fans.Mount fan(s)at top or bottom of enclosure and provide an exhaust grille in the opposite location,on the front of the enclosure. Fan(s)shall run continuously. Provide a single control wiring harness for control from the master section.Provide a single cable connection for VFD power from the bus through the VFD main circuit breaker. LED panel illumination kit,complete with door switch.Hoffman LED24V15,or equal. Terminal blocks shall be installed in a single location near the top of the VFD enclosure for field connection of all external control and power 26 23 00.10 -27 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear wiring for all VFD's.Use shielded wiring or separate routing for conductors on the load side of all VFD's as previously specified. 9.Variable frequency drive:Provide a Square D Altivar ATV320U40N4B, or approved equal,complete with the following features and accessories: a UL listed. b.Sized for continuous operation of 5 hp motor.Where smaller size motors are indicated use the same VFD.Adjust settings for motor provided. c.Ramp regulation,flying start,and step logic. d.Built-in PID control using 4-20 mA signal as the control variable. e.Sensorless vector slip compensation. f.Motor protection including overload protection,short circuit protection,ground fault protection,and under &over voltage protection. g 1:100 speed range. h.RS-485,ModBus protocol. i.4-20 mA analog input. j Four assignable logic inputs. k Two relay logic outputs. l Remote Graphic Display Terminal,Square D VW3A1101,or approved equal. m.Remote Graphic Display Mounting Kit,Square D VW3A1102,or approved equal. n.Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet communications card,Square D VW3A3316,or approved equal. oO.Cables and connectors as required. 10.Contactor for normal run operation.Provide isolation contactor on the load side of the VFD,Allen-Bradley model 100-C23ZJ10,or approved equal,with one normally open auxiliary contact. 11.|Adjustable solid-state overload relay,480-volt,3-phase,adjustable range. Allen-Bradley model 193,or approved equal,complete with din rail adapter.For motor sizes 2 HP and smaller provide 1.0-5.0A trip range. For motor sizes 3 HP and 5 HP provide 3.2-16A trip range. B.For radiator control,the 24V DC power supply to drive the temperature sensors shall be provided from the switchgear 24V DC control power. C.Sequence of Operation -General.Each variable frequency drive shall operate as follows: 1.When the VFD main circuit breaker is closed and the selector switch is in either the "VFD”or "BYPASS”position,power shall be provided to all control devices.Time delay shall be incorporated into the fault alarm such that there is no alarm due to initial powering up of the VFD. 26 23 00.10 -28 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear When the VFD main circuit breaker is open,the red "VFD Breaker Open” lamp shall illuminate and remote indication shall be provided to the PLC. When the 3-position selector switch is in the "OFF"position,the motor will not operate and power to all control devices will be off. When the 3-position selector switch is in the "Bypass"position,the motor shall operate at full speed and the "Bypass Mode"light shall be on.The VFD will not be in service and the contactor will be open.Provide remote indication that the VFD is in bypass mode from an auxiliary contact as indicated. When the 3-position selector switch is in the "VFD"position,the motor shall operate under control of the VFD and the "VFD Mode"light shall be on.Upon receipt of a run signal the contactor shall close,the motor shall operate,and the "VFD Running”light shall be on. Upon a fault of the VFD the red "VFD Fault”lamp shall illuminate and remote indication shall be provided to the PLC.After a pre-set time delay, 30 seconds,adjustable and a fault alarm shall be indicated on the associated GC.Placing the selector switch in the "OFF”position shall clear the fault alarm indication. Upon activation of the thermal overload,the VFD main circuit breaker shall trip,the red "VFD Breaker Open”lamp shall illuminate and remote indication shall be provided to the PLC. D.Sequence of Operation for Radiator.Each variable frequency drive for glycol coolant radiators shall operate as follows: 1.The VFD shall operate the radiator fan motor any time the coolant temperature is above the minimum setpoint as described below. The remote temperature sensor will sense coolant return temperature and send a 4-20mA signal to the VFD where 20°F equals 4 mA and 240°F equals 20 mA.The operating setpoint and minimum temperature setpoint shall be adjustable through the OIU and scaled to display in °F. The motor shall start at minimum speed and shall ramp up to the required speed. Using its internal proportional control,the VFD shall modulate the fan speed as required to maintain coolant temperature at the operating setpoint.Once the fan speed reaches a minimum speed of 10%(field adjustable),the VFD shall maintain that speed as long as the coolant temperature is above the minimum setpoint.As the coolant temperature rises,the VFD shall increase the speed of the fan motor up to 100%. When the temperature is below the minimum setpoint,the motor shall stop.The motor shall remain off until the temperature reaches the operating setpoint. 26 23 00.10 -29 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 6.The OIU shall be configured to display the fan speed in percentage and to display the minimum temperature setpoint,operating temperature setpoint, and glycol temperature in °F. 7.The operating setpoint for the radiators shall be 185°F,adjustable.The minimum setpoint for the radiators shall be 165°F,adjustable. 2.28.9 GENERATION SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. A.A complete and successfully operating system shall be provided for starting, stopping,and paralleling,both automatically and manually,all generator units.A total of three generator units shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.The following paragraphs describe the basic functional requirements of the system. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design to provide a safe and satisfactorily functioning system. Control system arrangement shall be such that the PLC provides control of the load sensing,automatic start and stop of each unit,and status.Actual synchronization,governor control,generator protection,load share,and voltage compensation shall be provided by devices exterior to the PLC.Failure of the automatic control system shall not prevent the manual operation of the system to start,stop,or synchronize any one,or all,of the generating units. Upon activation of the dead bus relay the feeder breaker shall open.This function shall be independent of the PLC and shall operate in all modes. Automatic Operating Conditions. 1.With the Master Control selector switch in the "Auto”position and each GC in "Auto”mode,the following sequences of operation shall be performed: a.Dead-bus startup,all available generating units will start and come up to rated speed.The first unit to stabilize will close to the dead bus.The remaining units shall auto-synchronize to that unit and close to the bus.After a time delay of 15 seconds,the PLC shall close the feeder breaker and energize the feeder.If available,a minimum of two units shall be running and synchronized prior to energizing the feeder.If only one generator is available for operation,the PLC shall use that unit to energize the feeder. b.With all units operating and all GC's in "AUTO”mode,the PLC shall monitor load on the bus and determine which unit best fits the demand load.The PLC shall then send a signal to the GC to unload and shut down any unit not needed to meet the load. c.If the load exceeds a preset percentage of the prime power rating of a unit,as specified herein,the PLC shall send a signal to the GC to automatically start,synchronize,and connect to the bus another unit.The predetermined demand level set points in the PLC shall determine which unit should be placed on line.-If that unit is not 26 23 00.10-30 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear available,the PLC shall automatically switch to another unit.The PLC shall continue to monitor load and send a command signal to the appropriate GC to start,synchronize,unload,and stop units as required,to match the appropriate unit to the load. d.Where multiple generators of the same capacity are being utilized provide lead/lag control. e.If any unit GC is not in "AUTO”mode,the PLC shall skip that unit and switch to the next available unit.Any time a unit's GC is switched from "STOP”to "AUTO”mode,the PLC shall compare the unit with the operating unit and load to determine which unit is more appropriate for the load.If the new unit is more appropriate, the PLC shall send a command signal to the GC to start, synchronize,and connect the unit to the bus and unload and shut down the other. f.If one unit is operating and is dropped from the bus,for any reason,the PLC shall send a command signal to the GC's to automatically start all remaining available units and perform a dead bus start up sequence as previously specified.The entire startup and synchronization sequence shall not exceed 10 seconds. After the bus is stabilized,the PLC shall resume normal demand level control operation and send a command signal to the GC's to shut down units not required to carry the load. g.If two units are operating and one of the units is dropped from the bus for any reason,the PLC shall check the raise level and overload level of the unit operating.If the system demand exceeds the raise level of the operating unit,the PLC shall send a command signal to the GC to start the next unit and place it in service after the raise level time delay times out.If the system demand exceeds the overload level of the operating unit,the PLC shall immediately send a command signal to the GC to start the next unit required for the automatic demand system and place it in service as soon as possible. h.The GC shall provide a programmable cool down period for each unit prior to engine shut down.Each unit shall operate at idle for 3 minutes,and then automatically stop the engine. i.If the GC of an operating unit is switched to "MAN”mode,the PLC shall send a command signal to the GC to start another unit, as specified above,before removing from the bus and shutting down the unit.Once another unit has been connected to the bus, the GC will shed the load to the other unit,open the breaker,and shut off the engine after a cool-down period. 26 23 00.10 -31 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear j.If the GC of an operating unit is switched to "STOP”mode,the GC will check to see if any other generators are on line.If there is another unit on-line,the GC will shed the load to the other unit, open the breaker,and shut off the engine after a cool-down period.If there is no other unit on-line,the breaker will open and the engine will shut off after a cool-down period. k.Upon shut down of a unit,all parameters shall be reset,if required, to allow the unit to be operated again,either manually or automatically,without further reset action. 2.If the Master Control Switch is switched from the "AUTO”position to the "MAN ISOCH”position while units are operating in automatic mode,the system shall continue to operate in the present state.If the master selector switch is moved back to the "AUTO”position,the PLC shall revert back to operation in the automatic demand mode. E.The Automatic Demand System shall provide 1 level of unit stopping control and 2 levels of starting control.The 2"level of starting control is considered the "overload level”.Each level shall have a kW and timing preset.The "raise level” and "lower level”shall be used by the demand control system as the point at which the level change timing preset begins.The timing preset is the time that the kW load is above a "raise level”or below a "lower level”set point,before the demand level changes.The Demand Control System shall have multiple demand levels.The highest demand level will command all units to start and go on-line. Demand Table:The load share function shall be in accordance with the following: Demand Control Generator(s)On-line kW |Level Level On Line (Overload)Increase Decrease Level 1 #2 or #3 65 55 --- Level 2 #2 and #3 130 110 45 Level 3 #1 180 160 90 Level 4 #1  or #3 245 210 140 Level 5 All 310 ---180 Note:Generator #1 and #2 are equal capacity and the operator must select the lead unit using the OIU.If the lead unit faults or fails to start,the Demand Control will automatically select the other unit. H.If the Master Control Switch is in the "MAN ISOCH"position each generator GC shall control the respective generator in isochronous mode.The GC must be placed in MAN mode to start,stop,and control the generator.All functions shall be manually executed through the GC.If multiple generators are placed on line the GC's shalt proportionally share load. 26 23 00.10 -32 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear I.Engine and generation alarm conditions and sequences.Note that these apply to both Auto and Manual operation. 1.Provide the following types of alarm sequences for each condition listed below: a.Type 1 (Engine Alarm Soft Shutdown): Upon alarm condition bring another generator on line,unload the first generator,open the circuit breaker,run through a cool down cycle,shut down engine,and illuminate "Alarm/Lockout”light and associated alarm annunciation light.Alarm light shall remain illuminated until the problem is corrected and the GC is manually reset.Note that this a Class B Easygen alarm with PLC assist to first start another generator and then take the first off line. Type 2 (Engine Alarm Hard Shutdown): Upon alarm,immediately open the circuit breaker and shut down without going through a cool down cycle.Illuminate "Alarm/Lockout”light and associated alarm annunciation light. Unit shall be locked out and alarm light shall remain illuminated until the problem is corrected and the GC is manually reset.Note that this a Class F Easygen alarm. Type 3 (Generation Alarm): Upon alarm,immediately open the circuit breaker,disable the voltage regulator,run engine through a cool down cycle,shut down engine,and illuminate "Alarm/Lockout”light and associated alarm annunciation light.Unit shall be locked out and alarm light shall remain illuminated until the problem is corrected and the GC is manually reset.Note that this a Class D Easygen alarm. For the following engine/generator alarm conditions perform the sequence indicated and illuminate the associated alarm light: a.Low_Oil Pressure -Provide a Type 1 shut down when the oil pressure drops to the pre-alarm level of 14.5 psig,adjustable,and stays below that level for 5 seconds,or if the signal is lost to the pressure transducer.Provide a Type 2 shutdown when the oil pressure drops to the alarm level of 10 psig,adjustable. Oil Level -Provide a Type 1 shut down when the oil level switch closes. High Coolant Temperature -Provide a Type 1 shut down when the jacket water temperature reaches the pre-alarm level of 210°F, adjustable,and stays above that level for 30 seconds or if the signal is lost to the temperature transducer.Provide a Type 2 shutdown when the jacket water temperature reaches the alarm level of 215°F,adjustable. 26 23 00.10 -33 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska p. Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear Over Speed -Provide a Type 2 shutdown on overspeed. Over Crank -If a unit fails to start after the over crank time delay has expired lock it out. Running Timeout -If the engine runs without being placed on line for 5 minutes,adjustable,shut down the engine and lock it out. Battery Charger Failure -If an alarm is received from the battery charger,illuminate the appropriate alarm light.Do not shut down or lock out the unit. Air Filter Plugged -Provide a Type 1 shut down when the vacuum on the air filter exceeds the pre-alarm level of 15”H2O,adjustable, and stays above that level for 60 seconds or if the vacuum signal is lost.Provide a Type 2 shut down when the vacuum on the air filter exceeds the alarm level of 20”H20. High Exhaust Temperature -Provide a Type 1 shut down when the exhaust temperature exceeds the pre-alarm level of 1000°F, adjustable,and stays above that level for 30 seconds or if the temperature signal is lost.Provide a Type 2 shutdown when the exhaust temperature exceeds the alarm level of 1050°F,adjustable. Fail to Synchronize -Provide a Type 3 shutdown if a unit fails to synchronize after a preset time delay. Over Current -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of an overcurrent element. Under Voltage -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of an under voltage element,90%of nominal voltage. Over Voltage -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of an over voltage element,110%of nominal voltage. Under Frequency -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of an under frequency element,58.2 Hz. Over Frequency -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of an over frequency element,61.8 Hz. Reverse Power -Provide a Type 3 shutdown on operation of a reverse power element,10%. 3.For the following system alarm conditions perform the sequence indicated and illuminate the associated alarm light: a.Fire Alarm -Upon receipt of a contact closure from the fire suppression system,all engines shall be shut down without going through a cool down sequence.The system shall remain in a lockout condition and no units shall be started either manually or automatically until the alarm is cleared. Emergency Stop -Upon receipt of a contact closure from the Emergency Stop Pushbutton,all engines shall be shut down without going through a cool down sequence.The system shall 26 23 00.10-34 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear remain in a lockout condition and no units shall be started either manually or automatically until the alarm is cleared. c.Low Coolant Level -Low Coolant Level -Opening of the low coolant alarm contact on the system low coolant level switch,all engines shall be shut down without going through a cool down sequence.The system shall remain in a lockout condition and no units shall be started either manually or automatically until the alarm is cleared. d.Low Fuel Level -Opening of the low fuel alarm contact on the day tank control panel (furnished separately)indicates a low fuel level condition.The low fuel level indication shall start a time delay relay,2 hours,adjustable,and illuminate the alarm lamp.If the fuel level has not been corrected by the end of the timed interval all engines shall go through a Type 1 shutdown and the alarm lamp shall remain illuminated.The manual alarm reset button on the front of the switchgear master section will reset the timer relay for another interval and place the engines back in service if timed out. The reset function shall work any time during or after expiration of the timed interval. e.PLC Failure -Upon failure of the PLC the alarm light shall remain illuminated until the PLC is back in acceptable service. f.System Not In Auto -When the Master Control Switch (MCS)is changed from Auto to Manual the alarm lamp shall illuminate. The alarm lamp shall remain illuminated until the MCS is switched back to Auto. g.Station Service Breaker Trip -Operation of any overcurrent element in the station service breaker trip unit shall immediately trip the circuit breaker. h.Station Service Breaker Open -Any time the station service circuit breaker is open (trip or manually opened)the alarm lamp shall illuminate. i.VED Main Breaker Trip -Operation of any overcurrent element in the station service breaker trip unit shall immediately trip the circuit breaker. j-VED Main Breaker Open -Any time the station service circuit breaker is open (trip or manually opened)the alarm lamp shall illuminate. k.Feeder Breaker Trip -Operation of the trip contact on the feeder breaker trip unit shall immediately trip the feeder circuit breaker, see Feeder Breaker Sequence below.On systems with more than one feeder breaker provide identical trip function for each. I.Feeder Breaker Fail to Close -Any time the feeder breaker does not close upon a command to close (after a preset time delay)the 26 23 00.10 -35 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear 2.29 2.30 alarm lamp shall illuminate.On systems with more than one feeder breaker provide alarm annunciation for each. FEEDER BREAKER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A.Automatic Operation -When the Master Control selector switch is in the "AUTO”position the feeder breaker shall operate under control of the PLC.The feeder breaker can be opened at any time by rotating the breaker control knob to the OPEN position.The PLC shall then perform a dead bus start sequence (start all available generators)and re-close the breaker(s)after the pre-set time delay. B.Manual Operation -When the Master Control selector switch is in the "MAN ISOCH”position and the bus is energized,the feeder breaker will operate under manual control.The feeder breaker shall close when the control knob is rotated to the CLOSE position and open when the control knob is rotated to the OPEN position. C.Trip Function -The trip output contact on the FPR shall be directly connected to the circuit breaker trip coil without any interposing relay.The FPR shall be programmed to trip the breaker for the following conditions: 1.Instantaneous overcurrent (phase/neutral). 2.Time overcurrent (phase/neutral). 3.Residual instantaneous overcurrent. 4.Residual time overcurrent. 5.Neutral instantaneous overcurrent. 6.Neutral time overcurrent. LOCAL AND REMOTE SYSTEM MONITORING The OIU shall provide the operator local access to the demand system setup parameters and shall display all screens required for system monitoring.The OIU and the server shall communicate with the Pro-Soft card on the PLC via ModBus TCP for tag information to display on the SCADA system.Actual programming of the OIU,GC screens,net burners,and server and development of all display screens shall be performed by the Authority and is not part of this scope of work.The contractor shall provide a listing of all tags available through the Pro-Soft card,with address,required for the Authority to program the following functions and display the following data.All multiplication factors or other proportional scaling of the raw data shall be provided by the Contractor so the data in the address provided will not need to be modified. A.Demand Control -Generator kW rating (overload level),raise level set point, raise level time duration,lower level set point,lower level time duration. B.Generator Control -Amount of time each generator will run off-line before it is shut down (cooldown duration).Enable/disable droop unloading and the kW load or amount of time before going off line.Lead/lag selection between two identical generators. 26 23 00.10-36 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear C.mGenerator Monitoring: Alarms -All engine/generator alarm conditions. Status of the breaker (open or closed.) Phases A,B,and C voltage,current,and power factor. Generator Frequency (Hz). Engine Speed (RPM). Engine Run Time (hours). Engine Water Jacket Temperature (°F). Engine Exhaust Temperature (°F). Engine Oil Pressure (PSI). 10.Engine Air Cleaner Vacuum (in-H20). 11.Engine Fuel Flow Rate (GPH). 12.Engine Total Fuel Use (Gal). 13.|Engine CAN Bus -All available data from Engine Control Unit (ECU). Bus Power Monitoring:eeRPNAYRPYNS1.Phases A,B,and C voltage,current,and power factor for bus. 2.Metering -All available data from totalizing meter. 3.Phases A,B,and C voltage,current,and power factor for station service. 4.Metering -All available data from station service meter. Feeder Circuit Breaker Monitoring: 1.Position indication for the feeder breaker. 2.All available data from the FPR. Device Net Status. Fuel system net burner to pull data from Tank Level Monitor and convert to Modbus TCP.SCADA net burner to pull data from PLC Pro-Soft and convert for use by SCADA and also to log and store alarms. Plant total fuel use. VFD Monitoring -All data available from Ethernet and/or ModBus connection on each of the variable frequency drives,quantity as indicated on the communication diagram on the project design drawings. Heat Recovery Monitoring Alarms. Heat recovery supply temperature (°F)and return temperature (°F). Heat recovery pressure (PSI). Heat recovery flow rate (GPM). Heat output (BTU/hour). Total heat delivered (100,000 BTU).AMWRYWNS26 23 00.10 -37 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTS A.Prior to shipment,the Low-Voltage Switchgear Fabricator shall perform factory tests at the shop where the switchgear is assembled.Provide certified copies of all manufacturers'test data and results.Supply sufficient notice to the Authority prior to performing tests.The Authority reserves the right to witness all tests. Test procedures shall conform to ASME,IEEE,and ANSI standards,and NEMA standard practices section on testing,as appropriate and applicable. The Fabricator shall provide all required equipment and measuring and indicating devices required to perform the tests indicated.All devices shall be certified correct or correction data furnished for the device. Tests shall indicate satisfactory operation and attainment of guarantees and specified performance.Fabricator shall not ship equipment without approval by the Authority of the shop test reports. If the Authority elects to witness the testing,prior to actual witness testing by the Authority,the Fabricator shall conduct sufficient tests and provide the test reports to the Authority to ensure that when the witness test is performed,the equipment will operate as specified. At a minimum,provide the following operational tests: 1.Verify that the system performs the sequence of operations as specified. Verify that the equipment performs each task as specified. 2.Verify all protective relay functions for the FPR and GC. Verify that the PLC starts and stops each generator based on the requirements of the demand table specified herein. 4,Verify that each annunciation point operates correctly.For external alarms,simulate the alarm. 5.Disconnect 120-volt AC power to the control power supply in the master unit to verify that the system continues to operate without interruption from the 24V DC source. 6.Test each variable frequency drive unit.Impress a 4-20 mA signal and verify the output of the VFD.Bench test completed unit.Provide a 3- phase motor of the size indicated and verify that the motor operates based on the 4-20 mA input signal. FPR testing.Provide the following testing of the feeder protection relay. 1.After factory assembly and wiring of equipment,conduct functional tests to prove correct wiring and operation of equipment.The tests shall include but not limited to the following: a.Input 3-phase AC signal voltage to all external terminal blocks where potential transformer connections shall be made.Verify 26 23 00.10-38 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear with a voltmeter and phase angle meter that the correct voltage is present at all points indicated. b.Input 3-phase AC signal current to all external terminal blocks where current transformer connections shall be made.Verify with an ammeter,current test plug,and phase angle meter,where possible,that the correct current is present at all points indicated. Currents through devices not provided with current test jacks may be verified with a clamp-on ammeter. c.Operate each control switch and selector switch in all positions to verify that all control circuits operate as shown on the schematic diagrams. d.Verify proper operation of all blocking,closing,and tripping contacts of the FPR. e.Simulate remote contacts and switches by jumpers at the appropriate external terminal blocks to verify proper circuit operation. f.Visually verify that all indicating lights operate properly. 2.The Contractor shall calibrate and set all relays.Appropriate testing equipment shall be provided to test the relays as specified herein. 3.A report shall be provided in the System Operation &Maintenance Manual for all tests performed. G.Perform the following electrical test and inspections of the switchgear: The switchgear equipment and circuit breakers shall receive factory production tests as listed below: 1.Equipment. a.Low frequency dielectric test. b.Grounding of instrument cases. c.Control wiring and device functional test. d.Polarity verification. e.Sequence test. f.Low frequency withstand voltage test on major insulation components. g.Low frequency withstand test on secondary control wiring. 2.Main Bus:Megger test at 1000 volts each bus to ground and phase-to- phase. 3.Contactors: a.Coil check test. b.Clearance and mechanical adjustment. c.300 Electrical and mechanical operation test. 26 23 00.10 -39 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 23 00.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Prime Power Low-Voltage Switchgear d.Conductivity of current path test. Tests that are provided by the manufacturer of the equipment need not be duplicated.However,documentation shall be provided that the test was performed. Perform multiple repetitions of individual operations as required by the Authority to adequately demonstrate satisfactory operation of all functions. 3.2 NOTIFICATION OF WITNESS TESTING A The Authority shall have the right to inspect,at the factory,all equipment covered by these specifications any time during manufacture and assembly and to be present during any tests made on the equipment. The Authority may visit the manufacturing facility for final performance testing. The Fabricator shall make a technician available to the Authority to assist in the inspection and witness test of the switchgear.The technician shall instruct the Authority in all functions of the equipment. The Fabricator shall notify the Authority two weeks in advance of the scheduled test date.If the Fabricator ships the equipment without allowing the Authority to witness testing of the equipment,or before the Authority accepts the equipment test,the Authority reserves the right to have a third party test the equipment in Anchorage,Alaska or at the F.O.B.destination.All costs associated with a third party test shall be deducted from the Fabricator's final payment.If the switchgear fails any test,the Fabricator shall be responsible for correction of all deficiencies, retesting,and proving the switchgear operates as specified and meets the requirements of these specifications with no increase in the contract price. END OF SECTION 26 23 00.10 -40 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators SECTION 26 32 13.10 ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SCOPE A.The Work included herein shall consist of providing,fabricating,and factory testing complete engine generator packages as specified herein. B.Each unit shall be harmonically balanced and shall be delivered complete and ready for installation. C.Provide all accessories as specified for all engine generator units plus any additional components listed. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 26 05 02 Basic Materials and Methods C.Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems D.Section 26 32 13.20 Rebuilt Diesel Engines SUBMITTALS A.Provide in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B.Provide complete and accurate drawings of the equipment,including outline drawings and dimensional data which fully describe the height,width,and depth of the equipment;skid construction;schematics;wiring diagrams;and other relevant details. C.Provide mechanical and electrical performance data including intake and exhaust air flow;charge air cooling requirements (if applicable);heat rejection;engine coolant pump curve at rated speed;fuel flow rate;fuel consumption at 100%, 75%,50%,and 25%of rated prime power;and other relevant data. D.Provide a torsional vibration analysis (TVA)for each unique engine generator combination. E.Provide manufacturer's catalog literature for all accessories and equipment. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)has issued New Source Performance Standards (NSPS)regulations governing use of stationary diesel engines in remote areas of Alaska.The following provisions of40 CFR Subpart IIII apply to this project: A.40 CFR 60.4201(f)permits manufacturers to produce stationary,non-emergency engines certified to 40 CFR 94 and 40 CFR 1042 (Tier 2 and Tier 3 Marine)if used solely in remote areas of Alaska. B.40 CFR 60.4208(d)prohibits owners and operators from installing a new engine greater than or equal to 75 HP and less than 175 HP after December 31,2013 unless it meets applicable 2012 model year emissions requirements.A new/unused Tier 2 Marine certified engine in this horsepower category complies 26 32 13.10-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 1.5 1.6 with this requirement because the Tier 2 Marine emissions standard was in effect through the 2012 model year. 40 CFR 60.4208(e)prohibits owners and operators from installing a new engine greater than or equal to 175 HP after December 31,2012 unless it meets applicable 2011 model year emissions requirements.A new/unused Tier 2 Marine certified engine in this horsepower category complies with this requirement because the Tier 2 Marine emissions standard was in effect through: 1.The 2012 model year for engines with displacements from 0.9 to less than 1.2 liters/cylinder. 2.The 2013 model year for engines with displacements from 1.2 to less than 2.5 liters/cylinder. 40 CFR 60.4216(b)permits manufacturers,owners and operators to install engines in remote areas of Alaska certified to 40 CFR 94 and 40 CFR 1042 (Tier 2 and Tier 3 Marine). In order to comply with EPA emissions requirements and also be compatible with the intended service applications,the diesel engines furnished under this solicitation shall be Tier 2 Marine certified engines,with a manufacture date in accordance with the requirements previously listed.If the engine is rebuilt it shall be rebuilt in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 1068 and applicable NSPS standards. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.All equipment shall be designed,fabricated,and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practices.Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges so that repair parts,furnished at any time,can be installed in the field.Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable.Except where specific allowance is made in this specification for rebuilt or remanufactured engines,Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery,except as required by tests. Equipment and components furnished under these specifications shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable UL,NEC,IEEE,NEMA,and ANSI standards. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS The engine generators shall be supplied,coordinated,and assembled by a qualified fabricator (Fabricator)who is regularly engaged in the business of providing diesel engine driven generator equipment. A.The Fabricator must have staff with extensive experience in packaging diesel engine driven electrical generators.A list of five prior projects that key staff have worked on may be requested by the Authority after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Fabricator qualifications.The list must include installation date,description of installation,and a reference contact for each installation. The Fabricator must maintain a competent service organization that is available for field service calls.A descriptionof the organization including resumes of key 26 32 13.10-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators personnel may be requested by the Authority after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Fabricator qualifications. The Fabricator must have a fabrication facility with adequate space and appropriate equipment as required to perform the work.The Authority may inspect the Fabricator's shop after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Fabricator qualifications. 1.7 CONTRACTOR WARRANTIES A.The Contractor shall warrant the work for a period of not less than one-year after energization of the equipment or 18 months after delivery to the F.O.B.point, whichever comes first.In the event of equipment or component failure during the warranty period,the Contractor shall replace such defective equipment or components and bear all associated costs.Costs shall include material,parts,and labor.The Contractor will be allowed to charge for travel and perdiem expenses related to warranty service at actual cost plus 10%.The Contractor shall pursue manufacturer's warranties to the extent necessary to obtain replacement equipment and provide proof of action taken upon request.Assist Authority as directed in determining cause of failure. The warranty shall state in clear terms exactly what warranty coverage the seller provides,for each unit and attachments.This shall include the terms,length of coverage,reporting responsibilities,how the warranty applies to accessory equipment,restrictions,locations of local facilities for handling warranty and other repairs (including contact names),and any other available information pertaining to warranty. Provide a nametag on each piece of equipment that clearly identifies the party responsible for the warranty.Nametag shall include the name,address,and phone number,and shop order or Contractor's serial number. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. A.Provide one (1)complete bound set of operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals for each unique engine generator unit.Identification symbols for all replaceable parts and assemblies shall be included.Provide manuals for the following equipment: 1.Engine. 2.Generator. 3.Voltage Regulator. 4.All accessories. For each engine provide all available factory service publications including parts manuals,service manuals,component technical manuals,etc. For all other components of each engine generator unit provide: 1.Equipment function,normal operating characteristics,and limiting conditions. 2.Assembly,installation,alignment,adjustment,and checking instructions. 3.Operating instructions for start-up,routine and normal operation, regulation and control,shutdown,and emergency conditions. 26 32 13.10-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 4.Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 5.Guide to "troubleshooting." 6.Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7.Outline,cross section,elevation,and assembly drawings 8.Engineering data including all mechanical and electrical performance characteristics. 9.Complete AC connection and three-line diagrams. 10.|Complete DC schematics including voltage regulator,fuel injector pump, H. I. sensors,switches,fuses,and all other devices. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts list packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered,or any information submitted for review. Each copy of the final O&M manual shall be provided with original copies of the manufacturer's instruction books.Copies of manufacturer's instruction books shall not be inserted in any of the final O&M manuals. Bind materials in locking three ring "D”style binders.Binder capacities shall not exceed 3 inches,nor shall material included exceed the designed binder capacity. If material to be bound exceeds capacity rating,multiple volumes shall be furnished.Binder capacity shall not be less than approximately 1/2 inch greater than the thickness of the material within the binder.Permanently label with project information on the front cover and edge. Where reduction is not practical,larger drawings shall be folded separately and placed in envelopes,which are bound into the manuals.Each envelope shall bear suitable identification on the outside. All information in the O&M manuals shall be new and original publications. All as-built drawings shall be provided in Adobe PDF format on CD. PART 2 -PRODUCTS GENERAL CONFIGURATION AND MANUFACTURERS2.1 A. B. All units shall be complete skid mounted engine generators utilizing all new components except where specific allowance is made for rebuilt engines. All units shall be configured as specified herein and shall include all accessories as indicated. Engines shall have a manufacture date prior to Model Year 2014.The engine shall be new or at Contractors option rebuilt in accordance with Section 26 32 13.20. Engines shall be rated for prime power duty at the horsepower (shaft)and electrical kilowatt (generator)ratings indicated for each unit.All engines shall be 1800 RPM unless specifically indicated otherwise.All starting systems shall be 24 VDC and all engine control (ECU)systems shall be 12 VDC. Provide engines of the manufacturer and model indicated in the Specific Configuration requirements that follow,no other substitutes except as specifically noted below. 26 32 13.10-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators F.Approved equal substitutions of engines will be allowed only by Engineer's approval.To obtain approval,submittals must clearly demonstrate the following: 1.The substitute engine must meet all of the requirements of Section 2.3 2.The substitute engine manufacturer must have at least one factory authorized service representative with a permanent shop in Southcentral Alaska. 3.The size and weight of the substitute engine must not exceed that of the specified engine by more than 10%. 4.The physical layout,piping connections,and service access area of the substitute engine must be sufficiently similar to that of the specified engine so that no major changes will be required to the power plant design.The engine must not be equipped,or require to be equipped,with any exhaust emissions equipment including Exhaust Gas Recirculation, Diesel Oxidation Catalyst,Diesel Particulate Filter,or Selective Catalytic Reduction. 5.The substitute engine must meet or exceed the fuel efficiency rate of the specified engine.Provide fuel curve showing fuel consumption (kWh/gallon)at 25%,50%,75%and 100%of prime rated capacity. 6.The substitute engine must be provided with a single jacket water cooling circuit without a separate aftercooler circuit. 7.The substitute engine must meet or exceed the heat rejection to the jacket water circuit of the specified engine. Provide Newage/Stamford generators as indicated in the Specific Configuration requirements that follow or Kato equal,no other substitutes except as specifically noted below.The generator shall be rated for continuous output at the value and temperature rise indicated at 0.8 power factor.The generator shall be 2/3 pitch winding,3 phase,277/480 volt,12 lead reconnectable,with PMG excitation. If a Marathon or other generator of equivalent or greater capacity is provided it shall be modified and upgraded prior to installation.Upon receipt of the generator from the factory it shall be taken to a manufacturer's authorized warranty service shop and the following tasks shall be performed: 1.Remove rotor assembly,bearing,exciter,diode plate and inspect for defects. 2.If any defects are encountered immediately file a warranty claim with the manufacturer. Electrically test all windings. 4.Encapsulate exciter rotor winding with epoxy. Replace bearing prior to reinstalling exciter.Bearing shall meet the minimum requirements of these specifications. 6.Replace diode plate mounting bolts with grade 8 bolts and use Loctite. 26 32 13.10-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 7.Insulate main rotor leads with phase paper.Secure leads with heat shrinkable polyester tape using epoxy on all knots. Spray coat all windings with epoxy. Dynamically balance and re-assemble. 10.Test at rated RPM. 26 32 13.10-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 2.2 2.3 SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION Furnish Engine Generators of the capacity and configuration listed below: No.1:Engine -260 hp,180 ekW prime,John Deere 6081AFM75,Tier 2 Marine. ECU Control Voltage =12 VDC (standard). Starting Voltage =24 VDC (convert as required). Generator -Minimum 230kW continuous at 105°C rise,Newage/Stamford UCI274J or Kato equal. Voltage Regulator Cross Current Transformer Ratio =300:5 Note that generator has been oversized to accommodate future re-power with a larger engine. No.2:Engine -98 hp,65 ekW prime,John Deere 4045TFM75,Tier 2 Marine. ECU Control Voltage =12 VDC (standard). Starting Voltage =24 VDC (convert as required). Generator -Minimum 125kW continuous at 105°C rise,Newage/Stamford UCI274E or Kato equal. Voltage Regulator Cross Current Transformer Ratio =150:5 Note that generator has been oversized to accommodate future re-power with a larger engine. No.3:Engine -98 hp,65 ekW prime,John Deere 4045TFM75,Tier 2 Marine. ECU Control Voltage =12 VDC (standard). Starting Voltage =24 VDC (convert as required). Generator -Minimum 125kW continuous at 105°C rise,Newage/Stamford UCI274E or Kato equal. Voltage Regulator Cross Current Transformer Ratio =150:5 Note that generator has been oversized to accommodate future re-power with a larger engine. ENGINE A.Provide a skid mounted,1800 RPM,diesel engine complete with generator/alternator and ready for service.Except where specific allowance is made in this specification for rebuilt or remanufactured engines,the unit shall be of newest design and of recent manufacture. Marine engines shall be furnished without a charging alternator,heat exchanger, coolant expansion tank,or accessory reduction gear drive.Factory installed components shall be removed as required. The engine shall be a four-cycle,water-cooled,direct injection diesel engine of 4 or 6 cylinder in-line configuration as indicated by model number and shall be provided with a gear driven coolant pump where offered by manufacturer. Cylinder Liners:The engines shall be provided with removable cylinder liners to facilitate field rebuilding. Horsepower:Certified engine power curves and fuel consumption at 25%,50%, 75%,and 100%loading,shall be submitted showing the manufacturer's approval of the engine rating for engine generator prime power application.Special ratings or "continuous standby"ratings will not be acceptable. 26 32 13.10-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators F,Engine Control:All engine control functions will be performed by remote switchgear which will perform all start/stop,speed,paralleling,and load sharing control functions in addition to all engine function monitoring and safety shut downs.Engine manufacturer's electronic control panels shall not be provided as part of this package. ECU and Isochronous Governor:The engine speed shall be 1800 RPM over the entire load range.The frequency at any constant load,including no load,shall remain within +/-0.5%isochronous control for rated frequency operation. Provide an Engine Control Unit (ECU)for interface with the switchgear. Fuel:The engine shall be capable of satisfactory performance on No.1 Arctic Grade Fuel or No.2 Domestic Burner Oil. Fuel System:The engine shall have manufacturer's engine mounted fuel filters with replaceable elements.Fuel supply and return lines shall be routed to the front of generator skid for field connection to the plant piping.See Drawings for detailed configuration. Lubrication:The engine shall have a gear type lubricating oil pump for supplying oil under pressure to the main bearings,crankshaft bearings,pistons, piston pins,timing gears,camshaft bearings and valve rocker mechanism. Threaded spin-on type,full flow lubricating oil filters shall be provided.The oil drain line shall be terminated with a ball valve and bulkhead fitting through the skid on the side of the unit.See Drawings for detailed configuration. Oil Level:The engine shall have a combination visual oil level site gauge with adjustable high and low level switches,Murphy L129CK1 or approved equal. Mount on rubber isolators and connect to engine with minimum #8 hoses. Carefully route upper vent hose to avoid any low point traps and connect directly into crankcase.Route lower hose to a connection directly on the oil pan.Do not tee lower hose into oil drain line.See Drawings for installation detail. Fuel and Oil Hoses:All hoses for fuel,lube oil,vents,mechanical gauges,etc., shall be Aeroquip type FC300,Eaton Weatherhead H569 or approved equal. Minimum hose size shall be 5/16”(#6).Provide with re-useable JIC swivel type fittings.Push-on or barb type hose connections will not be allowed.Route hoses to avoid wear points and to ensure access to normal service points on the engine. Securely support hoses from engine and skid. Glycol Hoses:All hoses for glycol shall be Teflon hose with stainless steel outer braid,Eaton Weatherhead H243 or approved equal.Provide with re-useable plated steel straight JIC swivel ends with NPT adapters.Route hoses to avoid wear points and to ensure access to normal service points on the engine.Securely support hoses from engine and skid. Wire Loom:All wiring for contro]and instrumentation shall be routed in plastic loom.Provide tee fittings for all branch connections.Route loom to avoid wear points and to ensure access to normal service points on the engine.Securely support loom from engine and skid. Protective Guards:All moving parts and hot surfaces shall be provided with protective guards in accordance with U.L Standard 2200. 26 32 13.10-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 2.4 2.5 P.Air Cleaners:The engine shall be provided with a dry-type,replaceable element air cleaner with a metal canister,Donaldson or approved equal.Open disposable type air filters or plastic canisters will not be accepted.Provide visual air restriction indicator,20”water column limit,manual reset,Donaldson X002251 or approved equal. Starting:The engine shall be equipped with a 24 VDC electric starting system. The starting system shall be of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at a speed which will allow full diesel starting.A starter auxiliary relay shall be remote mounted in control wiring junction box,Caterpillar 9X-8124 or approved equal. Control Power:To provide 24VDC power to the control wiring junction box,a 30A circuit breaker with switch shall be mounted on the engine in the vicinity of the starter,Cooper 187-030-F-00 or approved equal. Safety Controls:The automatic switchgear provided by others shall be equipped with automatic safety controls which will shut down the engine in the event of high jacket water temperature (primary),high lubricating oil temperature,low lubricating oil pressure,high or low lubricating oil level,high air filter restriction, and engine overspeed based on J1939 CANbus and engine mounted sensors. Note that a single low water shut down switch will be installed on the external cooling system. EXHAUST FLEX A.A flexible,continuous,18 inch long stainless steel exhaust flex connector with welded connections shall be furnished for each engine,Alaska Rubber or approved equal.Provide an appropriate engine mating connection at one end and an ASA 125 lb.flange sized to match silencer at the opposite end as shown on the Drawings.Slotted cuff connections are not acceptable.Provide gasket,bolts,v- clamp,or any other components required for connection to the engine.Provide a 90°elbow where required for the flex to be installed vertically.Note that if the exhaust temperature sensor cannot be installed directly in the outlet connection,a 1/4”FPT stainless steel thread-o-let shall be welded into the flex between the engine connection and the corrugated hose. ACCESSORIES Provide the following accessories for each generating unit (unless otherwise indicated): A.Spring vibration isolators complete with mounting hardware,four (4)per each unit,sized for the complete engine generator package weight.Caldyn or approved equal. Drip pan,16-gauge galvanized sheet metal,liquid tight joints,20”wide by 50” long by 1”high. Provide two each minimum 800 cold crank amp 12-volt starting batteries,two for each engine.Batteries shall be sealed maintenance free,Optima Red Top NAPA Part Number BAT N993478RED or approved equal.Each battery shall be installed in a battery rack sized to securely hold the battery and shall include a minimum 5/8”plywood base. 26 32 13.10-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators D.Each engine shall be provided with two each #2/0 AWG arctic flex battery cables, length as required,plus one each #2/0 AWG by 12-inch long jumper.All cables shall include compression type terminal ends.One battery cable shall be red for the positive lead and the other shall be black for the negative lead.The jumper shall be black with red heat shrink one end. 2.6 COOLING SYSTEM A. B. Engine cooling shall be by remote radiators with coolant circulation driven by the engine coolant pump. Glycol Filter:Provide screw-on canister style filter element with 3/8"NPT connections on head,Wix #24019 head with #24069 element.Mount head on steel bracket fixed to front or side of engine.Connect to engine with glycol hoses with 3/8”NPT quarter turn gauge cock isolation valves.Connect inlet to thermostat housing and connect outlet to water pump inlet.On thermostat housing connection provide 3/8”NPT tee fitting with plug for field connection of pre-heat line by others.When filters are provided as part of engine manufacturer's assembly the standard factory filters may be substituted for the above specified parts;however,equivalent mounting,connections,and isolation valves shall be included. On marine engines provide modifications as follows: 1.John Deere 6081AFM75 -Install a thermostat cover oriented for horizontal discharge on the right hand side of the engine,Option Code 2116. 2.John Deere 4045TFM/AFM -Upon removal of coolant expansion tank and other accessories that are not required,install 2”diameter steel tube coolant line extensions to the front of the engine as required for 2”coolant hose connection. 2.7 INSTRUMENT PANEL A.Provide a J1939 multi-function monitoring panel,Murphy PV101-C or approved equal.The panel shall be mounted on the side of the control wiring junction box. Provide with wiring harness as required for connection to ECU and battery power. 2.8 GENERATOR/ALTERNATOR A.Generator shall be a single bearing,four pole,synchronous type.Generator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel housing and driven through a flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment.The generator shall be rated three phase,277/480V,60 Hz,1800 RPM,brushless,12 lead reconnectable,and winding pitch of 2/3 design.Windings shall be random wound and lashed at the end turns to provide superior mechanical strength. The rotating assembly shall be dynamically balanced to less than 2 mils peak to peak displacement and shall be designed to have an over speed withstand of 125% of rated speed for 3 minutes when operating at stable rated operating temperature. Cast iron end brackets with bearing bores machined for an O-Ring to retard bearing outer race rotation and fabricated steel frames shall be used.Bearings 26 32 13.10-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators shall be pre-lubricated,double shielded,ball type,single row Conrad,C3 fit. Minimum B-10 bearing life shall be 30,000 hours for single bearing units. D.Generator wiring diagram shall be permanently installed on the inside of the terminal enclosure cover. E.The insulation system of both the rotor and stator shall be of NEMA Class H materials or better and shall be synthetic and non-hygroscopic.The stator winding shall be given multiple dips of resin,plus a final coating of epoxy for extra moisture and abrasion resistance.The rotor shall be layer wound with thermosetting 100%solids epoxy between each layer,plus a final coating of epoxy for moisture and abrasion resistance.The shaft exposed metal surfaces and rectifier assembly shall be coated with an epoxy varnish. F,The generator shall be equipped with a permanent magnet generator (PMG) excitation system.Both the PMG and the rotating brushless exciter shall be mounted outboard of the bearing.The system shall supply a minimum short circuit support current of 300%of the rating for 10 seconds.The rotating exciter shall use a three-phase full wave rectifier assembly with hermetically sealed silicon diodes protected against abnormal transient conditions by a multi-plate selenium surge protector.The diodes shall be designed for safety factors of 5 times voltage and 3 times current. G.Voltage Regulator:The voltage regulator shall be compatible with the PMG excitation and shall control the output of the brushless AC generator by regulating the current into the exciter field.The regulator shall include electromagnetic interference (EMI)filtering and under frequency roll-off protection.The voltage regulation shall be 0.25%from no load to full load and 4%frequency variation. Caterpillar CDVR or approved equal. 3.The voltage regulator shall be mounted inside of the control wiring junction box as indicated in the Drawings. 4.The voltage regulator shall be furnished complete with a cross current transformer (CT)for paralleling operation.Install the CT on Phase B generator lead with H1 facing towards the generator.The CT ratio shall be as indicated in the prior Specific Configuration requirements H.Nameplate:On the side of the generator housing,provide a nameplate that provides the following information.The nameplate shall be located in a clearly visible location and shall not be obscured by the terminal enclosure or located such that the nameplate is behind any part of the generator or housing. 1.Rated kW as specified. 2.Full load amps. 3.Rated voltage,phase,and power factor. 4.Rated voltage and current of the field exciter. I.Each generator shall be provided with a standard sized terminal compartment. The terminal compartment shall be provided with a load connection block to allow easy field termination of the load,neutral,and ground conductors.The generator neutral connection shall not be connected to the mounting skid or the 26 32 13.10-11 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators generator frame.The neutral shall be isolated for field grounding at the switchgear or transformer. The generator shall be self-ventilated with a direct drive one-piece,cast aluminum alloy,unidirectional internal fan for high volume,low noise air delivery.Airflow shall be from opposite drive end through generator to drive end.The exciter shall be in the airflow. Replace the standard factory hardware used for attachment of the generator coupling disc to the engine flywheel with Grade 8 hex head bolts.Install heavy gauge washers,tighten and torque bolts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications,and paint pen mark. 2.9 MOUNTING SKID A. C. The engine and generator shall be equipped with a suitable full length base frame (skid)for mounting the engine and generator.The skid shall be constructed from structural steel channel with ends beveled and plated for short term skidding and rolling of unit.No formed or stamped steel base frame designs will be accepted.Provisions shall be made so that the generator can slide back a minimum of 12”to access the rear main seal on the engine without removing the generator end off of the skid or requiring the use of blocking to support it.See the Drawings for skid design and layout. Provisions shall be made in the skid for the mounting of vibration isolators at locations as indicated on the Drawings.Wedge washers shall be welded in place on the skid to provide a flat surface for the vibration isolator lock nuts. Each engine generator shall be placed on the skid at the location indicated on the Drawings. 2.10 WIRING INTERFACE WITH REMOTE SWITCHGEAR A.A control wiring junction box shall be furnished for each generator as follows: 1.The junction box shall be steel,NEMA 4,with hinged door and screw down latches.Hoffman or approved equal.See Drawings for size. 2.The junction box orientation,device layout,terminal block layout,and labeling shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3.Install the voltage regulator and instrument panel as previously specified in the junction box as shown on the Drawings. 4.All wiring for control,monitoring,and safety shall be terminated on terminal blocks within the control wiring junction.The terminals shall be IDEC or approved equal,BNHISLW except where indicated 50A provide BNHSOW.Terminals shall be mounted on DIN rail with heavy duty end anchors.Each terminal block and all wire terminations shall be individually numbered as indicated. 5.The engine and generator mounted control wiring shall be provided with a maintenance loop of sufficient length to allow the generator to be slid back 12”minimum for maintenance of the engine without disconnecting any control wiring. 26 32 13.10-12 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators B.The DC power supply for the switchgear shall be provided from the engine starting batteries through the engine-mounted circuit breaker.Terminals shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings for supplying 24 VDC to the switchgear. The engine start systems shall be 24 VDC.The engine run systems shall be 12 VDC.All remote indication will be 24VDC,4-20mA,or as otherwise indicated. All switches used for remote indication shall be rated for operation at 24 VDC. 2.11 PAINTING Each unit shall be painted John Deere green including engine,skid,and generator. 2.12 SPARE FILTERS In addition to the filters installed on the engines,provide the following quantities of replacement filters for each engine.Package spare filters in boxes and label each box with the community name. A. B. C. D. Twelve (12)oil filters. Four (4)fuel filters. Three (3)air filters. Four (4)glycol filters. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTS A.Prior to shipment,the engine generator Fabricator shall perform factory tests on each unit at the shop where the engine generator is assembled.Provide certified copies of all Fabricators'test data and results.Supply sufficient notice to the Authority prior to performing tests.The Authority reserves the right to witness all tests.Test procedures shall conform to ASME,IEEE,and ANSI standards,and NEMA standard practices section on testing,as appropriate and applicable. The Fabricator shall provide all required mechanical and electrical equipment including but not limited to fuel supply,radiator,and load bank. The Fabricator shall provide all required measuring and indicating devices.All devices shall be certified correct or correction data furnished for the device. Engine Tests:Shop test each engine generator with the associated control wiring junction box permanently connected.Perform customary commercial factory tests on each engine generator including,but not limited to,the following: 1.Perform hydrostatic test on water jackets to assure that water seals and water jackets are watertight.Test report shall indicate pressure at which test was made and the results. 2.Place engine in continuous operation without stoppage for a period of not less than eight hours.Operate not less than one hour at each load point (1/2,3/4,and full load)and 1 hour at 110 percent of rated load.If stoppage becomes necessary during this period,repeat the 8-hour run. Also record the following data at the start,at 15-minute intervals,and at the end of each load run:Hz,kW load,fuel consumption,exhaust 26 32 13.10-13 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska 3.2 SHIPPING A. Engine Generators temperature,intake air temperature,jacket water temperature,lube oil temperature,lube oil pressure,manifold (boost)pressure,and crankcase vacuum. Tests shall indicate satisfactory operation and attainment of guarantees and specified performance.Contractor shall not ship equipment without approval by the Authority of the shop test reports. After testing,and immediately prior to shutdown for shipping perform the following steps: 1.Operate the engine three to five minutes with oil,which has 3%to 4% VCI (volatile corrosion inhibitor)oil per engine crankcase volume.The oil does not have to be removed from the engine. Remove any dirt from the air cleaner;check all seals and gaskets.Put lubricant on all points given in the lubrication chart of the engine operation guide. Turn the engine at cranking speed with governor control in full off position and use a sprayer to add a mixture of 50%VCI oil and 50%30 weight oil into the air intake or turbocharger inlet. Continue spraying the mixture of 50%VCI oil and 50%30-weight engine oil into the air intake or turbocharger inlet to ensure the cylinders and exhaust ports are coated with the oily mixture. Clean the outside of the engine and inspect and ensure that the engine and generator are covered by good quality paint.Correct any deficiencies. Spray a thin amount of 50%VCI oil and 50%30-weight engine oil on the flywheel,ring gear teeth,and starter pinion.Install the covers to keep the vapors in. Put a heavy layer of multipurpose grease on all outside parts that move, i.e.threaded rod,ball joints,linkage,etc. Flush the cooling system with extended life 50/50 ethylene glycol mix, Shell Rotella ELC or approved equal.Install covers over the connections. Note that if testing was performed with extended life ethylene glycol solution the engine does not need to be flushed. Install a positive mechanical seal consisting of a fitting plate and gasket on exhaust opening.Then install all covers and/or tape on openings,air intake,exhaust openings,flywheel housing,etc.Ensure all coves are air tight and weatherproof.Use waterproof,weather resistant type tape.Do not install tape in such a manner as will damage paint when the tape is removed.Install a mechanical protective device over any protruding items,which may be vulnerable to breakage during transportation. After preparing the equipment for shipping,package each engine generator separately as follows: 26 32 13.10-14 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.10 Mertarvik,Alaska Engine Generators 1.Coil wiring harnesses and secure control wiring junction box to generator. 2.Put a waterproof cover over the entire engine generator unit.Make the 3.3 cover tight,but loose enough to let air circulate around the unit to prevent damage to exposed metal parts from condensation. 3.All other included components (spare parts,loose items,etc.)shall be packaged individually in waterproof wrapping.Each individual component package shall then be packed in a box or crate,and each box/crate wrapped in waterproof wrapping to prevent corrosion to the components during extended periods of outside storage.All boxes or crates shall be palletized onto the minimum number of pallets,as required for the quantity and size of the boxes/crates. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING A. B. Install the engine generator as indicated on the Drawings. Ensure correct fit and alignment of all connections to not cause stress on engine connections or wear on piping,hoses,conduit,wiring,etc. Adjust spring vibration isolator leveling bolts to achieve a uniform installation height of approximately 5-3/4”then tighten locking nuts.Adjust nuts on stabilizer bolts to achieve a uniform clearance of approximately 1/8”then tighten locking nuts.Verify unit moves freely on isolators. During functional testing and commissioning,perform final inspection and testing as required to ensure full authorization of factory warranty.John Deere Application review AG04-A or equivalent. END OF SECTION 26 32 13.10-15 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.20 Mertarvik,Alaska Rebuilt Diesel Engines 1.1 SECTION 26 32 13.20 REBUILT DIESEL ENGINES PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE A.The Work included herein shall consist of furnishing diesel engines as specified 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 herein. B.The purpose of this solicitation is to procure used diesel engine(s),rebuilt to original equipment manufacturer (OEM)tolerances,durability,and quality.The diesel engine(s)will be used in a prime power,1800 rpm,genset application. Rebuilt engines shall be delivered complete,tested,and ready for installation. C.The Authority will not be furnishing cores.The Rebuilder shall furnish cores in compliance with Specification 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators,Paragraph 1.4, Regulatory Compliance. D.The engines rebuilt in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 1068 and applicable NSPS standards. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators SUBMITTALS A.Provide in accordance with Division |requirements. B.See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators for additional requirements. C.Provide the following a minimum of seven days prior to beginning final engine assembly: 1.An action plan specifying all work to be performed on existing engine components and a complete list of all new and remanufactured parts to be installed on each engine,with indication of new/remanufactured status. 2.All NDT inspection reports,existing component and original OEM dimensions and clearances,recorded by engine serial number for each engine.Note that if the contractor is furnishing OEM factory remanufactured engines the above information may not be available prior to final assembly.The information shall be provided as soon as available. If the results of the above inspections do not meet the requirements of these specifications for any engine that engine will be rejected. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Engines shall not have been in service at any time after rebuilding and prior to delivery except as required to comply with Section 26 32 13.10 requirements for Factory Tests. All new and refurbished parts,castings,assemblies and components furnished under these specifications shall meet original OEM specifications and be provided with contractor's warranty. 26 32 13.20-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.20 Mertarvik,Alaska Rebuilt Diesel Engines 1.6 1.7 1.8 C.All work shall be performed by certified and experienced technicians trained and authorized to work on the engines being rebuilt and furnished. D.All nondestructive testing (NDT)of castings and parts provided under these specifications to be performed to ASTM standards.All NDT inspections shall be performed by a Level II or Level III certified NDT inspector using a certified Quality System. E.Where items are described as factory rebuilt or remanufactured,the term factory shall mean a machine shop that is regularly engaged in the practice of remanufacturing the type of items required. REBUILDER QUALIFICATIONS Engines shall be rebuilt by a qualified rebuilder (Rebuilder)who is regularly engaged in the business of rebuilding diesel engines. A.The Rebuilder must have staff with extensive experience in rebuilding diesel engines.A list of five prior projects that key staff have worked on may be requested by the Authority after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Rebuilder qualifications.The list must include installation date,description of work,and a reference contact for each project. B.The Rebuilder must have a fabrication facility with adequate space and appropriate equipment as required to perform the work.The Authority may inspect the Rebuilder's shop after the bid opening and prior to award in order to verify Rebuilder qualifications. CONTRACTOR WARRANTIES - See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators for Warranty Requirements OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators for Manual Requirements PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 ENGINE MANUFACTURER,MODEL,CONFIGURATION,AND MODEL YEAR See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators ENGINE REBUILD STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES A.Replacement Parts:These specifications require that some existing engine components be reconditioned and reused.Other components are required to be replaced with either new or factory remanufactured parts.For the remaining components,the Rebuilder may recondition the existing part,or replace it with either a new or factory remanufactured part.All parts and components,whether new,remanufactured,or reconditioned,shall meet or exceed original OEM specifications,tolerances,durability and quality.Refer to the specific components listed below in this section. B.Disassembly &Cleaning:The used engine furnished for rebuilding shall be fully disassembled for cleaning,part inspection,qualification and reconditioning.All 26 32 13.20-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.20 Mertarvik,Alaska Rebuilt Diesel Engines cylinder liners,core plugs,passage plugs and other fittings shall be removed from all castings,including the cylinder block,cylinder head,oil cooler/filter housing, exhaust manifold,intake manifold,flywheel housing,front cover,etc.,to enable complete and thorough cleaning.All bearings and bushings shall be removed.All castings and other parts to be inspected shall be cleaned in a caustic cleaning solution to remove all grease,oil,loose paint,surface corrosion,carbon deposits and any other foreign material.All oil passages shall be mechanically cleaned where possible and confirmed to be free of any obstructions.After cleaning,all parts subject to corrosion must be lightly oiled and wrapped. C.Inspection and Measurement:After disassembly and cleaning,the following castings shall be visually and magnetic particle NDT inspected for defects: cylinder block external surfaces,cylinder block main bearing housing bore, cylinder head,crankshaft and camshaft (remove galley plugs,counterweights and gears),flywheel housing,timing gear cover,intake manifold and exhaust manifold.All components that are to be reused in engine assembly shall be inspected and measured to confirm tolerances are within OEM specifications. D.Corrective Action Plan:After cleaning,inspecting,and measuring all engine components to be reused in the engine assembly,provide a corrective action plan, including a complete parts list with measured dimensions and OEM specified tolerances,for each engine serial number and submit to the Engineer for approval prior to proceeding with engine assembly.All engine components shall be upgraded to include the latest factory design improvements and shall be included in the corrective action plan. E.Threaded Connections,Hardware and Fasteners:All threaded holes shall be inspected and tapped.Fasteners and hardware that are corroded,damaged,or do not meet original OEM specifications shall be replaced with new.All head bolts, flywheel bolts and any other torque-to-yield bolts shall be replaced with new. Any locking devices (such as lock washers and lock nuts)shall be replaced with new.During reassembly all fasteners shall be paint pen marked at the conclusion of final torque tightening. F,Cylinder Block:After cleaning and inspection,the existing cylinder block shall be reconditioned. 1.The cylinder block shall be measured for deck height and deck surface flatness.The condition of all gasket and sealing faces as well as all O-ringlandsandboltholesshallalsobeinspected.All block surfaces shall be machined as necessary to meet OEM specifications.Furnish all new expansion plugs. 2.The cylinder block main bearing housing bore shall be checked for properfitofcapstoblock,bore roundness,diameters and alignment.If fit, dimensions,and alignment meet OEM specifications,hone existing caps. If fit,dimensions and alignment meet do not meet OEM specifications, replace caps and perform line bore. 3.After resurfacing block,recut cylinder counter bores to proper dimensions. Note that upper and lower bore inserts are permitted as long as they meet or exceed factory repair procedures and factory new counter bore depth ismaintained.Ensure that all cylinder parent bores meet OEM 26 32 13.20-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.20 Mertarvik,Alaska Rebuilt Diesel Engines specifications and check O-ring and crevice ring liner sealing areas for pitting prior to installing new cylinder liners. 4.If the reconditioned block does not meet all original OEM specifications, the block shall be replaced with a used block that that meets all original OEM specifications and has a manufacture date prior to Model Year 2014. G.Crankshaft:The crankshaft shall be either reconditioned or replaced with a factory remanufactured crankshaft.Undersized journals and repair sleeves shall not be allowed.As a minimum,reconditioning shall include confirmation that dimensional,hardness,alignment,wear surface finish,and seal surface finish conditions meet OEM specifications.If the crankshaft has passed all other inspections,the journals shall be polished and checked with a surface profilometer to meet or exceed OEM smoothness requirements. H.Connecting Rods:The connecting rods shall be reconditioned or replaced with new.If reconditioned only the castings shall be reused.After magnetic particle NDT inspection and checking for straightness,connecting rod big end shall be machined to OEM specifications using new bolts.Connecting rod small end shall receive a new bushing and be machined to OEM specifications. I.Pistons,Rings,and Sleeves:The pistons,piston rings,and cylinder liners shall be new OEM parts.Aftermarket parts shall not be used. J.Camshaft:The camshaft shall be either reconditioned or replaced with new.Asa minimum reconditioning shall include confirmation that dimensional,hardness, alignment,wear surface finish,and seal surface finish conditions meet OEM specifications.If the camshaft has passed all other inspections,the lobes shall be ground to meet or exceed OEM specifications. K.Rocker Arms and Push Rods:The rocker arms and push rods shall be new OEM parts.Aftermarket parts shall not be used. L.Cylinder Head:The cylinder head shall be either reconditioned or replaced with a factory remanufactured complete assembly that meets or exceeds OEM specifications.If reconditioned,only the casting shall be reused with all parts replaced new.Welded,spray welded or otherwise repaired cylinder head castings shall not be allowed.Following are guidelines for reconditioning the existing cylinder head: 1.After inspection,the cylinder head shall be measured for surface flatness and resurfaced as necessary to meet OEM specifications.Ensure that no pitted or corroded areas remain outside of the gasket sealing area. 2.The overhead camshaft bores shall be measured for size and checked to ensure that roundness,taper,and alignment meet OEM specifications. Machining,line boring and straightening are acceptable practices for restoration of camshaft alignment.Fitting of replacement bearing shells, installing oversize components or performing metal build up are not acceptable practices for restoration of camshaft alignment. 3.All fuel injector sleeves,valves,seats,guides,springs,rotators and keepers shall be replaced new.Grind valves and seats to meet OEMspecifications.After assembly,test valves and seats using a vacuum pump maintaining a minimum of 25in HG. 26 32 13.20-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 26 32 13.20 Mertarvik,Alaska Rebuilt Diesel Engines M. R. Electrical and Controls:Furnish a new or remanufactured ECU,flashed to the service and emissions certification specified under Section 26 32 12.10 Engine Generators,Paragraph 1.4,Regulatory Compliance.Furnish new engine sensors and new wiring harnesses.Furnish new or remanufactured starter. Fuel System:Furnish new or remanufactured fuel injection pump,fuel transfer (lift)pump,injectors,and metering valves,Furnish new governor springs,filters, screens,gaskets,seals,O-rings,and fuel hoses.See Section 26 32 12.10 Engine Generators for hose type and installation.Inspect all metallic fuel tubing and replace with new if corroded,pitted,damaged,or otherwise not in compliance with OEM original specifications. Lubrication System:Furnish new or remanufactured oil pump and pressure valve. Furnish new oil cooler,thermetic regulating valve,filters,screens,gaskets,seals, O-rings and hoses.See Section 26 32 12.10 Engine Generators for hose type and installation.Inspect all metallic lubrication tubing and replace with new if corroded,pitted,damaged,or otherwise do not meet OEM original specifications. Cooling System:Furnish new or remanufactured water pump.Furnish new thermostat,filters,gaskets and hoses.See Section 26 32 12.10 Engine Generators for hose type and installation.Inspect all metallic coolant tubing and replace with new if corroded,pitted,damaged,or otherwise do not meet OEM original specifications. Air Intake and Exhaust Systems:The existing intake and exhaust manifolds shall be reconditioned and reinstalled if deemed suitable for reuse after NDT and visual inspections.If either casting is deemed unsuitable for reuse,replace with new OEM casting.Furnish a new or remanufactured turbocharger.Furnish all new gaskets,clamps and seals. Painting:See Section 26 32 12.10 Engine Generators for painting PART 3 -EXECUTION FACTORY TESTS See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators for Testing Requirements SHIPPING See Section 26 32 13.10 Engine Generators for Shipping Requirements 3.1 3.2 END OF SECTION 26 32 13.20-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section describes general requirements for all types of earthwork and is applicable to all earthwork required on the Project. IMPORTANT NOTES: 1.Site conditions are known to be saturated following seasonal snow melt, flooding,or significant rainfall.Standing water may be encountered. 2.Due to ground water fluctuation and the depth of pad excavation, dewatering of pad excavation may be required. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. Section 02 20 00 -Subsurface Conditions Section 31 23 19 --Dewatering Section 31 30 00 Clearing and Grubbing Section 31 32 19 -Geotextile Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation Section 32 92 19 -Seeding Section 33 47 13 -Fuel Protection Liners 13 PROTECTION A.Protect equipment and vehicular traffic from trenches and excavations by providing adequate barricades and signage. Protect excavation side-slopes or adjacent structures by providing adequate back- slopes,shoring,bracing or other methods required to prevent failure of the excavations or existing soils. Protect all above and below ground utilities. Notify the Engineer of unexpected sub-surface conditions. 31 2000-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska 1.4 1.5 E. Earth Moving Grade top perimeter of the excavation to prevent surface water runoff from entering the excavation. Provide for dewatering of the trench where ground water is encountered. Appropriate Personal Protection Equipment will be used to protect workers from work site hazards. The Contractor is responsible for meeting the OSHA requirements for worker safety on the work site. QUALITY CONTROL ASSURANCE A.Testing Procedures and Methods: 1.Earthwork Quality Control Assurance testing procedures and methods shall be in accordance with the Division 1 specifications. 2.Other testing procedures and methods referenced in individual specification sections. B.Quality Control Monitoring: 1.Contractor shall secure and pay for all required quality control monitoring. Contractor shall utilize Engineer approved,certified,independent laboratory and field personnel for all required testing. 2.Provide certified test results as required in Paragraph 1.5 Submittals of this specification. 3.Fill material placed prior to Engineer approval of test results is at the sole risk of the Contractor.Material not meeting requirements shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions,Division 1, and this Section. B.Provide the following submittals: 1.Name of proposed independent certified testing laboratory and field testing subconsultant. 31 20 00 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 2.Format of proposed laboratory and field test forms. 3.Laboratory results of gradation and moisture density tests for each fill type to be used on the Project. 4.If the Contractor changes the source and/or stockpile from which materials are obtained,Gradation Analysis and Moisture-Density test reports for these new sources shall be submitted to the Engineer. 5.Catalog and manufacturer's data sheets for proposed compaction equipment. 6.Disposal plan for unusable excavation. C.Additional Testing: 1.All testing necessary for the Contractor to locate acceptable sources material for the Project shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority. 2.During construction,the Authority may elect to have further gradation and compaction testing completed on the materials being furnished by the Contractor.This testing shall be at the expense of the Authority.The Contractor shall provide material samples as may be necessary to complete this testing and these material samples shall be furnished from material available on the Project site or from the Contractor's source and/or supplier. 1.6 MATERIAL SOURCES A.The Contractor shall coordinate as necessary with the materials site property owners,shall acquire all necessary permits and/or material sales agreements,and shall pay required fees,royalties,and other costs associated with pit access and material extraction. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with locating, procuring,transporting,testing,storing,placing,and compacting fill material.The Authority is not responsible for fill lost during transportation. 31 20 00-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXCAVATION A.Excavation from the project area,shall be considered unusable excavation. Complete all excavation regardless of the type,nature or condition of the materials encountered as shown on the drawings and/or at the Engineer's direction. Unusable excavation shall be stockpiled at the proposed community landfill site, in accordance with the Environmental Impact Statement available at https://www.denali.gov/publications.Stockpiled Unusable excavation shall be segregated into Non-Organic Fill and Organic Material. 2.2 FILL MATERIAL A.Fill Material shall meet the requirements for material types listed below. 1.Structural Fill: a.Structural Fill shall consist of reasonably well graded aggregate containing no muck,frozen material,roots,sod or other deleterious matter and with a plasticity index not greater than 6 as determined by ATM 204 and ATM 205. b.Structural fill material shall conform to the following gradation as determined by ATM 304: U.S.Standard Percent Passing, Sieve Size by Weight 3 inch 100 2 inch 75-100 No.4 15-60 No.200 0-10 2.Crushed Aggregate Surface Course (CASC): 31 20 00 -4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving a.Crushed Aggregate Surface Course shall consist of crushed stone or crushed gravel,consisting of sound,tough,durable pebbles or rock fragments of uniform quality.Free from clay balls,vegetable matter,or other deleterious matters. b.Crushed Aggregate Surface Course shall conform to the following gradation as determined by ATM 304: U.S.Standard Percent Passing, Sieve Size by Weight 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 70-100 3/8 inch 50-85 No.4 35-65 No.8 20-50 No.50 15-30 No.200 8-15 3.Erosion Control Aggregate: a.Erosion Control Aggregate shall consist of reasonably well graded ageregate containing no muck,frozen material,roots,sod or other deleterious matter. b.Erosion Control Aggregate shall conform to the following gradation as determined by ATM 304: U.S.Standard Percent Passing, Sieve Size by Weight 8 inch 100 6 inch 50-80 25-504inch 31 20 00-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 3 inch 0-25 2 inch 0-10 No.200 0-1 2.3 TOPSOIL A.Top soil furnished by the Contractor shall consist of natural friable surface soil without admixtures of undesirable subsoil,refuse,or foreign materials.It shall be reasonably free from roots,hard clay,coarse gravel,stones larger than one inch in any dimension,noxious weeds,tall grass,brush,sticks,stubble,or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Safety -The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all excavations in a safe manner.Provide appropriate measures to retain excavation sideslopes and prevent sloughing to ensure that persons working in or near the excavation are protected. Earthwork safety,excavation slope stability,and dewatering will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Contact Local utilities to locate all existing underground utilities in the vicinity prior to beginning excavation. Maintain and protect the existing utilities that may pass through the work area. Carefully lay out work to minimize disruption and damage to existing structures. Perform all work in accordance with OSHA requirements.Barricade open excavations to prohibit public entry. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies between Contractual requirements and site conditions prior to start of Work. Maintain subgrade,backfill and embankment areas or lifts open until testing is complete and testing requirements are met,or approval of testing is secured from the Engineer. 31 20 00 -6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 3.2 I.Any work covered up prior to test completion and achieving testing requirements or Engineer's approval shall be excavated and reconstructed at Contractor's expense. J.Work in inclement weather at Contractor's risk.Any materials which become unstable as the result of improper moisture content,improper selection of techniques,equipment,or operations during inclement wet weather shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. K.Excavations and embankment shall be accomplished in such a manner that drainage is maintained at all times.Any areas not graded to drain shall be kept free of standing water by pumping if necessary. L.The Contractor shall provide for the proper maintenance of traffic flow and accessibility as may be necessary,and shall also make adequate provisions for the safety of property and persons. M.No separate payment for any excavation shall be made.All excavation shall be incidental to the Bid Item being performed. EXCAVATION A.Excavate to lines and grades as shown on the Contract Drawings. B.Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation and inspection of utilities as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. C,Remove and dispose of all organic material,debris,and oversized rock from excavation. D.Disposal of Unusable Excavation 1.Dispose of all excavated materials at the proposed community land fill site,in accordance with the Environmental Impact Statement available at https://www.denali.gov/publications.Contractor shall make arrangements for the disposal of the excavated material and bear all costs incidental to such disposal. 2.Sideslopes of excavation waste piles shall be sloped to match the materials natural angle of repose,or flatter. 31 2000-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 3.3 3.Excavation waste shall be stored completely within the limits of the disposal area property. E.Dewatering: 1.Excavate all materials in a dewatered condition unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 2.Dewatering shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 23 19. F.Unauthorized Excavation: 1.Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or neat-line dimensions without written approval by the Engineer. 2.Unauthorized excavation,as well as remedial work as directed,shall be at Contractor's expense. 3.Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification. SITE PREPARATION G.The Contractor shall install Geotextile Fabric in accordance with Section 31 32 19 of the Specifications. H.The Contractor shall install insulation in accordance with Section 07 21 00 of the Specifications. I The Contractor shall use caution and appropriate construction equipment and techniques to ensure insulation is protected during formation of embankments. J.The Contractor shall install fill materials as shown on the drawings,and in accordance with Paragraph 3.6 and to a level,uniform surface before the placement of subsequent layers. K,The Contractor shall plow,bench,or break up sloped ground surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal on which embankment is to be placed in such manner that the fill material will bond with the prepared surface. 31 2000-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 3.4 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A.Embankment Fill Placement: 1.The specified material shall be placed at the locations and to the lines and grades indicated on the Contract Drawings.The fill shall be placed and spread uniformly in successive layers not exceeding eight (8)inches in loose thickness.The layers shall be carried up full width from the bottom of the fill.Each layer shall be compacted in accordance with Section 3.6 of this Specification.Grade to provide positive drainage and blend grading into existing surfaces. Blading and compaction shall continue until the surface is smooth,free from waves and irregularities,and conforms to elevations shown on the Contract Drawings.If at any time the material is excessively wet;it shall be scarified by means of blade graders,harrows,or other suitable equipment and dried until the moisture content is satisfactory.The material shall then be compacted and finished as specified above. Oversized cobbles or boulders with dimensions in excess of 2/3 of the lift thickness and organics,and other deleterious material shall be removed. Portions of any lift in which the fill material becomes segregated shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material and remixed to secure a homogeneous fill as directed by the Engineer.No separate payment will be made for any material removed or regraded in areas where material becomes segregated. 3.55 COMPACTION A.Structural Fill and Crushed Aggregate Surface Course:Deposit materials in layers not exceeding eight (8)inches in thickness before compaction.Compact by routing construction equipment and vibratory rollers uniformly over the entire surface of each layer before the next layer is placed.Keep dumping and rolling areas separate.Compact each lift to a minimum of 95%of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor compaction procedure per ASTM D1557.Compactive effort shall be sufficient to maintain the lines and grades shown in the plans for placed fill and allow for positive drainage for the duration of its intended use.Do not cover any lift by another until the required compaction has been completed,and lift has been approved by the Engineer. 31 20 00-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving 3.6 3.7 B.Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. Portions of any lift in which the materials become noticeably segregated shall be removed by the Contractor and replaced with satisfactory materials,or blended with additional material until segregation is eliminated and re-compacted in accordance with the Contract Documents. If,in the opinion of the Project Manager,based on testing service reports and inspection,subgrade and layers of embankment do not meet the specified compaction requirements,the Contractor shall perform additional compaction as directed by the Project Manager until specified compaction is obtained,at no additional cost to the Authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the proper size and type of compaction equipment and for selecting the proper method of operating said equipment to attain the required compaction. Contractor shall use caution and appropriate construction techniques to ensure that insulation is protected and not damaged during formation and compaction of embankments. GRADING A.Existing ground contours shown on the Contract Drawings are based upon limited information and are approximate. Finished surfaces shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below the finished grade elevations shown on the Contract Drawings;soft spots or settling areas shall be corrected at Contractor's expense.Blend finish grades to match adjacent existing roads and parking surfaces where required. MAINTENANCE A. B. As necessary,Contractor shall water the site to control dust. Contractor shall protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free of trash and debris. Contractor shall repair and re-establish grades in settled,eroded and rutted areas as directed by the Project Manager. 31 20 00-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving D.Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather,scarify surface,reshape,and compact in accordance with these Specifications prior to further construction. E.All open excavations shall be adequately signed and barricaded to protect the public. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing shall include nuclear densometer testing and material testing for placed fills to ensure the quality of constructed embankments.Minimum earthwork testing shall include: Material Test Frequency Structural Fill and Trench Backfill Gradation:ATM 304 At least 1 per source and as required by changes in material Plasticity Index:ATM 204 and ATM 205 At least 1 per source and as required by changes in material Moisture Density Determination:ASTM At least 1 per source and as required by changes in Fractured Face:ATM 305 D1557 or AASHTO T1180 __|material In Place Density 1 per 200 CY,or 1 per lift, Determination:AASHTO |whichever is more frequent;1 T310 or ATM 213 per 200 LF of trench;1 directly under each foundation Material Test Frequency Crushed AASHTO M-147 Quality |At least 1 per source and as Aggregate required by changes in Surface Course material (CASC)Coarse Aggregate Wear:At least 1 per source and as AT 313 required by changes in material Coarse Aggregate At least 1 per source and as required by changes in material Gradation:ATM 304 At least 1 per source and as required by changes in material Moisture Density Determination:ASTM At least 1 per source and as required by changes in 31 2000-11 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 20 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Earth Moving D1557 or AASHTO T180_|material In Place Density 1 per 25 CY Determination:AASHTO T310 or ATM 213 B.Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of trench backfilling operations to allow for inspection.Failure to obtain inspection prior to placement of backfill may be cause for rejection of installed buried pipelines and placed fills. C.The results of each density test shall be recorded on a test sheet.The following information shall be recorded. l.Horizontal and vertical location. 2.Density and percent of referenced standard compaction. 3.Material description and appropriate compaction control standard END OF SECTION 31 20 00 -12 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 23 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Dewatering SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This Section describes the requirements for dewatering during construction in accordance with the Contractor's approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving 13 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Dewatering and temporary diversion works shall be designed by and be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements:Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering.Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Selection of equipment and materials to perform the work is at the option of the Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Comply with the Contractor's approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B.The construction area shall be maintained in a relatively dry condition during the placement of fill materials.Contractor shall make his own provisions for diverting surface run off,alleviating ponding water,and dewatering excavation when ground water is encountered.Contractor shall be responsible for 3123 19-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 23 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Dewatering coordinating,acquiring,and paying for all permits required for dewatering operations. C.Remove ponded water and limit water flowing or infiltrating into the work area to the extent that the quality of work is not compromised. D.Surface water flows within the work area shall be diverted by constructing temporary ditches,berms,or other means to control and direct the water away from the work.The use of pumping equipment may be required to dewater some areas. E.Discharge from dewatering operations shall be returned to natural drainage routes. Settling pits,silt fences,straw dikes,or other appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent highly turbid waters from entering existing ponds,streams,or wetlands. END OF SECTION 3123 19-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Clearing and Grubbing SECTION 31 30 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This item consists of furnishing all labor,equipment,supplies,and material in performance of all operations required for site clearing,grubbing,and clean-up operations. B.No clearing shall occur between May 5 and July 25. 12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 31 23 19 -Dewatering B.Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving 1.3.DEFINITIONS A.Clearing and Grubbing:Includes cutting and grubbing all brush,trees and stumps, including roots,to natural ground.Contractor is responsible for the removal and proper disposal of cleared brush,trees,and root systems.Clearing also includes the removal of all snow and ice in the project area. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Contractor shall perform all clearing and grubbing operations where designated on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein or as directed by the Project Manager. 1.Locate,identify,and protect utilities from damage. 2.Verify and protect any vegetation to remain. 3.2.PROTECTION A.Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements and utilities indicated to remain. 31 3000-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 30 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Clearing and Grubbing 1.Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on project site. 2.Protect trees,plant growth,and features designated to remain.Protect survey benchmarks,property corners,survey monuments,and existing work from damage or displacement. All property corners,benchmarks or other permanent survey marker disturbed during construction shall be removed and recorded.The Contractor shall be responsible for the resurvey and resetting of any disturbed property corners, benchmarks or other permanent survey markers by a professional land surveyor, licensed by the State of Alaska. 3.3 USE AND DISPOSAL OF CLEARED MATERIAL A.Cleared material shall be disposed of at the proposed community landfill site,in accordance with the Environmental Impact Statement available at https://www.denali.gov/publications.Material shall be segregated into Non- Organic Fill and Organic Material. Except as otherwise stated,the Contractor shall make his/her own arrangements and assume all costs in connection with disposal sites.Disposal sites shall be located and maintained in such a manner as to prevent a public nuisance. If the disposal site is located on private land,the Contractor shall obtain written permission from the property owner or owners for such disposal sites and shall furnish the Project Manager with a copy of this permission.The written permission shall specifically provide that the property owner will not hold AEA, _its employees,agents,or engineers liable for use of or damage to this property. The Contractor shall be held liable for any trespass and property damage incurred outside of the disposal site. END OF SECTION 31 3000-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 32 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation SECTION 31 32 19 GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK A.The Work under this Section consists of furnishing all labor,equipment,supplies and materials necessary to perform all operations pertaining to the furnishing and placement of non-woven geotextiles. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 31 20 00 -Earth Moving B.Section 33 47 13 -Fuel Protection Liners SUBMITTALS A.Furnish Manufacturer's Information and design data,including complete product installation instructions. DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Packaging and Identification Requirements: 1.Non-woven geotextile rolls shall be furnished with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture,contamination and extended ultra-violet exposure prior to placement. 2.Each roll or bundle shall be labeled or tagged to provide product identification sufficient for field identification. 3.Products shall be stored in a manner that protects them from the elements. If stored outdoors,they shall be elevated and protected with a waterproof cover. QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer:The manufacturer of the non-woven geotextile materials shall have a minimum of ten years'experience in their fields. B.Sampling and Compliance Requirements: 3132 19-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 32 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Geotextile Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation A competent laboratory must be maintained by the producer of the non- woven geotextile at the point of manufacture to insure quality control in accordance with ASTM testing procedures. 2.That laboratory shall maintain records of its quality control results and provide,upon request of the specifying agent prior to shipment,a manufacturer's certificate. 3.The certificate shall include: a.Name of manufacturer. b.Chemical composition. c.Product description. d.Statement of compliance to specification requirements. e.Signature of legally authorized official attesting to the information required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GEOTEXTILE A.Non-woven Geotextile Fabric 1.Non-woven Geotextile Fabric shall be TenCate®'s Mirafi 180N or approved equal. The fabric shall be inert to naturally encountered chemicals,hydrocarbons, mildew and rot resistant,resistant to ultraviolet light exposure,insect and rodent resistant,and conform to the properties in the following table. The minimum average roll value (MARV)for strength properties of any individual roll tested from the manufacturing lot or lots of a particular shipment shall be in excess of the MARV stipulated herein. SPECIFICATION TEST PROPERTY LIMIT METHOD Grab Tensile Strength 200 Ibs ASTM D-4632 Trapezoid Tear Strength 75 lbs ASTM D-4533 3132 19-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 32 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Geotextile Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation CBR Puncture Strength 500 Ibs ASTM D-6241 Survivability Class 2 AASHTO M288 B.Package,label,handle,and store geotextile material according to ASTM D-4873. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FABRICS A.Preparation: l.Prepare subgrade and embankment as specified. 2.Grade to a smooth surface,leaving no surface undulations or irregularities. Do not stretch and or "bridge”bridge fabric over gaps or undulations. 3,Remove any loose and angular materials,rocks,brush,and sticks that may damage the fabric. B.Installation: 1.Weather Limitations:All work shall be performed under weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 2.The non-woven geotextile fabric sheet shall be unrolled,placed in a relaxed position,free from stress and with minimum wrinkles,and in full contact with the subgrade in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.Do not bridge over voids or low areas in the subgrade. 3.Seams shall be overlapped 2-feet or as approved by the Engineer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Construction vehicles shall not be allowed to travel directly on the fabric. 5.Take due care to ensure that fabric is not damaged during construction activities. 6.Fabric damaged to a degree that compromises its intended capabilities shall be replaced with same approved geotextile fabric at no additional. cost to the Authority. 31 32 19-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 31 32 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Geotextile Soil Stabilization and C. Layer Separation Placement:One layer of nonwoven geotextile material shall be installed for soil separation application as shown in the Drawings. 3.2.FILL PLACEMENT A. B. Fill or backfill placement shall be in accordance with Section 31 20 00. A minimum of 6 inches of fill material shall be placed before any construction equipment is permitted to pass over the installed geotextile fabric.At no time shall equipment be operated on the unprotected fabric. Care shall be taken to avoid tears or other damage to the geotextile fabric during placement.Tears or damage are cause for repair or replacement of the fabric at the Contractor's expense. 3.3 GEOTEXTILE REPAIR A.If the geotextile becomes torn or damaged,it shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense prior to backfill operations. The fill material shall be cleaned from the surface of the geotextile and the torn area overlain with new fabric per manufacturer's recommendations.Care shall be taken that the patch remains in place during subsequent fill placement. END OF SECTION 3132 19-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Chain Link Fence SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnishing and installing chain link fence for new installations. 12 RELATED REQUIREMENT A.Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications. 13.5 REFERENCES A. B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Product Manual CLF-PM0610. Specification of Metallic-Coated and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric,published by Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute, Washington,DC 20036. Federal Specification RR-F-191,Fencing,Wire and Post Metal. State of Alaska,Department of Transportation,and Public Facilities,"Standard Specifications for Highway Construction”. State of Alaska,Department of Transportation,and Public Facilities,"Standard Drawings Manual”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data:Provide data on fabric,posts,accessories,fittings and hardware. Shop Drawings:Indicate plan layout,spacing of components,post foundation dimensions,hardware anchorage,and schedule of components. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Method of post installation.Submit alternate post installation method for consideration if different method from those shown in these Construction Documents is proposed. 32 3113-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Chain Link Fence 15 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Contractor shall verify shipping dimensions and weight limitations with shipper to ensure that the receipt and delivery of materials will not require the use of specialized equipment. B.Contractor shall provide packing lists with all bundles and packages which shall list all materials contained in the package or bundle.Packing list shall be securely attached to each bundle in a watertight carrier. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Materials shall be new and products of recognized,reputable manufacturers.Used, re-rolled,or re-galvanized materials are not acceptable. B.All materials shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.Unless otherwise specified,all materials shall have a minimum zinc coating of 1.2 ounces per square foot of surface. 2.2.WIRE FABRIC A.Type I chain link fence fabric woven of 9-gauge steel wire in 2 inch diamond- mesh pattern.Selvages twisted and barbed,galvanized after weaving.Fabric Height as shown on the Drawings.Provide 1.2 ounce zinc coating meeting the requirements of ASTM A 392,Class 1. 2.3.PIPE A.Federal Specification RR-F-191/3,Fencing,Wire and Post,Metal (Fence Posts, Top Rails and Braces).Provide Class 1,Grade A pipe with a minimum zinc coating of 1.8 ounces per square foot of surface.Lengths for setting in ground as required for conditions shown on Drawings. B.Posts:Use 2.375 inch outside diameter,galvanized,standard weight steel pipe, weight 3.65 pounds per linear foot. C.Top Rail and Braces: 1.Use 1.66 inch outside diameter galvanized standard weight steel pipe, 32 3113-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Chain Link Fence 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 weight 2.27 pounds per linear foot. CAPS A.Dome Caps and Rail caps shall be pressed steel,or malleable iron per ASTM F 626,and designed as a weather-tight closure cap for tubular posts. B.Barb Arms shall be pressed steel galvanized after fabrication and capable of supporting a minimum 250 Ib.vertical load.Barb arms shall be Type I three strand 45-degree arms. C.Provide one cap for each new or replaced post. TENSION WIRE A.Tension wire shall be zinc-or aluminum-coated coil spring steel wire not less than No.7-gauge (0.177 inch in diameter). TENSION BARS A.Stretcher bars shall be one-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch.Provide one stretcher bar for each gate post and two bars for each corner and pull post. BANDS A.Bands shall be heavy-pressed steel,spaced not over 15 inches on center to secure tension bars,top rail and brace ends to end,corner,pull,and gate posts. HARDWARE A.Steel bolts nuts and washers. B.Top rail and brace ends shall be pressed steel,malleable iron per ASTM F 626. C.Top rail couplings shall be 6”long pressed steel,hot dip galvanized. WIRE TIES A.9 gauge galvanized steel wire for attachment of fabric to line post.Double wrap 13 gauge for top rails and braces.Hog ring ties of 12-1/2 gauge for attachment of fabric to tension wire. 32 31 13-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Chain Link Fence 2.10 TRUSS ROD AND TIGHTENER A.Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16”.Capable of withstanding minimum tension of 2,000 pounds. 2.11 GATES A.Federal Specification RR-F-191/2,Fencing,Wire and Post,Metal (Chain Link Fence Gates).Provide Single Swing 4.0 ft.wide man gates as indicated. B.Gate latches and other gate appurtenances shall be of sufficient strength and design to assure easy,trouble free operation.Gates shall be constructed so that they may be operated by one person. C.Hinges shall swing 180 degrees free of binding. D.Emergency egress man gates shall be able to be opened from the inside of the facilities. 2.12 LOCKS A.Provide 1.5-inch industrial grade,corrosion resistant padlock for each gate. Provide locks for valves where indicated.Master or approved equal.Key all padlocks alike for the same ownership. B.Submit for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. B. Locate fencing and posts as shown on Plans and space posts as specified. Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points by skilled labor experienced in this type of construction.Erect in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved and with these Specifications. Tension chain-link fabric as specified by manufacturer.Fasten chain link fabric to end,corner,pull or gate posts with tension bars and bands.Fasten chain link fabric to line posts and top rail at approximately 12 inch centers.Fasten chain link fabric to tension wires at approximately 24 inch centers. 32 31 13-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 31 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Chain Link Fence D.Braces shall be installed between end/corner/pull/gate posts and post(s)adjacent to end/corner/pull/gate post.Securely truss bracing from line post to base of end/corner/pull/gate post with a truss rod and tightener. E.Install top rail in caps on line posts.Terminate top rail at end/corner/pull/gate posts with rail ends.Install rail sleeves and expansion springs to tension top rail. Swedged top rail not allowed. F,Provide minimum three (3)full twists for each wire tie. 3.2.CLEANUP A.Upon completion of the fence installation,clean up all waste material resulting from the operation. END OF SECTION 32 31 13-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 92 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Seeding SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1.SECTION INCLUDES A.All areas grassed and/or seeded prior to construction and excavated or otherwise disturbed during construction operations shall be restored to their original condition. B.The following areas shall be seeded in accordance with this section: 1.Previously vegetated areas of local material sources. 2.Previously vegetated areas disturbed by construction activities. 3.The side slopes of embankments. 4.All other areas defined on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 31 10 00 -Clearing and Grubbing B.Section 31 32 19 --Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation 1.3 REFERENCES A."A Revegetation Manual for Alaska”August 2008,published by the Alaska Department of Natural Resources. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Duplicate copies of a statement signed by the vendor certifying that each lot of seed has been tested by a recognized seed testing laboratory within 6 months before the date of delivery to the Project. B.Duplicate copies of certification from grower certifying grass species. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A.Grass seed of the type hereinafter specified shall conform to the standards of State 32 9219-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 92 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Seeding Department of Agriculture. Seed shall be furnished in standard containers on which shall show the following information: 1.Common name of seed. 2.Lot number. 3.Net weight. 4,Percentage of purity. 5.Percentage of germination (in case of legumes percentage of germination to include hard seed). Percentage of weed seed content and inert material clearly marked for each kind of seed in accordance with applicable state and federal laws. Grass Seed Mix and Application Rates (broadcast method): 1. 2. 3. 4. Tufted Hairgrass (Nortran):50%of seed mix. Arctared Red Fescue:40%of seed mix. Annual Ryegrass:10%of seed mix. Application rate of 15 Ibs.per acre. 2.2 FERTILIZER A.General: 1.Fertilizer shall be a standard commercial grade of organic or inorganic fertilizer of the kind and quality specified herein.It may be separate or in a mixture containing the percentage of total nitrogen,available phosphoric acid,and water-soluble potash in the amounts specified. All fertilizers shall be furnished in standard unopened containers with weight, name of plant nutrients,and manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis clearly marked in accordance with state and federal laws. Fertilizer shall be ground to a fineness as required for the method of application. Fertilizer Analysis and Application Rates:PYeNSDTotal Nitrogen:20%of mixture. Available Phosphoric Acid:20%of mixture. Water Soluble Potash:10%of mixture. Application rate per the manufacture's recommendation. 32 92 19-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 92 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Seeding PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GRASS SEEDING A. B. Seeding shall be performed as soon as practicable after ground disturbing activities. Seeding shall not be performed during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively wet or otherwise untillable. Seedbed Preparation: 1.Sideslopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical and shall be compacted and tracked by a dozer to reduce erosion. 2.The tracked ground surface shall be covered with an erosion control blanket (North American Green S75,or approved equal)in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.Sideslopes shall be covered with native grubbed material as needed to ensure grass growth.Grubbed material shall be applied evenly and smoothly over sideslopes.See Section 31 30 00 ofthese specifications. Grass seed shall be applied at the rates specified above. Fertilizer shall be applied at the rates above. Seeding Time: 1.The exact time for seeding shall be determined by actual weather conditions. 2.Seeding shall be conducted after first freeze in the fall,or prior to July 15 for best germination. When weather conditions are such that satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained for any stage of the seeding operations,the Contractor shall stop the work and it shall be resumed only when the desired results are likely to be obtained or when approved alternates or corrective measures and procedures are adopted. The Contractor shall protect all seeded areas from erosion until final inspection and acceptance has been made and until such time as grass leaves are visible to the eye. Areas damaged by erosion shall be repaired by the Contractor at their own expense. 32 92 19 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 92 19 Mertarvik,Alaska 3.2 3.3 3.4 WATERING Seeding A.Duration: The Contractor shall water all seeded areas a minimum of three times each week or often enough to maintain a moist seed bed to promote healthy seed germination,whichever provides the greater watering frequency,for a duration of 30 days. Watering shall cease at first hard frost in the Fall and shall resume upon ground thaw the following Spring. If at any time during the maintenance period weather conditions (such as extended period with no rain or continuous drying winds)cause the root zone to dry out,the Project Manager may direct the Contractor to water all seeded areas. Any supplemental watering shall be done immediately at no additional cost to the Authority. B.Water application shall be applied at a rate that shall provide moisture penetration throughout the entire root zone with a minimum of water run-off and no erosion. C.Should soil conditions be encountered not conducive to water absorption,the Contractor shall take whatever corrective actions that may be required to correct this condition,without additional cost to the Authority. FINAL INSPECTION A.Final inspection for seeded areas shall not be made until 30 days following completion of all seeding and fertilizing as specified. B.Damage caused by the Contractor to areas which have been seeded shall be repaired and/or replaced by the Contractor at their own expense. GUARANTEE A.Guarantee of planting and seeding shall continue for one year from date of final acceptance. B.Contractor shall replace all seeded areas as required during the guarantee period. C.Guarantee shall include both materials and labor. D.Replacements shall be the same as originally planted. 3292 19-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 32 92 19 Mertarvik,Alaska Seeding END OF SECTION 3292 19-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 05 26.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Signage SECTION 33 05 26.13 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This section covers the furnishing and installation of signs at the aboveground fuel storage tank and module power plant facilities. B.The Contractor shall furnish all signs and fasteners. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 32 31 13 -Chain Link Fence. 1.3.5 REFERENCES A.International Fire Code (IFC),Sections 3404. B.National Fire Protection Association,No.704 C.State of Alaska,Department of Transportation,"Standard Specification for Highway Construction”and "Standard Drawings Manual”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit shop drawings of all signs,including height and width as well as sign thickness.Indicate background color and text color,text information (i.e.height and stroke)proposed for each sign. B.Submit manufacturer's data and standard colors for vinyl backgrounds and letters. C.Submit one (1)sample for approval of each type of fastener used to install,hang or otherwise fasten signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Signs shall be provided in the locations indicated in the Contract Drawings. B.Signs posted shall be constructed of 0.08”minimum aluminum plate.Warning signs shall be white non-reflective letters on a red non-reflective background. 33 05 26.13 -1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 05 26.13 Mertarvik,Alaska Signage Informational signs shall be black non-reflective letters on a white non-reflective background,unless otherwise indicated. C.Lay out letters such that no letters touch or overlap,and all words are clearly readable. D.Signs and letters shall be sized as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E.Provide 3M series 255 High Performance vinyl letters on 3M 3650-10 white vinyl background,or Gerber thermal transfer film printed letters on Gerber High Performance vinyl background as indicated on the Drawings,or as appropriate for the application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Install in accordance with IFC flammable and combustible liquid signage standards,and NFPA 704. Signs shall be conspicuously mounted and easily read. Where signs are fastened to fences,the fasteners used shall be steel hog rings or steel wire ties. END OF SECTION 33 05 26.13 -2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 47 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Protection Liners SECTION 33 47 13 FUEL PROTECTION LINERS (INSULATION LINERS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section includes selection and installation of a geomembrane liner above the below-grade rigid insulation for fuel protection as shown in the Plans. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 31 30 00 --Earth Moving B.Section 31 32 19 -Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation details for geomembrane liners. Show panel layout,seams,perimeter anchorage,and methods of attachment and sealing to other construction.Differentiate between factory and field seams and joints. B.Samples:For each geomembrane. C.Product test reports. D.Manufacturer's installation instructions. 14 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Packaging and Identification Requirements: 1.Geomembrane shall be furnished with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture,contamination and extended ultra-violet exposure prior to placement. 2.Each roll or bundle shall be labeled or tagged to provide product identifi- cation sufficient for field identification. 3.Products shall be stored in a manner that protects them from the elements. If stored outdoors,they shall be elevated and protected with a waterproof cover. 33 47 13-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 47 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Protection Liners 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:The installer shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with seaming geomembranes and have completed at least 3 projects with geomembrane liner materials.The installer shall be an employee of a company trained and approved by manufacturer. Sampling and Compliance Requirements: I.A competent laboratory must be maintained by the producer of the geotex- tile at the point of manufacture to insure quality control in accordance with ASTM testing procedures. 2.That laboratory shall maintain records of its quality control results and pro- vide,upon request of the specifying agent prior to shipment,a manufactur- er's certificate 3.The certificate shall include: a.Name of manufacturer. b.Chemical composition. c.Product description. d.Statement of compliance to specification requirements. e.Signature of legally authorized official attesting to the information required. 16 WARRANTY A.Specified form in which CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace geomembrane liner that fail(s)in materials or workmanship or that deteriorate(s) under conditions of normal weather and intended service within specified warranty period.Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of geomembrane liner due to exposure to harmful chemicals,gases or vapors, abnormal and severe weather phenomena,fire,earthquakes,floods,vandalism,or abuse by persons,animals,or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall warranty liner for a period of one (1)year from date of Project substantial completion. 33 47 13-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 47 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Protection Liners PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A.General:Provide impervious geomembrane liner fabricated from sheet material indicated and complying with specified product characteristics: 1.Reinforcing Scrim:One-ply polyester fabric totally encapsulated between two sheets. Fuel Protection Linear Nominal Thickness:30-mil nominal thickness per ASTM D 1593. Hydrostatic Resistance:Not less than 800-psi resistance per ASTM D 751, Procedure A. Dimensional Stability,Reinforced Sheet:Not more than plus or minus 0.5 percent per ASTM D 1204. Bursting Strength:Not less than 750 lb.per ASTM D 751 (Ball Tip). Weathering Resistance:Not less than 8,000 hours,per ASTM G 23 (Car- bon Arc). Secondary Containment:Seaman Corporation 8130 XR-5 or approved equal. Fuel Protection:Seaman Corporation 8138 XR-5 or approved equal. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Adhesives:Provide types of adhesive primers,compounds,solvents,and tapes recommended in writing by geomembrane liner manufacturer for bonding to structures (if required). 2.3 FABRICATION A.Fabricate geomembrane liner panels from sheets in sizes as large as practical with factory-sealed seams,consistent with limitations of weight and _installation procedures.Minimize field seaming. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 33 47 13 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 47 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Protection Liners A.Examine substrates,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for soil compaction and grading;for subgrade free from angular rocks,rubble,roots, vegetation,debris,voids,protrusions,and ground water;and for other conditions affecting performance of geomembrane liner. Provide temporary ballast,until edges are permanently secured,that does not damage geomembrane liner or substrate,to prevent uplift of geomembrane liner in areas with prevailing winds. Place geomembrane liner directly above rigid insulation and install according to Shop Drawings and to comply with geomembrane liner manufacturer's written instructions.In areas with prevailing winds,begin placing geomembrane liner at Project's upwind direction and proceed downwind.Install geomembrane liner in a relaxed condition,free from stress and with minimum wrinkles,and in full contact.Do not bridge over voids or low areas in the subgrade.Permanently secure edges. Field Seams:Comply with geomembrane liner manufacturer's written instructions.Form seams by lapping edges of panels 2 to 4 inches,unless instructions require a larger overlap.Wipe contact surfaces clean and free of dirt, dust,moisture,and other foreign materials.Use solvent-cleaning methods and grind geomembrane seam surfaces if recommended by geomembrane liner manufacturer.Proceed with seaming at required temperatures for materials and ambient conditions.Continuously bond sheet to sheet to construct single or double seams of width recommended for method of seaming used.Seal or fuse free seam edges as instructed.Inspect seams and reseal voids. Liner Repairs:Repair tears,punctures,and other imperfections in geomembrane liner and seams using patches of geomembrane liner material,liner-to-liner bonding materials,and bonding methods according to geomembrane liner manufacturer's written instructions.Apply bonding solvent or weld to contact surfaces of both patch and geomembrane liner,and press together immediately. Roll to remove wrinkles. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Nondestructive Testing:Visually inspect seams and patches.Comply with ASTM D4437 for Air Lance Test,Vacuum Box Testing,or Ultrasonic (High Frequency)Pulse Echo Testing or with GRI Test Method GM6,as applicable to geomembrane liner and seam construction.Record locations of failed seams and patches.For the record,individually number and date occurrences and details of leak and remedial action.Repair leaking seams and patches. 33 47 13-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 47 13 Mertarvik,Alaska Fuel Protection Liners 3.3 PROTECTION A.Protect installed geomembrane liner according to manufacturer's written instructions.Repair or replace areas of geomembrane liner damaged by scuffing, punctures,traffic,rough subgrade,or other unacceptable conditions. END OF SECTION 33.47 13-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska SECTION 33 71 00 ELECTRICAL UTILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A.This Specification describes the minimum acceptable standards for overhead distribution line construction. B.The staking sheets are included on the Drawings. C.Any modified RUS Construction Units or any new construction units are included on the detail sheets in the Drawings.Any standard RUS Construction Units referenced on the Drawings or staking sheets shall be obtained by the Contractor.The lack of having the correct RUS construction unit drawing will not be acceptable as an excuse for an incorrect installation. D.The Drawings and specifications are complementary.What is shown on one is binding whether shown or specified in the other or not.Failure to check both the Drawings and the specifications will not be grounds for a change order if additional equipment or material is required to be provided by the Contractor after the Engineer reviews,or deficiencies are identified during testing,either in the Factory or the field. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Division 1 Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical All other Division 33 Specifications 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Codes:Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable national, state,and local codes;including,but not limited to the latest legally enacted editions of the following specifically noted requirements: 1.ANSI-C2,National Electrical Safety Code -NESC. 2.RUS Bulletin 1728F-804,Specifications and Drawings for 12.47/7.2 kV Line Construction,the Staking Sheets,Drawings and Specification,and Construction Drawings. 33 71 00-1 Section 33 71 00 Electrical Utilities Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A.All material shall be Rural Utility Service (RUS)approved and accepted. B.All construction work shall be done in a thorough and workman-like manner in accordance with RUS Bulletin 1728F-804,Specifications and Drawings for 12.47/7.2 kV Line Construction,the Staking Sheets, Drawings and Specification,and Construction Drawings.The Contractor shall obtain a copy of these specifications and shall keep them on the jobsite. C.This specification supplements the RUS Bulletins identified above. Where there is a conflict,the more stringent condition shall apply.In general,standard RUS construction unit drawings have been used. However,several construction units have been modified.These construction units are included on the Drawings and have been identified with a modifier and shall be used in lieu of the similar RUS construction unit. D.Work shall be performed to the latest adopted Edition of the National Electric Safety Code (NESC)except where local regulations or the specifications or Drawings are more stringent,in which case the specifications and/or Drawings and the local regulations shall govern. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.06 DISTRIBUTING POLES In distributing the poles,large,choice,close-grained poles shall be used for transformers,deadend,angle,and corner poles. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A.Products shall conform to the following requirements.Items of the same classification shall be identical including equipment,assemblies,parts, and components. B.Material and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturer of the product. 33 71 00-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 2.02 INSULATORS A.Insulators shall be rated 23 kV,150 kV BIL,ANSI Class 56-1. B.Suspension insulators shall be ANSI Class 52-9. C.Insulators,tension,pin,and spool,shall be porcelain type.Insulators shall be selected to properly accommodate the armor rod installed on the conductor. D.All insulators shall be RUS approved. 2.03 CROSSARMS A.Crossarms shall meet the requirements of RUS Spec.No.DT-5B:PE-16 solid wood,distribution type,and a 1/4 inch,45°chamfer on all top edges. Crossarms shall be full-length pressure treated using a pressure injection method approved by the Western Wood Preserves Institute.Pressure treatment shall be by the Copper Naphthenate or pentachlorophenol process in accordance with AWPA C4.Other treatment processes will not be accepted. B.Crossarm gains shall meet ANSI C135.33 requirements. C.Crossarms shall be 8 feet in length,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.Crossarms shall be machined,chamfered,trimmed, and bored for stud and bolt holes before pressure treatment.Factory drilling shall be provided for pole and brace mounting,for four pin or four vertical line-post insulators,and for four suspension insulators,except where otherwise indicated or required.Drilling shall provide required climbing space and wire clearances.Crossarms shall be straight and free of twists to within 1/10-inch per foot of length.Bend or twist shall be in one direction only.Crossarms shall have a stamp or nameplate indicating manufacturer,year of manufacture,species of wood,and type of treatment,and grade (close grain or dense). D.Crossarm braces shall be selected for the crossarm length and shall be full- length pressure treated using a pressure injection method approved by the Western Wood Preserves Institute.Pressure treatment shall be by the Copper Naphthenate or pentachlorophenol process in accordance with AWPA C4.Other treatment processes will not be accepted. 2.04 FUSED CUTOUTS A.Primary-fuse cutouts shall be 15 kV,110 kV BIL,100A loadbreak open type construction,porcelain.NEMA B,heavy duty,10 kA,for crossarm mounting.Open-link cutouts are not acceptable.Fuses shall be the 33 71 00-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities dropout type.Fuse cutouts shall be equipped with combination mounting brackets for cutout and surge arrester,suitable for the indicated installations. B.Hubbell Power Systems or equal. C.Arresters shall be 7.65 kV,9 kV duty cycle,distribution class,MOV type requiring no gap adjustment. D.Surge arresters shall be provided for protection of aerial-to-underground transitions,gang-operated load-interrupter switches,transformers and other indicated equipment. E.Surge arrestors shall meet NEMA LAI requirements for the zinc-oxide type and shall be suitable for outdoor installations.Arresters shall be equipped with mounting brackets suitable for the indicated installations. F.Hubbell PDV-100,no.213708,or approved equal. 2.05 POLE LINE HARDWARE A.Zinc-coated hardware material shall meet ANSI C135.1,C135.14, C135.17,C135.22,and C135.33 requirements. B.Steel hardware material shall meet ASTM A575 and A576 requirements. C.All hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. D.All curved washers shall be cast ductile iron. 2.06 GUY ASSEMBLIES A.Guy material shall be minimum 7 strands,3/8”nominal diameter,Class A zinc-coated-steel high-strength meeting ASTM A475 requirements,with a minimum breaking strength not less than 10,800 pounds or as indicated on the Drawings. B.Guy assemblies,including insulators and attachments,shall provide a strength exceeding the required guy strength.Thimbles or thimble-eyes shall be provided on anchor points.Guy hook guy attachments shall be Hubbell catalog number GHSN,or approved equal. C.Holding capacities for down guys shall be based on a lead angle of 45 degrees as indicated.When field conditions prevent indicated lead angles, anchors shall be placed in other locations as approved by the Engineer. 33 71 00-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities D.Guy deadends shall be made by using Preformed Line Products Guy-Grip deadend,or Engineer approved equal.Deadends shall be selected to equal or exceed the rating of the RUS unit referenced in the Staking Sheets. 2.07 GUY MARKERS A.Guy markers shall be full round,2-inch by 8 feet long,yellow.Markers shall be made of high density polyethylene with ultra-violet light resistance additives to protect the resin and the color from brittleness and fading.Provide vandal resistant type.Securely clamped to the guy at the bottom and top of the marker. B.Install red striped reflective tape on both sides of the guy guard.Install in warm environment to allow for proper adhesion. 2.08 SPLICES AND DEADENDS A.All splices shall be full tension automatic type,Fargo GL406A,or approved equal. B.Primary deadends shall be clamp type dead end shoe,Hubbell PG46N,or equal.Deadends shall be full tension rated for the conductor. C.Secondary and service conductors shall be deadended using Preformed Line Products service grip deadends,suitable for the conductor provided. 2.09 POLE NUMBERS Pole numbers shall be 2-inch high aluminum embossed with Roman typeface. Attached to pole with aluminum barbed round head nail.Pole numbers shall match the associated location in the Staking Sheet. 2.10 POLE REFLECTORS Where indicated,install a minimum of 4 reflectors vertically on the pole. Reflectors shall be red,aluminum,3-inch two hole mounting,acrylic. 2.11 SECONDARY OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS A.All secondary conductors shall be overhead service drop,multiplex, aluminum,600 volt,75°C rating,polyethylene insulated conductors.For each assembly,provide insulated conductors as indicated and an ACSR concentrically stranded neutral messenger.Conductors shall conform to the following standards. B-230:Aluminum Wire,1350-H19 for Electrical Purposes. B-231:|Aluminum Conductors,Concentric-Lay-Stranded. 33 71 00-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities B-232 Aluminum conductors,Concentric-Lay-Stranded,Coated Steel Reinforced (ACSR). B-399:Concentric-Lay-Stranded 6201-T81 Aluminum Alloy Conductors. ICEA S-61-402 B.Each multiplex cable shall be provided in the sizes indicated in the Staking Sheets or on the Drawings.Cables shall be provided based on the standard Code Word for the specific cable.Cables shall be provided as follows: 1.Duplex Conductors: Cables utilized for lighting or other 120 volt service.Cable shall consist of one insulated conductor and one neutral. 2.Triplex Conductors: Cables utilized for single phase service or other uses as indicated on the Drawings.Cable shall consist of two insulated conductors and one neutral ACSR. 3.Quadruplex Conductors: Primarily used for three-phase service.Shall be provided with three insulated conductors and one neutral ACSR.Conductors shall be marked for easy phase identification. 2.12 SUPPORT BRACKETS AND TRANSFORMER MOUNTS Support mounts for three-phase transformer installations shall be Aluma-form wing cluster mounts,model 3MW-24-M-L.Cluster mounts shall be suitable for the transformers installed. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Materials to be used for construction are designated by one or two lower- case alphabetic characters shown on the Drawings and in the "ITEM” column in the drawing material blocks.For example,"b”designates a steel,pole top pin. B.Normally crossarm pins and post-type insulators come equipped with washers and locknuts.Thus,the washers and locknuts for crossarm pins are not tallied in the "QTY”(quantity)columns in the material boxes on . 33 71 00-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities the Drawings.However,the crossarm pin washers and locknuts are shown on the Drawings in parenthesis to depict proper construction.If crossarm pins or post type insulators are purchased without washers,locknuts or studs,the quantity totals in the material boxes on the Drawings will need to be adjusted accordingly. C.Locknuts shall be installed on all threaded material and hardware in addition to nuts and washers.The threads on installed bolts shall protrude past the lock washers a minimum of one inch but not more than two inches. 3.02 SETTING POLES A.All poles shall be direct buried as indicated on the Drawings. C.On sloping ground,the depth of the hole shall be measured from the low side of the hole. D.Poles shall be set so that alternate crossarm gains face in opposite directions, except at terminals and deadends where the gains of the last two (2)poles shall be on the side facing the terminal or deadend.On unusually long spans, the poles shall be set so that the crossarm comes on the side of the pole away from the long span.Where pole top pins are used,they shall be on the opposite side of the pole from the gain,with the flat side against the pole. E.Poles shall be set in alignment and plumb except at corners,terminals, angles,junctions,or other points of strain,where they shall be set and raked against the strain so that the conductors shall be in line.Vertical angle structures (A3,B3,C3)shall be offset from centerline by the length of the insulator string hardware,to prevent adjacent poles from leaning into the angle. F,Poles shall be raked against the conductor strain not less than one inch for each ten feet of pole length,but not more than two inches for each ten feet of pole length after conductors are installed at the required tension. G.Pole backfill shall be thoroughly tamped the full depth.Excess dirt shall be banked around the pole. 3.03 OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A.Conductors shall be handled with care.Conductors shall not be tramped on nor run over by vehicles.Each reel shall be examined and the wire shall be inspected for cuts,kinks,or other injuries.Injured portions shall be cut out and the conductors spliced.The conductors shall be pulled over suitable rollers or stringing blocks properly mounted on pole or crossarm if necessary to prevent binding while stringing. 33 71 00-7 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities B.The neutral conductor should be maintained on one side of the pole for tangent construction and for angles not exceeding 30°. C.With pin-type insulators the conductors shall be tied in the top groove of the insulator on tangent poles and on the side of the insulator away from the strain at angles.Pin-type insulators shall be tight on the pins and on tangent construction the top groove shall be in line with the conductors after tying in. D.For neutral and secondary conductors on poles,insulated brackets (Material Item 'da')may be substituted for the single and double upset bolts on angles of 0°to 5°in locations known to be subject to considerable conductor vibration.All conductors shall be cleaned thoroughly by wire brushing before splicing or the installation of a connector or clamp.A suitable inhibitor shall be used before splicing or applying connectors over aluminum conductor. 3.04 SAGGING CONDUCTORS A.Conductors shall be sagged evenly and in accordance with the conductor manufacturers'recommendations.The air temperature at the time and place of sagging shall be determined by a certified etched glass thermometer. B.The sag of all conductors after stringing shall be in accordance with the conductor manufacturers'recommendations,except that a maximum increase of three (3)inches of the specified sag in any span will be acceptable.However,under no circumstances will a decrease in the specified sag be allowed. C.The conductor shall be tensioned above the initial sag conditions.After bringing conductor to proper sag,deadends shall be secured within 2 hours.Wire shall be tied to insulators within 48 hours. 3.05 CONDUCTOR TIES A.All ties used shall be pre-formed type as manufactured by Preformed Line Products and conductors shall be properly attached to insulators using preformed ties. B.Conductor ties shall be selected to properly accommodate the armor rod installed on the conductor. 33 71 00-8 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 3.06 GRADING OF LINE When using high poles to clear obstacles such as buildings,foreign wire crossing, railroads,etc.,there shall be no upstrain on pin-type insulators in grading the line each way to lower poles. 3.07 GUYS AND ANCHORS A.Guys shall be placed before the conductors are strung and shall be attached to the pole per the Specifications for Overhead Distribution Line Construction. B.All anchors shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. C.Guys shall be placed before the conductors are strung and shall be attached to the pole as shown in the Drawings. D.All anchors and rods shall be in line with the strain and shall be so installed that approximately six inches of the rod remain out of the ground.In cultivated fields or other locations,as deemed necessary,the projection of the anchor rod above the earth may be increased to a maximum of 12 inches to prevent burial of the rod eye.The backfill of all anchor holes must be thoroughly tamped the full depth. E.Guy bonding clamps shall be installed in the eyes of all anchor rods.All guys (primary &secondary)shall be effectively grounded according to REA/RUS specifications.On secondary poles,guys shall be bonded to the secondary neutral. 3.08 POLE LINE HARDWARE A.A locknut shall be installed with each nut,eye-nut,or other fastener on all bolts or threaded hardware such as insulator pins,upset bolts,double arming bolts,etc. B.Suitable washers shall be installed under boltheads and nuts on wood surfaces and elsewhere as required.Washers used on through-bolts and double-arming bolts shall be approximately 2-1/4 inches square and 3/16 inch thick.The diameter of holes in washers shall be the correct standard size for the bolt on which a washer is used.Square curved washers shall be used for down-guy attachments to pole.Washers for use under heads of carriage-bolts shall be of the proper size to fit over square shanks of bolts.Eye bolts,bolt eyes,eyenuts,strain-load plates,lag screws,guy clamps,fasteners,hooks,shims,and clevises shall be used wherever required to adequately support and protect poles,brackets,crossarms,guy wires,and insulators. 33 71 00-9 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities C.A 3 inch by 3 inch (minimum),square,curved washer (item "d”)shall be used abutting the pole when installing primary deadend,neutral deadend and guy assemblies directly to the pole.A 2-%inch (minimum)square washer shall be placed under the shoulder of crossarm insulator pins whose surface area abutting the crossarm is less than 4 square inches. 3.09 SPLICES AND DEADENDS A.Conductors shall be spliced and deadended as indicated on the Drawings. There shall be not more than one (1)splice per conductor in any span and splicing sleeves shall be located at least ten (10)feet from the conductor support. B.No splices shall be located in grade B crossing spans nor in the adjacent spans. Cc.Splices shall be no closer than 1,000 feet from one another and there shall be no more than three splices per mile in any primary phase or neutral conductor. D.Splices shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. 3.10 TAPS AND JUMPERS A.Jumpers and other leads connected to line conductors shall have sufficient slack to allow free movement of the conductors.Where slack is not indicated,it shall be provided by at least two (2)bends in a vertical plane, or one (1)in a horizontal plane,or the equivalent.In areas where aeolian vibration occurs,special measures to minimize the effects of jumper breaks shall be used as specified. B.All aluminum to aluminum connections shall be provided with a Belleville washer. C.Jumpers and other leads connected to line conductors shall have sufficient slack to allow free movement of the conductors.Where slack is not shown on the Drawings it will be provided by at least two (2)bends in a vertical plane,or one (1)in a horizontal plane,or the equivalent.In areas where aeolian vibration occurs,special measures to minimize the effects of jumper breaks shall be used as specified. D.All leads on equipment such as transformers,reclosers,etc.,shall be a minimum of #6 copper conductivity.Where aluminum jumpers are used,a connection to an unplated bronze terminal shall be made by splicing a short stub of copper to the aluminum jumper using a suitable aluminum compression sleeve.-- 33 71 00-10 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities E.All primary jumpers shall consist of #2 ACSR,or the size of the conductor. F.Pole tap assemblies shall be framed so that the source is on top and the load (tap)is below. G.In no case shall pin-type insulators be installed upside down to carry jumpers. 3.11 HOT LINE CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS A.Connectors and hot-line clamps suitable for the purpose shall be installed. On all hot-line clamp installations,the clamp and jumper shall be installed so that they are permanently bonded to the load side of the line,allowing the jumper to be de-energized when the clamp is disconnected. B.Hot-line clamps shall be used at single phase transformer connections beneath three-phase primary lines and where single phase primary taps or extends from a three-phase primary line.Where a hot line clamp is used install a stirrup clamp suitable for the conductor. C.Stirrups shall be aluminum,bolted with tin plated loop.Hubbell Power type AHLS,or approved equal.Size selected to fit the primary conductor and the hot line clamp. D.Connections to the main line shall be made with compression solderless connectors.Connectors to equipment shall be made with compression connectors bolted to the equipment pad.Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.Where ground wires are connected to aluminum-composition conductors,specially treated or lined copper-to-aluminum connectors suitable for this purpose shall be utilized. E.All conductors shall be cleaned thoroughly by wire brushing before splicing or installing connectors or clamps.A suitable oxidation inhibitor shall be applied before splicing or applying connectors over aluminum conductor. F,All insulated secondary to secondary connections shall be made using compression connectors which are already pre-insulated,or parallel groove connectors and plastic covers. G.Secondary connections at the polemount transformers shall be made up using compression type pigtails on the ends of each conductor,and then installed in a stud connector,which will be installed in the secondary bushing of the transformer,as indicated on the Drawings.Inhibitor compound shall be used in all mechanical (setscrew)connections. 33 71 00-11 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 3.12.ARMOR RODS A.Armor rods shall be provided for all ACSR conductors.Armor rods shall be installed at each insulator but will not be required at primary dead-end assemblies if aluminum or aluminum-lined zinc-coated steel clamps are used. B.Lengths and methods of fastening armor rods shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.All armor rods shall be pre-formed round. C.The application of armor rods to the conductor shall be such that the center of the armor rods shall not deviate from the center of the conductor support by more than 2-1/2 inches. 3.13 SECONDARIES AND SERVICE DROPS A.Secondary conductors shall be multi-conductor service cable.The conductors shall be sagged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B.Conductors for secondary underbuild on primary lines will be insulated in those instances where prevailing conditions may limit primary span lengths to the extent that covered wires or service cables may be used.Service drops shall be covered wire or service cable. C.Secondaries and service drops shall be so installed as not to obstruct climbing space.There shall not be more than one splice per conductor in any span,and splicing sleeves shall be located at least ten feet from the conductor support.Where the same covered conductors or service cables are to be used for the secondary and service drop,they may be installed in one continuous run. D.#4 Service drops over 140'in length shall be solidly guyed. E.#2 Service drops over 100'in length shall be solidly guyed. F,Install a wrap of tape around multi-plex cable at ends,to prevent further unraveling.Where multi-plex cable is open-ended,fold leads back and tape to mainline.Also tape the rough edges of pre-formed grips to protect the insulated leads from abrasion caused by wind vibration. G.Secondary cable shall be installed:16"below existing bare neutral and 4'10" down on poles intended for a future primary tangent or 6'1"down on poles intended for a future primary dead-end. 33 71 00-12 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities H.Where both 240/120 volt 1-phase and a higher voltage (208 or 480 volt)3- phase secondary are to be installed,the higher voltage circuit shall be attached at least 16"above the lower voltage circuit (up to 4/0 quadruplex over 1/0 triplex,200'maximum span). 3.14 SERVICES A.Service entrance and riser shall be by the customer.Contractor shall install the service drop and make connections to the customer's service entrance conductors at the weatherhead.Contractor shall install service entrance deadend. 3.15 TRANSFORMERS A.|Polemount transformers shall be installed and grounded according to REA/RUS specifications.Transformers shall have at least two connections from the tank to the multi-grounded neutral conductor. B.Insulated trainer brackets (material item "fo")shall be used at pole transformers to secure secondary multiplex cable leads to prevent chafing due to wind movement. C.-Transformers internally wired for 120 Volt secondary shall be labeled "120V" with reflective tags,2.5"minimum height. 3.16 CROSSARMS A.Crossarms shall be bolted to poles with 5/8-inch through-bolts with square washer with locknut at each end.Bolts shall extend not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 2 inches beyond nuts. B.On single crossarm construction,the bolt head shall be installed on the crossarm side of the pole.Single crossarms shall be placed on opposite sides of consecutive poles. C.Double crossarms shall be securely held in position as indicated on the RUS Construction Units.Each bolt shall be equipped with square washers with locknuts.Double crossarms shall be provided at dead-ends,and at angles and corners as indicated,to provide adequate vertical and longitudinal strength. D.Tangent Arms and Buck Arms:Tangent arms and buck arms shall be set at right angles to lines for straight runs and for angles 45°and greater. Tangent arms shall bisect angles of turns of less than 45°.Dead-end assemblies shall be used for turns where shown.Buckarms shall be installed,as indicated,at corners and junction poles. 33 71 00-13 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 3.17 BRACES A.Wood braces shall be used for crossarm supports,unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.Braces shall be Hughes Brothers type 2023 or 2045,size as indicated on the RUS Construction Units,or approved equal. B.Braces shall be bolted to arms with 3/8-inch carriage bolts with round or square washers with locknuts between boltheads and crossarms,and secured to poles with 1/2-inch by 4-inch lag screws after crossarms are leveled and aligned. 3.18 GROUNDING A.The ground wire shall be secured to the pole with copper coated staples. The staples on the ground wire shall be spaced two (2)feet apart except for a distance of eight (8)feet above the ground and eight (8)feet down from the top of the pole where they shall be six (6)inches apart. B.Poles with pile foundations shall utilize the pile foundations in place of a ground rod.All poles shall be bonded to the pile,see construction unit for details. C.Ground rods shall be driven full length in undisturbed earth in accordance with the Drawings.The top shall be at least 12 inches below the surface of the earth. D.All below grade connections shall be made using the exothermic weld metal method. E.AlJl equipment shall have at least two (2)connections from the frame,case or tank to the multi-grounded neutral conductor. F.The equipment ground,neutral wires,and lightning-protective equipment shall be interconnected and attached to a common ground wire. G.Ground wire sizes,not otherwise indicated,shall be not smaller than No.4 AWG. H.Surge Arrester Grounding:Surge arresters shall be grounded.Ground resistance for distribution-class arresters shall be not more than 5 ohms. Ground wire connections shall be not less than #4 AWG for distribution arresters. I.Unless otherwise indicated,neutral conductors shall be grounded at each transformer.Also,neutral conductors shall be grounded at a point not exceeding every third pole. 33 71 00-14 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities 3.19 WOOD POLE STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Wood poles held in storage for more than 2 weeks shall be stored in accordance with ANSI 05.1.Poles shall be stacked on treated skids,so arranged as to support the poles without producing noticeable distortion to any of the poles and to allow free circulation of air.The height of the piles shall be limited so as to avoid damage to poles on the bottom layers. Poles shall be piled and supported in such a manner that all poles are at least 1 foot above general ground level and any vegetation growing thereon.No decayed or decaying wood shall be permitted to remain underneath stored poles. B.Handling of wood poles shall be in accordance with ANSI 05.1.Poles shall not be dragged along the ground.Cant hooks,pole tongs,or other tools capable of producing indentations of more than |inch in depth shall not be used in handling the poles. 3.20 TESTS A.Operating Test:After the installation is completed,the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval.Equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements herein.Tests shall be performed in the presence of the AUTHORITY or the AUTHORITY Representative.The AUTHORITY shall be notified no less than 7-days prior to test date.The Contractor shall furnish field transportation, instruments,power,tools and personnel required for the test. B.Ground-Resistance Measurements:Ground-resistance measurements shall be taken and certified by the Contractor.Certified test results shall be submitted to the AUTHORITY no less than 5-days prior to energization of the distribution system.No part of the electrical distribution system shall be energized prior to the receipt of written approval from the AUTHORITY of the resistance testing of that system's ground rods and grounding systems.Test reports shall indicate the location of the ground point and grounding system and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the test was performed.When the building water service is used as a ground or part of the grounding system,ground-resistance measurements shall also be made of this connection.Ground-resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather,not less than 48 hours after rainfall,and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds.The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of- potential method described in IEEE No.142. C.Sag and Tension Test 1.The AUTHORITY shall be given no less than 7-days prior notice of the time schedule for stringing conductors or cables serving 33 71 00-15 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 00 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utilities overhead medium-voltage circuits and reserves the right to witness the procedures used for ascertaining that initial stringing sags and tensions are in compliance with requirements for the applicable loading district and cable weight. 2.The Contractor shall submit the sag and tension method to be used and the sag tables used to achieve the proper sag.The contractor shall wait a minimum of 2 hours after stringing the conductors to allow the conductors to stabilize prior to conducting the sag and tension tests.The contractor must complete the tests within 36 hours after stringing the conductors to avoid damaging the cable. Sagging operations shall not be conducted when wind conditions prevents satisfactory sagging. 3.The span used to set the sag shall be called the sag-check span. The sag-check span shall be a level span and approximately equal to the ruling span. END OF SECTION 33 71 00-16 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Distribution Conductors SECTION 33 71 02 DISTRIBUTION CONDUCTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A.This specification describes the minimum acceptable quality of primary conductor. Where there is conflict between this specification and any other specification referred to herein,this specification shall govern. B.The specification herein is for the materials,design,fabrication,protective coating, and delivery of Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR)conductors.This specification also describes the requirements for the design,manufacture,and delivery of the conductor. C.Provide sag and tension and stringing tables for each type of conductor provided, based on the conditions specified herein.Submit tables for review. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 33 71 00 -Electrical Utilities 1.03 STANDARDS All characteristics,definitions,and terminology,except as specifically covered in this specification,shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards. ASTM B-230:Aluminum Wire,1350-H19 for Electrical Purposes ASTM B-231:Aluminum Conductors,Concentric-Lay Stranded. ASTM B-232:Aluminum Conductors,Concentric-Lay Stranded,Coated Steel Reinforced (ACSR). ASTM B-500:ASTM Standard Specification for Metallic Coated Stranded Steel Core for Aluminum Conductors,Steel Reinforced (ACSR). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. 33 7102-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Distribution Conductors B.Submit the following for review: 1.Each conductor type. 2.Sag table and stringing table for each conductor type. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR SPECIFICATIONS (#2 ACSR) A.Conductor for Twin Hills Distribution. 1.CODE WORD:Sparate 2.Stranding:7/1 3.Rated Strength (pounds)for overall Conductor:3460 4.Overall Conductor Diameter:0.325 inches 5.Weight (pounds per 1000 feet):106.7 2.02 CONDUCTOR A.The conductors shall be capable of withstanding normal handling incident to manufacture,shipment,and field installation without being deformed or abraded. Such handling includes reeling,lifting and movement of full reels,unreeling,pulling through controlled tension stringing equipment,over stringing sheaves,compression fittings and other standard accessories as required. 1.The conductor shall be Class AA stranding in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM B232. 2.The conductor size and number of wires shall be as specified herein. 3.The aluminum wire shall be made of 1350-H19 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B230.The minimum average conductivity of the aluminum shall not be less than 61.2%IACS. 4.The zinc-coated (galvanized)steel core wire (Class A weight coating)shall be in accordance with ASTM B498.The minimum average conductivity of the steel shall not be less than 8%IACS. 5.The component conductors shall be made with standard right hand lay. All tension tests shall meet or exceed ASTM B498,B230,and B232.The surface of the conductors shall remain smooth,free from points,sharp edges,abrasions,or other departures from smoothness that would tend to increase radio interference and corona 33 71 02-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 02 Mertarvik,Alaska Distribution Conductors loss.The conductors shall be free from excessive amounts of grease,metal particles, dirt,or other foreign matter.The conductors shall not deform from the cylindrical form nor shall longitudinal smoothness be affected by strand movement when subjected to tension.Conductor components shall be formed so that there is no slack in the outer layer. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 3.03 TESTING The MANUFACTURER shall use a statistically based quality control sampling and testing plan to assure acceptable quality levels.As a minimum,sampling and testing shall be as required by ASTM B230,ASTM B232,and ASTM B498. SAG &TENSION AND STRINGING TABLES The Contractor shall provide a sag table and stringing table for each conductor based on the following information prior to stringing any conductor.All costs associated with these tables shall be included in the cost of the conductor.Contractor shall submit the sag and stringing table for review. A.Design Conditions: 1.NESC Heavy Loading District,130 mph wind. 2.Ruling Span:225 feet 3.Tension: a.Initial Tension:15%of Conductor Tensile Strength. b.Final Tension:25%of Conductor Tensile Strength. c.Maximum Tension:50%of Conductor Tensile Strength. B.Creep is not a factor. C.Stinging table shall provide sag and tensions at spans of 100 feet to 300 feet at a temperature range of -40°F to 100 °F. CERTIFICATION A.Provide a certificate of compliance,signed by an authorized employee of the MANUFACTURER,that the material shipped meets the requirements of this specification and any supplementary requirements cited in a contract or order under which it was purchased. END OF SECTION 33 71 02 -3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 71 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Electrical Utility Poles SECTION 33 71 16 ELECTRICAL UTILITY POLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.02 1.03 SCOPE This specification describes the minimum acceptable quality of wood poles.Where there is conflict between this specification and any other specification referred to herein,this specification shall govern.The poles shall be constructed in accordance with these specifications. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 33 71 00 -Electrical Utilities STANDARDS All characteristics,definitions,and terminology,except as specifically covered in this specification,shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards. RUS Bulletin 1728F-700:Specification for Wood Poles,Stubs,and Anchor Logs. ANSI 05.1 Wood Poles -Specifications and Dimensions. AWPA-C4:Poles -Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes, American Wood Preservers Association. SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD POLES A.Wood poles shall meet the requirements of ANSI 05.1 and shall be Douglas Fir drilled and gained in accordance with RUS W1.1G Pole Framing Guide.Wood poles shall have pole markings located 10 feet from pole butts.Other locations will not be acceptable.Poles shall be machine trimmed by turning smooth full length,and shall be roofed,gained,and bored prior to pressure treatment.No climbing rungs shall be provided. B.Poles shall be full length pressure treated using a pressure injection method approved by the Western Wood Preserves Institute that prevents leaching.Pressure treatment shall be by the Copper Naphthenate process in accordance with AWPA C4.Other treatment processes will not be accepted. 33 71 16-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska Poles exhibiting any of the following defects will not be accepted;cross-breaks (horizontal cracks),catface (scars),compound through checks,decay,double sweep (poles having sweep in two planes),hollow butts or tops,improper framing,plugged holes (other than increment core holes),spike knots or any knot with bark inclusion, and split top. Checks: 1.Checks (vertical cracks)are permitted in the top of pole except for any check more than 1/8 inch wide and extending down from the top of the pole more than 12 inches and within 30 angular degrees from the axis of the face of pole Section 33 71 16 Electrical Utility Poles directly above ground;and any through checks or splits. 2.Through checks or splits in the butt surface of the pole are not permitted. 3.A check is considered to be continuous if it is not separated by at least 1/2 inch of wood.The maximum allowable width and length of any single check are found in Table I]"Maximum Allowable Check Dimensions". TABLE II.MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHECK DIMENSIONS LENGTH OF POLE MAXIMUM WIDTH MAXIMUM LENGTH 30 feet Y%inch 5 inches 35 and 45 feet 5/16 inch 5 inches 50 feet and longer 3/8 inch 8 inches Knots: 1.The diameter of any single knot or sum of the diameters of all knots shall not exceed the limits of Table II "Limits of Knot Sizes". PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 CERTIFICATION A.Provide a certificate of compliance,signed by an authorized employee of the producer,that the material shipped meets the requirements of this specification and any supplementary requirements cited in a contract or order under which it was purchased. Provide independent inspection certification. END OF SECTION 33 71 16-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers SECTION 33 72 16 LIQUID-FILLED UTILITY TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SUMMARY A.This specification covers the electrical and mechanical characteristics of Single- Phase Overhead-Type Distribution Transformers.The transformers shall be designed and constructed in accordance with these specifications.All characteristics,voltage designations and tests shall be in accordance with the latest editions of ANSI Standards C57.12.26 and C57.12.00,except as modified herein. B.Transformers shall be designed in accordance with RUS requirements and shall be of new construction. C.Transformers shall be suitable for step-down service or step-up service as indicated. D.Quantities and ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings and staking sheets. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical B.Section 33 71 00 -Electrical Utilities 1.03 STANDARDS All characteristics,definitions,and terminology,except as specifically covered in this specification,shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the following ANSI and NEMA standards. C57.12.00:IEEE Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,Power and Regulating Transformers. C57.12.20:Overhead-Type Distribution Transformers,500 KVA and Smaller: High Voltage,34500 Volts and Below:Low Voltage,7970/13800Y Volts and Below. C57.12.31 IEEE Standard for Pole Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity C57.12.35:Bar Coding for Distribution Transformers. 33 72 16-1 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers 1.04 1.05 C57.12.90:IEEE Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,Power, and Regulating Transformers and IEEE Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers. C57.12.91:Guide for Loading Méineral-Oil-Immersed Overhead and Pad- Mounted Transformers rated 500 kVA and less with 55°C or 65°C average winding rise. NEMA TR-1:Transformers,Regulators,and Reactors. NEMA TP-1:Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers NEMA TP-3:Standard for Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency. DOE:10 CFR Part 431 -Department of Energy -Energy Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment:Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards;Final Rule. REA:Bulletin 50-37 (D10),Specification for Rural Distribution Transformers (Overhead.) SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings and Product Data:Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this section in compliance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical. Submit complete electrical data,mechanical and layout drawings,and wiring and connection diagrams for each type of transformer provided. Drawings shall indicate the kVA rating,dimensions,transformer impedance, voltage (both primary and secondary),phase of the transformer,and winding connecting. Provide certified test reports prior to shipment of the transformers.Test reports shall indicate the impedance,no load,and full load loss of each transformer,by serial number,and shall include the transformer efficiency,expressed in percent, of the transformer based on the test procedures specified herein. Certified test reports shall contain a statement identifying the amount of PCB in the insulating oil. WARRANTY The failure of any transformer due to defective design,material and/or workmanship within 12 months after being energized or eighteen months after being delivered, 33 72 16-2 Mertarvik Rural Power System Mertarvik,Alaska Section 33 72 16 Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers whichever comes first,shall be repaired or replaced without cost.Any defect in design, material and/or construction discovered within this period shall be corrected at the manufacturer's expense,either by repair or replacement. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RATINGS A.General: 1.Primary Voltage Rating: 2.Secondary Voltage Rating: 3.Frequency: 4.Phase: 5.Impedance: 6.kVA Rating: 7.BIL Rating:7200/12470Y 8.Temperature Rating: 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Acceptable manufactures shall be as follows. approved list. ABB. Cooper Power. Ermco. General Electric. Howard Transformers.7m9OoFP>Approved equal. 2.03 TRANSFORMER VOLTAGES 12470/7200 volt,grounded wye. As indicated on the staking sheets. 60 Hz. Single. 1%+5%. As indicated on the staking sheets. 95 kV. Self-cooled,65°C above a 30°C ambient. Manufacturers shall be on the RUS A.Transformer primary voltage shall be 7,200 volts. 33 72 16-3 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers 2.04 2.04 2.05 2.06 B.Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the staking sheets,transformer secondary voltages shall be as follows: 1.Transformers used for single-phase service shall be 120/240 volt. 2.Transformers used as part of a 120/208 three-phase transformer bank shall be rated 120 volts to provide utilization of the full transformer capacity for 120/208 volt,three-phase service. TRANSFORMER LOSSES Transformer no load and load losses shall be provided with the transformer submittal and shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer.Transformer losses determined by the factory tests on the individual transformers shall be less than 10%greater than the guaranteed bid losses.No individual unit shall be shipped that exceeds guaranteed no load losses by more than 10%. TRANSFORMER TAPS Transformers shall be furnished with full capacity high-voltage taps.The taps shall be +/-2 -2''24%above and below rated nominal voltage.The tap changer switch shall be an externally operated switch with a hotstick-operable handle.The tap changer shall be clearly labeled to reflect that the transformer must be de-energized before operating the tap changer as required in IEEE Standard C57.12.20. HIGH VOLTAGE BUSHINGS AND TERMINALS A.Provide two high voltage bushings.Single bushing transformers will not be acceptable. B.The bushing terminals provided shall be tin-plated to accommodate both aluminum and copper conductors.The size of the terminals shall be 5/8”. C.The color of the bushings shall match Light Gray Number 70,Munsell Notation 5BG7.0/0.4. D.High voltage bushings shall be porcelain. E.Provide high voltage bushings rated at 110 kV BIL. LOW VOLTAGE BUSHINGS AND TERMINALS A.Low voltage bushings shall be provided with the following ratings. 1.30 kV BIL Rating. 2.10 kV 60 Hz Dry 1-Minute Withstand Voltage. 3.6 kV 60 Hz Wet 10 Second Withstand Voltage. 33 72 16-4 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers 2.07 2.08 2.09 B.The bushing terminals provided shall be clamp type to accommodate the use of screw bar post connector. Provide three porcelain bushings on 120/240 volt transformers. D.The internal secondary leads shall be permanently embossed with the letters A,B, C,and D per ANSI C57.12.00 and C57.12.20. PROTECTION A.No overcurrent protection is required.Transformers shall be protected using external fused cutouts installed by others. CORE AND COIL A.Windings shall be copper or aluminum.All windings shall meet the guaranteed temperature rise requirements. B.The core and coil shall be vacuum processed to ensure maximum penetration of insulating fluid into the coil insulation system.While under vacuum the transformer shall be filled with preheated filtered degassed insulating fluid.The core shall be manufactured from burr-free,grain-oriented silicon steel and shall be precisely stacked to eliminate gaps in the corner joints.The coil shall be insulated with B-stage,epoxy coated,diamond pattern,insulating paper,which shall be thermally cured under pressure to ensure proper bonding of conductor and paper. TANK A.The tank shall include a pressure relief device as a means to relieve pressure in excess of pressure resulting from normal operation.The venting and sealing characteristics shall be as follows. Cracking Pressure:10-psig +2 psig. Resealing Pressure:6-psig minimum. Zero leakage from reseal pressure to -8 psig. Flow at 15 psig:35 SCFM minimum.FYN>SB.The tank coating shall meet all requirements in ANSI C57.12.31 including. Salt Spray Test. Crosshatch Adhesion Test. Humidity Test. Impact Test. Oil Resistance Test. Ultraviolet Accelerated Weathering Test. Abrasion Resistance -Taber Abraser.NAWWND33 72 16-5 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers C.The tank provided shall have a recessed tank bottom which offers protection when sliding over rough surfaces. D.The tank shall have an internal mark,which indicates the proper oil level per Section 6.2.3 of ANSI C57.12.20. E.Permanently stamped secondary leads. F.The tank covering,and cover ring loops shall be stainless steel.All hardware shall be stainless steel.A bronze nut shall also be provided to eliminate corrosion problems and avoid galling.Provide a visible cover ground. G.Provide a drain/sampling device. H.Provide ground connections accepting #8 AWG solid to #2 AWG stranded. Provide a ground strap between the secondary neutral bushing and the transformer tank. I.The tank shall include arrester mounting pads,grounding provisions,ANSI support lugs (hanger brackets)and lift lugs.Hanger brackets shall be single. J.The tank color shall be ANSI 70 light gray. 2.10 INSULATING OIL Transformers shall be provided with highly refined inhibited new mineral oil and meet the minimum requirements as specified in Table 1,"Functional Property Requirements,”of ASTM D3487 and ANSI C57.106. 2.11 NOISE Standard transformer sound level shall not exceed the values as calculated per the latest edition of NEMA Publication TR-1. 2.12 NAMEPLATES &LABELS A.Diagrammatic nameplate that conforms to the latest edition of ANSI C57.12.00. Impedance of the transformer shall be included on the nameplate.The nameplate shall be etched and black-filled aluminum or stainless steel.Affix to the enclosure with rivets. In addition to warning labels,provide a label indicating the transformer kVA rating on the front of the transformer,in minimum 2-1/2”black letters. 33 72 16-6 Mertarvik Rural Power System Section 33 72 16 Mertarvik,Alaska Liquid-Filled Utility Transformers PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING AND LOSSES A.All units shall be tested for the following: No Load (Core)Losses. Load Losses at 85°C and rated current. Percent Impedance at 85°C and rated current. Excitation current (100%voltage)test. Winding resistance measurement tests. Ratio tests using all tap settings. Polarity and phase relation tests. Induced potential tests.SNAMAYNSB.The manufacturer shall provide certification for all design and other tests listed in Table 17 of ANSI C57.12.00 including verification that the design has passed Short Circuit Criteria per ANSI C57.12.00 and C57.12.90. C.One PDF copy of the factory certified test report of each test,in IEEE 1388 format,shall be delivered to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to shipment of the transformers. 3.02 SHIPPING A.The transformers shall be packaged to protect them from damage during shipment,handling,and storage. END OF SECTION 33 72 16-7 APPENDIX A GOLDER'S GEOTECHNICAL REPORT =GolderAssociates TECHNICAL MEMORANDUM Date:February t,2018 Project No.:1775079 To:Gavin Dixon ;Company:Alaska Native Tribal Health'a ConsortiumFrom:Brenton Savikko,PE,Jonn "Hornley,PE Email:gndixon@anthc.org RE:REVISED GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED POWER PLANT IN MERTARVIK,ALASKA 1.0 INTRODUCTION Golder Associates Inc.(Golder)is pleased to present this technical memorandum to the Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium (ANTHC)presenting the geotechnical recommendations for the proposed power plant in Mertarvik,Alaska.Goider previously developed geotechnical recommendations for the proposed power plant in a memorandum presented to ANTHC on October 23,2017.However,HDL Engineering Consultants,LLC (HDL),who is designing the power plant and associated infrastructure,informed Golder that the power plant has been relocated to a new site approximately 300 feet to the southeast,and requested that Golder provide geotechnical recommendations and considerations for the new site.The work presented in this memorandum was performed in general accordance with our contract with ANTHC dated May 15,2017. 2.0 SITE CONDITIONS The proposed site for the power plant is currently an undeveloped area that gradually slopes from the south to the north.The proposed site is in an area that has no existing geotechnical information.Golder previously performed a geotechnical exploration program in Mertarvik.As detailed in Golder's Geotechnical Exploration Data Report dated November 2,2017,41 boreholes and eight test pits were advanced throughout the community for various infrastructure upgrades.An additional 19 boreholes were advanced at the proposed airport site south of town.The subsurface conditions encountered varied greatly throughout the planned community.Subsurface soils consisted of a mixture of silt,sand,and gravel.Volcanic ash was observed in several test pits.Bedrock was encountered in some explorations,with depths ranging from five to 40 feet below ground surface (bgs). Permafrost was discontinuous between the boreholes.Where present,permafrost was typically observed to contain non-visible and visible ice that was estimated to range from zero to 50 percent by volume.In one borehole at the airport,a four-foot thick lens of massive ice intermixed with silt was observed.Where measured,ground temperatures of permafrost were generally within +1 degree Fahrenheit (°F)of 32°F. Golder Associates Inc. 2121 Abbott Road,Suite 100 Anchorage,AK 99507 USA Tel:(907)344-6001 Fax:(907)344-6011 www.golder.com Golder Associates:Operations in Africa,Asia,Australasia,Europe,North America and South America ANTHC Power Plant Memo Golder,Golder Associates and the GA globe design are trademarks of Golder Associates Corporation Gavin Dixon February 1,2018 Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium 2 1775079 HDL has informed Golder that the proposed power plant site is near a septic system that was installed in the summer of 2017.According to HDL,permafrost was not encountered during excavation for the septic system,and that bedrock was encountered at a depth of approximately 10 feet bgs.Golder has not verified this information,and was not provided site specific photos or other information for review.A geotechnical borehole,Borehole G17-T6,was advanced by Golder during their geotechnical exploration program at a location approximately 200 feet northeast of the proposed site.The subsurface conditions observed in the borehole consisted of 0.5 feet of organic material,overlying 4.5 feet of sandy silt,overlying 2 feet of silty gravel.Bedrock was encountered at 7 feet bgs.Groundwater and permafrost were not encountered in the borehole. At the pervious site for the power plant located approximately 300 feet to the northwest,the subsurface conditions consisted of organic material to three feet,overlying silty sand and gravel.Degrading permafrost was observed in five of the six boreholes,with the top of permafrost ranging in depths from 10 to 17.5 feet bgs.Further discussion was presented in our previous Power Plant memorandum,dated October 23,2017. Borehole G17-1T12,advanced approximately 400 feet south of the proposed site,encountered 1.5 feet of organic material overlying silty sand and sandy silt,with volcanic ash encountered in one of the samples at ten feet bgs.Groundwater,bedrock,and permafrost were not encountered in the borehole. It has been assumed that the subsurface conditions at the proposed site will consist of an organic mat underlain by silty sand or sandy silt.It is assumed that near surface permafrost does not exist at this site based on the nearby geotechnical information.However,there is significant variability in the subsurface conditions throughout the community,and subsurface conditions should be verified either prior to or at the time of construction. 3.0 RECOMMENDATIONS Based on discussions with ANTHC and HDL,the power plant will be modular connex structure constructed on a compacted structural fill pad.The structure will be unheated throughout its design life.The power plant will have an associated 5,000-gallon fuel tank located adjacent to it.Both the power plant and fuel tank will be founded on timber sill foundations placed on the prepared structural fill pad.HDL has indicated that the structure and tank can tolerate differential settlement without adversely impacting performance. Based on the assumed subsurface conditions,it is likely that the subgrade soils are moderately to highly frost susceptible,and seasonal frost movements may occur.To limit the amount of differential settlement of the pad under the proposed structures,Golder recommends that the existing soil is excavated down to mineral soil and replaced with compacted structural fill creating a structural pad.The minimum recommended fill thickness below the structures should be eight feet,which will limit seasonal differential movement.Excavation should extend horizontally for a distance,starting at the edge of the structures and _ extending down to the bottom of excavation at an imaginary slope of 1 horizontal to 1 vertical (1H:1V).To ce4-GolderCy ANTHC Power Plant Memo (Di cotder Gavin Dixon February 1,2018 Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium 3 1775079 further limit seasonal movement,placement of rigid insulation in the pad below the foundations is recommended,as described below. We understand that funding limitations may prohibit the utilization of rigid insulation,or constructing a pad that has eight feet of structural fill below the footprint of the structures.If insulation is not placed,and the pad is less than eight feet thick under the structures,the risk of seasonal movement is significantly higher, and foundation movement should be expected as the frost susceptible soils heave seasonally.The extent of the seasonal movement will depend on several elements including the underlying soil frost susceptibility, available moisture,and final thickness of the pad.At a minimum,a uniform structural fill thickness should be placed under the footprint of the structures.Doing this may result in more uniform seasonal movement. In any case,piping connections should be designed to tolerate greater differential movement between structures. Further discussion of specific recommendations are presented below. 3.1.Earthwork and Site Preparation Organic and soft soil should be excavated from the footprint of the structural fill pad to expose mineral soil. The excavation should extend to the toe of the structural pad.Once the subgrade soil is exposed,a visual assessment is recommended to confirm organic material and other deleterious soils are removed from within the proposed footprint. Proof compaction should be completed with a vibratory roller or plate equipment capable of achieving at least 95-percent of the exposed subgrade material's maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test method,ASTM D1557.Proof compaction is recommended to ensure that soft or yielding in- place material under the foundations has been removed prior to placement of fill material.If soft or yielding material is encountered during proof compaction,the soft or yielding areas should be over-excavated to firm,non-yielding soil and the excavation backfilled with compacted fill. Groundwater was not observed in the nearby boreholes.However,groundwater levels can fluctuate with the season and weather conditions.In addition,the organic surface materials typically pond water and there is a possibility that seeping of adjacent perched water from the tundra may introduce water into the excavation.De-watering efforts may be required during construction.If so,dewatering means and methods are considered the responsibility of the contractor. A non-woven geotextile fabric,similar to Geotex 601 is recommended at the base excavations as a separation fabric between the in-situ material and structural fill.The geotextile should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 7g+(€2)GolderANTHCPowerPlantMemoAssociates Gavin Dixon February 1,2018 Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium 4 1775079 3.2.Structural Fill We recommend that the structural fill planned at the sites is constructed of non-frost susceptible (NFS) sand and gravel,free of any deleterious material.Structural fill material should meet the NFS criteria established by the US Army Corps of Engineers (USACE).The gradation of the fill material should meet the Alaska Department and Public Facilities (ADOT&PF)design criteria for Selected Material Type A specifications with 100 percent of the material passing the three-inch sieve. All structural fill must be placed and compacted in a fully thawed state.Prior to compaction,structural fill should be placed in individual lifts not exceeding 12 inches thick.Each lift should be compacted using vibratory roller compaction equipment prior to placing subsequent lifts.Nominal six inch thick lifts are recommended for lighter-weight or hand-operated vibratory compaction equipment.All fills should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test method (ASTM D1557). The structural fill should be installed to grades as determined by the project civil engineer.The structural fill should extend at least four feet in all directions beyond the perimeter of the foundations then at a minimum of 3H:1V slope,or flatter,to the proof compacted in-place soils. 3.3.Rigid Insulation To limit seasonal movement of the structure,we recommend that at least two inches of rigid insulation is placed two feet below the bottom of footings.The insulation should have a minimum compressive strength of 40 pounds per square inch (psi)at no more than two percent strain.The insulation should have a minimum total R-value of 4.5 per two inches of insulation.The rigid insulation should be placed below the foundations and extend laterally at least eight feet out from the edges of the foundations. The rigid insulation should be protected against hydrocarbon or other deleterious releases to prevent damage to the insulation.Considerations should be given to placement of a continuous fuel resistant liner over the top of the rigid insulation. Consideration should be given to compaction efforts over the rigid insulation.Excessive vibratory compaction effort may damage the insulation and have an unintended effect on the rigid insulation material properties and placed geometry.Consideration should be given to a thicker initial lift over the rigid insulation.Additionally,we recommend several initial static compaction efforts with a large vibratory roller compactor.After the initial static compaction effort,vibratory compaction may be attempted,provided the underlying insulation is not damaged. 3.4 Bearing Capacity and Settlement We understand that the proposed power plant will be founded on at-grade timber sill foundations.The timber should be all-weather wood,and be at least 12 inches wide.The footings should be designed by a (€2)GolderANTHCPowerPlantMemoAssociates Gavin Dixon February 1,2018 Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium 5 1775079 the structural engineer.Provided the recommendations stated above are followed,an allowable bearing pressure of 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf)can be used for design. Settlement of the structure and fuel tank will depend on the site specific subsurface conditions at the site. If granular soil exists below the structural pad,settlement may be less than two inches.If soft,organic,or permafrost soils exist below the structural fill pad,the settlement may be significantly more than this. Seasonal movement of the pad may occur depending on the site specific soil conditions.Re-leveling of the structure and the pad may be required over the design life. 3.5 Foundation Uplift and Lateral Resistance It is our understanding that the uplift on the foundations will be countered by the design dead loads.If additional uplift capacity is required,shallow,small riser shaft diameter helical anchors can be seated into the in-situ soil below the fill pad.Consideration should be given to minimizing damage to the rigid insulation if helical anchors are utilized.We can provide geotechnical recommendations for additional uplift resistance,if needed. Lateral loads on the foundation can be designed using an angle of friction between the timber foundation and the gravel backfill of 20 degrees.Lateral resistance should be based solely on the design dead load and should ignore any live load conditions. 3.6 Drainage Considerations Site drainage should be designed to prevent water from ponding on the fill pad.Final grades should be contoured to direct surface water away from the foundations. Since the pad will be built into the slope,diverting uphill surface water away from the pad may be necessary. A drainage ditch should be installed near the toe of the fill pad on the uphill side.The ditch should divert water around the pad.Additionally,construction of a swale on the slope above the pad will limit the amount of surface water that may enter the drainage ditch.Site drainage at the project area should be determined and designed by the project civil engineer. 3.7.Maintenance Considerations Since subsurface conditions are unknown at the proposed site,there will still likely be long-term maintenance required to level the structure,fuel tank,and pad.Subsurface soil and thermal states are variable throughout the community.Massive ice and ice rich soil have been encountered within other areas of the community.It is possible that massive ice or ice rich material may exist under the proposed power plant site.If permafrost is present,there is an increased chance that the development will experience differential movement. =Ey GolderANTHCPowerPlantMemoAssociates Gavin Dixon February 1,2018 Alaska Native Tribal Health Consortium 6 1775079 4.0 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING The recommendations presented in the memorandum are based on assumptions on subsurface conditions. To verify these assumptions,a qualified geotechnical engineer should be on site to observe construction and provide recommendations for corrective action if unanticipated conditions are present.It is recommended that the construction contractor perform exploratory test pits prior to placement of fill to verify subsurface conditions below the planned excavation depths.The recommendations in this report may need to be modified if unanticipated subsurface conditions,such as permafrost,volcanic ash,or thick organic deposits are present. 5.0 CLOSURE This technical memorandum was prepared for ANTHC and their design team for the use in the planning and design of the proposed power plant in Mertarvik,Alaska.If there are significant changes in the nature, design,or location of the facility,we should be notified so that we may review our conceptual and preliminary conclusions and recommendations in light of the proposed changes and provide a written modification or verification of the changes. There are possible variations in subsurface conditions between exploration locations.Therefore,inspection and testing by a qualified geotechnical engineer or technician should be included during construction to 'provide corrective recommendations adapted to the conditions revealed during construction activities. Unanticipated soil conditions are commonly encountered and cannot fully be determined by a limited number of explorations or soils samples.Such unexpected conditions frequently result in additional project costs in order to build the project as designed.Therefore,a contingency for unanticipated conditions should be included in the construction budget and schedule. This work program followed the standard of care expected of professionals undertaking similar conceptual level work in the State of Alaska under similar conditions.No warranty expressed or implied is made. Thank you for the opportunity to assist with this project.If you have comments or questions,please contact Brenton Savikko at (907)865-2524 or John Thornley at (907)865-2538. aevs GolderA ANTHC Power Plant Memo Dircotcer..